Albin  Putzker 


-Digitized  by  tine  Internet  Arcinive 

in  2007  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


littp://www.arcliive.org/details/conversationingeOOIiussricli 


CONVERSATION  i 


ON 


A  GRAMMATICAL  BASIS 


HERMANN  C.  0.  HUSS,  PH.  D. 

Professor  of  Modern  Languages  and  Literature  in  the  College  of 
Ntw  Jersey,  Princeton. 


IFIFTEC    EiDiTionsr. 


NEW  YORK 

HENRY  HOLT  AND  COMPANY 

F.  W.  CHRISTERN 
BOSTON :  CARL  SCHOENHOF. 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  18S3,  by 

Hermann  C.  O.  Huss, 

In  the  Office  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress  ,  at  Washington,  D.  C. 

Copyright,  18S9 

BY 

Henry  Holt  &  Co.  


PREFACE. 


This  text-book  is  intended  to  assist  the  instructor  in 
teaching  beginners  to  speak  German  with  the  constant  guid- 
ance of  the  grammar,  and  is  an  attempt  to  include  that  which 
is  vital  in  the  two  methods  which  hitherto  have  been  making 
war  against  each  other,  viz.  the  "grammatical"  and  the  so 
called  "natural"  method.  It  consists  of  a  theoretical  and  a 
practical  part  with  cross  references.  The  former  is  an  ordinary 
grammar;  the  latter  contains,  besides  reading  exercises,  a 
lai'ge  mass  of  material  for  conversation — German  sentences 
illustrating  the  leading  gTammatical  principles. 

The  work  should  be  used  somewhat  in  tliis  way:  Let  the 
teacher  first  pronounce  and  explain  a  number  of  German 
sentences,  say  those  of  section  14  on  page  2  of  the  Practical 
Part,  and  then  refer  to  the  corresponding  section  on  page  9 
of  the  Theoretical  Part.  The  sentences  having  thus  been 
made  clear  to  the  understanding  of  the  student,  must  then  be 
memorized  by  him  (cf.  page  1  of  the  Practical  Part),  to  serve 
in  the  next  recitation  as  material  for  conversation.  Each 
illustration  has  been  so  devised  as  to  suggest  to  the  teacher 
a  natural  and  definite  question.  Prom  most  of  them  two  or 
more  different  questions  may  be  framed.  Suppose,  for 
example,  that  the  student  has  committed  to  memory  the 
sentence:  §err  ^txd)  befi^t  ein  fef)r  fd)one8  Sanb^au^  am  9?^eitt 


IV  PREFACE. 

—  he  will  be  able  to  -understand  and  answer  the  following 
questions : 

1.  3Bo  ift  ba$  Sanb^au^  bc^  germ  Dieid)  ? 

2.  2Ba§  fitr  ctn  ?anbt)au^3  befi^t  §crr  Dicii^  ? 

Of  these  two  questions,  the  second  is  the  best  because  it 
calls  foiih  the  answer  „ctu  fcl)r  fd)onc§,"  which  illustrates,  and 
marks  by  the  heavy  print  the  grammatical  principle  of  §  82, 
and  fulfils  the  pui-pose  for  which  the  sentence  was  con- 
structed. The  examples  have  been  carefiilly  sifted  with 
reference  to  the  possibihty  of  such  a  searching  question  in 
every  case. 

It  is  neither  necessary  nor  desirable  that  the  question 
should  be  slavishly  formed  in  the  exact  words  of  the  sentence. 
The  freer  the  question,  the  greater  will  be  the  exeiiion  on  the 
part  of  the  student  in  f  oiTaing  his  answer,  and  the  quicker 
will  he  become  independent  in  the  use  of  the  language.  Nor 
is  it  necessary  to  avoid  in  the  question  all  the  w^ords  the 
student  is  not  supj)0sed  to  know,  since  one  or  two  new  words 
introduced  into  a  gi'oup  of  familiar  ones  wiU  easily  be  under- 
stood by  him,  and  added  to  his  vocabulary.  It  would,  of 
course,  be  an  additional  assistance  to  find  them  Avritten  before 
him  on  the  black-board. 

It  will  prove  a  useful  exercise  occasionally  to  require  the 
student  to  form  the  question  himself,  addi'essing  it  to  a  class- 
mate. It  is  necessary  for  this  purpose  that  the  instructor 
should  give  out  that  word  which  reminds  the  class  of  the 
whole  sentence  to  which  it  belongs.  If,  e.  g.,  the  sentence 
„Sir  blicbcn  auf  bctn  33crbec!,  bi^  \mt  !ein  Sanb  me!)r  fallen"  is 
among  those  committed,  the  w^ord  „33crbcct''  "vsTitten  out  on 
the  board  or  pronounced  by  the  teacher,  will  at  once  remind 
the  class  of  the  whole  sentence,  and  suggest  to  one  the  ques- 
tion: „3Sie  lange  hWzhzxi  (Sie  Quf  bem  33crbe(f  ?"  and  to  another 
the  answer:  „^t§  Xoxx  fcin  Sanb  mel}r  fa^en." 

"Whenever  the  quantity  of  the  Material  for  Conversation 


PREFACE.  V 

exceeds  the  demands  of  the  instructor,  or  the  memorizing 
capacity  of  the  student,  it  is  left  to  the  discretion  of  the  former 
to  make  the  proper  selections.  All  sentences  under  the  head- 
ing "Additional  Examples,"  as  implying  no  additional 
principle,  may  in  giving  out  the  lesson  safely  be  omitted 
and  reserved  for  an  extemporary  conversation  with  open 
text-book. 

AH  the  most  important  sections  in  the  theoretical  as  well  as 
in  the  practical  part  have  been  marked  by  numbers  in  heavy 
print,  and  in  o,  first  course  of  study  the  instruction  is  best  con- 
fined to  them,  in  order  to  avoid  bewildering  the  student's 
mind  by  particulars,  for  which  time  will  be  found  later.  Here, 
putting  off  means  saving  time.  This  is,  e.  g.,  true  of  the 
instruction  in  the  German  written  character,  and  true  above 
aU  of  the  declension  of  nouns  in  the  plural,  a  real  stone  of 
Sisyphus,  which  has  fatigued,  discouraged,  and  repelled 
thousands  of  well  meaning  beginners. 

Exercises  for  translating  English  into  German  have  been 
omitted  because  they  are  not  only  unsatisfactory  for  several 
reasons,  but  even  injurious  in  so  far  as  they  counteract  the 
most  beneficial  effects  which  conversation  is  intended  to 
produce  in  the  student,  viz.  the  habit  of  thinking  in  the  foreign 
idiom  itself,  instead  of  using  his  mother  tongue  as  a  medium 
of  thought 

Heading  exercises  have  been  given  in  connection  with  the 
first  few  paragraphs  only,  in  the  behef  that  thereafter  a  read- 
ing book  may  be  used  to  advantage.  They  are  not  meant  to 
be  given  out  as  lessons. 

As  to  practice  in  ivriting,  it  is  believed  that  it  can  best  be 
secured  by  addressing  questions  in  German  to  the  whole 
class,  and  by  requiring  the  answer  to  be  written  down  and 
handed  in  for  correction. — If  it  should  seem  desirable  to  give 
out  lessons  in  \vriting,  let  them  consist  in  requiring  the  proper 
questions  to  be  framed  from  a  certain  number  of  sentences. 


YI  PREFACE. 

a  task  which  cannot  by  any  means  be  done  mechanically,  and 
will  i^rove  a  very  efficient  exercise. 

A  single  word  to  those  who  may  honor  the  author's  effoi-ts 
with  their  criticism.  No  one  who  bear^  in  mind  that  this 
book  is  not  meant  to  replace,  but  to  accompany  the  instnictor, 
wiU  find  fault  with  the  writer  for  not  swelling  it  with  the 
history  of  grammatical  forms,  and  compai-ative  philology.  The 
author  fuUy  appreciates  the  value  of  these  illustrations,  the 
Ught  they  throw  on  the  subject,  the  interest  they  awaken  in 
the  student;  but  why  not  leave  all  that  to  the  discretion  of 
the  teacher?  Besides,  a  historical  grammar  has  been  an- 
nounced as  being  in  prepai*ation  by  two  competent  scholars, 
which  will  meet  the  wants  not  satisfied  here. 

Far  more  than  an  author's  ordinary  thanks  are  due  to 
Professor  W.  M.  Sloane,  of  Princeton  College,  who  read  the 
MS.  with  painstaking  care,  and  gave  it  the  benefit  of  his  rare 
German  scholarship  and  valuable  criticism. 


PREFACE  TO  THE  rOURTH  EDITION". 

In  this  revised  edition  the  old  title  "  A  System  of  Oral 
Instruction "  has  been  abandoned  and  the  practical  part, 
owing  to  its  prominence,  has  taken  i)recedence  over  the 
theoretical. 

H.  H. 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


The  references  are  to  paragraphs. 


ETYMOLOGY. 

Alphabet,  1 — 7. 

Table  of  letters,  1;  modified  vowels  and  diphthongs,  2;  double 
vowels,  3;  combinations  of  consonants,  and  doubled  consonants,  5; 
sonant  and  surd  consonants,  6 ;  use  of  capitals,  7. 

Pronunciation,  8 — 10. 

Quantity,  8 ;  alphabetical  list  of  all  vocal  and  consonantal  sounds, 
9;  accent,  10. 

Division  of  syllables,  12. 

Apostrophe,  13. 

Articles  and  their  declension,  14 — 15. 

Nouns,  16 — 45. 

Their  declension:— Singular,  IG— 17;  plural,  18—21;  paradigms, 
22;  examples  for  practice,  23;  compound  nouns,  24;  nouns  with  two 
plural  forms,  25;  defective  declension,  26—28;  suppressed  forms  of 
declension,  29 ;  nouns  of  foreign  origin,  30 — 32 ;  alphabetical  list  of 
exceptions  to  the  rules  given  on  declension,  33 ;  proper  names,  34 — 40. 

Gender:— Masculine  nouns,  41;  feminine  nouns,  42;  neuter  nouns, 
43;  nouns  with  double  gender,  44;  compound  nouns,  45. 

Preliminary  chapter  on  prepositions,  46-^7. 

Verbs,  48—56. 

Conjugation  of  the  auxiliaries  of  tense  \\(xbt\\,  jetn,  and  inerben, 
48—50;  general  remarks  on  the  verb;  formation  of  moods  and  tenses, 
51—53. 

Kegular  conjugation:— Its  characteristics,  54;  paradigm  (toben),  55; 
special  remarks,  56. 


Vin  TABLE   OF   CONTENTS. 

Preliminary  chapter  on  the  order  of  words,  57 — 61. 

Normal  order,  58;  inverted  order,  59;  transposed  order,  60;  place 
of  the  negative,  61. 

Prehminaiy  rules  on  the  use  of  the  Subjunctive,  62. 

Verbs  (continued),  63 — 79. 

Irregular  conjugation: — Its  characteristics,  63 — 64;  a  comparative 
table  of  the  regular  and  irregular  conjugation,  66;  mixed  conjugation, 
67;  conjugation  of  the  modal  auxiliaries,  68;  remarks  on  them,  69 — 70; 
alphabetical  list  of  all  irregular  verbs,  71 . 

Separable  and  inseparable  verbs,  72 — 79, 

Adjectives,  80—96. 

Not  declined  when  used  predicatively,  80;  their  declension  when 
used  attributively,  81—84;  when  used  substantively,  85;  suppressed 
forms  of  declension,  86;  indeclinable  adjectives,  87;  special  re- 
marks, 88. 

Their  comparison: — Regular,  89—91;  irregular,  92;  defective,  93; 
special  remarks,  94—95;  particles  used  in  comparison,  96. 

Pronouns,  97 — 150. 

Personal,  97—104;  possessive,  105—107;  demonstrative,  108—116; 
interrogative,  117-121;  relative,  122— 127;  indefinite,  128—150. 

Numerals,  151 — 165. 

Verbs  (completed),  166—182. 

Passive  voice,  166  —171 ;  reflexive  verbs,  172 — 176;  impersonal  verbs, 
177—179;  use  of  f)abcn  and  fein  as  auxiliaries  of  tense,  180 — 182. 

Adverbs,  183—188. 

Prepositions  (completed),  189 — 193. 

Conjunctions,  194 — 201. 

Interjections,  202. 

Word-formation,  203—215. 

Derivation,  203—209;  composition,  210—215. 

Brief  historical  sketch  of  the  German  language,  216. 

Correspondences  of  Consonants  in  German  and  English,  217 
—220. 


PRACTICAL    PART 


CONTAINING 


Material  for  Conversation p.     1 — 79. 

Reading  Exercises p.  80 — 92. 


MATERIAL 


FOR 


CONVERSATION. 


Note. — As  stated  in  tlie  preface,  the  sentences  wliieh.  follow  are  meant 
to  be  memorized  by  the  student,  to  serve  afterwards  as  material  for  con- 
versation. It  would,  however,  be  contrary  to  his  interests,  should  he 
endeavor  to  impress  them  upon  his  mind  by  dint  of  translating  their 
English  equivalents  into  German,  inasmuch  as  by  such  a  proceeding 
he  would  constantly  use  his  mother  tongue  as  a  medium  of  thought. 
The  only  right  course  for  him  to  take  is, 

First,  to  secure  a  logical  and  grammatical  understanding  of  the  sent- 
ences to  be  committed; 

Secondly,  to  pronounce  them  repeatedly  aloud; 

Thirdly,  to  write  out  from  each  illustration  that  word  which  will 
remind  him  of  the  idea  contained  in  it,  as,  e.  g.,  the  word  „3ugenb"  will 
remind  him  of  the  statement  made  in  the  first  sentence  that  youth  is 
the  spring-time  of  life; 

Finally,  to  endeavor  to  recall  by  the  aid  of  his  catchword  the  German 
form  expressing  that  idea,  failing  in  which  he  will  consult  the  text  and 
try  again  until  he  becomes  wholly  independent  of  it. 

If  he  has  conscientiously  followed  the  second  of  these  directions,  the 
English  idiom  will  not  intrude  because  by  a  repeated  loud  reading  of 
the  text  he  has  not  only  practiced  his  eye,  ear,  and  tongue,  each  of 
which  factors  will  become  a  valuable  support  to  his  memory,  but  he 
has,  at  the  same  time,  established  so  close  and  immediate  a  connexion 
between  the  German  catchword  and  the  other  words  constituting  the 
sentence  that  they  will  spontaneously  present  themselves  at  the  first 
call  of  the  catchword,  and  group  themselves  around  it ;  and  if  at  the 
first  attempt  all  do  not  come,  they  will  at  a  second  or  third. 

That  the  student  may  understand  the  questions  formed  by  the  in- 
structor from  the  sentences  thus  memorized,  we  subjoin  a  list  of  the 
most  common  interrogative  pronouns  and  adverbs : 


mCTRT^T^  K»B' bONYEESATION. 


toer?  who? 

iDCff en? -whose? 
Wtm?  to  whom? 
Iticn?  "whom? 
tpae?-vrhat? 
iDctd^er?  which? 


tpa0  fiir  ein?  what     tt)o ?  where? 

3dnd  of?  triotjin ?  whither  ? 

line?  how?  lt>oI)cr?  whence? 

Unet)tc(  ?  how  much?  uic^S^alb  ?    )  for  what 
inarum?  whj'?  Hjc^iuegen?)  reason? 

iDonn?  when? 


Observe  also  the  j^hrases: 


2^a§  tt^iffen  (^ie  Don. .  ? 
iBa§  gilt  t)on. .  ? 


"What  do  you  know  of . .  ? 
'\Miat  is  tiTie  of . .  ?     \Vhat 
said  of. .  ? 


can 


be 


To§U— §  17  (p.  9  to  12). 
14. 


X)ie  Ougcnb  ift  bet  grul)lmg 
bc8  ?eben^.  —  !4}a^  ii^cbcn. 

!4}a^  ®d)loB  ge^brt  *  bem  ^b^ 
nig,  ber  ^^arf  bcm  ^aifcr. 

'^tv  -Qiigcr  licbt  ben  SSalb. 

'A^it  Sa^rl)cit  ift  emig. 

!ir^ie  (gonne  ift  bie  Cuelle  bc^ 
2id)k^  unb  bcr  Same.  —  !4)ae 
gid)t. 

^tc  9?i((a  Satbau  ger)ort  ber 
©rdfin  \)on  5lmim. 

!3^er  !4}ic^ter  licbt  bie  gin* 
famfeit. 

!4^er  5lrabcr  ncnnt  ba§  garnet 
bttS  (Sd)iff  bcr  3BUfte. 

3cbe8  mctaii  ift  nu^^Iic^. 

5(IIe0  ®lUc!  ift  tjcrgdngad). 


*  See  §  55. 


Youth  is  the  sj^ring-time  of 
Hfe. 

The  castle  belongs  to  the 
king;  the  park,  to  the  em^Deror. 

The  hunter  loves  the  forest 

Ti-uth  is  etemaL 

Tlie  sun  is  the  source  of 
Hght  and  heat 

The  Tilla  TTaldau  belongs 
to  the  Countess  von  Amim. 
The  poet  loves  soHtude. 

The  Arab  calls  the  camel 
the  ship  of  the  desei-t. 
EveiT  metal  is  usefuL 
All  happiness  is  transitory. 


15, 


'^cv  grfmbcr  ber  2o!omotiDe 
tear  ein  (ingtanber. 


The  inventor  of  the  loco- 
motive was  an  Englishman. 


MATERIAI.   FOK   CONVERSATION. 


tft  bte  (Sttmmc  etncS  ^^ic^ter^. 
—  !4}a^  @ett)if]cn. 

^4e   ^uri3  pattern    gel}brt 
eincm  (Snt3tanbei\ 
'    grau  ©iibner  jtf)reibt  etncn 
9?oman. 

Unfer  Sebctt  ift  emc  (Scl)u(e. 

^er  ^apft  (Si^1u^  wax  bcr 
®ol)u  etncr  ^duerin. 

X)a^   §otcl   -53rlftol    gel)ort 
etnct  ^ame  in  •Bremen. 

©err  OJZetibe  \d)xdbt  cin  ^urf) 


The  voice  of  conscience  is 
the  voice  of  a  judge. 

The  castle  Hallern  belongs 
to  an  Englishman. 

IVIi'S.  Hiibner  is  writing  a 
novel. 

Our  life  is  a  school. 

Pope  Sixtus  was  the  son  of 
a  peasant  woman. 

The  Hotel  Bristol  belongs 
to  a  lady  in  Bremen. 

Mr.  Mende  is  writing  a  book 
on  China. 


16, 


S^cr  (Bd)ia\  tft  ha^  ^itb  bc§ 
^obc§. 

„!Dic  9J?ad)t  bc^  ©efangeS" 
tft  ber  2:itet  einc§  @ebtcl)tc8  Don 
(Sdjillcr.  —  !Der  ©cfang;  ba^ 
®ebtd)t. 

5}te  (Srfinbunt]  bc6  ©lafcg 
unb  be^  $apierc§  tft  fel)r  alt. 
—  ^a§  ®la§;  ba^  papier. 

Mer  35?atb  bci  Settcjefelb  ge* 
^ort  bem  (Staatc.  —  ^er  (Staat. 

1.  X)k  2Bufte  {ft  ba§  ^eid) 
be6  Sowett.  —  ®er  i^dipe, 

®ie  ^illa  Df^oberti  gel)drt 
ctnetn  D^uffen. 

®er  @per(itig  fitrd^tet  bctt 
fatten. 

2.  ^er  taifer  it^ar  ber  ®aft 
be§  giirftcn  Don  Sii^tetiftein. 

^er  (Sec  uttb  ber  ^ar!  gc^ 
prcn  bem  ©rafcn  ^euft. 
©ottter  befittgt  bctt  ©elbcn 


Sleep  is  the  image  of  death. 

"The  Power  of    Song"  is 
the  title  of  a  poem  by  Schiller. 


The  invention  of  glass  and 
paper  is  very  old. 

All  the  woodland  near  Len- 
gefeld  belongs  to  the  state. 

The  desert  is  the  realm  of 
the  Hon. 

The  viUa  Kodern  belongs  to 
a  Russian. 

The  sparrow  fears  the  fal- 
con. 

The  emperor  was  the  guest 
of  the  Prince  von  Lichten- 
stein. 

The  lake  and  park  belong 
to  Count  Beust. 

Homer  sings  of  the  hero 
Achilles. 


4  MATERIAL  FOE   CONVERSATION. 

17. 

T)cr  Dbelt^f  tft  ba6  ^cn!ma(  The  obelisk  is  the  monu- 

ber  gfrou  non  vgarncn;  tie  Ua^  ment  to  Ladj  Samen;   the 

pelle  Don  DJZarmor  ge^ort  ber  marble  chapel  belongs  to  the 

gcrjogin.  duchess. 

To  §18— §23. 

Note.  —The  rules  given  in  §  18  to  §  23  on  the  formation  of  the  plural 
are  not  meant  to  be  studied  by  the  beginner,  for  whom  the  following 
general  statements  may  suffice : 

1,  In  the  nominative  plural,  masculine  and  neuter  nouns 
ending  in  d,  Ctt,  cr,  or  the  diminutive  syllables  c^ett  and  leiu, 
are  not  inflected:  as,  ber  §imme(,  sky:  plui'.  bic  §tmmeL 

All  other  nouns,  feminine  ones  included,  take  one  of  the 
endings  e,  cr,  en  (n):  as, 

ber  Xi}d},  table:  plur.  Xi}6:}t, 

ba^  .^leib,  dress:  plur.  ^(etbcr. 

ba^  ^ett,  bed:  plur.  ^ettc«. 

hk  ^(ume,  flower:  plur.  ^(umen. 

In  addition  many  nouns  modify  theu'  radical  vowel,  viz.: 
a  to  d,  0  to  0,  U  to  ii,  au  to  du.     Examples: 

ber  35ater,  -^ather:  plur.  33tttcr. 

ber  ^otjUf  ^on:  plur.  ^ol^tte. 

ber  ^ruber,  brother:  jdIut.  ^ruber. 

ber  ^aum,  tree:  plur.  ^dume, 

2.  The  genitive  and  accusative  of  the  plural  are  like  the 
nominative  plural;  the  dative  adds  an  n  to  it  (except  when  the 
nominative  plui*al  itself  ends  in  n);  thus,  nom.  bte  ^riiber;  gen. 
ber  ^iiber;  dat  i>cn  ^ritbertt;  accus.  bte  ^ruber. 

!Die  blotter  ftnb  ber  (Sdjmuc!  Leaves  are  the  ornaments 

ber  ^durnc.  —  T)ad  ^iatt  of  trees. 

^ebennann  hat  ^cdjtt  unb  Everybody  has  rights  and 

l^flid)tctt.  —  ^a*3  9?ecf)t;  bie  duties," 
WW. 

^ie  ))latnv  ift  eine  Sel^rerin  Nature  is  a  teacher  of  man- 

ber  Mcnidjtn.  kind. 


MATERIAL  FOR   CONVERSATION. 


^tnbct  unb  9^arren  reben  bie 
Sat)r^eit  —  '^a^  ^inb;    ber 

®er  ^bler  tft  ber  ^onig  ber 
^ogeL  —  !Der  SSocjeL 

„3Banbc  l)abett  Dt)ren/'  fagt 
ba§  ©pri^tuort.  —  X)k  Sanb; 
ba^  Dt)r. 

^ie  @djtt)al6en  finb  bie  ^o^ 
tm  be^  grul)ling^.  —  !^ie 
®(^tt)dbe;  ber  ^ote. 

'Die  gurf)[c  finb  riftu3.  —  5)er 
gud)d. 

^ie  ^ienen  finb  fleigig.  — 
X)k  ^iene. 

3ebe^  filter  ^at  feine  @pie(c. 
—  X)a^  (Spiel. 

!Die  mot  ift  bie  Gutter  ber  (5r^ 
finbungett. 

!Die  ©efe^c  finb  bie  ^ciulen 
beg  (Staate^J  —  3:)ag  @efe^;  bie 
@dule;  ber  (Staat. 

5(l(e  ^Jj^enfd)cn  finb  mel)r  ober 
iueniger  bie  (Sflat)en_il)rer  2tU 
benfc^aftctt.  — T)er(^f(at)e;  bie 
^eibenfd)aft. 

T)ie  Saftcr  finb  bie  a'ran!^ 
^eitett  ber  ®cele.  —  "^a^  Rafter; 
bie  ^ran!^ eit. 

©riec^enlanb  ift  bie  SSiege  ber 
^ilnftc.  —  'Die  ^unft. 


Children  and  fools  speak 
the  tinith. 

The  eagle  is  the  king  of 
bii'ds. 

Walls  have  ears,  says  the 
proverb. 

Swallows  are  the  heralds  of 
spring. 

Foxes  aire  cunning. 

Bees  are  industrious. 

Every  period  of  life  has  its 
sports. 

Necessity  is  the  mother  of 
invention. 

Laws  are  the  pillars  of  the 
state. 

AU  men  are  more  or  less 
the  slaves  of  their  passions. 


Vices  are  the  diseases  of  the 
soul. 

Greece  is  the  cradle  of  fine 
arts. 


24. 


^er  ^'ngenienr  Strobel 
fd)reibt  eine  ®efd)ic^te  be§ 
^rii(fenliauc§. — i)er  ^ritden^ 
ban. 

Unfer  ©cirtner  ppan^t  "^pkU 
bourne  unb  ^einftotf c.  —  X)er 
(Stocf. 


Strobel,    the    engineer,    is 
writing  a  history  of  bridge- 


building. 


Our  gardener  is  planting 
apple-trees  and  vines. 


MATEMAL   FOE   COXVEESATION. 


T)k  Sod)e  I)at  fec^^3  S>cr^ 
toge:  a)?ontag,Dicn$tag,  dMtU 
tood),  :4}onner«Jtag,  greitaq  uttb 
'Sonttabenb;  unb  einen  9^u^c= 
tag,  bm  Sountag.  —  ©er  2^ag. 

Dcr  2)2alcr  §au|ci)i(b  malt 
bie  ^Bafferfttflc  letncr  §cimat. 
—  Dcr  33a|fcrfaU. 


The  week  has  six  work  days: 
Monday,  Tuesday,  Wednesday, 
Thui'sday,  Friday,  and  Satui'- 
da}-;  and  one  day  of  rest,  Sun- 
day. 

Hauschild,  the  artist,  is 
painting  the  waterfalls  of  his 
country. 


29. 


Uttfcrc  Scftung^mauer  ift 
jtpan^ig  ^nf^  \)od);  ber  @rabcn 
ift  breigig  Sub  brcit. 

^eber  3olbat  ber  ^Irmec  1:)at 
gmei  ^aot  (Sc^ut)e  unb  \\vc\ 
^aav  sgtriimpf  e.  —  ^tv  ®(i)u^ ; 
ber  (Strumpf. 

(Sin   ^ilogramm   ift    gwei 

'^ie  3Ser!e  be^  "profefford 
geber  foften  jwan^ig  Port 
flinfsig  5pf  ennig.  —  4)a^  Serf. 


The  wall  of  our  fortress  is 
twenty  feet  high;  the  ditch  is 
tldrty  feet  wide. 

Every  soldier  of  the  ai'my 
has  two  paii's  of  shoes,  and 
two  pau's  of  stockings. 

A  kilogi'am  is  two  pounds. 

The  works  of  Professor  He- 
ber  cost  twenty  marks  and 
fifty  pfennigs. 


46. 


1.  !Dic  5lmetfcn  fammein 
iDd^renb  bc0  eommer^  33or^ 
rate  |itr  ben  SBinter.  —  ^ie 
Slmeife;  ber  (Sommer;  ber  3$or^ 
rat. 

■  'Dk  ^ipflan^en  tnarfifen  nii^t 
ii)  e  g  e  n  ber  2^rocEen^eit.  —  X)ie 
^flange. 

'  2.  £ie  ^atteln  fommen  a  u  S 
bcm  Siiben.  —  ^ie  X)attet;  ber 
igiiben. 

Der   Tlaxtt   ift    bei   ber 
:Srlicfe. 


Ants,  during  summer,  gather 
provisions  for  winter. 


The  plants  do  not  grow  on 
account  of  the  drought. 

Dates  come  from  the  south. 


The   market    is    near    the 
bridge. 


MATERIAL   FOR    CONVERSATION. 


Sir  mcffcn  blc  Xemperatur 
bcr  5ltmoipl)cire  mtt  bcm  Xijcx^ 
mometer.  —  ^a^  ^^ermo= 
meter. 

^ie  (Solbatctt  fommcn  ebett 
t)on  bcr  ^arabe  unb  marfc^ie^ 
rett  nad)  iijun  ^afernen.  ^Die 
Dberftcit  Qel)en  3  u  tf)rcm  ©cnc^ 
raL — ^er  (^olbat;  bie  ^afcrne; 
ber  Dberft. 

!Der  ^aftor  \DoI)nt  bcr  ^irc^c 
gecjeniiber. 

4)cr  ^rafibent  tft  feit  eincm 
9al)rc  i:x  (5uropa. — ^Da^  3al)r. 

a.  X)cr  ^on[ut  i^iibcr  cjel)t 
itoi^  iD^ittidjett  unb  bort  bort  ju 
beni  ^{)ai[er  i;i  ©afteirt. 

3.  Unfcrc  ®  l)iffc  gct)en  b  ur  c^ 
bctt  (Sue^fanal  nad)  3^^^icu. — 
'^a^  (Sd)iff. 

©a'5  ^^;Kf et  mit  ben  fiinf  ^le- 
ge(n  ift  fiir  ben  ^Mffierer. — 
3^a$  <Sict]c(. 

^iele  &utc  fterben  o^nc  bic 
S^rbftungen  bcr  9?eUgton. 

T)ie  'ptanetcn  tretfen  um  bic 
(Sonne.  —  !^er  planet. 

(S()inin  ift  ein  yj^ittet  g  c  g  c n 
bttS  gieber. 

4.  Sien  tiegt  an  bcr  T)onau. 
Sir  fa{)ren  gemb^nlid)  bt^  an 

bctt  glUB. 

!Die  ©emfen  leben  in  ben  ^\U 
pen.  —  !Die  @emfe. 

©er  9^^ein  ftie^t  in  ben  -53o= 
benfce. 

T)er  ©otteSacfer  ift  I) inter 
bcr  ^ird)e. 

^ie  (Sd)u(e  ift  neb  en  bcr 
^iid)e. 


We  measure  the  tempera- 
ture of  the  atmosphere  by 
means  of  the  thermometer. 

Tho  soldiers  are  just  com- 
ing from  the  parade,  and  are 
marching  to  their  barracks. 
The  colonels  are  going  to  their 
general. 

The  pastor  lives  opposite 
the  church. 

The  President  has  been  in 
Europe  for  a  year. 

Consul  Lober  goes  to 
Munich,  and  from  thence  to 
the  emperor  at  Oastein. 

Our  ships  go  to  India 
through  the  Suez  canal. 

The  parcel  with  the  five 
seals  is  for  the  cashier. 

Many  people  die  without 
the  comforts  of  reUgion. 

The  planets  revolve  about 
the  sun. 

Quinine  is  an  antidote  to 
fever. 

Vienna  lies  on  the  Danube. 

We  usually  drive  as  far  as 
the  river. 

The  chamois  live  in  the 
Alps. 

The  Khine  flows  into  the 
Lake  of  Constance. 

The  cemetery  is  behind  the 
church. 

The  school  is  near  the 
chui'ch. 


MATERIAL    FOR   CONVERSATION. 


T)cv  .<loIo§  Don  9?f)obu^  ftanb 
fiber  bcm  (SingauQ  b^3  §afen^ 
bcr  S'ni'cL  —  $)cr  (Siugang. 

^cr  "^fab  mit  bent  (Seldnber 
fUt)rt  bnrd)  bie  (Sc^(nd)t  unb 
iiber  ben  ^erg  nad)  ber  (gtabt. 

—  ®a^  ©ctanber. 

(5in  2:ei(  ber  SSitftc  <Sat)ara 
liegt  nnter  bcm  3)tee§fpiegel. 

—  ©er  (Spiegel. 

!iDie  Sa|ferl)ii^ner  landmen 
unter  baS  Saffer.  —  1)a^ 
©ul)n. 

!^ie  (gtatne  be^  ^apfte^  ®re== 
gor  fte^t  Dor  bet  ^at^ebrole. 

T)a^  Drifter  fi^t ;;  m  i  f  c!^  e  n 
bcr  ^n^ne  unb  bcm  $ubli!um» 

—  X)a^  ^nblifum. 


The  Colossus  of  Rhodes 
stood  over  the  entrance  to  the 
harbor  of  the  island. 

The  path  vdih  the  balus- 
trade leads  through  the  ravine 
and  over  the  mountain  to  the 
city. 

A  part  of  the  desert  of  Sa- 
hara hes  below  the  level  of 
the  sea. 

Water-fowls  dive  under  the 
water. 

The  statue  of  Pope  Gregory 
stands  in  fiott  of  the  cathe- 
dral 

The  orchestra  sits  between 
the  stage  and  the  audience. 


47- 


build 


near 


the 


^Die  :53iber  bauen  onS  Staffer. 

—  T)er  ^iber. 
^ie  3J?inifter  fmb  nod)  Bcim 

^onig. 

^ie  (Emigranten  gef)en  gum 
^onful.  —  T)a'  CEmigrant. 

X)\c  ©olbaten  fommen  tium 
g^er^icrpla^.  —  ^er  ^(a^. 

^ie  tonigin  gct)t  im  @om:= 
mer  geiub()nlid)  in!  (^birgc. 

Die  ©locfen  rufen  jur  ^ird)e. 

—  Die  ©lode. 
(Storc^c  unb  (^njalben  flie* 

gen  im  |)erbft  ubcrS  lUleer.  — 
fecr  ^tord);  bcr  ^Jcrbft. 

48. 
Note. — On  the  use  of  pronouns  in  direct  address,  see  §  98 
and  §  105,  2,  and  on  their  agreement  with  the  noun  in  regard 
to  gender,  see  §  100. 


Beavers 
water. 

The  ministers  are  still  with 
the  king. 

The  emigrants  are  going  to 
the  consul 

The    soldiers    are    coming 
from  the  drill-ground. 

The  queen  usually  goes  into 
the  mountains  in  smniner. 

The  bells  caU  to  chui'ch« 

Storks    and     swallows    fly 
across  the  sea  in  autumn. 


MATERIAL   FOR   CONVERSATION.. 


9 


3t^  ^ttBc  cincn  ^anaricn^ 
tjoget  im  It'cifig.  —  ^er  ^'afig. 

T)a^  V^amm  fagte  gum  SSolf: 
„2)tt  ^aft  fein  ©erj."  —  ©er 
SBolf. 

^a§  ®e)d)aft  be§  ^anquier^ 
SD^aufe  getjt  fel)r  gut;  ct  \)ai 
itber  ge^it  ^ommt^. 

SJ^eine  ^ntkx  ift  utiipol)!, 
fie  Ijttt  ba§  gteber. 

^a^  ^orf  ^uct)t)eim  ift  Hein; 
e§  ^ot  tiur  brcil}unbert  ^in* 
H)ot)ner. 

S3Bir  ^aBcn  neun  5Q?onatc 
(Bdjnk  unb  brei  3Jionate  3ferien. 
—  ^er  SDbnat. 

Sic  l^abcn  nod)  brei  (Stun* 
ben  Qdt  bi^  gum  ^Ibgang  be^ 
3uge^,  —  ®ie  (Stunbe;  ber 
5lbgang;  ber  ^^ug. 

i,§ahtn  ^it  nod)  cine  Sod^e 
©ebulb,"  fagte  ber  ilonful  gu 
ben  ^lu^wanberern. 

^JJieinc  ^(tern  jinb  no^  in 
SKleu;  fie  Ijabcn  uielc  greunbe 
bafelbft. 

iJct)  ttjar  nic^t  im  ^'ongert; 
i^  ^tttte  !etn  billet,  —  ©a^ 
^^ongert. 

9)Jein  S5atcr  n?ar  geftem  auf 
feincm  ^iircau,  benn  cr  IJotte 
uicl  3U  tt)un;  meine  3J^utter  aber 
wax  gu  |)aufc,  fie  ^otte  ®dfte 
au^  ber  '5)Jacl)barfc^aft,  —  Da^ 
bureau;  ber  (^aft. 

^ir  ioaren  nid)t  in  ber  SSor=* 
Icfung;  mit  fatten  feine  Qdt 

!Dcr  9^ic^ter  fagte  gum  '^e- 
linqucntcn:  „<Sie  pttcn  tcin 
^ci)i,  im  @ee  gu  fifdjcn/  — 
'  2)cr  Delinquent. 


I  have  a  canary  bird  in  the 
cage. 

The  lamb  said  to  the  v^^olf : 
Thou  hast  no  heari 

The  business  of  Mauke,  the 
banker,  is  very  prosperous;  he 
has  more  than  ten  clerks. 

My  mother  is  unwell,  she 
has  a  fever. 

The  village  of  Bucliheim  is 
small ;  it  has  but  tlu-ee  hundred 
inhabitants. 

We  have  nine  months  school 
and  three  months  vacation. 

You  have  still  three  hours' 
time  before  the  train  starts. 


Have  patience  for'  another 
week,  said  the  consul  to  the 
emigrants. 

My  parents  are  still  at 
Vienna;  they  have  many 
friends  there. 

I  was  not  at  the  concert;  I 
had  no  ticket. 

My  father  was  in  his  office 
yesterday,  for  he  had  a  gi-eat 
deal  to  do;  but  my  mother 
was  at  home,  as  she  had  guests 
from  the  vicinity. 

"We  were  not  at  the  lecture; 
we  had  no  time. 

The  judge  said  to  the  cul- 
prit: You  had  no  right  to  fish 
in  the  lake. 


10 


MATERIAL   FOR    CONVERSATION. 


T)k  5Irbcitcr  \mvcn  mit  9f?cd)t 
uujufricben,  benn  fie  fatten 
i)ie(  Slrbcit  unb  luenig  8of)tt. 


The  •workinen  were  justly 
discontented,  for  they  had 
much  labor  and  little  j)ay. 


49. 


T)cv  ^Spcrber  fagt  jum  (Sper* 
ling  in  ber  gabel:  „T)u  bift 
mctn,  benn  ii^  Un  grog,  unb 
bu  bip  Rein."  —  I)cr  (Sperling. 

9)Zcin  ^atcr  ift  nid)t  gugaufe, 
ct  ift  auf  ber  3agb. 

T>a5  better  ift  unfrcunblii^ 
l^ier  m  ben  Bergen;  c8  ifl  !alt 
unb  feud)t.  —  !iDcr  ^crg. 

,Miv  finb  ^aicm,"  fagten 
bie  ^^lu^manberer,  „unb  finb  auf 
bem  Sege  nad)  (Ealifornien."  — 
5Der  ^aier. 

Wlcim  (v(tern  finb  nid)t  I)ter, 
fie  finb  in  (Suropa. 
-^  2)Jeine  ^^riiber  maren  geftern 
abenb  in  ber  33orIefung;  ii) 
felbft  ttior  im  33erein.  —  ©er 
S3erein. 

SBir  to  or  en  tDd^renb  be^ 
SBintcr^  in  ';)^eapc(.  —  !iDer 
Winter. 

!l)ie  ?agc  ber  granjofcn  in 
9J?o§!au  njar  {)offnung^lov^;  fie 
maren  ol)ne  Dbbacf),  '3k()rung 
unb  ^leibung.  —  '^tv  granjofe. 

„<Btitn  Sie  ganj  o^ne  Sor* 
gc,"  fagte  ber  "^rebiger  gu  un§, 
Jd)  bin  ^):}v  greunb  unb  meine 
c^  gut,'^ 


The  hawk,  in  the  fable,  says 
to  the  sparrow:  Thou  ai't  mine, 
for  I  am  lai'ge,  and  thou  art 
small 

My  father  is  not  at  home, 
he  is  out  hunting. 

The  weather  is  disagree- 
able here  in  the  mountains;  it 
is  cold  and  damp. 

"We  ai'e  Bavarians,"  said 
the  emigrants,  "and  are  on 
our  way  to  California." 

My  parents  are  not  here, 
they  ai'e  in  Eui'ope. 

My  brothel's  were  at  the 
lectui'e  last  night;  I  myself 
was  at  the  club. 

We  were  at  Naples  during 
the  -svinter. 

The  condition  of  the  French 
at  Moscow  was  hopeless;  they 
were  mthout  shelter,  food,  or 
clothing. 

"Be  entirely  free  from  care," 
said  the  i^reacher  to  us,  "I  am 
3  our  friend  and  well  disposed 
towai'ds  you. 


50. 

Qd)  !ann  nid)t  mel^r  arbciten,      I  cannot  work  any  more,  I 
i^  met  be  mube.  am  getting  tired. 


MATERIAL   FOR    CONVERSATION. 


11 


Unfcr  T)icner  ift  nic^t  !ran!, 
aber  tx  ttiirb  alt  unb  fd)tt)ad). 

3Sir  mitffen  cilen,  bcnn  C'3 
regnet,  unb  loir  lucrbcn  na^. 

-3(^  t)cr!aufe  tnetnc  ^rief* 
marfen,  benn  flc  iuerbcn  mir 
gletc^gitltig.  —  X)k  dJlavk. 

^d)  muBte  mctne  O^Jetfe  tiac^ 
©panteu  auffc^ieben,  benu  i^ 
tuurbc  plo^Iic^  fran!. 

©ad  '$er[eiTetd)  tour  be  bie 
^eute  2lle^anberd» 


Our  servant  is  not  sick,  but 
lie  is  getting  old  and  weak. 

AVe  must  liurry,  for  it  is 
raining,  and  we  are  getting 
wet. 

I  am  selling  my  stamps,  for 
I  am  growing  indifferent  to 
them. 

I  had  to  put  off  my  journey 
to  Spain  because  I  suddenly 
fell  sick. 

The  Persian  empire  became 
the  j)rey  of  Alexander. 


55. 


Qrfl  fd)retbc  einett  ^rtef  an 
meinen  Secret  in  Bremen. 

grau  (Sc^allcr  copiert  cine 
9}?abonna  uon  Wlnxiiio. 

Sir  cjlaubcn  (eid)t  \va^  \mv 
!)offcn. 

,,^tebct  eure  getnbe!"  ift  cine 
S5or|"d)rift  bed  (i^rtftentumd.  — 
!4^ad  (SI]rtftentum. 

nungen  tdufdjcn.  —  !l)er  ^wet^ 
fc(;  bie  §oftnung. 

3d)  mac^tc  bie  ^efanntfd^aft 
metned  ajiufitte^rcrd  in  Sied* 
baben, 

^ert!(ed  fc^mitdtc  5lt!)en  nttt 
^entpeln  unb  .Statuen.  —  'X)er 
^empel. 

2Btr  tDaren  jmei  (Stunbcn  ivx 
S5crein  unb  fpiettcn  bann  ®d)ac^ 
bid  5Jiitternad|t.  —  X)k  md)t 


I  am  ■writing  a  letter  to  my 
teacher  in  Bremen. 

Mrs.  SchaUer  is  copying  a 
Madonna  by  MuriUo. 

We  easily  believe  what  we 
hope. 

Love  your  enemies,  is  a 
precept  of  Christianity. 

Doubts  torment,  and  hopes 
deceive. 

I  made  the  acquaintance  of 
my  music-master  at  Wies- 
baden. 

Pericles  adorned  Athens 
with  temples  and  statues. 

We  were  at  the  club  for 
two  hours,  and  afterwards 
played  chess  until  midnight 


56. 

^(eyanbcr    griinbcte    ©tdbte         Alexander    founded    cities 
unb  ^^dnigreidje.  and  kingdoms. 


12 


MATERIAL   FOR   CONVERSATION. 


^tc  9iuffen  opferten  tl)re 
.?)auptftabt  unb  rcttcten  il}re 
grei^cit. 


The  Russians  sacrificed 
tlieii'  capital,  and  saved  their 
freedom. 


Additional  Examples  to  §  55  —  §  56. 


^  ^c^  njo^ttC  in  bcr  griebrid)^ 
ftraBc. 

T)ie  ^inbcr  fpiclctt  tior  bem 
§au)'c,  —  S^a^  ttnb. 

Qd)  bleibc  gu  §aufe  tnegen 
be§  9?cgcii^.  —  !Dcr  9?egen. 

!I)er  ©artncr  ift  im  ©arten 
unb  pflanjt  ^ lumen. 

^ie  gurdjt  uerleitjt  glitgef. 
—  ^er  gaigef. 

!Die  (S^inefen  betrad)tcn  bie 
2^anne  al§  ein  @tnnbilb  ber  Un* 
fterbltd)!ett.  —  ^cr  (5l)inefe. 

Tk  3Sufte  erfittlt  ba^  ©emiit 
mit  bem  ®cfU()te  bcr  Uncnblic^* 
teit.  —  T)a^  ©efit^l. 

T)er  (Sinfiebler  tno^ntc  in 
ciner  §utte  im  SBalbe.  —  !Der 
Salb. 

§crhi(c§  befreite  ben  ^rome^ 
t^eu^  t)om  ©eier.  —  ®cr  ®eier. 

^cpkv  entbccftc  bie  ^cwc* 
gung^gefe^e  ber  ^(aneten.  — 
^a^  (Sefct^. 

2lnftoteIc§  leitcte  ^cn  Unter* 
ridjt  Stlcjanber^. 


I  live  in  Frederick  Street. 

The  children  are  playing 
before  the  house. 

I  stay  at  home  on  account 
of  the  rain. 

The  gardener  is  in  the  gar- 
den, planting  flowers. 

Fear  gives  wings. 

The  Chinese  regard  the  fir 
as  an  emblem  of  immortality. 

The  desert  fills  the  mind 
■with  the  sense  of  infinity. 

The  hermit  Hved  in  a  hut  in 
the  forest 

Hercules  rescued  Prome- 
theus from  the  vulture. 

Kepler  discovered  the  laws 
of  the  rotation  of  the  planets. 

Aristotle  supervised  the  in- 
struction of  Alexander. 


To  §  58- 
58, 

S^  lin  nie  in  (^uropa  jcs 
ttjcjcn,  ic^  l^obc  nod)  nte  3^^it 
gcnug  gur  9^ei]e  gc^ttBt. 

c^crr  iKid)ter  ijt  Senator  gc? 


§61. 


I  have  never  been  in  Europe, 
I  have  never  yet  had  time 
enough  for  the  journey. 

]VIr.  Eichter  has  become  a 
senator. 


MATERIAL   FOR   CONVERSATION. 


13 


tnu^  cntbcrft. 

!Der  Sagen  mirb  g(etc^  be- 
rett  |cin. 

!4)ie  Slnfunft  unferer  (Sttertt 
mor  un^  alien  cine  Ucbcrs 
taft^ung. 

^Mc(e  3nfe!tctt  finb  hm 
grudjten  fi^ablt^.  —  ^a^ 
Snfeft;  bie  grudjt. 

^(^  geticnf c  ben  (Sommer  in 
^ari^  311  dcrBrinactt. 

^f^apoleon^  Stbft^t  n)ar  feine 
gctnbe  etnjeln  ju  fi|(o0Ctt. 

„(S^  ift  rii^mlit^,"  fagt  §0^ 
ra.;;,  „fur  ba^  ^atcrknb  ju 
ftctkn.^' 


Galvani  discovered  galvan- 
ism. 

The  carriage  will  be  ready 
immediately. 

The  arrival  of  our  parents 
was  a  surprise  to  all  of  us. 

Many  insects  are  hurtful  to 
the  fruits. 

I  intend  spending  the  sum- 
mer at  Paris. 

Napoleon's  intention  was  to 
beat  his  enemies  sej)arately. 

"  It  is  glorious,"  says  Horace, 
"to -die  for  one's  country," 


59. 


©eftem  tnotcti  to  it  in  ber 

5lu^ftcl(nng. 

Sir  arbciteten  bi§  brei  U^r, 
bann  moditctt  ttiir  ?incn  (Spa* 
giergang  urn.  bie  ©tabt. 

3m  Sinter  too^ncn  ttiir  in 
ber  @tabt,  im  (Sommer  auf  bem 
i^anbe.  —  X)a^  \ia\\h, 

!Die  ^onigtn  ^aBc  it§  gefe^en, 
aber  nici)t  ben  ^onig. 

^'raftitj  ift  bie  <Stimme  bc^ 
2:enortften  ntd)t,  aber  fel)r  bieg* 
fam.  —  jDer  ATenorift. 

Senn  e^  (jegen  abcnb  f^dn 
ift,  (jo)  gcbenten  mir  anf  bem 
g(uf|c  p  rnbern.  —  ^er  glug. 

T)a  ic^  ®afte  ^abe,  faun  ii^ 
ntd)t  t)erfpred)en  in  bie  iStabt  ^n 
fommen. 


Yesterday  we  were  at  the 
exhibition. 

We  worked  until  three 
o'clock,  then  we  took  a  walk 
around  the  town. 

In  winter  we  live  in  town; 
in  summer,  in  the  country. 

I  have  seen  the  queen,  but 
not  the  king. 

The  tenor's  voice  is  not 
strong,  but  very  flexible. 

If  it  is  fine  towards  evening, 
we  intend  rowing  on  the  river. 

Since  I  have  guests,  I  can- 
not promise  to  come  to  town. 


u 


MATERL\L     FOR   CONVERSATION. 

60. 


*^o(t)!ratc6  \)attc  cmcti  9^ing, 
tt)c(d)cn  ct  feljr  f)od)  fdjt^tc. 

©eftcrn  \)abcn  mv  bie  ^urg 
bciud)t,  IDO  Sutler  bie  ^ibel 


Potycrates  had  a  ring  which 
he  valued  xerj  higlilj. 

Yesterday  we  \isited  the 
castle  where  Luther  ti'anslated 
the  Bible. 


61. 


©te  ?eute  glaubcn  bie  @e* 
fd)id)te  be^  ^cttler^  nii^t. 

Qd)  emartc  metne  greunbe 
ni^i  me^r;  e^  ift  fd)OTi  fel)r 
fpat. 


The  people  do  not  beUeve 
the  beggars  stoiy. 

I  do  not  expect  my  friends 
any  longer;  it  is  very  late  al- 
ready. 


Additional  examples  to  §  58  —  §  Gl. 


§err  ^Seige  f^ai  neulidi  fcine 
3ucferfabri!  ticrfauft. 

§eutc  abenb  tottn  tc^  tiid)t 
au^ge^en,  tueil  ii^  greunbe  au^ 
ber  (Stabt  crtuarte. 

Sir  finb  geftertt  5Ibcnb  in 
ber  Dper  gcttjefcn  unb  iijerben 
^eute  abenb  gu  §au|e  blciben. 

priebrid)  miirbc  me{)r  ^^Ippetit 
§obcn,  fagt  ber  ^trgt,  mcnn  er 
mel)r  arbeitete. 

SSir  bewnnbem  in  ben  ^ra* 
men  (^octI)ei5  bie  ($l)araftere, 
mcil  lie  immcr  ber  ^Mtnr  ge- 
trcu  {inb.  —  Da^  !Drama;  ber 
(^t)arafter. 

iDa^  Setter  ift  nn[i<^er;  id) 
glaube,  c5  ttiirb  morgcn  rcgs 
nen. 

Sd)  ^aBc  etncn  (Btod  unb 
einen  O^egcnfdjirin  in  ber  Stabt 
gcfauft. 

©corg  ijl  8oIbat  gctoorbcn. 


]\Ii\  Weisse  sold  his  sugar- 
factory  the  other  day. 

To-night  I  cannot  go  out 
because  I  am  expecting  friends 
fi'oni  the  city. 

We  were  at  the  opera  last 
night,  and  shall  stay  at  home 
to-night. 

Frederick  would  have  more 
api^etite,  the  ph^'sician  says, 
if  he  worked  more. 

We  admii'e  the  chai-actei-s 
in  the  dramas  of  Goethe  be- 
cause they  are  always  faithful 
to  nature. 

The  weather  is  uncertain;  I 
beheve  it  will  rain  to-morrow. 

I  have  bought  a  cane  and 
an  umbrella  in  town. 

George  has  become  a  soldier. 


MATERIAL   FOR   CONVERSATION. 


15 


Str  ttJCtbcn  in  brei  (Stunben 
in  (Sm^  fcin. 

'5^ie  ©tra^cn  ftnb  burcl)  hm 
9^ecjcn  fet)r  fiiimut^ig  gcliaorbcn. 
—  X)ie  @tra§i\  :. 

T)er  llaufmann  Wldcx  Ijat 
ISanfrott  gcma^t. 

^ir  ^ttbcn  l)eute  friil)  cinen 
^pa^tergang  bur(^  ben  SSalb 

X)€r  ^r^t  eritcirt,  cine  9?ei]e 
iiber  t)tn  Dcean  iuiirtic  ber  @e^ 
funb^ett  ber  gnr[tin  fj^abcn. 

—  ^te  (Srf)riftftel(er  alter  ^eiten 
^aBctt  bie  33er(jangen^eit  anf 
^^often  ber  (^egeniMrt  gcloH. 

—  2)ie  3eit. 


We  shall  be  at  Ems  in  three 

hours. 

The   streets    have    become 

very  dirty  owing  to  the  rain- 
Meier,   the    merchant,   has 

become  a  bankrupt. 

We   took   a  walk  through 

the  woods  this  morning. 

The  physician  declares  that 
a  journey  across  the  ocean 
would  injure  the  health  of  the 
princess. 

The  writers  of  aU  times 
have  praised  the  past  at  the 
expense  of  the  present. 


62, 


1.  -3ebermann  tennt  ben 
^n^fprnd)  ^(epnber^:  „^Benn 
idjf^  ntd)t  5liepnber  to  are, 
ttiiinfd^tc  iiij,  !iDiogene^  ^n  fein. 

5Benn  xdj  bie^  ^^fti^^^^^S 
mciner  (SItern  ^iittc,  tciftc  ic^ 
fogleid)  nacI)(Snropa  (or  wiirbc 
id)  fogleid)  nad)  (Snropa  tcifcn). 

Sir  ^'diitn  nnfer  $aud  ntd)t 
tjertanft^iDennmnf  ere  Itmcjebnng 
nid}t  fo  geranfc^uoU  gewefen 
mdrc  (or  roir  ttjiitbcn  nnfer 
gan^  ntc^t  Dertanft  IjttlJcn, 
toenn  etc.). 

2.  (Sato  ppegte  ^n  fagen,  er 
fci  nie  fo  ttjenig  allein,  al-^  tpenn 
er  alkin  fci. 

§omer  (e^rt,  \>a^  5ltlae  bie 
(5rbe  trogc. 


Every  one  knows  the  saying 
of  Alexander  :  "If  I  was  not 
Alexander,  I  should  like  to  be 
Diogenes." 

If  I  had  the  consent  of  my 
parents,  I  should  go  to  Europe 
unmediately. 

We  should  not  have  sold 
our  house  if  our  surroundings 
had  been  less  noisy. 


Cato  used  to  say  that  he  was 
never  less  alone  than  when  he 
was  alone. 

Homer  teaches  that  Atlas 
carries  the  earth. 


16 


VJLTERTAL   FOR   CONVERSATION. 


T)tr  T^icb  bctcucrtc,  cr  l^obe 
bie  Ul)r  gctauft,  loiff c  aber  nid)t, 
in  ipeld)cm  l^iben,  benn  cr  fci 
ganj  frcmb  in  bcr  @tabt. 

Unfer  ^onful  f(f)reibt,  bag 
cin  ^rieg  ^mifdjcn  granfrcic^ 
unb  (Sljina  unocnneiblicl)  fci. 


Tlie  thief  protestod  lie  had 
bought  the  watch,  but  did  not 
know  in  which  store,  for  lie 
was  an  entii'e  sti'anger  in  the 
city.  ^ 

Our  consul  wi'ites  that  a 
war  between  France  and  China 
is  unavoidable. 


67. 


1.  3d)  borf  abenbS  nit^t 
au^^e^en  unb  !ann  fomit  nid)t 
in  bie  (Stabt  fommen. 

T)k  ^inbcr  Woikn  raiffen,  ob 
fie  ^eute  baben  turfen. 

Sil^elm  Wat  t)erbrieB(id), 
tDeit  er  nid^t  auf  bie  ^agb  gc^en 
burfte. 

!^ie  5lrbeiter  n)iinfd}ten  cine 
S?crfammlung  gu  I) alien,  Ijaben 
aber  nic^t  gcburft. 

2.  Qdj  fanit  f)eutc  abenb 
tiid)t  in  bie  33or(einng  ge^en,  id) 
l^abe  ^riefe  gu  )d)reiben.  —  X)er 
^rief. 

-Semattb  fragte  ben  ^iogene^, 
urn  rokmi  Ul)r  cr  gn  SJiittag 
efjen  fo((te.  !Diefcr  antnjortcte: 
^Senn  bu  reid)  bift,  ig  inann 
bu  tPiUft;  n>enn  bu  arm  bift, 
n?ann  bu  fonnfl." 

Unfcre  greunbe  fonncn  nic^t 
t)or  DJ^ittag  anfommcn. 

Qd)  ionnte  nic^t  c^er  font* 
men,  nj?il  id)  lange  auf  bie 
^ferbe  luarten  mugte.  —  '^a^ 
$ferb. 

3.  Qd)  mog  ben  (Stro^^ut 
nid)t;  cr  ift  gu  ^od). 


I  am  not  allowed  to  go  out 
in  the  evening,  and  cannot, 
therefore,  come  to  town. 

The  children  want  to  know 
whether  they  are  allowed  to 
bathe  to-day. 

AVilliam  was  vexed  because 
he  was  not  allowed  tj  go 
hunting. 

The  workmen  wished  to 
hold  a  meeting,  but  they  were 
not  allowed. 

I  cannot  go  to  the  lecture 
to-night;  I  have  lettei*s  to 
wiite. 

Somebody  asked  Diogenes 
at  what  o'clock  he  should  dine. 
He  answered  :  "If  you  ai'e 
rich,  dine  when  you  like ;  if 
you  are  poor,  when  you  can." 

Our  friends  cannot  arrive 
before  noon. 

I  could  not  come  sooner 
because  I  had  to  wait  a  long 
time  for  the  horses. 

I  do  not  like  the  straw-hat; 

it  is  too  higL 


MATERIAL   FOR   CONVERSATION. 


17 


^mt  Wcvn  tnogctt  ^eute 
mM  in^  Xl)catcr  ge()en. 

'i^a^  ^d)Io^  am  (See  fteljt 
nod)  tmmer  leer;  niemanb  Ijat 

feurfjt  unb  ungefunb  tjt. 

3^cl)  ino^tc  nod)  etnc  ScUe 
l^tcr  im  @artcn  bleibcn;  nnferen 
^efu(^  fonnen  tuir  eine  (Stnnbe 
fpatcr  mad)en.  —  !Dcr  ©arten. 

4.  grt^  tDetnt,  tneil  er  gu 
§aufe  bleiben  inu§,  tr»d()renb 
feine  @efd)iwifter  au^gel)en  biir* 
fen. 

(S3  ift  em  9?atnrgcfe^,  ha^ 
aUc  Wlm\d)tn  fterben  miiffcn. 

SD^eine  grennbe  !onnten  nic^t 
e'^er  fommen,  \w\i  fie  lange  auf^ 
2Dampffd)tff  loarten  umfetcn. 

5.  >Du  follfl  beinen  S5ater 
unb  bcine  SJ^utter  e()ren  —  ift 
eine  3Sorfd)rift  ber  :^ibeL 

'A^cv  SiJ^iniftcr  ift  befc^afti^t 
unb  I)at  unS  (^cantinortct,  mv 
fottctt  inieberfommen. 

5)ie  ^tonung  fotttc  I)ente 
ftattfinben,  bod)  ift  cin  3(uff d)nb 
notig  geiDorben, 

-  6.  !^er  5Infang  bon  (Sd)tt(er§ 
„llpenjagerMantet:  MiU^i  hn 
nid)t  bad  l^ammtetn  l)itten'?" 

^er  !Dire!tor  mar  fet)r  frcunb- 
lid)  gegcn  und.  „^'ommen  (Sie, 
tDann  (Sie  luottcn,"  fagte  er, 
„@ie  finb  immcr  luidtontmen." 

3d)  tooUtt  fjcftern  gran  ^lu 
berd  bcfnd)en,  aber  id)  l)atte 
felbft  «efud)» 


My  parents  do  not  wish  to 
go  to  the  theatre  to-day. 

The  castle  on  the  lake  still 
remains  empty;  nobody  has 
wanted  it  thus  far  because  it 
is  damp  and  unhealthy. 

I  should  hke  to  stay  here  in 
the  garden  a  while  longer;  we 
can  make  our  call  an  hour 
later. 

Fred  cries  because  he  must 
stay  at  home,  while  his  broth- 
ers and  sisters  are  allowed  to 
go  out. 

It  is  a  law  of  nature  that  all 
men  must  die. 

My  friends  could  not  come 
any  sooner  because  they  had 
io  wait  a  long  time  for  the 
steamer. 

Thou  shalt  honor  thy  father 
and  thy  mother,  is  a  precept 
of  the  Bible. 

The  minister  is  busy,  and 
has  answered  us  that  we  are 
to  come  again. 

The  coronation  was  to  take 
place  to-day,  but  a  delay  has 
become  necessary. 

The  beginning  of  Schiller's 
"Alp  Hunter"  runs;  "Wilt 
thou  not  guard  the  lambkin?" 

The  director  was  very  kind 
towards  us.  "Come  when  you 
hke,"  said  he,  "  you  are  always 
welcome." 

I  intended  calling  on  Mrs. 
Liiders  yesterday,  but  I  had  a 
visitor  myself. 


18 


MATERIAL   FOR   COX^'ERSATION 


69, 


?ubmi(^  f)at  ntd)t  auf  ben 
^afirmarft  Qclien  biitfcn;  fchi 
Srubcr  (Sbuarb  {)at  gcburft. 

Sd)  t)abe  metnen  greunbcn 
md)t  fcf)reibcn  f  onncn,  iuei(  id) 
i^re  Ibrefje  nic^t  f)attc, 

§eute  nad)mittacj  \mv  fcin 
^l)catcr;  bie  ^d)aufpiclcr  I)abcn 
in  bicfer  §i^e  nid)t  fpiclen  mos 
gen. 

9}?cin  3?cttcr  I)at  pIot4ic^  ab* 
reifeu  miiffcn. 


Lewis  has  not  been  allowed 
to  fio  to  the  fail*;  his  brother 
Edward  has. 

I  have  not  been  able  to 
write  to  my  friends  because 
I  did  not  have  theii'  addi'ess. 

There  was  no  theatre  this 
afternoon ;  the  actors  have  had 
no  inclination  to  play  in  this 
heat 

My  cousin  has  been  obliged 
to  leave  suddenly. 


71, 


!^tc  gctnbe  iDaren  tm  S?or* 
tei(,  meiT  unfcr  @enera(  j;u  fpdt 
Befall  ba^  geuer  gu  erdffnen. 
—  Tcr  33ortciL 

^ad  ^on^ert  Bcginnt  f)ciite 
urn  Dicr  U()r;  gefteni  bcgann 
c^  urn  brei. 

^cr  ^au  be§  ®ome§  l)at  be* 
reit^  bcgonncn.  —  ^er  !4^ont. 

!^ie  igdjmugglcr  leiftctcn  kU 
ncn  Siberftanb,  fonbern  ftrccf^ 
ten  bie  SSaffen  unb  botcit  urn 
(Sd)onung.  —  ®ie  Saffe, 

&ir  l^abcn  grau  9?nge  oft 
umfonft  gcbctcn  ^lauier  ^u 
fpielen;  fie  fpielt  nie  in  ©efell* 
fcf)aft. 

9Jlein  vSc^n^ager  I)at  bie  5lb* 
fid)t,  in  Berlin  gn  Blcibcn. 

Unfere  (5cereiie  wax  fe^r  an* 
genelpn;  bie  5tdd}te  inaren  ftet^ 
fo  l)eiter  unb  mi(b,  \>a^  \mv  biiJ 
9J?itternad)t  anf  bem  S3erbecf 
ilicftctt.  —  1)a^3  ©erbecf. 


The  enemy  had  the  .advan- 
tage because  our  general  gave 
the  order  to  open  fire  too  late. 

The  concert  begins  at  four 
o'clock  to-day;  yesterday  it 
began  at  thi-ee. 

The  building  of  the  cathe- 
dral has  begun  akeady. 

Tlie  smugglers  offered  no 
resistance,  but  laid  down  their 
arms  and  asked  for  mercy. 

"We  have  often  asked  Mrs. 
Huge  in  vain  to  play  on  the 
piano;  she  never  plays  in  so- 
ciety. 

My  brother-in-law  intends 
to  stay  at  Berlin. 

Our  voyage  was  very  pleas- 
ant ;  the  nights  were  always 
so  serene  and  mild  that  we 
remained  on  deck  until  mid- 
night 


MATERIAL   FOR    CO:^TVERSATION. 


19 


Utiferc  9?eii'cc^cfdt)rtcn  finb* 
in  !4)rc^ben  gcMicbcn.  —  !3)er 

!Da^  9ftof)r  ^t  bie  (Sigenfc^aft, 
bag  c§  nid)t  (cidjt  iDrit^t. 
--  Unfer  33irt  brat^  ben  ^on- 
traft,  unb  fo  mngten  n>ir  tn^ 
§otcI  ge(}en. 

Unfer  ©tener  I) at  hen  5.(rm 
gcBto^cttitnb  ltcc5tim4)ofpitaL 
—  !^a^  ©ofpitaL 

@op^of(e^  bra^tc  ha^ 
2^ranerfpie{  ^u  feiner  ^olkn^ 
bung. 

l^uculto  ^at  bie  ttrfc^e  t)on 
5l)*ien  nad)  Suropa  gcbroi^t. 
-=  £)anntba(  bat^tc  unablciffig 
auf  bie  3^ernid;tung  9^om^« 

S:)ie  ®efaf)rten  be§  Dbt)ffeu§ 
it)oUten  nidit  auf  i!)re  (2d)iffe 
^nriidgeljen,  lueil  fie  Sotu^  gcs 
gtffctt  batten* 

Sir  fel)en  ben  ^bnig  faft  tag* 
lid),  menu  er  nad)  bent  *$ar! 
fttljtt. 

i^J^ine  (SItern  finb  anf§  ^anb 
gcfa^rcn. 

(^uftau  ^IbolpI)  pet  in  ber 
©d){adjt  bci  l^lt^en. 

®cr  9Zebe(  fallt,  bie  (Sonne 
iDirb  balb  fc^einen, 

:4^ie  9^ad)tigallett  finb  jel^t 
fel)r  fparlid)  in  unferm  SKalbc; 
fonft  fingcrt  mir  jebe  2Bod)e  ein 
paar,  —  3^ie  9kd)tigall. 
.  -  Sir  l^aben  heute  ntorgen  So- 
relten  int  ^ac^e  gcfongcn.  — 
©ie  gorelle;  ber  S3ac^. 


Our  fellow-travelers  have 
remained  at  Dresden. 

The  reed  has  the  quality  of 
not  breaking  easily. 

Our  landlord  broke  his  con- 
tract, and  so  we  had  to  go  to 
the  hotel. 

Our  servant  lias  broken  his 
ami,  and  lies  in  the  hospital 

Sophocles  brought  tragedy 
to  its  perfection. 

Lucullus  brought  the  cherry 
from  Asia  to  Europe. 

Hannibal  was  incessantly 
planning  the  destruction  of 
Rome. 

The  comrades  of  Ulysses 
would  not  go  back  to  their 
ships  because  they  had  eaten 
of  the  lotus. 

We  see  the  king  almost 
daily  when  he  is  driving  to 
the  park. 

My  parents  have  driven  in- 
to the  country. 

Gustavus  Adolphus  fell  in 
the  battle  of  Liitzen. 

The  fog  is  falhng;  the  sun 
wiU  shine  soon. 

Nightingales  are  very  scarce 
now  in  our  forest;  we  formerly 
caught  a  couple  every  week. 

We  caught  trout  in  the 
brook  this  morning. 


*  Note.— Many  intransUive  verbs  are  connected  with  fciii.  (See  §  181). 


20 


MATERIAL   FOR    CONVERSATION. 


71  (continued). 


Qn  ^eutfdilanb  fcj^tcn  bie 
(^tubcntcn  |el)r  Did.  —  5)cr 
^tubcnt. 

"  5}ie  3c^^^9  metbct,  ba^  he- 
fonber^unfcrc  ^^nfauterie  tapfer 
gcfo(^tcn  l)at. 

-3cl)  finbc  mcine  2Bo{)nung 
flcin,  abcr  frcunblic^. 

5)cr  5^ic!)ter  !^l)cobor  .Corner 
fonb  ben  2^ob  auf  bcm  .^djlad)!* 
fclbe.  —  '^a^  gelb. 

^te  ^inber  bicfeS  ^nftitutd 
flcj^tcn  ^orbe;  fie  ^abett  and) 
\d)o\\  §ute  au$  (Strof)  gcflot^s 
ten. — Da^3  ^nftitut ;  ber  iiorb ; 
ber  $ut. 

5Mc  @^nepfen  finb  fcf)irer  ^u 
yd)icBcn,  incil  fie  fel)r  fd)neil 
flicacn.  —  ^ic  (2cl)ncpfe. 

t^ov  ciner  Sod)e  flog  unfer 
^uiucrmagajtn  in  bie  l^uft.  — 
l^a^  OJ^aga^in. 

^Diad)  ber(S(^(ad)t  bci  ^ama 
fio^  §aTiniba(  ^u  5(ntiod)u^. 

5luf  bent  O^igi  l)aben  inir  tro^ 
unfcren  ^el^^en  gcfrotcn.  — 
3)er  9iigt;  ber  ^el^. 

^ie  ^ienen  finb  nit^Itc^,  n>ei( 
ficnn^§onig  nnb  Sacfi^?  acbcn. 

Sir  l}aben  unfcrer  ^^illa  nod) 
!cinen  y^ntcn  gcgeben. 
"  !£)ie  Scilber  ^]3o(en^^  finb  nn* 
fid)cr,  n^eil  e^  nod)  Sdlfe  unb 
:^ducu  barm  aicbt.*  —  33er 
«dr. 


Students  in  Germany  fence 
a  great  deaL 

The  newspaper  reports  that 
our  infantry  especially  have 
fought  bravely. 

I  find  my  lodgings  small, 
but  cheerful 

Theodore  Komer,  the  poet^ 
met  with  death  on  the  battle- 
field. 

The  children  of  this  institu- 
tion make  baskets;  they  have 
hitherto  braided  hats  also 
from  sti'aw. 

Snipe  are  hard  to  shoot  be- 
cause they  fly  \ery  fast 

A  week  ago,  our  powder- 
magazine  blew  up. 

After  the  battle  of  Zama, 
Hannibal  fled  to  Antiochus. 

We  were  cold  on  the  Rigi 
in  spite  of  our  furs. 

The  bees  are  useful  because 
they  give  us  honej^  and  w^ax. 

We  have  not  yet  given  a 
name  to  our  villa. 

The  forests  of  Poland  are 
unsafe  because  there  ai'e  still 
wolves  and  bears  in  them. 


On  the  ^mp3r3onal  use  of  geben,  see  §  179. 


MATERIAL   FOR    CONVERSATION. 


21 


T)k  ®efd)ic^te  (cl)rt,  \ia^  c^ 
gu  alien  ^citeu  .'perren  unb 
^ncc^te  gegckn  I)at,  —  :^te 

©tcr  am  ©eftabc  gc^cn  wiv 
iac^xd)  anf  bte  Qao,h, 
—'    '^^ad)  ber  ^lnnal)me  tion  ^art§ 
giitg  9tapoleoti  frehinllig  in  bie 
S^erbannung. 

iD^etne  (^Itern   finb    in   hk 
^ird)e  gcgongcn. 
'    !Der  5lr3t  Tnad)t  nn^  §ot> 
nung,  hai  unfer  ^atcr  balb  gcs 
ncfeti  mirb. 

'  yJiein  On!e(  Wuxhc  in  ^Ile^ 
^anbria  fiebertran!  nnb  gcno§ 
erft  nad)  fec^^  SO^onatcn  luicber. 
—  ^er  momt 

T^k  ©rafin  ift  DoUfommen 
gencfcn. 

-  Scnn  tt)ir  auf  t>cn  Sit^rer 
tDarten^gcUjinncn  unferegrenn* 
be  einen  ^^orfprung. 

-  (Safar  gctnann  bie  @unft  bc^ 
5>olfe§  burd)  feine  greigebigfeit. 

-  ©a^  «olL 

Unfer  Wiener  l)at  in  ber  2oU 
tcrie  gettiattnen  unb  ift  nun 
felbftanbig. 

!r)ie  gitd)fe  groBcn  Sbd)er  in 
ben  ^rbboben.  —  ^a^  Sod). 

9}2cin  9^ad)bar  grofit  in  fei^ 
Item  ©artcn. 

llnfere  Offi.^ierc  l^nlUn 
^rieg^rat,  benn  ber  geinb  ^dlt 
atle  $affe  befey.  —  3)er  "ipag. 

Cicero  J^itli  \)kv  ^chtn  ge* 
gen  Ciatilina.  —  S^ie  9f^ebe. 

^cr  ^er^og  ift  fcl)r  fran!; 
fein  l^eben  ftongt  an  eineni  ga* 
ben.  —  !Der  gabcn. 


History  teaches  that  there 
have  been  masters  and  ser- 
vants at  all  times. 

Here  at  the  sea-shore  we 
go  hunting  every  da}^ 

Napoleon,  after  the  capture 
of  Paris,  went  voluntarily  into 
exile. 

My  parents  have  gone  to 
church. 

The  physician  gives  us  hope 
that  our  father  Avill  soon  re- 
cover. 

My  uncle  took  a  fever  in 
Alexandria,  and  did  not  re- 
cover until  after  six  months. 

The  countess  has  recovered 
completely. 

If  we  wait  for  the  guide, 
our  friends  will  get  the  start 
of  us. 

Caesar  won  the  favor  of  the 
people  by  his  liberaHty. 

Our  servant  won  in  the  lot- 
tery and  is  now  independent. 

Foxes  dig  holes  in  the 
ground. 

My  neighbor  is  digging  in 
his  garden. 

Our  officers  hold  a  council 
of  war,  for  the  enemy  has  oc- 
cupied all  the  passes. 

Cicero  delivered  four 
speeches  against  Catiline. 

The  duke  is  very  sick;  his 
Hfe  hangs  by  a  thread. 


22 


MATERIAI.   FOR    CONVEESA.TIOX. 


71  (continued). 


■^  3:)cr  tatfcr  -3ofep^_  \oav  cvup 
ltd)  bemuf)t  tie  SBof)(faf)rt  feincS 

-  ^arl  ber  ©roge  ^oB  ben  §an^ 
bcl  unb  forberte  bic  Stiffen* 
fd)aft 

Sran^  i|t  auf  bcr  3Siefe  unb 
l^ilft  bcti  5Irbcitcnt.  —  T^cr 
5lrbcitcr. 

^te  ^(ataer  ^olfcn  hen  3ltf)c* 
ncrn  gegen  bie  ^erfcr. 

3c^  eriaugte  bie  (Srlaubnt^ 
bie  geftung  ju  be]'ud)en,  wcii  id) 
hen  tommanbanten  f  anntc.  — 
5)cr  ^ommanbant. 
^  (Sigenlob  f  lingt  nic^t  gut. 

^6)  iDotrte  ben  Zf)akv  nxd)t 
neI)Titcn,  tDcit  er  nid)t  cd)t  f  long. 

3d)  muB  su  §aufe  blciben, 
bi^  meine  dltcrn  fommcn. 

(Ed[ar  fdjricb  an  fcincn 
grcunb:  „S6:}  lorn,  fa^  unb 
ftegte." 

^ie  i?einbe  muBtcn  it)re  ^a= 
noncn  in  unfcrn  §anben  loffcn. 

-  'A^k  ^anone. 

Unfre  ^^oli^^ei  ift  fel^r  xoad)^ 
fam;  fie  lop  feinen  ^Serbrec^er 
entnnfdjcn. 

-  "^ladj  bcr  (5innal)me  t)on  3D2an= 
tua  lic^  ^Bonaparte  eine  ^c= 
fal3ung  m  bcr  ^taht  unb  mar:^ 
fdjierte  nac^  £)\kn, 

Sir  I)abcn  unfcr  ®cpad  am 
^a{)n()of  gclafjcn.  —  !Dcr 
:^al)nl)of. 


The  Emperor  Joseph  earn- 
estly endeavored  to  promote 
the  "weKai'e  of  his  people. 

Chai'les  the  Great  improved 
commerce  and  fuiihered  sci- 
ence. 

Frank  is  in  the  meadov^r, 
helping  the  laborers. 

The  Plataeans  helped  the 
Athenians  against  the  Persi- 
ans. 

I  obtained  permission  to 
visit  the  foiiress  because  I 
knew  the  commander. 

Self-praise  does  not  sound 
■weU. 

I  refused  to  take  the  doUar 
because  it  did  not  ring  time. 

I  have  to  stay  at  home  rm- 
til  my  parents  come. 

Caesar  "WTote  to  his  friend : 
"I  came,  saw,  and  conquered.'' 

The  enemy  were  obhged  to 
leave  their  camion  in  our 
hands. 

Our  poHce  are  veiy  vigilant; 
they  let  no  criminal  escape. 

Bonapai'te,  after  the  capture 
of  Mantua,  left  a  garrison  in 
the  city,  and  marched  towards 
the  east. 

We  have  left  our  baggage 
at  the  station. 


MATERIAL  FOR   CONVERSATION. 


23 


^  ^k  ^ricgMa(^nd)tcn  finb 
f(^(ed)t;  un[re  ^olbatcn  Iciicn 
unter  bcr^ij^c;  fiebaben  and) 
\d)on  Saffcrmangel  gcUttcn. 

—  T:k  "iRadjvidjt 

-  ©a^  ^ferb  tDurbe  fc^eu,  lt?ei( 
cm  Scidjnam  tm  Sege  lag.  — 
3)cr  l^cidjnam. 

(Sonftantino^jcl  ift  feljr  fc^on 
gclegcn. 

-DJcciuSSatec  gcl|t  nid)t  tnc()r 
in  hen  S5erein,  uicit  er  ben  3^a* 
bo!§rau(^  tncibcn  mug, 

•*5aluu^  tnicb  taitgc  ^cit  ein 
S^reffcn  mit  ©annibaL 

"  T)k  (Bd}\da  bc^  ©errti  <ScnTt 
melfcn  jel^t  hen  g(ac^ettin()alt 
be^  partes ;  ()eute  morgen  I)aben 
fie  bie  §o^e  be^  Dbeli^fen  gcs 
mejfcn. 

&>ir  !aufctt  mdjt^  met)r  bci 
Scvrn  <Bpk^r  iucii;  er  jdjlec^t 
liiiP;  friiljcr  mag  er  beffer. 

!Der  patient  iDirb  nt(f)t  ge^ 
funb,  mii  er  !eine  3Jiebictn  etn* 
nimmt. 

3^  T^abe  ettt  3^tnmer  in  ber 
^arfftrage  gcnotnmcn. 

©eftertt  rict  ber  ^'onful  mcU 
nem  SSater  in  bleiben;  r)eute 
tttt  er  utt^  alten  ju  gel^en. 

3^cr  Wc'^t  l)at  memer  Wnikv 
gctotcnna^  ^arl^bab  3Ui3ef)en. 

X)er  ^Infang  t)oti  ®oet{)e^ 
^rlfontg  lautet:  ,,Scr  tcitct  fo 
fpat  burd;  ^Jiad;t  uub  Siu^?" 


Tlie  news  from  the  war  is 
bad:  our  soldiers  are  suffering 
from  the  heat;  they  have, 
moreover,  aheady  suffered 
from  scarcity  of  water. 

The  horse  took  fright  be- 
cause a  corpse  was  lying  in 
the  road. 

Constantinople  is  very  beau" 
tifully  situated. 

My  father  does  not  go  the 
club  any  more  because  he 
has  to  avoid  the  smoke  of 
tobacco. 

Fabius  for  a  long  time 
avoided  a  battle  with  Hanni- 
bal 

The  pupils  of  Mr.  Senn  are 
now  measuring  the  area  of 
the  park;  this  morning,  they 
measured  the  height  of  the 
obelisk. 

We  don't  deal  at  Mr.  Spiess' 
any  more  because  he  gives 
poor  measure ;  he  formerly 
gave  better  measure. 

The  patient  does  not  get 
well  because  he  takes  no  me- 
dicina 

I  have  taken  a  room  in 
Park  Street 

Yesterday,  the  consul  ad- 
vised my  father  to  stay;  to- 
day, he  advises  all  of  us  to 
leave. 

The  physician  has  advised 
my  mother  to  go  to  Carlsbad. 

The  beginning  of  Goethe's 
Erlking  reads:  "Who  rides 
so  late  thi'ough  night  and 
wind?" 


24 


MATEMAL   FOR   CONVERSATION. 


71  (continued). 


3d^  Italic  ben  ^ronprin^cn  ge* 
fel)en,  al^  er  auf  Me  ^arabe  xiii, 

§annibal  f^icb  Don  ^talien 
mtt  S^^ranen  in  ben  5lugen.  — 
X)k  Zi)vant;  bad  5Iuge, 

^a§  Setter  f^eint  gut  gu 
merben;  ba§  barometer  fteigt. 

(5§  ift  triibe  unb  !alt  ^ier  in 
8cl)bcn;  bie  (Bonne  \)at  fctt 
einem  2J?onat  nid)t  gcfd^icnen. 

-  Tlcin  ^ater  mug  unf  em  5)te* 
ncr  Idglic^  luegen  S'iadilaffigteit 
fr^cltcn. 

-  5)er  Qnfpeftor  xoav  aUgemein 
t)erl)afit,  meil  cr  bie  2Irbeiter  be* 
ftdnbig  idjolt. 

!Dte  &ie!ruten  f^tc^cn  nad) 
ber  (gc^eibe.  —  ©er  D^efrut. 

SS?ilt)etm  >lcll  f^o§  einen 
5lpfct  t)om  topfe  feinee  @o^* 
ne^.  —  ©cr  ^opf. 

©ie  ^lerjte  berid)ten,  ha^  ber 
^5rdfibent  gut  gcft^lofcn  \)at 

-  ©cr  5lr3t. 

9^apo(con  f^licf  fe^r  wenig. 

3c^  trage  bie  Ul)r  gum  lU)r* 

tnadjcr,    iiicit    fie    nid)t   mc^r 

©ie  ^onigin  ^t>irb  abreifcn, 
fobalb  ba^  ^^avtamcnt  gcfi^lofs 
fen  ift. 

©a^  ^ki  f ^miljt  ]c\^v  Iciest. 

©a§  5lBad)iJ  an  ben  S^iiQ^tti 
bc$  Staru^  ft^molj  an  ber 
(Sonne.  —  ©cr  gUigct. 

SBir  nicrbcn  morgcn  unfer 
^orn  f^nciUcn;  ben  SSeigcn 
^abcn  njir  fd)on  geft^nittcn. 


I  saw  the  crown-prince  as 
he  was  riding  to  the  parade. 

Hannibal  departed  from 
Italy  Avith  tears  in  his  eyes. 

The  weather  seems  to  be 
getting  fine;  the  barometer 
is  rising. 

It  is  gloomy  and  cold  here 
in  Ley  den;  the  sun  has  not 
been  sliining  for  a  month. 

My  father  has  to  scold  our 
servant  for  negligence  every 
day. 

The  inspector  was  univers- 
ally hated  because  he  con- 
stantly scolded  the  laborei^ 

The  recruits  are  shooting 
at  the  mai'k. 

WiUiam  Tell  shot  an  apple 
off  the  head  of  his  son. 

The  physicians  report  that 
the  president  has  slept  welL 

Napoleon  slept  very  little. 

I  caTiy  the  clock  to  the 
clockmaker's  because  it  has 
stopped  striking. 

The  queen  will  depai't  as 
soon  as  j^ai'Hament  is  proro- 
gued. 

Lead  melts  very  easil}^ 

The  wax  on  the  \vings  of 
Icai'us  melted  in  the  sun. 

"We  shall  cut  oiu*  lye  to- 
mon'ow;  we  have  cut  the 
wheat  alreadv. 


MATERIAL  TOR   CONVERSATION. 


25 


Qn  her  Qcitmq  ftetjt,  ha^  ber 
^dfer  einen  ^rief  an  ben  'papft 
gcfdjncBctt  l^ot 

-  3:)a^  tinb  f(!Jrctf,  fo  oft  c§ 
Slqnei  ne()men  tnu^* 

!Dte  «tbe(  fagt:  „^ae  ^tut 
5lbel^  f^ne  .^^um  $immel." 

,,'^a^  UnGlitcf  jt^tcitct 
f(f)ne((/'  fac|t  ber  T)tc^ter. 

S'ti  ber  geftung  luar  e§  nan;^ 
fttll ;  nitr  erne  <Sd)t(b  tt)ad)e  f  ^ritt 
langfam  auf  unb  ab. 

Uttfere  (Sd)tffc  feitertcn,  bi^ 
bie  ^anonen  ber  gort^  ff^mics 
gen.  —  SDae  gort 

-  !Dcr  ^elegrapt)  melbet,  bag 
alio  ^ad)e  m  ©ebtrge  betrdc^t^ 
lid)  geji^ttJoflen  finb  unb  un^ 
etnc  Uberj'c^wemmung  bet)or* 
ftel)t. 

i^orb  ^t)ron  fcOttJomm  uber 
ben  ^elie^pont. 
-!Dte  ©olbaten  fd^rtjongctt  btc 
gal)nen,  ai^  ber  ^a\\cx  nal)te. 

—  S)te  ga^ne. 
©djonal^^'^lnabe  ff^  to  or  ©an* 

nibal  ben  ^Jomern  geinbf^aft. 

—  ADer  9^omer. 

IDie  ^nbianer  fc^cn  unb  l)o* 
ren  [cl)r  fi^arf. 

Sir  blieben  auf  bem  S3erbe(f, 
bi5  iDir  fein  Sari's)  me^r  fo^cn. 
~  ©a§  SScrbed. 

-3c^  l^abe  grau  9f^euter  t)orI)in 
auf  ber  ^traj^e  gefc^cit. 

^3^a)3oteon  mad}te  einen  ge!)* 
ler,  aU  er  STruppen  nad)  IMqito 
fanbte. 

^ie  ^tnber  tan,^en  unb  fins 
gen  im  §ain.  —  3^cr  .?)ain. 

!^ie  ^olijct  Ijat  bicfe  ^ilrbetter 


It  is  stated  in  the  newspaper 
that  the  emperor  has  written 
a  letter  to  the  pope. 

The  child  cries  whenever  it 
has  to  take  medicine. 

The  Bible  says:  "The  blood 
of  Abel  cried  to  heaven." 

"Misfortune  strides  fast," 
sajs  the  poet. 

It  was  quite  still  in  the 
fortress;  only  a  sentinel  paced 
slowly  up  and  down. 

Our  ships  fired  until  the 
camion  of  the  forts  were  silent. 

The  telegraph  announces 
that  aU  the  brooks  in  the 
mountains  have  swoUen  con- 
ciderably,  and  that  an  inunda- 
tion is  near  at  hand. 

Lord  Byron  swam  across 
the  Hellespont. 

The  soldiers  waved  their 
flags  when  the  emperor  was 
approaching. 

Hannibal,  while  jet  a  boy, 
swore  hostility  to  the  Romans. 

The  Indians  see  and  hear 
very  acutely. 

We  remained  on  deck  until 
we  saw  land  no  longer. 

I  saw  Mrs.  Eeuter  in  the 
street  a  little  while  ago. 

Napoleon  made  a  mistake 
when  he  sent  troops  to  Mexico. 

The  children  are   dancing 
and  singing  in  the  grove. 
The  police    have    arrested 


2G 


MATERIAL   FOR   CON^^ERSATION. 


71  (continued). 


orrcttert,  mil  fie  (Sipottlicbcr 
Quf  bie  9?egierung  gcfungcn 
()aben.  —  ^a6  Sieb. 

!5)ie  ©cologte  le^rt,  bag  bie 
.^onttnente  balb  fintctt,  balb 
ftciiicn.  —  !4)er  Continent. 

m^  bie  ^kdiric^t  Dom  Xobe 
bc§  £an3(er^  tarn,  fontcn  alle 
^urfe  an  ber  ^orfe.  —  5^cr 

3Me  3^fi^<^K^  PpJ^QC^  nuf 
bem  gugboben  gu  fi^cn.  —  ^cr 
^apanefe;  ber  ^oben. 

5(uguftu§  l)atte  (^liicf  unb 
©rfo(g,  folange  cr  auf  bem 
S;i)rone  fa|.  —  ^cr  2:()ron. 

!Der  9)?aior  l)at  bem  $aupt* 
mann  im  !©uefl  ben  3cl}abet 
gcf^oltcn.  —  ^a§  ©nelL 

c^crr  ^idjtcv  t)at  t)ente  f(f)on 

^me'imal  im  9^eict)^tag  gcf^ros 

'  ctt  unb  iDtrb  nidjt  iDieber  f^Jtcs 

tn. 

Unfer  ^^rcbigcr  gefallt  un§ 
nid)t,  weil  er  m  langjam  f^ri^t ; 
friit)er  f^radj  er  f(^neller, 

5I(§  ha^  (^d)tff  gener  fing, 
flJtangcn  t^tete  *i|3a|fagiere  in^ 


?nt!)er  flonb  in  Sonn§  un* 
erfdjrocfen  uor  ^aifer  unb  O^cid). 

*ipromet^eu§  {)at  \>a^  gcuer 
au5  bem  §immct  ^cjlo^Un. 

!i[)er  Gallon  fiicg  anfang^ 
fcnfredit  in  bie  §o^e,  banu  flog 
er  n»cftUd)  baooii. 


these  laborers  because  iliey 
have  been  singing  satirical 
songs  against  the  government. 

Geology  teaches  that  con- 
tinents sink  at  one  time,  liie 
at  another. 

AVhen  the  news  of  the 
chancellor's  death  arrived,  all 
the  stocks  at  the  exchange  fell 

The  Japanese  are  wont  to 
sit  on  the  floor. 

Augustus  was  fortunate  and 
successful  as  long  as  he  sat  on 
the  thi'one. 

The  major  has  spHt  the 
captain's  skull  in  the  duel 

Mr.  Eichter  has  spoken 
twice  already  in  the  Diet  to- 
day, and  will  not  speak  again. 

Oiu'  preacher  does  not 
please  us  because  he  speaks 
too  slowly;  he  formerly  sjDoke 
faster. 

When  the  ship  caught  fii'e, 
many  passengers  sprang  into 
the  water. 

Luther,  at  Worms,  stood 
fearless  before  the  emperor 
and  emph-e. 

Prometheus  stole  fire  from 
heaven- 

The  balloon  at  first  rose 
pei-pendicularlv ;  it  then  sailed 
away  westwai-d. 


MATERIAL   FOR   CONVERSATION. 


27 


T)a^  ^f)crmotneter   ift  um 
eineti  ®rab  gcfticgcn. 
"  @^  ift  fo  l)ei6  l)ier  in  ^aler== 
tno,  \)a^  Diele  Seute  am  (Sott= 
nenftic^  ftctkn.  —  'Dcr  (Btid) 

^apokon  ftorb  in  ber  @e* 
fan(ienfd)aft  ber  (Sngtdnber. 

^ente  morgen  ift  ber  :^ifd)of 
gcftotBctt. 

^JJ^ein  ^ater  ^at  unfercm 
(partner  ben  5lbfd)ieb  gegeben, 
iDcil  er  gar  nid)t^  t^ot. 
-3}er  ^^a^ft  ©regor  l)at  ben 
^aifer  Don  ^eutfd)(anb  in  ben 
^ann  gct^on. 

-  Unfere  ^^felbdnme  trogcn 
i^euer  nic^t;  bi§l)er  t)aben  fie  fe^r 
reidjlid)  gctrogcn;  and)  ber 
Qnittenbaum  triigt  nid)t  fo  Diet 
trie  gen)b{)nlid). 

^d)  I)abe  ben  'Direftor  nen= 
lidx.in  ber  -^anf  gctroffcn. 

Snea§  ttug  feinen  ^ater  auf 
ben  (Bdjnikvn  au^  S^roja.  — 
3)ie  @d)nlter. 

•  ^ie  3^ben  tnihtn  meift 
§anbe(.  —  ^er  Quhe, 

Unfrc  (gSeereife  loar  nid)t  ge^ 
fa()r(o^;  ber  (Sturm  tticli  un'fer 
(Sd)iff  an  bie  ^iifte. 

X)emoftt)ene^  wax  fe!)r  jung, 
al^  er  3uerft  offentlit^  auftrttt. 

-(Sotratee  ttanf  ben  ®ift* 
bed)er. 

i)a^(Sprid^rt)ortfagt:  „35ie(c 
tod)e  tjcrlicrbctt  ben  :^rei."  — 
:SDer  llod). 
-Untraut  bcrbitBt  nic^t. 

^er  9?egen  t)at  bie  ^ege  tiers 
botBctt.  ~  X)er  ^eg. 


The  tliermometer  has  risen 
one  degree. 

It  is  so  hot  here  in  Palermo 
that  many  people  die  of  sun- 
stroke. 

Napoleon  died  in  captivity 
to  the  Enghsh. 

The  bishop  died  this  morn- 
ing. 

My  father  has  discharged 
our  gardener  because'  he  did 
not  work  at  all. 

Pope  Gregory  excommuni- 
cated the  emperor  of  Germany. 

Our  apple-trees  do  not  bear 
this  year;  they  have,  up  to 
this  time,  borne  very  abund- 
antly; the  qmnce-tree,  also, 
does  not  bear  as  usual. 

I  met  the  director  in  the 
banlc  the  other  day. 

Aeneas  canied  his  father 
on  his  shoulders  out  of  Troy. 

The  Jews  are  mostly  in 
business. 

Our  voyage  was  not  -without 
danger;  the  storm  drove  our 
ship  near  the  coast. 

Demosthenes  was  very 
young  when  he  first  appeared 
in  public. 

Socrates  drank  the  poisoned 
cup. 

The  proverb  says :  Too 
many  cooks  spoil  the  broth. 

HI  weeds  grow  apace. 
The  rain  has  spoiled  the 
roads. 


28 


MATERLAX    FOS    CONVEBSATION. 


71  (continued). 


^cr  (Bpankv  iJcrgigt  nidjt 
ldd)t  eine  ^eleibigung. 

^cr  D^cfrut  ticrgag,  feme 
glinte  3U  rctnigen. 

S)cr  (partner  \)at  bcrgcffcn 
tncinc  ^f(an3en  gu  bcgicjcn.  — 
X)ie  ^flanje. 

-  ^reufeen  tictlor  burrf)  'bcn 
^ncbcn^Dcrtrag  t»on  Siilfit  bci* 
nal)e  bie  §dlfte  feincr  (Staatcn. 

'  §err  @tabe  t)at  feine  ^ud)* 
^alterftelle  ticrlorcn. 

^er  Slrjt  ift  urn  ^cmf)arb 
be[orgt,tt)eit  er  gUfrf^neH  mdd^ji. 

!^ie  (Scf)Iarf)t  ift  getDonncn, 
bie  gcinbe  toci^cn  oiif  qUcu 
(2etten;  ba0  Centrum  toi^  ju^ 
erft.  —  !4^'ie  (geite. 

5)ie  5lrbeiter  finb  auf  ber 
Sicfe  uttb  tticnbcn  $eu. 

-  5)a^  ^ublifum  toanbtc  bcm 
9?cbner  ben  dlMm  unb  uerlieg 
ben  Saal. 

\\m  bie  ©otter  311  t)crfo!)ncn, 
lunrf  ^^otljrmte^  fcincn  9iiug 
iii^  ^JO^ccr. 

Sir  l^abcn  ha^  ©cu  gcttios 
Qcti;  c§  ttiicgt  ac^t^ig  ^^funb. 

5^ie  ^inber  ^inb  ouf  ber  33e* 
ranba  unb  tomb  en  ^ran5e; 
l^eute  friil)  ^abcn  fie  ©uirlanben 
gcttiunbcn,  urn  bie  ^apelle  gu 
fd)miicfen.  —  ^cr  ^rans;  ^^^ 
©uirlanbc. 

-  3^^^i  (Sd)tangen  —  fo  gel^t 
bie  (Sage  —  toonbcn  fic^  urn 
l^aofoott  u^b  feine  ^oljne.  — 
2)ie  8c^laugc;  ber  l^eib. 


The  Spaniard  does  not  easi- 
ly forget  an  offense. 

The  reci-uit  forgot  to  clean 
his  gun, 

liie  gardener  has  forgotten 
to  water  my  plants. 

Prussia  lost,  through  the 
treaty  of  peace  of  Tilsit,  al- 
most one-haK  of  her  provinces. 

Mr.  Stade  has  lost  his  pos- 
ition as  book-keeper. 

The  physician  is  anxious 
about  Bernhard  because  he  is 
groA^ing  too  fast. 

The  battle  is  won,  the  enemy 
is  yielding  on  all  sides;  the 
centre  gave  way  first 

The  laborers  are  in  the 
meadow,  turning  hay. 

The  audience  tui-ned  their 
back  on  the  orator,  and  left 
thehaH 

In  order  to  reconcile  the 
Gods,  Polycrates  threw  his 
ring  into  the  sea. 

We  have  weighed  the  hay; 
it  weighs  eighty  pounds. 

The  children  are  on  the 
veranda,  making  wreaths;  they 
made  garlands  this  morning 
to  decorate  the  chapeL 


Two  serpents,  according  to 
the  mj-th,  wound  themselves 
around  Laocoon  and  Lis  sous. 


MATERIAL   FOR   CONVERSATION. 


29 


(5^riftu§  "  fagtc  am  ^reu^: 
„S3ater,  bergieb  il}ncn,  benn  jic 
tniffcn  md)t  H)a^3  fie  t^un."  — 

„^d)  mcifi^  bag  t(^  ntd)tg 
h?eiB,"  ift  em  Slu^fpru^  be§ 
©ofrate^. 

Sir  finb  ntc^t  burd)  ben  SKatb 
gegatigett,  meit  l»ir  bett  2Beg 
nid)t  tmi^icn. 

ifoie  geinbe  iDcrbcn  burd)  utt= 
fer  ^^a(  jie'^cn. 

^ao)  ^efiegung  bcr  ©ricdjcn 
3og  3l(ejanber  gegen  bte  ^erfer. 
—  ^er  ®riedj)e. 

^ie  55o(ter  ift  unmoralifi^, 
iDeil  fie  ii)re  Dpfcr  oft  gttiinot 
gegen  i()r  ©etDiffcn  gu  rcbcn.  — 
^a^  Dpfcr. 

§err  a)2cn!e  ^at  fciuen  (So^tt 

Sen. 


Ckrist  said  on  tlio  cross: 
"Father,  forjjive  them,  for 
they  know  not  what  they  do.'* 

"I  know  that  I  know  noth- 
ing," is  a  saying  of  Socrates. 

"We  did  not  go  through  the 
woods  because  we  did  not 
know  the  way. 

The  enemy  will  march 
through  our  valley. 

After  conquering  the  Greeks, 
Alexander  inarched  against 
the  Persians. 

The  rack  is  immoral  be- 
cause it  often  makes  its  victims 
speak  contrary  to  their  con- 
science. 

Mr.  Menke  has  compelled 
his  son  to  become  a  merchant. 


73. 


!^ie  ^ontgin  tt)irb  morgen 
aBrcifctt. 

!Der  ^ron|)rin;5  teif!c  Dor^ 
geftcrn  ton  Berlin  ah  unb  lorn 
§eute  morgen  in  ?Dlailanb  an. 

SD^orgcn  gcbcn!en  tnir  nad^ 
^uropa  abjure  if  en;  mein  ^rn* 
ber  ift  fc^on  abgcrcift. 
-  Sir  l^aben  gran  9?ott)  anf=* 
Qcforbert  l^eute  abenb  mit  un§ 
^n  fingen;  fie  l^at  e^  jeboc^  ab* 
gcf(l)(agen. 

2])er  ^taifer  Bttnot  hen  (Som^ 
mer  in  t)erfd)iebenen  4Dabern 
ga.  —  'La^  ^ab. 


The  queen  will  leave  to- 
morrow. 

The  crown-prince  left  Ber- 
lin the  day  before  yesterday, 
and  arrived  at  Milan  this 
morning. 

We  intend  leaving  for  Eur- 
ope to-morrow;  my  brother 
has  left  already. 

We  asked  IVIrs.  Both  to  sing 
with  us  to-night,  but  she  has 
declined. 

The  emperor  spends  the 
summer  at  different  watering 
places. 


30 


MATERIAL  FOR   CONVEBSATIOU: 


5D^etnc  (Sltem  gebcnfen  ben 
3iiiter  in  ^encbig  3U3Ubringen. 

SKir  ^abeti  ^erm  unb  gran 
\^citcrer  fiir  l^ciite  abenb  einge* 
tobcn,  itnb  fie  ^abeu  gugcj'agt. 

<Sir  So^n  granfltn  f am  aitf 
fcincr  9?eife  nac^  htm  9^orbpol 
urn.  —  3>er  $oI. 

^a-S  ^onsert  I)at  Ijcute  ftatt^ 
gefunben. 

3c^  t)offe,  in  brei  !i:agcn  gn^ 
riicf ^ttfommen.  —  '^cv  Sag. 
-  ©er  (^ri(^t^I)of  fjat  unfcren 
Hgcnten  freigefprodjen.  —  X)er 
Slgent. 

X)er  ^riefbote  ift  Dor  gc{)n 
3JJimttcn  Dor  unfercnt  ^aufe 
Dorbeigcfommcn;  er  lommi  in 
einer  (gtunbe  toieber  tiorbet.  — 
2)ie  SDIinute. 

-3c^  fa^  ba6  ^ncggf(f)iff,  aU 
cS  eben  in  ben  §afen  einlicf. 

§eute  frii^  l^aben  h)ir  bie 
55refd)e  in  ber  Tlamx  gc[c^cn, 
too  bie  jtmppen  be^  ^o'nig^  in 
9^oni  cinbrangcn. 

SDcr  patient  fc^Ucf  um  Dier 
H^r  eitt  unb  toai^te  crft  um 
ge^n  U^r  loieber  ouf.  ^r  jic^t 
ten  ^affec  bem  Zt^ct  Uor ;  ber 
2:t)ec  tegt  feine  D^erDen  ;;n  fe^r 
•iif.  —  "^v  3:f)ee;  ber  9ierD. 

5)cr  general  3teinad)  ift  eben 
^ier  tjorbeigcritten. 

gefunben,  ober  bie  5Iu^fagen 
ilimmen  nici)t  uicrctn.  —  i)ie 
Slu^^fagc. 

SDie  S3u(!ane  toctfcn  Scuja 
attS.  —  ^tx  ^viilan. 


My  parents  intend  to  spend 
the  winter  at  Venice. 

We  inyited  Mr.  and  Mrs. 
Leiterer  for  to-night,  and  they 
have  accepted. 

Sir  John  FranMin  perished 
on  his  voyage  to  tlie  North 
Pole. 

The  concert  took  jDlace  to- 
day. 

I  hope  to  come  back  in  three 
days. 

The  court  has  acquitted  our 
agent 

The  postman  passed  by  our 
house  ten  minutes  ago;  he 
will  pass  again  in  an  hour. 


I  saw  the  man  of  war  when 
it  was  just  enteiing  the  harbor. 

"We  saw  this  morning  the 
breach  in  the  waU  where  the 
troops  of  the  king  entered 
Eome. 

The  patient  fell  asleep  at 
four  o'clock,  and  did  not  awake 
tmtil  ten.  He  prefers  coffee 
to  tea;  tea  excites  his  nerves 
too  much. 

General  Steinach  has  just 
passed  here  on  horseback. 

The  examination  of  wit- 
nesses has  token  place,  but 
their  testimonies  do  not  agree. 

Volcanoes  throw  out  lava. 


MATERIAL   FOU   CONVERSATION. 


31 


-    St)!urc|  f^afftc  bie  Oorb=  unb  Lycurgus    abolished    gold 

(Stlbermiin^en     aB.     —     ®ie  and  silver  coinage. 

Unfer   ^ireftor    tft    gcnefen  Our  director  has  recovered 

unb  I)at  fcine  Slrbeit  iDiebcr  auf^  and  resumed  his  work. 
,  gcnommen. 

Sir  finb  geftern  au^gcsogen.  We  moved  yesterday. 


76, 


SOZettt  SSater  l^at  bcfd)(o[fen 
fetn  §au§  ju  dcrfaufcn. 

(Sofrate^  ^at  9}?aBiguttt3  in 
alien  3)tngeti  em^fo^'lcn.  — 
^a^  S:)ing. 

M  tft  fo  Mt  r)ier  in  mi^a/' 
f(i)reibt  mein  greunb,  ,,ba6  alle 
(SttroncnbUttcn  crfroren  jinb.^' 

§crr  33eit  f)at  ^eute  morgen 
fetne  ^ilia  Ucrtauft. 

"^k  3^cpe)dje  Dom  trieg^^ 
fcf)aup(a^  lautete:  „X)cv  @ieg 
tft  unfeiv  bie  geinbe  finb  jets 

^er  9^ic^ter  fagte  ^um  ^Ibtjo* 
faten:  „3rf)  tan  nic^t  um^in 
3t)re  9^ebe  ju  mipifligcn.'^  — 
'^tv  mt)oht. 

l^ut^er  ^at  feine  ^el)re  nie 
tnibcrrufctt. 

1.  3^cr  ^apft  ^at  bem  taifer 
bereit§  geantwortet. 


My  father  has  decided  to 
sell  his  house. 

Socrates  recommended  mo- 
deration in  all  things. 

"  It  is  so  cold  here  in  Nice," 
writes  my  friend,  "that  all 
lemon-blossoms  are  frozen." 

Mr.  Veit  sold  his  villa  this 
morning. 

The  dispatch  from  the 
theatre  of  war  ran :  Victory  is 
ours;  the  enemy  are  scattered. 

The  judge  said  to  the 
lawyer:  "I  cannot  help  dis- 
approving of  your  speech." 

Luther  never  revoked  his 
doctrine. 

The  pope  has  already  an- 
swered the  emperor. 


78. 


©err  ^rciunUc^  ift  bon  ^om 
na(|  S!JJund)en  ubergefiebelt. 

t^cv  T)ampfer  „^(i)\ikv"  ift 
untergegangen. 


Mr.  Braunlich  has  moved 
from  Rome  to  Munich. 

The  steamer  "  Schiller  "  has 
gone  down. 


MATERIAL   FOR   CONVERSATION. 


!4)er  9?tng  luar  gu  Hein;  e5 
tnar  unmocjlid)  ta^  i2ei(  (^in) 
burd[i5u^,tet)cn. 

©ie  geinbe  burt^^ogcn  unfer 
!^anb  nad)  alien  S^idjtungcn;  em 
^pion  l)atte  il)nen  unfere  '^(dne 
Winter  brac^t.  —  '^k  iRid)tung; 
bcr  ^lan. 

$err  ^ed)ftein  !^at  (Strafe 
;ial)[cn  miiffen,  mil  cr  cm  £mb 
ubcrftt^rcn  l)aL 

3Bir  jinb  auf  cinem  glo§ 
iibergefabrcn.  —  ^a$  ^[o% 

'4Der  ^apitan  Goo!  umfdjifftc 
bie  (vrbe  Dreimat. 

!Der  Drf an  ri§  ^dume  unb 
gdufcr  urn. 


The  ring  was  too  small;  it 
was  inijDossible  to  puU  the 
rope  through  it. 

The  enemy  marched  tkrougli 
our  country  in  all  directions; 
a  spy  had  informed  them  of 
our  plans. 

Mr.  Bechstein  has  had  to 
pay  a  fine  because  he  ran  over 
a  child- 

We  crossed  on  a  raft 

Captain   Cook   sailed    three 
times  around  the  world. 

The  hurricane  tore  down 
trees  and  houses. 


Additional  Examples  to  §  78. 


T)k  ^oUjci  l)at  \>a^  §au§  un^ 
fere^  9cad)bard  t)ou  obea  bi^ 
unten  burr^fut^t. 

SO^eine  greunbe  l)aben  (Ba'dj^ 
fen  unb  Satern  3U  gu^e  hnx^i 
rcijl. 

§onanb  ift  t»on  tiielcn  ^ana^ 
Icn  bur(^fi))nttten.  —  5^er 
^anal. 

(5olumbu^  but^f^ifftc  iiu 
crft  hen  Ocean. 

SBiv  finb  oon  ber  Unfc^ulb 
beg  ^afi'ierer^  iiberjcugt. 

33o6  l)atben§onierubcrjc^t. 

$eute  frit()  ):)at  ung  unfer 
gii^rer  bie  (gtelle  am  9il)ein  ge= 
getflt,  IDO  9?apo(eon  nad)  ber 
@d)(ad)tbeiVeip3ic^  iibcrgcfcfet  ift. 

"^k  Corner  iibcrtrttfctt  alle 
9f^ationen  an  Sapfcrfeit.  —  'A^k 
5iation. 


The  poHce  have  searched 
the  house  of  our  neighbor 
from  top  to  bottom. 

My  friends  traveled  on  foot 
through  Saxony  and  Bavaria. 

Holland  is  intersected  by 
many  canals. 

Columbus  first  crossed  the 
ocean. 

We  are  convinced  of  the 
cashier's  innocence. 

Yoss  translated  Homer. 

Our  guide  this  morning 
showed  us  the  place  on  the 
Rhine  where  Napoleon  crossed 
after  the  battle  of  Leipsic. 

The  Komans  surpassed  all 
nations  in  braverv. 


MATEELiL   FOR    CONVERSAllOX. 


33 


^ie  9^eitcrct  be6  geinbe^  t)er== 
fud)te,  un^  gu  umge^cn. 

t)cv  ^clxnt  ttcv^a^r  feinen 
@abc(  umju]rf)nallen. 

®cr  giirft  l)atte  i^eber  Xvup^ 
^en  nod)  ®elb  genuQ,  ben  Hr ieg 
jtt  itntctnc^mcn. 

511^  lr>ir  ba^  SBracf  erreid)ten, 
tt)ar  e^  eben  im  ^tQvi\\  untev* 
3tti'inten. 


The  cavalry  of  the  enemy 
tried  to  outflank  us. 

The  recruit  forgot  to  buckle 
on  his  sword. 

The  prince  had  neither 
troops  nor  money  enough  to 
untei^take  the  war. 

When  we  came  np  to  the 
wreck,  it  was  just  on  the  jDoint 
of  going  down. 


79, 


(I^irtftn^  fagte  am  ^reu^c: 
„(^^  ift  UoIIBrnrl)t." 

:^er  :^ilbl)auer  mmcv  \)at 
feinen  *il3rometl)en^  tjollcnbct. 

!Dcr  Dberft  ftcl)t  Dor  bem 
^nei3§gerid)t,  iDeil  cr  bie  ^e^ 
fel)(e  be^  ©cneral^  nidjt  tiofls 
jogcn  Ijat.  —  S}a^  ©eri^t. 


Christ  said  on  the  cross: 
"It  is  finished." 

Madler,  the  sculptor,  has 
finished  his  Prometheus. 

The  colonel  is  to  he  tried 
by  courtmartial  because  he  has 
not  executed  the  orders  of  the 
general. 


80. 


SDie  ^offnnng  ift  ttugcttfcj. 
@panien  ift  etnftmal^  fcljr 
retc^  nnb  mot^tig  geiDefen* 


Hope  is  deceitful 
Spain   was  very  rich 
powerful  at  one  time. 


und 


81, 


T)a§  Srbtebcn,  fagt  bcr  ^cU 
tun(;Sberid)t,  tlang  \mc  ferner 

Qd)  l)abe  blancg  papier  nnb 
rote  3:tnte  getanft. 

$err  ^JJand)  ^at  eine  ?abnng 
tt)et|ctt  23larmor^  bei  nnfcrer 
girma  beftellt.  —  T)er  OJiarmor. 

2J?aria®tnart  fc^rieb  i^rXef= 
tament  mit  eignct  §anb  nieber. 


The  earthquake,  says  the 
newspaper  account,  sounded 
like  distant  thunder. 

I  have  bought  blue  paper 
and  red  ink. 

Mr.  Bauch  has  ordered  a 
cargo  of  white  marble  from 
our  firm. 

Mary  Stuart  wrote  her  will 
with  her  own  hand. 


34 


MATERL\L   FOR   CONVERSATION. 


„Der  ^aifer/  fc^rcibt  mein 
Sreunb,  „[it  ein  ID'^ann  Don 
i)ol}cm  2Sud)^,  brcitcn  ^djuU 
teru  uitb  c^cfunbcr  ^e)id)t^farbe. 

3Sir  brauc^cn  f(i)mar5Ctt 
(Sammt  unb  grunc  ®eibe  fiir 
unfern  Alitor. 

X){e  Sc^otten  f)aben  gett)of)n* 
lic^  blauc  ^ugeu  unb  blonbc 
.^aare.  —  ®er  ©c^otte;  ba^ 

"iProfeffor  (Sta^t  l)at  fcitte 
(Satnmlung  beutfc^cr  ^^Itertii* 
Tuer  unferem  SJiufeum  dermac^t. 

!Da^  5llpftabet  bcftef)t  au^ 
groBcn  unb  flcincn  ^ud)ftaben. 
—  1>r  :Sud)ftabe. 

§err  3titbcr  t)at  cjute  2^inte, 
blauc,  rote  wxh  fc^war^c. 

^r  ©drtncr  Qdkim  t)at  fe()r 
fettene  ^flanjen,  frembc  unb 
einl)eimii'ct)e. 


"The  emperor,"  my  friend 
wiites,  "  is  a  man  tall  in  stat- 
ure, with  broad  shoulders,  and 
a  healthy  complexion." 

"We  need  black  velvet  and 
gi'een  silk  for  our  altar. 

The  Scotch  usually  have 
blue  eves  and  fair  hair. 


Professor  Stahl  bequeath- 
ed his  collection  of  German 
antiquities  to  our  museum. 

The  alphabet  consists  of  cap- 
itals and  small  lettei-s. 

IMr.  Stiiber  has  good  ink, 
blue,  red,  and  black. 

Gleim,  tlie  gardener,  has 
very  rare  plants,  foreign  and 
indigenous. 


82—83, 


dm  fran55fifd)cr  .^upfcrfte^ 
ti)er  ()at  ben  ^rei^  gcmonnen. 

!Der  ^tvx  im  grauen  ^od 
\mv  ber  fran,^dfifc^c3)ialer  ^arr. 

—  Der  ^orf. 

!Dcr  "^^rei^  beS  @tcc;er§  im 
SKettlauf  tft  eine  gotbenc  Ul)r. 

—  Der  I'auf. 
!Da^  ganje  Sanb  fetert  bie 


goibenc  ©odijett  be^  ^aifere. 

©err  9?et(^  beft^t  ein  fe^r 
fd)onc8  l'anbl)au^  am  9i()ctn. 

5Bir  njcrbcn  morgen  ba^  neuc 
SJiujeum  befuc^en. 


A  French  engraver  has  won 
the  piize. 

The  gentleman  with  the  gi'ay 
coat  was  the  French  painter 
Karr. 

The  prize  of  the  winner  in 
the  race  is  a  gold  watch. 

The  whole  country  is  cele- 
brating the  golden  wedding 
of  the  emperor. 

]\Ir.  Reich  possesses  a  very 
beautiful  villa  on  the  Rhine. 

We  shaU  \isit  the  new 
museum  to-morrow. 


MATERIAL  FOR   CONVERSATION. 


85 


5lUe  ^reibc^eiiiinungen  in  ber 
5lu^ftellung  (inb  bte  5lrbcit  eine^ 
italient|d)cn  ^linftler^.  —  :Die 
3eid)nung. 

granffurt  "wax  frit{)er  bte 
§auptftabt  be^  beutfct)cn  Wid)^. 

:Dte  ^iifte  be^  ^bmtral^  ift 
t)on  einem  preugifc^cn  ^ilb^ 
Ifjauen 

!Dte  Orangen  fommen  au§ 
bcm  fonntgctt  Hubert,  —  X)k 
Drange. 

^te  5lrbetter  ^aben  ^eute 
einen  fd)dncn  5lpoUo  au^gegra^ 
ben, 

^ir  ^aben  nculic^  \)cn  attcn 
^empel  ber  SJ^incroa  bcfud^t. 

T)tv  5Ird[)aoIog  Dr.  (^(^affer 
Ifat  in  ^(cinaficn  bic  ^^uinen 
eincr  aiten  ^tabt  entbecft  — 
X)k  9?uine. 

@oetI}eei  gauft  tft  bie  trone 
ber  beutfc^en  i^itteratur. 

!Dte  nenctt  Slu^grabnngcn  in 
^ompeji  finb  ber  ©egenftanb 
einer  5lb^anblnng  t)on  i)r.  gelb* 
mann. 

§crr  'tRolji  giebt  eine  5Iu§* 
ma^t  ber  giicii)ifd)cn  ^taffiter 
I)eran§. 

T)ie  "iPalmen  n)acf)fen  in  htn 
l)eij5cn  !^anbern.  —  !I)ie  ^a(me» 


AH  pencil-drawings  at  the 
exhibition  are  the  work  of  an 
Italian  artist. 

Frankfort  was  formerly  the 
capital  of  the  German  empire. 

The  bust  of  the  admiral  is 
by  a  Prussian  sculptor. 

Oranges  come  from  the 
sunny  south. 

The  laborers  excavated  a 
fine  Apollo  to-day. 


visited     the     ancient 
of  Minerva  the  other 


We 

temple 
day. 

Dr.  Schaffer,  the  archaeo- 
logist, discovered  the  ruins  of 
an  ancient  city  in  Asia  Minor. 

Goethe's  Faust  is  the  crown 
of  German  Hterature. 

The  new  excavations  at 
Pompeii  are  the  subject  of  a 
treatise  by  Dr.  Feldmann. 

Mr.  Rohl  is  publishing  a 
selection  of  the  Greek  classics. 

Palm-trees  grow  in  hot 
countries. 


82,  1. 


Wlcxn  attct  gau§(e^rer,  Dr. 
grennb,  ift  unfer  ©aft. 

Unfcr  nencr  Drganift  inirb 
morgcn  bie  gro^e  £)rge(  fpic(ctu 


My  old  tutor.  Dr.  Freund, 
is  our  guest. 

Our  new  organist  will  play 
the  large  organ  to-morrow. 


36 


MATERIAL   FOR   CONVERSATION. 


§err  <Staubc  ^t  fein  grogcS 
gernro^r  unferer  (Stemroarte 
Dermact)t. 

^^err  (Sctbcl  l)at  fcinc  ncuc 
3>tUa  am  See  be^^ogen. 

X)cx  ©drtner  dl'mnc  ^at  t)cutc 
frill)  alle  fcine  lueijen  O^ofcu 
Dcrfauft.  —  'I)k  9?o)e. 


IVIr.  Staude  has  bequeathed 
his  large  telescope  to  our  ob- 
ser^-atory. 

]\Ir.  Seidel  has  moTed  into 
his  new  ^*iUa  on  the  lake. 

Rinne,  the  gardener,  sold 
all  his  white  roses  this  mom- 


83,  1, 


liefer  rote  ^(eiftift  ift  gu 
l)art,  jener  blaue  ift  gu  weid); 
id)  nel)me  biefen  |d)tDar5Ctt. 

^iefe^  ineiBC  vgau^  gel)t)rt 
bem  "ipfarrer,  iene^3  griinc  bcm 
<Sd)ulIc{)rer» 

S^ieje  jutigctt  8olbaten  ge^en 
in-^  gclb,  jene  altcn  blciben  in 
(^arnifon. 

^eber  gutc  53iirger  ift  itber 
ha^  3(ttentat  auf  t>a^  !^ebcn  bc^ 
•prdfibenten  entruftet. 


This  red  pencil  is  too  hard, 
that  blue  one  is  too  soft;  I  will 
take  this  blaek  one. 

This  white  house  belongs  to 
the  pai-son;  that  green  one, 
to  the  school-teacher. 

These  young  soldiers  go  to 
the  field,  those  old  ones  re- 
main in  gan-ison. 

Ever^"  good  citizen  is  in- 
dignant at  the  attemj)t  on  the 
life  of  the  president 


84. 


Ittifere  (Seereife  h)ar  nid)t  ge* 
fabric^;  ein  )d)n)immcnbcr  (Si^* 
berg  bcbrobte  unfer  3c^iff. 

(Bd^iikx^  „!^ieb  uon  ber  ©locf  c" 
ift  cin  t)ie(bett)UTibertc§  @ebid)t. 
—  SDae  ieieb. 


Our  voyage  was  not  with- 
out danger;  a  floating  iceberg 
threatened  our  ship. 

Schiller's  "  Song  of  the  BeU  " 
is  a  much  admired  poem. 


85. 


T'k  4riftlid)e  Dtcligion  (cl)rt, 
ha^  ^ol)C  unb  9liebrigc,  9leid}C 
unb  3lrmc  gleid)  finb  Dor  @ott. 

-53ei  htn  (Sgljjptem  l^crrfc^te 
ber  (^^ebraiid),  bie  2^otctt  cinju* 
balfamieren.  —  "^cx  (Jg^pter. 


The  Christian  Religion 
teaches  that  high  and  low,  rich 
and  poor,  are  alike  before  God. 

The  custom  of  embalming 
the  dead  prevailed  among  the 
Eg^^tians. 


MATERIAL   FOR   CONVERSATION. 


37 


1.  Qxn  iBebtcntct  bed  ©ra^ 
fen  ^at  tie  (vmlabung  fjcbrac^t. 

3ot)ann  {)at  :^e|d)(iftti)utig 
(^efunben;  er  ii't  ber  ^ebientc 
bed  §auptmannd. 

!Der  @e(e^rte,  ber  'Dtcl)ter 
unb  ber  ^btlofopli  ikWu  bie 
9^u!)e. 

fiumbolbt  toav  eitt  ®e(e^rtcr 
faft  alten  ©ebtetett  ber  9k== 
tumnffenfd)aft.  —  T)a^  ©ebtet. 
Unfcr  ^onful  ^t  und  l)or 
(^icilien  gemarnt,  ineil  9?cifcnbc, 
iDie  er  fagt,  nid)t  fid]icr  t)or  9^du* 
bern  finb,  —  T)er  D^itubcr. 

2.  ©in  !l)cutf(^er  l)at  bie 
^afcf)enul)r  crfunben, 

SJ^eine  9?cifec^efal)rtett  iDaren 
!Deutfd)c  unb  Jfocinen.  —  ©er 
©dne. 

^rofeffor  (Sta^t  betttett  fein 
letted  ^ud) :  „X)k  ©eutf d|cn  in 
5luftra(ten." 

3.  ©ad  S^onc,  bad  23Sa^re 
unb  ha^  (SJutc  finb  bie  brei 
^beale  ber  9)Zenfd)f)eit.  —  ©ad 
3beaL 

©ie  .^ritiler  fagen  Dom  ^uc^c 
h^^  '^rof  cfford  jogqe,  bag  ed  t^ict 
9leucg  unb  ScrtublleS  ent()d(t 


A  servant  of  the  count  has 
brought  the  invitation. 

John  has  found  employ- 
ment; he  i3  the  servant  of  the 
captain. 

The  scholar,  the  poet,  and 
the  philosopher  like  quiet. 

Humboldt  was  learned  in  al- 
most every  branch  of  natural 
science. 

Our  con'^ul  has  warned  us 
against  Sicily  because  travel- 
ers, as  he  says,  are  not  safe 
from  robbers. 

A  German  invented  the 
watch. 

My  fellow  -  travelers  were 
Germans  and  Danes. 

Professor  Stahl  entitles  his 
last  book:  "The  Germans  in 
Australia." 

The  beautiful,  the  true,  and 
the  good  are  the  three  ideals 
of  mankind. 

The  critics  say  of  Professor 
Fogge's  book  that  it  contains 
much  that  is  new  and  valuable. 


8G, 

SO^etnc  (SItern  ^bcn  ganj 
©eutfd)(anb  bereift. 

©ie  ^oti;^ei  l)at  gonj  bonbon 
nac^  \>m  ^crbrectiern  burc^fud^t. 


i^rau  ^aucr  fpridjt  bie  ^cr^ 
liner  aj^unbart. 


1. 

My  parents  have  traveled 
through  the  whole  of  Germany. 

The  police  have  searched 
all  London  for  the  criminals. 


87,  1. 


Mrs.  Bauer  speaks  the  dialect 
of  Berlin. 


38 


MATERIAL   FOR    CONVERSATION. 


!Die9?umbcri3crSpic(maarett        The    Numberg    toys    are 
finb  bcrii^mt.  —  iDie  SBaare.       famous. 


88,  1. 


'Ajk  ^dutnc  t?on  dalifornictt 
fmb  fe^r  I)0(^  unb  il}re  ©tammc 
t)on  macl)ttgcm  llmfancje.  — 
'^cv  <Stamm;  ber  Umfanc;, 

5^ie  ^d)iDet5  ^at  I)o§e  Serge 
unb  tiefe  vgeen. 


The  trees  of  California  are 
very  high,  and  theu'  stems  of 
an  immense  circumference. 

Switzerland  has  high  moun- 
tains and  deep  lakes. 


89. 


'^k  ^^cter§!ird^e  in  9?0Ttt  ift 
ein  fd)oncrcr  iBau  aU  bic  dJlav^ 
cu^firc^e  in  33enebig. 

Sir  t)aben  unfer  §au«  in  bcr 
(Btaht  t)cr!auft  unb  ein  bcquc== 
mcrcS  in  ber  33orftabt  bejogen. 

&c'6\vL^  tuar  bcr  reid)flc  SOlann 
bc5  Hltcrtum^?.  —  ^a5  ^lltcr:^ 
turn. 

S^ae  ^lima  bon  (Siibfpanicn 
ift  ba^  {)ei^cflc  in  (Suropa. 

!Demoftf)enc6  toav  bcr  be* 
riibmtcflc  gricd)ifd)e  9?ebner. 

^rofcj'for  Diicbcl  tpirb  iiber 
bie  neucflcn  (Jntbecfungen  in 
ber  (Il)emie  Icfcn. 

©ute  (Sd)iDimmer  fuc^en  ini* 
ntcr  bie  tiefflcn  (Steden.  —  S^ie 
<Ste((e. 

SD^ein  i^Tcunb  in  5lt^en 
fd^reibt,  bie  \?uft  fci  bort  flarcr 
unb  burd)i'id)tigcr,  unb  bcr  §im* 
met  t)on  einein  reincrcn  unb 
ticfcrcn  <^(att  aU  bcl  un^  gu 
©aufe. 


Si  Peter's  at  Borne  is  a  finer 
structure  than  St.  Mark's  at 
Yenice. 

We  have  sold  our  house  in 
the  city  and  moved  into  a 
more  convenient  one  in  the 
suburbs. 

Croesus  was  the  richest  man 
of  antiquity. 

The  climate  of  southern 
Spain  is  the  hottest  in  Eur- 
ope. 

Demosthenes  was  the  most 
celebrated  Greek  orator. 

Professor  Eiedel  vnR  lecturfe 
on  the  latest  discoveries  ir 
chemistry. 

Good  swimmers  always  seek 
the  deepest  places. 

My  friend  in  Athens  writes 
that  the  air  is  clearer  and  more 
transparent  there,  and  the  sky 
of  a  purer  and  deeper  blue 
than  mth  us  at  home. 


MATERIAL   FOR    COITVERSATION. 


Additional  examj)les  to  §  89. 


Unfre  ncue  ^o^nung  ift  0C^ 
raumtQcr  unb  in  jcber  ginfic^t 
ancjenet)mer  al^  bie  altc;  fonj't 
n)ol)nten  n)ir  in  ber  gcraufd)^ 
Dollftctt  ©trage,  jc^t  iu  bcr 
rul)tfjftctt. 

4)ie  rctd)ftett  Seutc  ftnb  utc()t 
tmmer  bie  freigebigjictt. 

^ie  ^cttiire  guter  iBii^er  ift 
gkic^  einer  Unter^altung  mit 
ben  au§ge3eid^netftcit  SJ^anncrn 
ber  iBergangen^eit  —  ®cr 
3)^ann, 

Unfcr  ^aftor  I)  at  bie  Blutig^ 
fictt  (^cfjlact)ten  bc^  ^ricge^  mit^ 
gemadjt*  —  ®te  (Sdjla^t ;  bcr 


!^ante§  ©ottlit^e  tomobie  ift 
bie  er^abenfle  4)id)tung  bcr 
ltalienifd)en  l^itteratnr*  —  S)ie 
^'omobie* 

^eter  bcr  ®ro^e  wav  bcr  ge^ 
bilbetftc  9iuffe  fcincr  ^dt 


Our  new  lodging  is  more 
roomy,  and  in  every  respect 
more  pleasant  than  the  old 
one ;  "we  formerly  lived  in  the 
noisiest  street,  "we  now  live  in 
the  quietest. 

The  richest  people  are  not 
always  the  most  HberaL 

The  reading  of  good  books 
is  like  a  conversation  with  the 
most  distinguished  men  gf  the 
past 

Our  pastor  took  part  in  the 
bloodiest  battles  of  the  war. 


Dante's  Divine  Comedy  is 
the  most  subhme  poem  of 
ItaHan  literature. 

Peter  the  Great  was  the 
most  accompHshed  Kussian  of 
his  time. 


90, 


!Da§  gcner  brac^  gerabe  au^3, 
qU  ber  SBinb  am  Ijcfttgftcn  tt»ar. 

Sir  ftnb  nm.  rcid)ftcn,  inenn 
mir  cm  3ufriebenftett  finb» 


The  fire  broke  out  just  as 
the  wind  was  most  violent. 

We  are  richest  when  we  aro 
most  contented. 


91. 


®oetT)e  fc^ien  grogct  aU  er 
\oav;  (Sd)itlcr  n)ar  grower  a($  cr 
fd)icn. 

'a:)cx  2'6x\)c  ift  ftar!er  aU  ber 


Goethe  seemed  taller  than 
he  was;  Schiller  was  taUer 
than  he  seemed. 

The  lion  is  stronger  than 
the  ti«Ter. 


40 


MATERIAL   FOR   CONVERSATION. 


!Der  ^blcr  tft  ber  ftiirffte  5Bo^ 

9}?em  3iiittitcr  ift  baS  f  oltefte 
int  §aufc,  abcr  c^  ^at  bie  lDei= 
tcfte  ^u^fid)t. 

!^crD3Zontb(anc  ift  ber  l)bc^fte 
4Berg  ber  5llpcn. 

(Sine  gerabe  IL^inte  ift  ber  fur* 
gefte  SScc^  groifdjen  ^xod  ^un!* 
ten,  —  S^er  $untt. 

92. 

S)a^  (Spricf)tt)ort  fagt:  „(iin 
(gpertinn  in  ber  .^anb  ift  Bcffcr 
c.l^  cine  Stanlic  auf  bem  !l)ac^e." 

!Der  l&cflc  ^affee  fomtnt  au^ 
5lrabien» 

Unfere  ^dngebritde  ift  l^ojcr 
al^3  ber  S^om. 


The  eagle  is  the  strongest 
of  birds. 

My  room  is  the  coldest  in 
the  house,  but  it  has  the  most 
extensive  ^-iew. 

Mont  Blanc  is  the  highest 
moimtain  of  the  AIjds. 

A  straight  line  is  the  shortest 
distance  between  two  points. 


The  proverb  says  —  A  bird 
in  the  hand  is  worth  two  in 
the  bush. 


"^It  greit)eit  ift  ba§  ^B^fle 
©ut  einer  Elation. 

^^apoleon  toax  ber  grSpc 
5Ve(bI)crr  beS  3fit)5^^itnbert5,  — 
5)a§  3:af)rr)unbert. 

cgerr  ©ierfen  ift  in  bie  ^taht 
Oe^ogen,  um  feincn  ^inbem 
nd^cr  gu  fcin. 

^ie  SBafferleitung  toirb  erft 
no^ficS  3^al)r  fertig  ipcr^cn. 

ll^ie  ^agcr  fcljoffen  mc^rcrc 
.^afen  itnb  ^anind)cn.  —  5)er 
Sciger;  ber  §afe. 

1.  i)it  mcificn  ©tatuen  ber 
5ln$fteIIung  finb  tiortrefflic^. 


The  best  coffee  comes  from 
Arabia. 

Our  suspension  bridge  is 
higher  than  tlie  dome. 

Liberty  is  the  highest  good 
of  a  nation. 

Napoleon  was  the  greatest 
general  of  the  century. 

Mr.  Giei'sen  has  moved  into 
the  city,  in  order  to  be  nearer 
to  his  children. 

The  aqueduct  will  not  be 
ready  before  next  year. 

The  hunters  shot  several 
hares  and  rabbits. 

Most  of  the  statues  of  the 
exhibition  are  excellent. 


93. 


^;e  ougctc  SJJaucr  beS  ©c* 
fanpniffe^  ift  brci^ig  guJ5  Ijod}, 
hk  innttt  s^angig. — >DaS  ©c* 


The  exterior  wall  of  tlie 
prison  is  thirty  feet  high;  the 
interior,  twenty. 


MATERIAL   FOR    CONVERSATION. 


41 


T)ie  geinbc  hdjauMkn  utt= 
fcren  ©efanbten  mit  ber  duvets 
[ten  il}|{pd)tunr5» 

'A^ii^  uktc  (StocftDcr!  un[erc§ 
.?)aufc^  ent^dit  ad}t  ^inumXr 
ba^^  unitxt  ^cl)n. 

9^icl)arb  ift  bcr  o'bctftc  m  \cU 
ner  ^tlaffc,  ^mit  bcr  iintcrftc. 

$Homu(u^3  \mv  bcr  crfic  ro^ 
imfd)e  ^onig,  unb  S^arquiniu^ 
@upcrbu^  bcr  le^tc. 

5iriftibc3  unh  ^paminonba^ 
waxen  ;^tt)ci  fcltcne  Gt)aratterc; 
bcr  erpctc  (or  crftcrcr)  wax 
ciujii]  burc^  feincn  (^cred)tig^ 
fcitsfinn,  bcr  Ic^tctc  (or  Ic^s 
tcrcr)  buret)  fcine  (Sntf)alt|am^ 
kit  —  Scr  (I!)ara!tcr. 


The  enemy  treated  oiir  am- 
bassador with  the  utmost  con- 
tempt. 

The  upper  story  of  our 
house  contains  eight  rooms; 
the  lower,  ten. 

Bichard  is  the  first  in  his 
class;  Emil,  the  last. 

Romulus  was  the  first  Roman 
king;  and  Tarquinius  Super- 
bus,  the  last. 

Aristides  and  Epaminondas 
were  two  rare  characters;  the 
former  was  unequaled  for  his 
sense  of  justice;  the  latter,  for 
his  abstinence. 


9G. 


■2Sir  lyoI)ucn  c^cnavi  cBcufa 
tncit  t)on  granffurt  M  \)on 
min. 

^cr  ^onig  "^PijiKp^  wax  cBcns 
fa  t(ug  aU  ta\)\cx. 

r,3cna/'  [djrctbt  meiu  greimb, 
„ift  nicljt  fa  oroB  ttJtc  Scipjig, 
aOcr  e3  ij"!  rjcit  fcI)oncr  gckgcn 
iinb  bid  billigcr  aU  biefcS*  3c 
I-ingcr  inir  ^'icr  tnoljnen,  bcfio 
bcffer  gcfdlU  e'3  un§." 

Un[cr  (gommcr  ti"t  ertrdglid); 
je  l)ci^cr  bie  Za(\t  finb,  bcfto 
littler  jinb  bie  Tiddjtc, 

^/tor  Wax  bcr  tapferfte  um 
ax"  alien  Xxoiancxn.  —  3)cr 
Sroiancr, 

@o!ratc§  wax  ber  njeifefte  tion 
alien  ®ried)ett.  —  S^cr  ©rtcdjc* 

„X)cr  md(!^tt(3[te  l!3n   alien 


"We  live  just  as  f;ir  from 
Frankfort  as  from  Cologne. 

KingPhilipp  was  as  prudent 
as  he  was  brave. 

"Jena,"  writes  my  friend, 
"is  not  so  large  as  Leipsic, 
but  it  is  far  more  beautiful  in 
nituation,  and  much  cheaper. 
The  longer  wo  live  here,  the 
better  we  like  it." 

Our  summer  is  endurable; 
the  hotter  the  days  ai'e,  the 
cooler  are  the  nights. 

Hector  was  the  bravest  of 
all  the  Trojans. 

Socrates  was  the  wisest  of 
all  the  Greeks. 

"  The  most  powerful  of  all 


42 


3£ATERIAIi   FOR    CONVERSATION. 


ber  ^lutjenbltcf.^ 


rulers,"  sajs  Schiller,  "  is  tli« 
moment." 


97. 


Q6)  \nar  gcftcm  iticnt  in  ber 
SPcrfammluitg,  iucit  bcr  ^(rjt 
mir  ucrboten  ^at  abenb^  au^* 
gugcl)cn. 

^cr  ^ieb  ]ac^tc  5U  fciner 
(5ntfd)utbigung:  „I>cr  ^lunger 
IjatmidJ  gc^iimngen  g:i  ftc()tcn.'' 

511^  id)  5(b|d)tcb  Dom  ^^ireftor 
ttal)m,  fagte  cr:  „3d)  U">crbe 
bii^  mcincn  greunbcit  in  ^^cm 
cmpfct)Icn  unb  Ijoffe,  balb  i?on 
bir  gu  l)orcn." 

daltjjula  bcfat)(  ben  ^ftdmern, 
i^m  gottlid)c  (5I)re  gu  ermcifen; 
bof^  fetne  Untertl)anen  Uemc^^ 
tetcn  if)n.  —  !5)cr  9^dmer. 

SBir  el)ren  ba^3  5lnbenfen  be§ 
(Sofrated,  liietl  er  unS  ein  ^ct- 
fpict  Uia[}rer  ^eelengro^e  gege^^ 
ben  I; at. 

,,grcunbe/'  bcgann  ber  $Reb* 
ncr,  „{c^  l)abc  cui^  cine  SO^ittei== 
lung  gu  mad)en,  hk  eud^  alle 
iiberrajdien  tinrb." 

^te  ^(rbcitcr  ftanben  an^, 
treil  i^ncn  bcr  gabrif{)err  fcine 
9?ebuftion  bcr  Slrbeit^jeit  gc* 
tod^ren  luoKtc. 

Qd)  l)abe  §eine§  ©cbioite  gc* 
Tauft  unb  l)Offe  fie  tra^renb  ber 
gerien  gu  lefen. 


I  was  not  at  the  meeting 
Yesterday  because  the  I3hysi- 
cian  has  forbidden  me  to  go 
out  in  the  evening. 

In  justification  of  himself 
the  thief  said:  "Hunger  has 
compelled  me  to  steal" 

"WTaen  I  took  leave  of  the 
dii-ector,  lio  said:  "I  shall  re- 
commend Tou  to  my  friends 
at  Bern,  and  hope  soon  to 
hear  from  you." 

Cahgiila  ordered  the  Romans 
to  render  him  divine  honoi*s, 
but  his  subjects  despised  him. 

We  honor  the  memory  of 
Socrates  because  he  has  given 
us  an  example  of  time  gi*andeur 
of  mind- 

"  Friends,"  began  the  orator, 
"I  have  a  communication  to 
make  to  you  which  ^vill  sur- 
piise  you  alL" 

The  workmen  struck  be- 
cause the  proprietor  of  the 
factory  refused  to  gxant  them 
a  diminution  of  their  working 
time. 

I  have  bought  Heine's  poems, 
and  hope  to  read  them  during 
vacation. 


98. 


34   ft^rieb    meiuent  ^ud)^ 
l^onbler:    „^  bitte  Sic,  mic^ 


I  ^Tote  to  my  bookseller: 
Please  let    me    know    how 


MATERIAL    FOR    CONVERSATION. 


43 


ir»{ffcn   JU    laffcn,    iDiCDicl    id)  mucli  I  owe  3^ou."     He  ans- 

g^ncn  fdjutbtcj  bin/'     (Sr  ant^  wered  tliat  I  owed  him  noth- 

tcortcte,  id)  fci  if}m  nid)t<3  \d)nU  mg. 
bicj. 


100. 


Sir  ^ben  unferen  SGagcn 
uerfauft,  tvcxi  tx  au§  ber  SD^obe 
ttjar. 

(gie  fragen  nad)  ber  neueti 
:33io(}rapr)ie  CeffingS;  fie  JDirb 
balb  crfdjeinen. 


"We  sold  our  carriage  because 
it  was  out  of  fashion. 

You  inquire  about  the  new 
biogi-aphy  of  Lessing;  it  will 
appear  soon. 


101, 


!^ie  51rttlteric  ftanb  auf  eincm 

itgcl,  bie  3^nfantcrie  na()c  bas 
ci.  —  ^cr  ©iigeL 

^icle  S5cber  gebeti  if)r  §anb^ 
tner!  auf,  tDcit  fie  nidjt  genug 
batttit  t)crbiencn. 

^rofcf[or  S:)ictri(^  fdireibt 
meincm  ^atcr,  hc^  er  etne  dnU 
bedung  mit  bem  SO^ifroffo)?  ge^* 
nadjt  Ijat  unb  ba(b  etneu  S3or^ 
trag  barilBct  fjalten  tctrb.  — 
®a§  2}'^i!rof!o^. 

©er  S3ogelftelIcr  fing  nur 
gclju  SSiJgcI,  bod)  irar  er  ganj 
iufrieben,  n)eil  ^inet  9^a^tigaUen 
Mtuttter  iDareu.  —  !Die  9^a^^ 
tigaU. 

^iu  ttalienifd}e^  (S^rid)ttiort 
fagt:  „!Der  Mar^  madjt  bie 
iDIumen,  unb  ber  5l]3rit  ^at  ben 
SMm  batJiJtt,'' 

S^iemanb  tnoHte  bie  (Statue 
bcfS  :53ilbl)auer§  2;()i"e(c,  \ml  tin 
glecfen  haxm  roar* 


The  artillery  stood  upon  a 
hill;  the  infantry,  near  by. 

Many  weavers  give  up  their 
trade  because  they  do  not  earn 
enough  by  it. 

Professor  Dietrich  writes  to 
my  father  that  he  has  made  a 
discovery  with  the  microscope, 
and  will  soon  deliver  a  lecture 
on  it. 

The  bird-catcher  caught  ten 
bii'ds  only,  but  he  was  quite 
satisfied  because  there  were 
two  nightingales  amongst 
them. 

An  Italian  proverb  says  — 
March  makes  the  flowers,  and 
April  has  the  glory  of  it 

Nobody  wanted  the  statue 
of  Thiele,  the  sciilptor,  because 
there  was  a  stain  on  ii 


44 


MATERIAL   FOR    CONVERSATION. 


102,  see  172, 

103. 


^k  (Bummc  allcr  (Bchotc  i[t: 
Siclie  bcincn  TOdiftcn  \vk  bi^ 
jclbfl.  —  5:)a^  (^cbot. 

^ie  gcinbe  griffcn  un[cre 
Xvvippcnnid)t  an, lueit  fic  fclbfl 
einctt  ^Ingrtff  Don  un^3  ennar- 
teten. 

1.  <SclBflaitt®aIcjcngeftanb 
bcr  3}Zorbcr  feme  (Bdjvdh  md)t 
ein.  —  ^cr  ©algen. 

2.  5^icmanb  ^at  bie  junge 
^aucrin  gc^mungcn  in5  .^loftcr 
3U  gcf)cn:  fie  l)at  ben  ^djlcier 
Uott  fclljfl  gcnommen. 


The  sum  of  all  tlie  com- 
inandinents  is  —  Love  tliy 
neighbor  as  tlivself. 

The  enemy  did  not  attack 
our  troops  because  tliey  them- 
selves exj^ected  an  attack  from 
our  side. 

Even  at  tlie  gallows  the 
mui'derer  did  not  confess  his 
guili 

Nobody  com2:)elled  the  young 
peasant  woman  to  enter  the 
convent;  she  took  the  veil  of 
her  own  accord. 


104, 


Tldn  SSater  fet^te  geftcrn 
aBenb  fcine  9letfe  radjt  fort, 
tt)eil  er  t)ic(  @e(b  bet  \i^  I)atte. 
—  S}at^  ©elb. 

grau  (Stetni^  I) at  alle  il)re 
^inber  mit  flcj  nacf)  2^entfd)^ 
lanb  genommcn. 


My  father  did  not  continue 
his  journey  last  night  because 
hs  had  a  great  deal  of  money 
with  hinL 

Mrs.  Steinitz  has  taken  all 
her  children  with  her  to 
Germany. 


105. 


!^ie  SBcl^cnfcIbcr  am  (^ee 
finb  iittfcr;  tk  235iefcn  gefjoren 
unfercm  9kdjbar.  —  S)a5  gelb. 

!4)te  5lrbeit  ij't  etne  ^ebtnnung 
unfercg  ©ludeS.  —  S)a^  @(u(f. 

il^cine  (SItern  n)oI)nen  bci 
i^rcn  S5ennanbten  in  (Suropa. 

3ofe)3^  fagte  gu  feinen  -^rit^ 
beru:  „3cl;  bin  3^ofep!),  tntx 
4Sruber." 


The  wheat-fields  on  the  lake 
are  ours;  the  meadows  belong 
to  our  neighbor. 

Work  is  a  condition  of  our 
happiness. 

Mj  parents  are  staying  with 
their  relatives  in  Europe. 

Josej^h  said  to  his  brothers: 
"I  am  Joseph,  your  brother." 


MATERIAL    FOR    CONVERSATION. 


45 


1.  „SBo  ^a}t  bu  bcittctt 
SJ^unb  gelaffen?"  fa^te  bcr  Se^= 
rer  gum  Keinett  ^au(,  a(§  cr 
ntd)t  rebcn  luolltc, 

„So  I)abt  i|r  eurcn  Siti?'' 
fagte  gri^  gu  feinen  ^amcra^^ 
ben*  —  ®cr  ^antcrab. 

,,@c^icben  <Sic  3S,i^^  ^cife 
na(^  granfrcidi  auf,  bi3  bie  po^ 
litifc^cn  9h(^rid)tcn  beffcr  ft»er^ 
ben;  ba§  ift  mein  '^at/'  fatjte 
ber  ^onfnl  gu  nxeinm  (gltern. 


"Where  did  you  leave  your 
mouth?"  said  the  teacher  to 
Httle  Paul,  when  he  refused 
to  speak. 

"Where  are  your  wits?'* 
said  Fred  to  his  comrades. 

"Put  off  your  journey  to 
France  until  the  poHtical  news 
gets  better;  such  is  my  ad- 
vice," said  the  consul  to  my 
parents. 


106. 


!^a6  (Stubiergimmcr  meine^ 
S3ater§  ift  redjt^  t)om  (Empfano,^ 
gimmer,  btt§  mcinigc  Itn!^  ba* 
Don* 

3cf)  bin  mit  ber  gran  3Bai^ 
t)emanbt;  ntein  Dnfct  nnb  bcr 
ijtige  toaxcn  ^riiber. 

Sir  tDiffcn  nidjt  t)icl  t)on  ber 
SD^ufi!  ber  alten  @rted)en;  bod) 
ift  fo  \)\d  geiDifv  bag  fie  bon 
ber  itnfrigctt  feljr  oerfd)tebcn 

SJleine  ©tern  merben  ba§ 
§au§  be§  3Jiaior§  bejieljen,  tDeit 
btt§  t^rtge  gu  !(ein  ift 

1. 36cnopfion  fit^rte  bie  (Sets 
ttigeit  rjoMbe^alten  in  bie  QzU 
mat  guritd 


My  father's  study  is  to  the 
right  of  the  parlour;  mine,  to 
the  left  of  it 

I  am  related  to  Mrs.  Waitz; 
my  uncle  and  hers  were 
brothers. 

We  do  not  know  much  about 
the  music  of  the  ancient 
Greeks,  but  this  much  is  cer- 
tain that  it  was  very  different 
from  ours. 

My  parents  will  move  into 
the  major's  house  because 
theirs  is  too  small 

Xenophon  led  his  comrades 
back  home  in  safety. 


110, 


!^ie  atten  §errcn  im  Dmnt^ 
buiS  toaren  grembe.  ^er  mit 
ber  Grille  irar  ber  ruffifd^e  @e^ 
fanbte,  unb  bcr  mit  bem  (^txoly 
l)Ut  fein  ©etretdr.  —  '^tx  Dm* 
nibue. 


The  old  gentlemen  in  tha 
omnibus  were  foreigners.  The 
one  with  the  glasses  was  the 
Russian  ambassador,  and  the 
one  with  the  straw-hat,  his 
secretary. 


46 


MATERIAL   FOR   CONA'ERSATIOX. 


fr^kv  ift  meitt  rul)igfte^ 
^ferb,"  fagte  ber  gii^rer ;  „mit 
icm  iaufctt  (Sie  fcinc  @cfal)r/' 

T}cv  (iltcftc  giil)rcr  umr  ab* 
hiefcnb,  ba^crmuBten  luir  ben 
Don  Qcftern  Ipicbcr  engaflicren. 

^ie  befte,  abcr  tcuerfte  »8d)ule 
ift  bic  bcr  ferfa^runcj. 

(2cf){ncr^  fc^bnfte^  2ieb  ift 
bog  Don  bcr  ©locfe. 

Sir  gefallen  alien  bcncn, 
bcrcn  ©gentiebe  tDir  fc^meidjeln, 
bcfonber^  wcnn  w'lv  felbft  un^ 
bcfjcn  nid^t  bcwuBt  ftnb. 


"  Here  is  my  quietest  horse," 
said  the  guide;  "with  him 
you  run  no  danger." 

The  oldest  guide  was  absent, 
therefore  we  had  to  re-engage 
the  one  we  had  yesterday. 

The  best,  but  most  expens- 
ive school  is  that  of  experience. 

Schiller's  most  beautiful 
song  is  that  of  the  BelL 

We  please  all  those  whose 
self-love  we  flatter,  especially 
when  we  ourselves  are  not  con- 
scious of  it 


112. 


„'^k]t^  (or  bte§,  or  ha^)  ift 
mein  (Sdjmucf,"  fagte  (Eomelia 
gu  i^rer  greunbin,  a(5  i^re 
(So^ne  eintraten.  —  'i)tv 
(Sdjmucf. 

„^o0  fmb  nic^t  meine  £in^ 
bcr/  fagte  bie  ^ranfe,  ai^  man 
i^re  3:od)ter  an  i()r  ^ttt  brac^te. 
—  X)k  2:od)tcr. 


"These  are  my  jewels,"  said 
Cornelia  to  her  friend,  whea 
her  sons  entered. 


"  These  are  not  my  children," 
said  the  sick  woman,  when 
they  brought  her  daughters  to 
her  bedside. 


113, 


!Dcr  .^oufmann  ^Raufd)  I)  at 
ein  !i'anbl)au^3  gefauft;  b at ou§ 
tan  man  erfe^en,  bag  cr  nod) 
nid)t  bantrott  ift. 

-3d)  bin  nid)t  in  bic  3>crfamm^ 
Inng  gcfommen,  lucit  mid)  nic* 
manb  ba&on  bcnad)rid)tigt  I)at. 


Rauscli,  the  merchant,  has 
bought  a  countrs'-house ;  from 
this  it  may  bs  inferred  that 
he  is  not  yet  a  bankrupt 

I  did  not  come  to  the  meet- 
ing because  nobody  informed 
me  of  it 


114. 


Unfcr  bcftcr  grennb  ift  bcrs 
jcttigc  (or  bcr),  ber  un^  bie 


Our  best  friend  is  he  who 
tells  us  the  truth,  and  vet  we 


MATERIAL   FOR    CONVERSATION. 


47 


S03at)rl)cit  fagt,  unb  bod)  r)affen 
iDtr  leti^t  bcnjcniGcn,  bcr  unfere 

Sir  fdjrcibcn  Uldjt  bcmjcnt^ 
gctt  (or  bem),  bcr  un§  lobt, 
(^cfd)ma(f  unb  (Sinfidjt  ^u. 

„i)k  bcfte  grau/'  fagte  (So^ 
!ratc§,  ,»{ft  bicjenicjc  (or  bie), 
Don  bcr  bie  Seute  am  iDenioften 
rebcn." 

©ic  ^ercbfamfcit  be§  ^cri!^ 
Ie§  lx>ar  Don  bcrienigcn  (or  bcr) 
5lrt,  iDcIc^e  ntcl)t  ilberrebct,  fon= 
bern  iiberjeugt 

©a§  fc^onfte  ^on3ert  Voav 
ba§jentgc  (or  ba^]),  \vd6)t§> 
§err  5^enmann  biric^iertc. 

S^ie  foftbarften  4)tamanten 
finb  btcjentcjcn  (or  bte),  trcldje 
avL^  Dftinbien  !ommen.  —  3^cr 
!Diamant» 

Sir  Der^ei^en  gem  bcnjeni^ 
gen,  tvcldjt  un^  langmeilen, 
aber  ntd)t  benen  bie  iuir  hng^ 
hjeilen*  ^ 


are   quick   to  liate  liim  avIio 
offends  our  seK-love. 

We  are  quick  to  attribute 
taste  and  intelligence  to  liini 
wlio  praises  us. 

"  The  best  woman,"  Socrates 
said,  "is  she  of  whom  peox)le 
talk  least" 

The  eloquence  of  Pericles 
was  of  the  sort  which  does  not 
persuade,  but  convince. 

The  finest  concert  was  that 
which  Mr.  Neumann  con- 
ducted. 

The  most  precious  diamonds 
are  those  which  come  from  the 
East  Indies. 

We  gladly  pardon  those 
who  bore  us,  but  not  those 
whom  we  bore. 


115, 


!IDer  ^erg  mit  bem  fc^arfcn 
''Profile,  fagt  ber  p()rer,  ift  bct= 
felbc,  t>cn  \mv  geftern  Don  Dften 
fatjen.  —  T)a^  profit. 

X)k  (Sangerin,  iDcIdje  I)cute 
abenb  fingen  inirb,  ift  bic* 
fctbc,  bie  iDir  in  -Lofton  geljdrt 
^aben. 

!Da0  ^entige  ^on5ertpro== 
gramm  ift  baSfetbe  \vk  ba^ 
geftrige. 


The  mountain  with  the  sharp 
outlines,  says  the  guide,  is  the 
same  we  saw  yesterday  from 
the  east. 

The  singer  who  is  going  to 
sing  to-night  is  the  same  we 
heard  at  Boston. 

The  program  of  to-day's 
concert  is  the  same  as  that  of 
yesterday. 


48 


MATERL\L   FOS    CO^r^^ERSATION. 


116, 


(53  ift  cine  fol^c  ^i^t  Ijkv 
m  glorenj,  bag  ba$  %^p\]a{U 
p]ia]tcv  fci)mit<;t 

©cfterii  ging  ctit  fali^cr 
©tunn,  bag  tjiele  (gffcn  einfic* 
len.  —  ^ie  (^ffe. 

1.  'A}a^  (Stimmred}t  ^bcn 
nur  fal^c,  bic  Icfcn  !onnen. 


There  is  so  great  lieat  here 
at  Florence  that  the  asphaltmii 
paYement  is  melting. 

There  was  such  a  tempest 
yesterday  that  many  chimneys 
fell  do^vn. 

Only  such  as  know  how  to 
read  have  the  right  to  vote. 


118. 


(Sdnttcr^  Gaudier  bcginnt  mit 
hen  S5}ortcn :  „SBcr  luagt  e^, 
Otitter^mann  obcr  £napp,  ^u 
taudjen  in  biefen  (gc^tunb?"  — 
5)ae  33ort 

^ie  (2d)aufpiclcr  bcratcn, 
tocficn  2tM  fie  gucrft  aufful)* 
ten  folkn.  —  S)a^  Stiicf. 

Unfcr  3:1) etna  ;;um  englifdjen 
5Iu[fat3  lautct:  f&tm  untcx  hen 
©riedfcn  (jcbii^rt  unfcre  grogte 
^eiDnnberung,  itnb  n»em  un* 
fere  grogte  ^^tnncj?  —  ^aS 

T:k  5IrBeiter  berieten  geftem, 
tocn  au^  il)rer  Mittc  fie  jum 
3}^nifter  fd)icfen  fodten. 

^99Bo§  l^aben  8ie  gu  iljrer 
2>erteibii3nng  gu  fagen?''  fragte 
ber  9iid)ter  ben  3lngeHagten. 

3.  S)a6S:t)emaber^jei§auf= 
gabe  lautet:  JBSorin  beftel)t  ha^ 
ifeefen  be§  (5r!)abenen? 

!SDer  5(rreftant  berlangt  gu 
tDiffen,  to  omit  er  fcine  grcil)eit 
erlangen  fann. 


Schiller's  "Diver"  begins 
with  the  words:  "Who  vent- 
ures, Knight  or  Knave,  to  dive 
into  this  abyss?" 

The  actors  are  dehberatrng 
whose  play  to  give  fii^st. 

The  subject  of  our  EngHsh 
composition  is  —  To  whom, 
amongst  the  Greeks  is  our 
greatest  admiration  due,  and 
to  whom  our  highest  esteem  ? 

The  workmen  dehberated 
yesterday  whom  they  should 
send  from  among  them  to  the 
minister. 

"What  have  you  to  say  in 
your  defense  ?"  asked  the  judge 
of  the  defendani 

The  subject  of  the  prize- 
essa^ds — ^^^lierein  consists  the 
essence  of  the  subhme? 

The  prisoner  wants  to  know 
how  he  can  obtain  his  hberty. 


MATERIAL   FOR   C0N^^3RSATI0N. 


49 


119. 


t,^^td)tn  3Scg  t)aben  (Sic  ge^^ 
uommen,  unb  wcldjcS  ^Dar  3^1)^ 
^efthnmunt3§ort?"  frac^te  bcr 
5lbt)o!at  ben  3^^9^^*  -^  ^^^ 
Drt ;  ber  ^^^O^* 

„a[Sc^  ein  (gletib!"  ricfbcr 
^onig  au§,  a(§  er  bie  Ubcr= 
f  djtDc'mmung  f  a^. — SDa^  (Stcnb. 


"Which  way  did  you  take, 
and  "what  was  your  destina- 
tion ?"  asked  the  lawyer  of  the 
witness. 

"What  a  scene  of  miserj^'" 
exclaimed  the  king,  when  he 
saw  the  inundation. 


120, 


®ie  crfte  gragc  mctnc§  g^a^ 
minatory  tDar:  JSESaS  flit  tin 
Unterfc^icb  ift  gtrifdjcit  ber  jDUt- 
id)cn  unb  bortfdien  @an(e  ?  ®ie 
(e^te  Srage  tear:  3n  lDa§  fur 
etnem  S^ia(e!te  \>\d}tctt  §omer? 

—  T)cv  Unterfrf)ieb;  bcr  !4Diale!t 

1.  ^ii)  I)abe  hen  ©drtner  ge^ 
fragt,  maS  flit  ^lumcn  nnb 
\m^  fiir  Dbft  cr  ^eute  fct(  Ijat 

—  T)a6  Dbft. 

2.  .^crr  ^itti^'^i'  ^f^  leibcnb, 
unb  !cin  5lrjt  tann  angebcn, 
teidS  er  fnt  einc  ^ran!()ctt  I)at. 


The  first  question  of  my 
examiner  was — What  differ- 
ence is  there  between  the  Ion- 
ic and  the  Doric  column? 
The  last  question  was — In 
what  dialect  did  Homer  write 
his  poems  ? 

I  have  asked  the  gardener 
what  flowers  and  wliat  fruit 
he  has  for  sale  to-da}^ 

Mr.  Zinner  is  sick,  and  no 
physician  can  tsll  what  disease 
lie  has. 


123—124. 


^ccf^oDcn  ift  ein  ^omponift, 
xt)dd}tx  (or  ber)  feincS  ®(ctcf)cn 
auf  bcr  Selt  nidjt  I) at. 

^l)ibia§  Wax  etn  ^itnftler, 
bcffctt  @d)opfungen  nod)  Ijcute 
unerreid)te  IDZuftcr  finb.  —  ^te 
@c^opfung;  ha^  9)?ufter. 

4)a^  gotbene  3^^^^^^^^  ^'^^ 
bagjentge.in  lDe(d)em  (or  bem) 
H^  @o(b  nid)t  ^crrfd)te. 


Beethoven  is  a  composer 
who  has  not  his  equal  in  the 
world. 

Phidias  was  an  artist  whose 
creations  are  to  this  day  un- 
equaled  models. 

The  golden  age  was  that  in 
which  gold  was  not  supreme. 


50 


MATEEIAL   FOR   CON^^ERSATIOX. 


^a-0  ^antljeon  in  9?0Tn  mac^t, 
tt)ie  alle  9Jei|'cnben  ncrftc^em, 
etnctt  ©nbrucf,  lucldjcn  (or 
ben)  mannie  bcrgij^t. 

?nt(}er  ftammte  au^3  eincr  Jva* 
milic,  Wcldjt  (or  bic)  t)on  bcr 
Slrbctt  il)rcr  ^^dnbe  Icbte. 
^  T)a^$  ntenfd)Iid)e  Scbcn  ift  nur 
eine  lauc^e  (Ir^ie^nnc^,  bcr  en 
3ie(  bie  iBcrDoUfomninnng  ift. 
—  ^a^3  3ieL 

!^cr  5(r5t  I)at  mir  eine  Hrjnci 
tierfc^ricbcn,  uon  ^Dcld)cr  (or 
bcr)  id)  jtiinblic^  einen  St()ce* 
Idffcl  Doll  einne^men  foC.  — 


;i:ie  (Spartaner  tbteten  alle 
^inber,  ipeldje  (or  bie)  Der* 
friippett  ^ur  Selt  famen. 


The  pantheon  in  Rome,  as 
all  travelers  assert,  makes  an 
impression  which  is  never  f  or- 
gotten- 

Luther  descended  from  a 
famil}'  which  hved  by  the  labor 
of  their  hands. 

Human  life  is  but  a  long 
education,  the  object  of  whicli 
is  improvement 

The  physician  prescribed 
for  me  a  medicine  of  which  I 
have  to  take  a  tea-spoonful 
every  hour. 

The  Spartans  killed  all  in- 
fants winch  were  bom  crip- 
pled. 


Additional  Examples  to  §  123 — §  124 


9JHttn)od)  I)ciSt  bcr  Xac^,  bet 
(or  lueldjet)  bie  3}|itte  ber'^odje 
bilbet. 

giir  biele  3J?enfd)ett  ift  bie 
3Migion  nic^t^S  ai^  ein  ^annt, 
untci*  bem  (or  ir>eld)cm)  fie  waiy 
rcnb  hc^  9?egen^  (Sdjufe  fuc^en, 
unb  ben  jie  ucrlaffcn,  fobdb  bcr 
9?e(^cn  auf^ort.  —  i)er  ^d)U^. 

X)it  §offnung  ift  eine  grenn:^ 
bin,  wddjt  un^  im  Ungliicf 
ndl)cr  ift  CiU$  im  (3tM,  unb  bie 
un>5  unfere  -^itrbe  tragen  ^ilft, 
luenn  fie  ant  fd)mcrftcn  ift. 

SMe  egi)pti[c^cn  S)cnhndler 
fmb  bie  diteftcn.mit  benen  n»ir 
bctannt  finb.  —  ^a5  ^cnfmaL 

'^cv  Oft)mp  ift  ein  -^erg, 
beffcn  (S)ipfet  faft  nie  fidjtbar 
ift.  —  X)er  @ipfe(. 


The  day  in  the  middle  of 
the  week  is  called  Wednesday. 

For  many  i>eople  reUgion  is 
nothing  but  a  tree  under  which 
they  seek  shelter  dming  the 
rain,  and  which  they  leave  as 
soon  as  the  rain  ceases. 

Hope  is  a  friend  which  is 
nearer  to  us  in  misfortune  than 
in  happiness,  and  which  helps 
us  to  cany  oui*  burden  when 
it  is  heaviest 

The  Eg^-ptian  moJfuments 
are  the  oldest  with  which  we 
ai'e  acquainted. 

Olvmpus  is  a  mountain  the 
summit  of  which  is  hardly 
ever  visible. 


MATERIAL   FOR   CONVERSATION. 


51 


125. 


29Scr  nicijt'3  tt)agt,   (jeiDinnt 

3Bir  Dergcffen  Iei(J)t,  tnaS  ir»ir 
anbcrn  t»crban!en. 


NotHng  venture,  notliiiig 
win. 

We  easily  forget  wliat  we 
owe  to  others. 


126. 


^rofeffor  (SMmtI)cr  Heft  f)eute 
itber  bie  ri)mifcl)en  9^uincn,  bte 
er  geftem  mtt  jcmcu  (s^tubcntcn 
befuc^t  I)at* 


Professor  Giintlier  lectures 
to-day  on  the  lioman  ruins 
he  visited  yesterday  with  his 
students. 


127. 


^IborpI)  etatjr  ^t  ctn  md) 
qefdjvieben,  to  or  in  er  hen  .^aifer 
feiberiu^  geijeu  feme  ^iogra^ 
p\)m  Derteibigt  —  ^Der  -53to^ 
grapl). 

!Die  @d)u(b  ber  SJ^aria  Stuart 
ift  ein  "$unft,  motiibcr  bie  @e^ 
fc^trf)t5fd)reiber  nic^t  einii]  finb. 

(Sin  (Snglanbcr  ^at  ein  -3tt^ 
ftruntent  erfnnben,  loomit  man 
bie  SiJieereStiefe  of)ne  @en!blei 
meffeu  tann*  —  ®a^  iBIet. 


Adolph  Stahr  has  written  a 
book  in  which  he  defends  the 
emperor  Tiberius  against  his 
biographers. 

The  guilt  of  Mary  Stuart  is 
a  2^oiiit  on  which  historians 
do  not  agree. 

An  Enghshman  has  invented 
an  instrument  with  which  one 
can  measure  the  depth  cf  the 
sea  without  the  sounding  lead. 


128. 


Unfer  ©cfanbter  fd}reibt  au^ 
Berlin,  baji  moti  einen  allgc* 
meinen  enropaifd)en  ^rieg  be== 
fiird)te. 

3d)  lefe  in  ber  ^citnng,  ba^ 
man  eine  Dortrefflii^e  @tatne  in 
^ompeji  gefunben  \}at 

1.  dJldn  I) at  fetten  grennbc, 
menn  fie  ciiicm  am  niitigften 
finb. 


Our  ambassador  writes  from 
Berhn  that  people  apprehend 
a  general  European  war. 

I  read  in  the  paper  that  an 
excellent  statue  has  been  found 
at  Pompeii. 

We  rarely  have  friends 
when  we  need  them  most. 


52 


materi.Uj  for  conversation. 


2.  ^ie  3^ugcnb  ift  ein  gliid* 
ltd)e^5  5Uter;  irenn  vaan  juni]  ift, 
I)at  man  cbcn  jo  t>icle  ^offttun* 
fjcn  aU  ^uufdje.  —  ^er 
S^unfd). 

3.  aj^itt  fdngt  an  fic^  gn  be^ 
teid)ern,  wenn  man  fcinc  (Edjul* 
bcu  be3al)(t 


Youth  is  aliajjpy  age;  wlien 
one  is  joung,  he  has  as  many 
hopes  as  wishes. 


"W'e   begin  to   enrich   our 
selves  when  we  pay  our  debts. 


129—133, 


3tt  -9I)rcr  5lbn)c?cnl)cit  i-'t 
Scmanb  au6  ber  (Stabt  l)ier  ge* 
njefen. 

„Si|"fen  Sie  iemanb(cn),  ber 
guten  itlat)ieruntemd)t  giebt?" 
fragte  mid)  bie  ©rafin. 

Qi)  l)abe  niemanb(cn)  auf 
bem  <Sce  gefel)cn. 

<Die  ^icbe  ergriffen  bie  j^lndjt, 
abcr  tcincr  enttam. — 'J^er  Dieb. 

©ncr  t»on  ben  3iDit(ingen 
^ot)me  I}at  bie  ^djcune  in 
^rant)  Qcftccft,  abcr  feinci  (Don 
bciben)  cieftcl)t  c5  ein.  —  ^er 
^icillinG;  ^^^  ^ranb. 


Somebody  from  the  city 
was  here  in  youi*  absence. 

"Do  you  know  any  one  who 
gives  good  piano  instnietion?" 
the  countess  asked  of  me. 

I  have  not  seen  anybody  on 
the  lake. 

The  thieves  took  to  flight, 
but  not  one  escaped. 

One  or  the  other  of  the 
Boehme  twins  has  set  fire  to 
the  bam,  but  neither  one  ad- 
mits it 


134—135. 


'^lad)  '^^rofeffor  gedinere  dJlcU 
nung  ift  jcbc§  (oreinjebe^)  ©c- 
mdlbe  ber  ncuen  vSammtnng 
ein  93?eiftcrftiicf.  —  S)a^5  ^titcf . 

^ebcr  (or  ein  jeber),  ber  bie 
Selt  fennt,  ift  me^r  ober  tneni* 
gcr  miBtranifdi. 

^ie  .^onigin  ift  fo  betiebt, 
n»ci(  fie  fiir  jcbcrmann  ein 
frennblid^e^  ^ort  ^at. 

"^k  ^tebe  be^  tan^Ierd  f)at 
nid)t  JebermannS  -^eifall.  — 
'^cv  ^eifall. 


In  the  oi:)inlon  of  Professor 
Fechner,  every  jiicture  of  the 
new  collection  is  a  mast€r- 
piece. 

Every  one  who  knows  the 
world  is  more  or  less  suspi- 
cious. 

The  queen  is  so  popular  be- 
cause she  has  a  kind  word  for 
everybody. 

The  speech  of  the  chancellor 
does  not  meet  with  approbar 
tion  from  everyone. 


MATERIAL   FOR   CONVERSATION. 


53 


136, 


!Der  Settler  blttet  nt(f)t  urn 
®elb,  fonbern  urn  cttuag  ^rob. 
—  !Dag@elb;ba^-^rob. 

5Bir  (efen  taglid)  irgcnb  tU 
tt)a0  au^  ber  Sfiaturgefoitdite* 


The  beggar  does  not  ask  for 
money,  but  for  some  bread. 

"We  read  something  or  other 
on  the  subject  of  natural 
history  every  day. 


137—138, 


^OTtc^  t)erbrannte  feine  eige* 
nen  @d)iffe,  urn  ben  (Seinen 
feme  anbere  §offnung  al^  bie 
be^  (Sieged  3U  Ia[fen.  —  ^er 
@ieg. 

©nor  bon  hm  ?Ingc!Iagten 
ift  eiti  "Deutfc^er,  ein  anbercr  ift 
tin  ©djiuebe,  bie  iibrigeu  finb 
^uffen. 

^cr  ^uc^pnblcr  I)at  mir 
n\d)t  ba^  red)te  iBuc^  ge|d)icft; 
id)  l]atte  ein  anbercS  bejtellt. 

®ie  ^et)t)Iferung  bcr  33er^ 
cinigten  (gtaaten  iDdc^ft  rafc^cr 
al^  bie  irgenb  eine^  anbercn 
ganbe^. 

!Die  9J^enfd)cn  gerfaden  in 
^n)ci  ^(affen;  bie  eine  {)errf(^t, 
bie  anbere  bient.  —  !l)ic  Piaffe. 

Sir  !)aben  unfre  ©dfte  iibcr^ 
rebetnat^  cincn  Stag  ^n  bieiben. 

X)tv  rnffifd}e  unb  preuBifc^e 
^onfnl  ^ben  cinaniicr  offent* 
lid)  befd)tmpft. 


Cortez  burned  his  own  ships, 
in  order  to  leave  to  his  com- 
panions no  other  hope  than 
that  of  victory. 

One  of  the  defendants  is  a 
German,  another  is  a  Swede, 
the  rest  are  Russians. 

The  bookseller  has  not  sent 
me  the  right  book;  I  had 
ordered  a  different  one. 

The  population  of  the  United 
States  is  growing  more  rapid- 
ly than  that  of  any  other 
countr}\ 

Men  are  divided  into  two 
classes;  the  one  rules,  the 
other  serves. 

We  have  persuaded  our 
guests  to  stay  another  day. 

The  Russian  and  Prussian 
consuls  have  publicly  insulted 
each  other. 


139—142. 


Unfere  (Sotbaten  ^ben  atleS 
3Sertranen  auf  il)re  ©enercile 
oerloren. 


Our  soldiers  have  lost  all 
confidence  in  their  generals. 


54 


MATERIAL    FOR   CONVERSATION. 


(5§  {ft  mciftcn6  etn  "A^'mq  ber 
UnmogItrt)fett  fiir  einen  (Staat^^ 
mann,  e^  aiitn  rec^t  gu  macl)ett. 

Wan  {)at  cine  gan^c  ©ruppc 
Heiner  "iplanetett  gunfdjen  Tlax^ 
unb  Jupiter  entbccft 

'^k  ©emalt  bc^  Stunned  trar 
fo  grog,  bap  gan^c  §au[er  au^ 
ben  (gtragen  Derfdjmanbeit 

(2^  ift  etn  ^pom,  baB  ba^3 
©an^^c  gropcr  o(^  bcr  ^eU  ift. 
—  S}a§  3lpom. 

^rofcffor  (gc^Idger  l^aft  ba* 
fitr,  ha^  berSpiriti^mu^  lauUx 
^etrug  ift  —  X:ct  ^etrug, 

5^cr  3Sa]^nfinn  be5  ^rutu5 
tDar  I  outer  33crfte(Iung.  —  Xic 
^crftcUung» 


It  is  in  most  cases  an  im- 
possibility for  a  statesman  to 
please  everybody. 

They  have  discovered  a 
•whole  group  of  small  planets 
between  ^lars  and  Jupiter. 

The  force  of  the  tempest 
"was  so  gi'eat  that  entii-e  houses 
disappeared  from  the  streets. 

It  is  an  axiom  that  the 
whole  is  gi-eater  than  its  part 

Professor  Schlager  believes 
that  spiritualism  is  all  a  fraud- 

The  insanity  of  Brutus  was 
all  a  pretense. 


143—146. 


'a^cv  \cigtc  cgt)ptifrf)C  £rieg 
bauerte  nur  etnigc  3!?od)cn. 

T)k  £riti!cr  finb  nid)t  etnig 
in  it)rem  Urteil  iiber  t>a^  neuc 
Srauerfpiel;  einigc  lobcn  e^, 
anbere  tabeln  e^.  —  ^a^  Ur^ 
teiL    ' 

^cr  aJhtfifbireftor  hot  un^ 
^illetc  an;  xviv  banftcn  il)m 
aber,  tt>ci(  luir  jd)on  rotid)t  ge* 
!auft  l^attcn. 

(t^  ift  fein  Staffer  tnelir  in 
unfcrcm  ^rnnnen,  tt>ir  ^aben 
aber  tioc^  ipelcf)e§  in  ber  difterne. 
—  ^a^  2i?af|cr;  ber  iBrunnen. 

dllit  tin  paax  ©olbftitden 
!ann  man  biele  Slrme  gliidlid) 
marf)en.  —  X)o§  ^tM, 

Sir  hjerben  in  tin  paax  Xa^ 
gen  abrei]cn. 


The  last  Egyptian  war  lasted 
but  a  few  weeks. 

The  critics  do  not  agree  iA 
their  judgment  of  the  new 
tragedy;  some  praise  it,  others 
find  fault  with  it 

The  musical  director  offered 
us  tickets,  but  we  declined 
with  thanks  because  we  had 
already  bought  some. 

There  is  no  more  water  in 
our  well,  but  we  have  some 
left  in  our  cistern. 

"With  a  few  pieces  of  gold 
mu;     one    can    make    many    poor 

people  happy. 
Xa-        We  shall  leave  in  a  few  days. 


MATERIAL   FOR    CON^^ERSATION. 


55 


3m  le^ten  gelbjuge  fjaben 
unfere  (Solbaten  matt^c  ^adjt 
im  (Sc^nee  Qefdjlafen.  —  :Dcr 
^VLc\;  ha  (Bd)ncc, 

(Sia  ita(teni|cl)e$  (Spric^tnort 

au-3  unb  !ommt  gefc^oren  nac^ 
©au[e."  —  X)te  SBolIe. 

U7- 

!Die  58egetattoti  ift  ^ier  mcgcn 
ber  tJielen  Mten  9^arf)te  no^ 
fel)r  ^uritcf, 

T)ct  (Sturm  ^at  mlt  §au[er 
befc^fibtgt. 

X)cv  Sf)rgct3  ift  erne  ^(ippc, 
an  bcr  fc^on  Dieic  gefd}cttert 
finb.  —  S:)cr  @cta. 

§:rr  ©ofer  ift  mit  feiner 
(Stelle  un^ufrieben,  mcil  er  diet 
Slfbcit  unb  njcnig  @ei)a(t  ^at. 
—  3:)a5  ®cl)a(t. 

^ie  ^eftt^utic^  $errn  9^ofen6 
iftfe^rfd)on,abermitcitt  tncntg 
Siefenlaub  tucire  fie  fct)duei\ 

@oetl)e^  Ic^te  SKorte  maren: 
„2id)t,  mcijt  ^l6)tV' 

grau  ..?L)ioUcr  ift  fo  fc^mad), 
ha^  hit  ^ix^k  km  goffnung 
mc  jt  fiir  fie  ^ben. 

§enr  '^otjn  ijat  fein  @efd)aft 
fo  bebeutenb  emeitert,  baf^  er 
no^  ^\vd  ^orrefponbenten 
brauc^t.  —  ^a§  (^efdjcift. 

liDie  S^scr  t)aben  brei  §ofett 
unb  tne^rcrc  Sadjteln  gefc^of* 
fen.  —  !Die  Sac^teL 

Unfere  @rnteau^fid)ten  finb 
\d)kd)t,  tt)ei(  inir  nidjt  (^tnn^ 
9?cgen  (or  Olegen  nemtg)  gcf}abt 
l^aben.  —  S)ie  Slu^fidjt. 


In  the  last  campaign,  our 
soldiers  slept  in  the  snow  many 
a  night 

An  Itahan  proverb  says — 
Many  a  one  goes  out  for  wool, 
and  comes  home  shorn. 


-150. 

Vegetation  here  is  still  far 
behind  on  account  of  the  many 
cold  nights. 

The  storm  has  injured  many 
houses. 

Ambition  is  a  rock  on  which 
many  have  foundered  already. 

Mr.  Hofer  is  dissatisfied 
with  his  jDOsition  because  he 
has  much  work  and  a  small 
salary. 

Mr.  Rosen's  place  is  fine, 
but  with  a  little  meadow-land 
it  would  be  finer. 

Goethe's  last  words  were: 
*' Light,  more  light!" 

IVfi-s.  Moller  is  so  weak  that 
the  physicians  have  no  longer 
any  hope  for  her. 

Mr.  Rohn  has  extended 
his  business  so  considerably 
that  he  needs  two  more  cor- 
respondents. 

The  hunters  have  shot  three 
hares  and  several  quails. 

Our  prospects  for  the  har^ 
vest  are  bad  because  we  have 
not  had  enough  rain. 


56 


MATERIAL   FOR   CONVERSATION. 


^in  gcmiffcr  §err  @cini^  ift 
^oftmeifter  gcujorben. 


One  ]VIi\  Geinitz  lias  become 
postmaster. 


151 


!Der  ^c^rer  ga^rte:  ,,ctn8, 
jttici,  brci !"  unb  alle  ^naben 
tlogen  lr»ie  ^feile  gum  Settlauf 
baDon.  —  i)er  "^fei(. 

3ti  bcr  gemdBigteti  3otte 
c^icbt  c^  bier  ^^iire^jCitcn : 
griU)lmi3,  (Sommciv  @erbft  uub 
feintcr.  —  S^ie  3cit. 

33?ir  l^abeu  funf  ginger  an 
jeber  §anb.  —  ©er  ginger. 

^ie  iBod)e  I)at  fcj^§  SSer!* 
tage. 

^a§  alte  ^om  lag  auf  fieicn 
§iigeln. 

Unferc  (5ifcnbal)nwagen  l^a- 
ben  ttr^t  9?aber.  —  T)a^  '>Ra'b. 

T)k  Qal)[  hcviSbxicn  ift  ntnn, 
—  ©ie  mu]c, 

!Die  c^riftlic^e  9?eUgion  for* 
bert  bie  iXbung  ber  jc^n  @c^ 
bote. 

!l)er  ©otte^bienft  bcginnt  nm 
elf.  —  ^er  ^ienft. 

T)a^Sat)rl)at5tti5lf9Jionate: 
S^anuar,  gebruar,  ^J^dr^,  ?lpri(, 
9J^ai,  ^nm,  Ouli^  5luguft,  3cp^ 
tember,  Oftober,  DZooember, 
^December. 

T)cr  rote  Omnibus  fagt  brcU 
gciftrt  "ipcrionen.  —  ©ie  ^erfon. 

^iJiobe  i)atte  btcr^r^n  ^^inber. 

'I^ie  ^ogtinge  bcr  'JJ^a(crfd)u(e 
finb  funfje^n  bi^  fei^jc^n 
3at)rc  alt;  nur  mcnige  finb 
pcbjc^n  bis  oi^t^c^n,  fciner 
t)on  itjnen  ift  ttcunjc^n.  — 
5)er  3ogling. 


The  teacher  counted:  "one, 
two,  three!"  and  all  the  boys 
darted  off  for  a  race  li^e 
aiTows. 

In  the  temperate  zone,  there 
are  foui'  seasons:  spiing,  sum- 
mer, autumn,  and  Tvinter. 

We  have  five  fingers  on  each 
hand. 

The  week  has  six  working 
daya 

Ancient  Rome  was  situated 
on  seven  hills. 

Our  raihoad  cars  have  eight 
wheels. 

The  number  of  the  Muses  is 
nine. 

The  Christian  Eehgion  re- 
quires the  practice  of  the  ten 
commandments. 

Divine  sei'vice  begins  at 
eleven. 

The  year  has  twelve  months : 
Januaiy,  February,  March, 
Api-il,  May,  June,  July,  August, 
September,  October,  Novem- 
ber, December. 

The  red  omnibus  holds 
thu'teen  }>ei'sons. 

Nioba  hadf  oui-teen  children. 

The  pupils  of  the  school  of 
painting  ai'e  from  fifteen  to 
sixteen  years  old;  only  a  few 
are  from  seventeen  to  eighteen, 
none  of  them  is  nineteen. 


MATERIAL   FOR    CONVERSATION. 


57 


Wt  Jtoatt^ig  3al)ren  ift  je* 
bermartn  in  :l)eutf^(anb  mtlttftr* 

!Der  gebruar  I)at  at^tunbs 
jluanjig  Xac^c,  in  (Scf)aUjal)rcn 
ncununb;^tDan^,ig. 

^er^lpril  \)at  t>tci§ig  Xa^c, 
bcr  iDM  cinunbbrctfjig. 

'Ajk  frangofifdje  5Ifabcmie  lie* 
ftel)t  au'3  tJtctjig  lWitgltebern» 
—  ©a§  mth. 

^cr  ^onig  ^riantog  I)atte 
fttnf5i3  (Sof)ne. 

X)te  Gtunbe  ()at  fc^jig  aJii:^ 
nutcn.  —  ^ie  SO^inute. 

Unfcr  iBitrgermeii'tcr  ift  fleBs 

(v§  c^iebt  in  'Deutfcbjanb  eine 
groile  ^njatjt  tion  ^erfonen,  bie 
oc^t^ig  bi§  neunjig  -3al)re  alt 
ftnb. 

^rei^uttbctt  (Spartaner  fie* 
len  bet  X()ermopi)(ae. 
^©a§3(^^)^  ^}^^  btciTjunbcrts 
funfimbfcd^;^ig  3;:age» 

(5ine  aJinriabe  ift  jc^ntous 
fcnb. 

^Berlin  I)at  iiber  eine  9Wittiott 
(iintt)ot)ner;  bonbon  l}at  bcinat)e 
Dtcr  TOlUoncn. 

1.  ^ertl)oIb  (Srf)marj  Ijat  im 
3a^re  cintaufcnbbtei^uns 
bcrtttt^tjtg  ba§  (Sdjiegputt^er 
erfnnben. 

(5oIumbn§  entbedte  ^Imertfa 
im  Qa\)xc  bict^c^n^unbctts 
jtnciutibncun^ig. 

2.  (Sine  a)ki1  l)at  ^nnbctt 
^fennic^. 

2!ttuf  cnb  'Sc^ritte  madden  cine 
romifc^e  IDJeile.  —  X)er  ^djxitt 


Every  one  in  Germany  is 
subject  at  twenty  years  of  age 
to  military  duty. 

February  has  twenty-eight 
days;  in  leap-year,  twenty- 
nine. 

April  has  thirty  days;  May, 
thii-ty-one. 

The  French  Academy  con- 
sists of  forty  members. 

King  Priam  had  fifty  sons. 

An  hour  lias  sixty  minutes. 

Our  mayor  is  seventy  years 
old. 

There  are  in  Germany  a 
large  number  of  persons  from 
eighty  to  ninety  years  old. 

Three  hundred  Spartans 
fell  at  Thermopylae. 

A  year  has  three  hundred 
and  sixty-five  days. 

A  myriad  is  ten  thousand. 

Berhn  has  over  one  million 
inhabitants;  London  has  al- 
most four  millions. 

Berthold  Schwarz  invented 
gunpowder  in  the  year  1380. 


Columbus  discovered  Amer- 
ica in  1492. 

A  mark  has  one  hundred 
pfennigs. 

A  thousand  paces  make  a 
Roman  mile. 


58 


MATERIAL   rOR   CONVERSATION. 


152—153. 


^cr  ^onlc^  "^at  ttur  cmcn 
Don  ben  ^^crbrcd)ern  bcgnabigt. 

^cr  ^ud)()anbler  l)at  mir  brct 
^ud}cr  ^ngefdjidt,  obc^teid)  id) 
nur  bicfc^  cine  bcftcllt  i)abe. 

9J^it  tin  unb  5iuan3ig  Qal]^ 
ren  ift  nun  niitnbic;. 

302em  Hcincr  ^mber  lemt 
jetjt  ba$  ^inmalcing. 

5Bir  Waxtn  ade  gefnnb  an 
^orb  mit  5[n^5na^me  gracicr 
obcr  brcicr  ^:noncn. 

13>av3  «i:b  bc5  iWaIer§  @d)ctb^ 
Icr  ftcdt  bie  (^cbnrt  bcr  brci 
©ration  Dor.  —  ^ie  ©rajte. 

^eibc  ^arteien  bcanfprni^ten 
in  ber  Icl^tcn  (Bd)iad)t  ben  <Sieg. 
—  '5Me  i^artct. 

S^er  vSto(5  ber  (Eomelia  toa^ 
ren  i^re  bciben  @of)ne. 

5}er  Coffer  nnb  bie9?eifetafd)e 
nnfere^  (^V.aftc^  finb  angetom^ 
men;  ber  S^iener  l)at  betbc§  auf 
feine  (^tube  gctragen. 


Tlie  king  lias  pardoned  but 
one  of  the  criminala 

Tlie  bookseller  lias  sent  me 
three  books,  although  I  order- 
ed only  this  one. 

At  twenty  one,  one  is  of  age. 


My  little  brother  is  now 
leaiTiing  the  multii^Hcation 
table. 

We  -were  all  well  on  boai'd 
with  the  exception  of  two  or 
three  persons. 

The  picture  of  Scheidler, 
the  artist,  represents  the  birth 
of  the  three  Graces. 

Both  sides  claimed  the  vic- 
tory in  the  last  battle. 

The  pride  of  Cornelia  was 
her  two  sons. 

The  trunk  and  satchel  of 
our  guest  have  arrived;  the 
sers^ant  has  caiTied  both  to  his 
room. 


158  —  159, 


SJ^eiftcr  S)ck  Don  ^itrnbercj 
mad)te  bie  ctjic  2:a)(^ennf)r. 

!Da^  ^iDeitc,  Diertc  nnb  fcd)jtc 
Snd)  ber  5(eneibe  finb  bie  fc^iin* 
ften  be^  ganjen  @ebid)t-5. 

Qd)  tcfe  ben  brittcn  2:ei(  Don 
;^d)iaer^3  Sallenftein. 
^cr  'pap ft  ©regor  ber  ^k^ 


Master  Hele  of  Niimberg 
made  the  fii'st  watch. 

The  second,  fourth,  and 
sixth  books  of  the  Eneid  are 
the  most  beautiful  of  the  whole 
poem. 

I  am  reading  the  third  part 
of  Schiller's  WaUenstein. 

Pope  Gregory  YIl  excom- 


MATERIAL   FOR    CONVERSATION. 


59 


bente  ()at  ben  tatfei\getnrid)  hen 
^iertctt  in  ben  -53ann  getl)an. 

^'m  arfjtcn  3^^)^'i)^tibert  be* 
bro()ten  bie  5(raber  granfreid), 

T)k  ^ren^^^itge  begannen  tm 
etftctt   -3^^^'^}^^^c^^-  —  ®^i* 

3Sir  leben  im  neun3e^ntcti 
3at)rt)unbert 

S^er  gorfter  @tb()r  i}at  feinen 
^nnbertftcit  ©cburt^tag  ge^ 
feiert,  feiii  'ool)n  hm  Dierunb^ 
ficbsigftcn. 


municated  the  emperor  Hen- 

ly  IV. 

In  the  eightli  century,  the 
Arabs  threatened  France. 

The  crusades  began  in  the 
eleventh  century. 

We  hve  in  the  nineteenth 
century. 

Stohr,  the  forester,  has  celeb- 
rated his  hundredth  birthday; 
his  son,  his  seventy-fourth. 


160, 


1.  ®oet()c  befud)te  ^talien 
3tt)eimoI. 

®er  getnb  mad)te  einen  brei^ 
maligctt  togriff  auf  unfere 
iSd)an3en.  —  ^le  (Bd)an]c, 

2.  fcer  Slrreftant  !)at  einen 
t)icrfa(5crt  ©iebftal)!  begangen. 

^rft  nad)  t)ic(fad)Ctt  S(ben- 
tenern  errei(^te  £)bt)|feu§  feine 
§eimat  —  4)a§  Slbentener. 

®er  S^^unnel  !ann  in  ^ttiei 
S'a^ren  nnmoglii^^  ferttg  fetn; 
bie  boppelte  ^t-'it  ift  h^M  erfor- 
ber(id). 

3.  Unfcr  ©iirtner  t}at  hvcU 
crlcl  33eil(^en,  blane,  tDei^e  unb 
gelbe. 

3Der  M\cv  9^ero  beflecJte  fci* 
nen  9^anten  bnrd)  alter  lei 
@d)anbt{)aten,  —  !Dte  '^^^at 


Goethe  visited  Italy  twice. 


The  enemy  made  a  thrice 
repeated  attack  upon  our  re- 
doubts. 

The  prisoner  has  committed 
a  fourfold  theft. 

Not  until  after  many  ad- 
ventures did  Ulysses  reach  his 
home. 

The  tunnel  cannot  possibly 
be  finished  in  two  years;  twice 
that  time  is  necessary  for  it. 

Our  gardener  has  three 
kinds  of  violets;  blue,  white, 
and  yellow. 

The  emperor  Nero  dis- 
graced his  name  by  all  sorta 
of  infamies. 


^ie  Wdh&jcn  gtngen  je  ^iDei 
unb  3tt)ei  in  ber  $ro;^effion,  bie 
^naben  jc  \3ier  unb  t)ier. 


16L 

The  guls  walked  two  by 
two  in  the  procession  ^  the 
boys,  four  by  four. 


60 


MATERLUL.  FOR  CONVERSATION. 


3e  bcr  f  iinfte  SD^ann  bc^  sct)n^ 
ten  9?enimente^5  fie(  beim  ^^n^ 
griff  auf  bie  erfte  (Sd)an3C.  — 
X)a^  D^egiment. 


Every  fifth  man  of  the 
tenth  regiment  fell  in  the  at- 
tack  on  the  first  redoubt. 


162. 


■    1.  T)ariu§  bot  bem  5llepn* 
ber  bie  §d(fte  feine^  9f?eic^e§ 

QTt. 

©n  5lc^te(  t)on  jtDattjig  i[t 
jtpci  imb  ctn  l^olb. 

I)ie  -Siiger  frf)offen  ein  \)aU 
bc§  ^u^enb  ijafen. 

iibcr  giuci  ^rittcl  bcr  (Srb* 
oberflddje  fiub  mit  Saffer  be^ 
berft. 

(Sin  5Biertcl  ober  ein  giinftcl 
unferer  ^eudlferung  finb  3r* 
lanber, 

2.  ^ein  35atcr  l)at  ba^s  §au^ 
bc^3  Oberften  nic^t  gcfauft,  benn 
erftenS  ift  e^  nid)t  gro^  genug, 
unb  gtneitcnS  gefallt  i()m  bie 
i^agc  nid}U 


Darius  offered  Alexander 
one-half  of  his  kingdom. 

One-eighth  of  twenty  is  two 
and  a  half. 

The  hunters  shot  half  a 
dozen  hai'es. 

Over  two-thii'ds  of  the 
earth's  suii ace  is  covered  with 
water. 

One-fourth  or  one-fifth  of 
our  population  is  Irish. 

My  father  has  not  bought 
the  colonels  house,  for  in  the 
first  place,  it  is  not  lai-ge 
enough,  and  in  the  second 
place,  the  situation  does  not 
please  him. 


163. 


^d)  \mv  brct  nnb  ctn  ^atbe§ 
3al)r  iu  'Dcutfcfilanb,  mein 
Srnber  nnr  britt^aCb  3-"i^^^- 

SBir  gingen  Uicrt^atb  dJlcU 
Icn  ;^u  guB.  bie  iibrigcn  anberts 
f^M  3)M(en  fuhren'wir,  —  !©ie 
iU^eile. 


I  was  in  Germany  for  three 
years  and  a  half;  my  brother, 
only  two  years  and  a  half. 

We  went  three  miles  and  a 
half  on  foot;  the  remaining 
one  mile  anJl  a  half  w^e  drove. 


^'ie  3ogtingc  bc3  ?t)ceunt6 
frix^ftiicfen  um  jlcbcit  lUr  unb 
effen  um  ein  Ugt  su  3Jlittag. 


164. 

The  pupils  of  the  lyceum 
breakfast  at  seven  o'clock,  and 
dine  at  one. 


MATERIAL   FOR    CONVERSATION. 


Gl 


(5^  toav  gcrabe  urn  elf,  aU 
wiv  ben  erften  geuerldrm  l^or^ 
ttn;  ttm  cin0  [tanb  ba^  Zljcakv 
in  ^(ammen,  —  !Dte  glamme, 

3rf)  ^atte  bcm  ^edncr  einge^ 
f(i)drft,  mid)  (urn)  ciit  85icrtcl 
ouf  fed)§  gu  iDcden;  \tatt  beffen 
tDedfte  er  tnic^  (nm)  irci  Skiers 
tcl  auf  fec^§,  unb  fiinf  9Kintt? 
ten  itttt^  fieben  mugte  ict)  am 
^a{)nl)of  fcin. 

^^  luar  jc^n  SWinittcn  titit 
SJ^Itternadit,  at§  uni*  ben  erften 
(5rbfto6H)af)mat)mcn.  ttm  ^alh 
tin  U|r  be^  9JJor(jen§  ftitrgte 
bte  ^tr^e  ein.  —  S3te  aJlinute; 
ber  ^Jiorgen. 

^er  Ic^te  S^^G^  ^^^  ^^^  ^^t^* 
tigfte  t)on  alien,  tt)et(  er  genan 
angebcn  fonnte,  am  (or  ben) 
itii'elJtelten  er  hen  ^Ingeflagten 
gefel)en  Ijatte, 


It  was  just  eleven  when  we 
heard  the  first  alarm  of  fire; 
at  one,  the  theatre  was  in 
flames. 

I  had  enjoined  the  waiter  to 
'  call  me  at  a  quarter  past  five ; 
instead  of  that  he  caUed  me 
at  a  quarter  to  six,  and  I  had 
to  be  at  the  station  at  five 
minutes  past  seven. 

It  was  ten  minutes  before 
midnight,  when  we  noticed 
the  first  shock.  At  half-past 
twelve  in  the  morning  the 
church  fell  in. 

The  last  witness  was  the 
most  important  of  aU  because 
he  could  teU  exactly  on  what 
day  of  the  month  he  had  seen 
tli3  defendant. 


^fla^oHeon  ber  ^rfte  ftarb  ben 
(or  am)  fiinften  ^al  1821. 

S)ie  (gct)tad)t  bet  ^ena  fanb 
ben  bicrje^ntcnOtober  1806 

ftatt 


165. 

Napoleon  the  First  died  on 
the  fifth  of  May,  1821. 

The  battle  of  Jena  took 
place  on  the  fourteenth  of 
October,  1806. 


166. 


•-3:^  !ann  um  3el)n  Ut)r  nldjt 
in  ber  ^tbliot^ef  fetn,  ba  id)  gu 
biefer  (Stnnbe  auf  ber  ^oft  tn 
mttrtet  metbe. 

:Dae  ©c^log  im  Salbe  luttb 
t)on  einer  italienifc^en  ©rdfin 
htto^nU 

Sir  tnitfjen  ^a^c  \tti)cn, 
bis  n)ir  abgclojl  toetben. 


I  cannot  bo  at  the  library 
at  ten,  as  I  am  expected  at  the 
post-office  at  that  hour. 

The  castle  in  the  forest  is 
inhabited  by  an  Italian  coun- 


We  must  stand  watch  until 
we  are  relieved. 


62 


>L\TERL\L    FOR    CONYERS.\TIO>:. 


T)cv  S3orftanb  fcf)ricb  mtr: 
„<Bk  tocrbcn  crfu^t  ^itn!t(id) 
urn  ficbeti  Ut)r  gu  er)cf)einen." 

-3rt  $Rug(anb  toctticn  bie  })o* 
liti)rf)en  ^erbred)er  nac^  ©ibi* 
rieit  gcfii^itft. 

^di  tour  be  ;juerft  Don  mct^ 
Tiem  S?ater  iintcrtii^tct. 

^orintt)  tourbe  Don  ben  ^6^ 
mem  jcrjiort. 

©ie  ©cbritbcr  ®untr)er  tours 
ben  ntc^t  ertod^It,  meil  fie  fiir 
^c^ublifancr  gcl)a(ten  lourben. 

^c^  bin  l)eute  morgen  eingec 
f^ricbcn  toorbcn. 

S)ie  SHaoevei  ijl  in  alien  cioi^ 
fifierten  !i3anbern  obgefr^afft 
toorben. 

„Q6)  i^abe  Q^mn  ;;u  ntelben, 
ha^  (^ie  Dom  ^aifcr  begnobigt 
toorbcn  flub,"  fagte  ber  Herfer* 
meifter  gum  ©efangcnen. 

SDie  ^tragen  firib  burc^  bie 
glut  bcrborbcrt  toorbcn. 

©ne  2Jhu^  —  fo  ergdf)tt  bie 
gobct  —  befreite  eincn  ^oraen, 
bcr  in  einem  S^e^e  gefongcn 
toorbcn  to^r. 

IWeinc  ^(tem  fonnten  gran 
9?id)tcr  nid)t  einlaben,  tr»ci(  fie 
i()r  nid)t  borgcftcttt  toorben 
toarcn. 

3i)  tocrbc  morgen  cjomis 
nicrt  toerben. 

3:a^  :4:)enhna(  bc5  .Qanglere 
toirb  iibermorgenent^iittt  toers 
ben. 

3=1^  !ann  meinem  ®aft  nid)t 
ratcn  ab^,ureifen,  id)  tourbe  migs 
Ucrftanben  toerben. 

^rofcffor   ^ietric^   ift   ent* 


The  chairman  Tvrote  to  me: 
"You  are  requested  to  appear 
punctually  at  seven  o'clock." 

In  Russia,  political  offenders 
are  sent  to  Siberia. 

I  was  first  taught  by  my 
father. 

Corinth  was  destroyed  by 
the  Komans. 

The  brothers  Giinther  were 
not  elected  because  they  were 
looked  on  as  repubhcans. 

I  was  matiiculated  this 
morning. 

Slavery  has  been  abolished 
in  all  civilized  countries. 

*'I  have  to  announce  to  3-0U 
that  you  have  been  pardoned 
by  the  emperor,"  said  the 
gaoler  to  the  prisoner. 

The  roads  have  been  spoiled 
by  the  flood. 

A  mouse,  according  to  the 
fable,  rescued  a  hon  which 
had  been  caught  in  a  nei 

My  parents  could  not  invite 
!Mrs.  Richter  because  they  h^d 
not  been  introduced  to  her. 

I  shall  be  examined  to- 
mon-ow. 

The  monument  of  the 
chancellor  ^-ill  be  unveiled  the 
day  after  to-morrow. 

I  cSkunot  advise  my  guest  to 
leave;  I  should  be  misunder- 
stood. 

Professor  Dietrich  is  deter- 


MATERIAL    FOR    CONVERSATION. 


63f, 


fc^foffett  feme  Seljre  nidjt  ^u 
tribcrrufcn ;  er  itjctg,  t^a^  er 
fonft  t)on  alien  feincn  (Stuben== 
ten  bcrkffcrt  tocrbcn  toilrbc. 

S^cr  ^erbredjcr  tniirbe  bcs 
gnobigt  triarbctt  fcin,  \x>tnn  or 
?Reue  Qcjeigt  l)atte, 

rrllnfer  ^ngriff  ouf  bie  ftettcn 
$o(}ett  tni^icitij],"  Jagte  bcr 
Dberft,  „aber  Wk  toarcn  gctas 
belt  itjorbcn,  wcnn  voir  xlyi 
nidjt  gewagt  I)attenJ'  —  Xk 
§o()e. 

S!)ic  gort§  mtttcn  friiljcr  gcs 
nommcit  marbcn,  locnn  \mv 
nnfere  ^anonen  inv  ©telle  gc^ 
I)abt  l^dttcn. 

S)a§  ^acfct  mn^  foglctd)  auf 
bie  "poft  gctragcn  Uicrbcn. 


mined  not  to  retract  his  teach- 
ings; he  knows  that  he  -would 
otherwise  be  abandoned  by 
all  his  students. 

The  criminal  would  have 
been  pardoned  if  he  had 
shown  repentance. 

"Our  attack  on  the  stee23 
heights  failed,"  said  the  col- 
onel, "but  we  would  have  been 
blamed  if  we  had  not  risked 
it." 

The  forts  would  have  been 
taken  sooner  if  we  had  had 
our  cannon  on  the  spot. 

The  i^arcel  must  at  once  be 
taken  to  the  post-ofiice. 


167. 


„^fe  Seitiire  outer  S^oucKcn/' 
fagt  'iprofeffor  (Sc^mibt,  „\~t 
alien  ju  cm^fc^lcn." 

Unfcre  ^Regterung  macl)t  neue 
9?uj'tungcn,  tt)ci(  ein  balbigcr 
^riebenig]'(i)tn§  nic^t  ju  crttittrs 
itn  x\t  —  3^ie  $Rii[tnng. 

1.  !Die  35it^^(5  entt)dtt  iBc* 
rid)te  iibcr  bie  in  (Suro^^a  ^u  crs 
l:iartcnbc  SSci^^enernte* 

©ie  @c[unbt)cit  ift  ein  i:ber= 
am  1)0^  5tt  jc^a^enbcS  ®nt. 


"The  reading  of  good  nov- 
els," says  Professor  Schmidt, 
"is  to  be  recommended  to 
every  one." 

Our  government  is  making 
new  preparations  because  a 
speedy  conclusion  of  peace  is 
not  to  be  expected. 

The  newspaper  contains  re- 
ports on  the  wheat-crop  to  be 
expected  in  Europe. 

Health  is  a  blessing  to  be 
rated  exceedingly  liigh. 


^ie  le^te  9^ad)ric^t  'com 
^rieg§fd)au|3la^  ift,  bag  bie  Qn^ 
bianer  aefd)(agen  finb  nn\>  \)on 
nnferemeitereit)erfotgt  mcrbcn. 


168. 

The  last  news  from  the 
theatre  of  war  is  that  the 
Indians  are  beaten,  and  are 
pursued  by  our  cavalry. 


64 


MATERIAL   FOR    CONVERSATION. 


^(^  tt)ir  on  ha^  T)ampffd)iff 
famen,  inurbc  gcrabe  ber  ^liifcr 
gend)tct,  fo  ba|l  mir  feiiten  Sib- 
fd)icb  Don  unfern  greunbcu  ndy 
men  fonntcn. 

^ie  erbeuteten  .^anonen  idq- 
reu  unfern  (Solbaten  ju  nid)tv^ 
niifee,  lueit  fie  fdmtlic^  Demagelt 
waxtn. 

5Die  ^uefteKuncj  tuirb  Imlb 
gefd)Ioffen  mcrbcri,  unit  f.1)on 
biemeiften^iiber  ucrfauft  finti. 
—  Da^  ^ilb. 


Wlien  we  reached  the  steam- 
er, the  anchor  was  just  being 
raised,  so  that  we  could  not 
take  leave  of  our  friends. 

The  captured  guns  were  of 
no  use  to  oui*  soldiers  because 
they  were  all  spiked. 

The  exhibition  will  soon  be 
closed  because  most  of  the 
pictui'es  are  akeady  sold. 


160  — lYL 


(S8  ifl  fcincm  romlfdjcn  ^rief^ 
ter  crlttubt  ^,u  l)eiraten. 

©S  ifl  bcr  ^d)ilbn)a(i)c  bcrs 
Botcn  mit  hen  5>oritberge^enben 
3U  rcbcn. 

T^ie  Qcftrigc  5lbcnbc5efellfd)aft 
\oav  )cljrtebl)aft;  c§  tiiurbc  gcs 
fungcn  nnb  gcton^t. 

9Jccinem  Onfe(  nefdllt  e§  nic^t 
tm  ^^erein;  eS  ttiirb  ibm  moiel 
^oUtiftrt. 

„Ste  ^ci^cn  Sic,  nnb  trie 
dt  finb  (^ie?"  fracjte  mic^  ber 
il^ireftor. 

§erobot  Ijeigt  bcr  35ater  ber 
®e)djtcf)tc. 


Xo  Roman  priest  is  allowed 
to  maiTv. 

The  sentinel  is  forbidden  to 
talk  with  the  passei-s-by. 

Last  night's  party  was  very 
hvely;  there  was  singing  and 
dancing. 

My  uncle  does  not  like  it 
in  the  club ;  there  is  too  much 
pohtical  talk  for  him. 

"AMiat  is  your  name,  and 
how  old  are  you?"  asked  the 
director  of  me. 

Herodotus  is  called  the 
father  of  liistors'. 


172  —  173. 


3d)  cttnitctc  wt^  ben  Xenor 
fdjon  einmal  getjort  gu  t)abcn. 
„3BennI)u2)ii^  entfi^ncgctt 

fannft  nac^  (Suropa  gu  fom= 
men,"  fd)reibt  meine  S^antc,  ,Jo 
\m\i  id)  ^ir  gem  t>a^  ^^cifcgcib 
fdiicfen." 


I  remember  to  have  heai'd 
the  tenor  once  before. 

"If  you  can  make  up  your 
mind  to  come  to  Europe," 
wiites  my  aunt,  "  I  wiU  take 
pleasure  in  sending  money  for 
your  traveling  cx]3ensG3. 


[ATERI.\li    FOn    CON\TERSATION. 


65 


!\(h  nld)t  it)ot)(  bei  un^;  er  fc^nt 
i($  na^  fetnett  Bergen. 

3Kir  tounbcrn  Utt§,ba§  unfre 
@afte  fd)on  l)eute  eittnctroffen 
finb,  aber  iDir  frcucii  itn§  um 
fo  mc(}i\ 

^ie  ^aucrtt  in  (Suropa  jinb 
unpfriebcn;  fie  Bcflagcn  M 
iiber  ben  (Steuerbrucf.  —  'i)cv 
-Waiter. 

^Sc^ctt  Sic  flt^,  mettic 
grcunbe/'  fagtc  ber  ^mfibent, 
al^  wir  i()m  bie  Slbreffe  iiber* 
reid)t  fatten. 

Qd)  ()abe  mi^  nii^t  um  beu 
^ret^  fiemorbctt. 

^Si^amc  bii^/'  fagte  bie 
SD^uttcr  ^u  Sia)clm,  M  l)aft 
iDtt^  aig  Dcrftcflt." 

iU^cia  S3ater  beftnbet  fidj  ntd)t 
ti3ol)l,  cr  l)at  flr^  ftarf  crtaltct. 

^Mr  l)aben  un§  dcrf^iitct, 
iDeihuiriinS  tmSalbc  dctlaus 
fctt  l)abcn. 

„Gie  f)abeTt  fit^  3U  fe()r  auf 
3I)r  gute^  @Ut(J  ucrlafjcn/' 
fagte  ber  S^aminator  sum  ^au* 
bibaten.  —  ®er  ^aubibat. 

SBir  ii^crben  unS  ac()t  ^age 
1)tcr  nuf^altcn. 

„(Sie  luerbeu  flt^  batb  an  un^ 
fer  21ima  gcmo^ucn,"  \ac^tt  tin 
QUtmittiger  @^fimo  3U  uuferu 
yJorbpotfa^rern. 

^d)  gcttouc  mir  ntd)t,  btefe 
©onate  t)om  -^(att  ^u  fpielen; 
ic^  (telle  fie  mir  fcf)r  fd)Uier  t)or. 

§crr  9}^ebeu  ift  lDal)ttfiunig 
getnorbeu;  er  bilbet  fi^  tin  ber 
reic^ftc  3Jlauu  ber  ^e(t  3U  feiu. 


The  young  Swiss  does  not 
feel  comfortable  among  us; 
lie  longs  for  liis  mountains. 

We  are  surprised  that  our 
guests  have  arrived  to-day, 
but  we  are  aH  the  more  re- 
joiced. 

The  peasants  in  Europe  are 
discontented;  they  complain 
of  heavy  taxation. 

"Sit  down,  my  friends," 
said  the  President,  when  we 
had  presented  liim  the  address. 

I  have  not  competed  for  the 
prize. 

"Shame  on  you,"  said  his 
mother  to  WiUiam,  "you have 
been  very  deceitful." 

My  father  is  not  well,  he 
has  caught  a  heavy  cold. 

We  are  late  because  we  lost 
ourselves  in  the  woods. 

"You  have  been relyinfif  too 
much  on  your  good  luck," 
said  the  examiner  to  the  can- 
didate. 

We  shall  stay  here  for  eight 
days. 

"You  will  soon  get  ac- 
customed to  our  climate,"  said 
a  goodnatured  Eskimo  to  our 
North  Pole  expedition. 

I  do  not  trust  myself  to  play 
this  sonata  at  sight ;  I  imagine 
it  to  be  very  difficult. 

Mr.  Meden  has  become  in- 
sane; he  imagines  to  be  the 
richest  man  in  the  world. 


66 


JtlATERIAL    FOR    CON^TIRSATION. 


3c^I)abc  mir  dotgettommcn 

ncidjfte^  ^al)V  uacl)  3^^^^^^^  l^ 

Qdj  tt)ei6  bie  5lbreffc  be§  cttG- 
Ii|d)ett  ©eiftlic^en  nirf)t,  aber  id) 
tDerbe  mir  9Rii^e  gcben  fie  gu 
erfal)ren,  —  X)cv  @ciftUd)e. 


I  liave  determined  to  go  to 
Italy  next  year. 

I  do  not  know  the  address 
of  the  Eno^hsh  clergyman,  but 
I  shall  take  i^ains  to  iind  it 
oui 


Additional  examples  to  §  172. 


gc^t  guritcf,  lucif  er  fic§  urn 
nici)t^  befiimmert. 

^ie  'iRcd)nuTti3  bc§  Sremben 
Belief  fir§  auf  taufenb  Wlavt. 

d)lcm  ©roBeltem  erfteuen 
fliij  noc^  immer  einer  guten  (^e= 
funbl)eit. 

dMnt  mvLtkv  cr^olt  fi^ 
nur  langfam  Don  ifjrem  gicber. 

^d)  ^ahc  mtdj  iiberaU  nac^ 
?^rau  .^o()ler  ertunbigt,  bod) 
tami  jtr^  niemanb  entjinnen 
i)on  il)r  gcl)ort  gu  liaben. 

DJ^an  fagt  t»OTt  griebric^  bem 
©ro^cn,  bag  er  fl^  nie  im  dla^ 
men  eiue^  ^i^olbateti  irtte.  — 
'^cv  9^ame. 

Der  alte  §ufe(b  lebt  in  tief^ 
fter  5lrmut;  er  !ann  nid)t  meljr 
arbeitenunb  fri^ttmt  fli^  3U  bet^ 
te(n. 

(Sie  fbnnen  fH  t)oIIfommen 
auf  3^ren  gii{)rcr  tjerlaflen. 

^er  ^bnig  l)at  fid^  geioeigert 
baS  Urteil  gu  unterfd)reibcn. 


The  business  of  Mr.  Rober 
is  declining  because  he  attends 
to  nothing  liimself. 

The  stranger's  bill  amount- 
ed to  one  thousand  marks. 

My  gi-and-pai'ents  ai'e  still 
enjoying  good  health. 

My  mother  is  recovering  but 
slowly  from  her  fever. 

I  have  inquired  everj^where 
for  ^Mrs.  Kohler,  but  no  one 
can  recollect  having  heard  of 
her. 

It  is  said  of  Frederick  the 
Great  that  he  was  never  mis- 
taken in  the  name  of  a 
soldier. 

Old  Hufeld  hves  in  the 
deepest  poverty;  he  cannot 
work  any  longer,  and  is  asham- 
ed to  beg. 

You  can  rely  to  the  utmost 
on  your  guide. 

The  king  has  refused  to 
sisrn  the  warrant 


lU. 


!:Da3  9^oI)r  Biegt  fic^. 
£opemihi^  Iet)rte  guerft,  bag 
bie  ($rbe  fir^  Bcmegt, 


The  reed  bends. 
Copernicus  first  taught  that 
the  earth  moves. 


MATERIAIi   FOR    CONVEESATION. 


67 


1,  Sir  finb  entfc^Ioffeu  un^ 
f:r  $au^  ^u  Derfaufen,  fobalb 
f4  cin  ^ciufer  ftnbct. 


We  are  determined  to  sell 
our  house  as  soon  as  a  pur- 
cliaser  is  found. 


177. 


1.  (B^  fi^ncit  fo  ftar!  i;t  hen 
5l(pcn,  bag  bte  ^oftoerbinbung 
unterbrodjctt  x]t, 

Senn  c§  nicl}t  tcgnct,  ^irb 
bae  Settrenneti  morgett  \tatu 
finb  en. 

2.  ^§  munbcrt  ttit§,  bag 
bcr  S3crbrec^er  begnabigt  wov^ 
ben  ift. 

,r@3  ft  cut  tntcj,  bag  (gie  fo 
t)crtrancn§t)olI  3U  mtr  t'ommcn," 
fagte  ber  ^farrcr. 

m  tfjut  mir  Icib,  \)m  S5or^ 
trag  iiber  ben  ^l)onograp^en 
ntri)t  geljcirt  gu  ^aben. 

3.  !4:)er'23atlent!(aat,  bag  eS 
i5mfcl)r5ci6ifi. 

3^c^  fonnte  gcftern  mlji  in 
bte  ^erfammlung  {ommen;  c0 
mar  mir  nid}t  ttio^t. 

4.  ^0  fcpt  unferm  !^lcncr 
ntd)t  an  gntem  SBiKen,  aber  an 
(Srfa()rnng. 

Notes.  —  a.  25ir  tDoIjntcn  tm 
§ote(,  bl^  c8  ung  gclttng  einc 
gnte  $nDattDoI)nung  3U  finben. 

'iPo(t)frate^  filrditcte  ben  9^eib 
ber  ©fitter,  tneit  i^m  al(e  fetne 
Unterne^mungen  glilrftett. 


lb  is  snowin;^  so  liard  in  the 
Alps  that  postal  communica- 
tion is  interrupted. 

If  it  does  not  rain,  the  race 
■wiU  take  place  to-morrow. 

We  wonder  that  the  criminal 
has  been  pardoned. 

"I  am  glad  that  you  come 
to  me  so  confidentially,"  said 
the  parson. 

I  am  sorry  not  to  have  heard 
the  lecture  on  the  phonograph. 

The  patient  complains  of 
feeling  very  f everisli. 

I  could  not  come  to  the 
meeting  yesterday;  I  was  not 
well. 

Our  servant  is  not  wanting 
in  good  will,  but  in  experience. 

"We  lived  in  the  hotel  until 
we  succeeded  in  finding  a 
good  private  lodging. 

Polycrates  feared  the  envy 
of  the  Gods  because  he  was 
successful  in  all  his  enter- 
prises. 


179. 


^n  ben  SSereinigten  (Staaten 
gtcit  eg  feinen  ^beL 


Tliere  i^  no  anstocracy  in 
the  "United  States. 


63 


MATERIAL   FOR   COXVEKSA'HO::. 


S5or  bctt  3^ttcn  bc^  gucitKu^^ 
gaB  e0  nod)  fcine  ^irfc^en  in 
(£uropa.  —  SMe  ^irfd)e. 

(S^,(^icl)t  bic[c§  Sal)i*  fet)r  ft»C:^ 
nig  2ipfc(  bet  un5,  Uial)rcnb  c0 
»origc^  ^aljr  fcljr  Diele  gcgcBcn 
Jet. 

Si^ic  Sm5cr  t)erfict)em,  bap 
c?  !):ucr  t){c(e  3:raul)cn  gcBctt 
tu:r!).  —  S^ie  Straubc. 

1.  dl  ift  leinc  Zxntc  md)V 
\:i  hzv  glafdje. 

^3  finb  3tT)ct  ©errcn  uub 
3:yci  '^amen  im  (gmpfanojim* 
ncr. 


Before  the  times  of  Lucul- 
lus,  there  were  no  cherries  in 
Europe. 

Ai^ples  are  scarce  with  us 
this  year,  while  last  year  there 
were  j)leuty  of  them. 

The  vine- dressers  assei-t  that 
there  "wiil  be  plenty  of  gi-apes 
this  year. 

There  is  no  more  inV  in  the 
bottle. 

There  are  two  gentlemen 
and  two  ladies  in  the  paiior. 


181. 


1.  T)ic  Scild^eu  in  bcm  ^ou* 
qi:t  flnJi  in  nnferem  ©artcn 
fjciDarfii'cn.  —  !Da^3  SSe{(cf)en; 
ba^  bouquet. 

Tlcinc  iUhitter  i  Jl  tJoKtommcn 
gencfcn. 

S^cmtfto!Ie6  i|l  in  ber  S3cr* 
tanuung  ^eftorbcn. 

>Dcr  .^auptmann  'Biolk  ijl 
feinci  SBnnben  cricgen.  —  !^ie 

2.  ©eftern  Un  Id)  7,vl  mcU 
nrn  Dntel  in  ber  SBorftabt  ge* 
fi^rcn. 

9)2etne  (gitem  finb  gan3  pio^ 
M)  nai)  ^aUt  abgereift. 

S^cr  ^onig  ifl  nad)  3Jiitnd)en 
juriicfgctc^rt. 

•iprofeffor  tnnje  ifl  t)on^re§^ 
ben  nac^  ^cip^ig  gc^,ogen. 

Sir  bleiben  I)eute  gu  ^au\c, 
VDtii  nnfcr  3>atcr  angcfonuucu 
ifl. 


The  violets  in  the  bouquet 
grew  in  our  gai'den. 


My  mother  has  completely 
recovered. 

Themistocles  died  in  exile. 

Captain  Stolle  has  suc- 
ciunbed  to  lus  wounds. 

I  yesterday  drove  to  my 
uncle's  in  the  suburbs. 

My  parents  left  for  Halle 
quite  suddenly. 

The  king  has  returned  to 
Munich. 

Professor  Kunze  has  moved 
fi'om  Dresden  to  Leipsic. 

AYe  are  staying  at  home  to- 
day because  oui'  father  has 
anived. 


MATERIAL   FOR   COITV^ESATIO:?. 


G9 


S^  !attn  feln  SSaffer  i5ici)cn, 
tncit  bcr  (Winter  in  ben  ^runneu 
gefallcn  ift. 

a.  ^tcj:anber  boti  §umbotbt 
^ai  fe^r  t)tc(  c^cretft. 

SDie  ®c[ellfc^aft  ifl  narf)  bcm 
5Il)cnbc[fctt  fpajieren  gegatigen. 
—  ©a^  ^beubeffen. 

8.  Sj)  ^irt  focbcn  \>tm  ^tqte 
auf  bcr  (Strafe  bcgcgnct. 

!Dcr  ^onig  ift  nur  bi§  j^um 
j^tDciten  5l!t  gebliebcn.  —  Der 
2l!t. 

^a3  S5or!  ift  un^,ufriebcn, 
vocii  h:z  geuent)er!e  nic^t  ge(un* 
geii  fln^. 

a.  !iDie  *iPoIi^,ei  ift  bem  ®au* 
ner  bi3  nac^  'prag  gefolgt;  bort 
abcr  l)at  fie  fcine  (Spur  t)cr^ 
lorett. 

9tubo(|3^  mug  gu  §aufe  btel* 
ben,  tt)ei(  cr  fciner  SDwtter  nidjt 
gefolgt  ^at. 


I  cannot  draw  any  watei' 
because  the  bucket  has  fallen 
into  the  well. 

Alexander  Ton  Humboldt 
traveled  extensively. 

The  company  took  a  walk 
after  supper. 

I  have  just  met  the  physi- 
cian in  the  street. 

The  king  remained  only 
until  the  second  act. 

The  people  are  discontent- 
el  because  the  fireworks  did 
not  succeed. 

The  police  followed  the 
sharper  as  far  as  Prague,  but 
lost  there  his  track. 

Balph  must  stay  at  home 
because  he  did  not  obey  his 
mother. 


182. 


"?Profcffor  iScI)ring  Ijat  Ijcutc 
in  feinen  33orlefungen  itbcr  Xa^ 
citu^  fortgefat)rc:t. 

!^cr  ©oftor  ift  nid)t  mel}r  ha, 
er  ift  fortgcfaI)reu. 

(g^  ift  fo  !alt  bet  un6,  ha^  mu 
fere  ^runnen  gefroren  finti.  — 
iDet  ^runnen. 

^6  tt)ar  fel)r  latt  im  (Sd)(itten; 
xoit  l^oBcn  an  §anben  unb  ^^'iu 
^eu  gefroren.  —  3Dcr  (Sct)(itten. 


Professor  Beliring  proceed- 
ed to-day  in  his  lectures  on 
Tacitus. 

The  doctor  is  no  longer  here ; 
he  has  driven  away. 

It  is  so  cold  here  that  our 
Avells  are  frozen. 

It  was  verj'  cold  in  the  sleigh ; 
our  hands  and  feet  suffered. 


18.3. 


IBet  un^  ttergc^t  ein  3^ag  tute 
ber  anbere:  t)ormittag8  arbeiten 


"With  us  one  day  passes  like 
another;  we  work  during  the 


70 


MATERIAL   FOR    COX^'ERSATION. 


totr,  nad)mittag§  geljcn  tvxv  fpiv 
giercn,  unb  abcnbS  mad;cn  wix 

„Die  (Sd)tad)t  tear  fc^r  blu* 
tig,"  fd)rcibt  bcr  9)Mjor,  „b{e 
^^ugcln  flocjen  red)tS  uub  liufg; 
id)  fa^  greunbe  unb  gcinbc 
rci^cnmctfc   fallen."  —  ^k 


forenoon,  take  a  -walk  in  the 
afternoon  and  make  visits  in 
the  evening. 

"  The  battle  was  very  bloody," 
writes  the  major,  "the  bullets 
flew  right  and  left;  I  saw 
friends  and  enemies  fall  by 
companies." 


184. 


T)cr  ncuc  (Eontmi^  arbeitet 
\d)v  forofoltig. 

Qm  ©cbirge  gtcl)t  ber  ^cU 
fcnbe  bte  2}^au(ttere  ben  ^^ferben 
»or,  iDeit  fie  tiorp^tigcr  auf* 
treten. 

!Dte  g^adjtigatt  finest  nntcr 
alien  23ogeln  am  fc^dnflcn. 

1.  Um  bte  9?ucf!el)r  ber 
STruppen  gu  fciern,  fd)mU(ftcn 
tic  iDiirncr  hk  @tra|en  oufS 
bcr[d)uienberi)d)flc  mit  glag* 
t\cn  unb  ©uirlanben.  —  ^ie 
glance. 

aCnr  iDurben  t)om  ^on[u( 
aufi  ^oflidjpc  enipfangen. 


The  new  clerk  works  very 
carefully. 

Travelers  in  the  mountains 
prefer  mules  to  horses  because 
they  step  more  carefully. 

Of  all  birds,  the  nightingale 
sings  most  beautifully. 

To  celebrate  the  return  of 
the  troops,  the  citizens  decor- 
ated the  streets  most  profusely 
with  flags  and  festoons  of 
flowers. 

"We  were  most  poHtely  re- 
ceived by  the  consul 


185. 


Unfere  iBiirger  l^oren  gem 
beutfd)c  DJ^ufif,  abcr  nod)  lithtt 
italteni)"d)e;  om  Itebflcn  tjovtn 
fie  bie  italienifc^e  £)pcr. 

SO^clne  SO^uttcr  beftnbet  fid) 
md)t  ganj  toajl;  ouf  bent  ^anbe 
bcfanb  fie  fic^  icjfcr;  am  BcPcit 
ift  e^  ii)X  rva^renb  tl)rcr  euro* 
))aifi^en  vReife  gegangcn* 


Our  people  lilie  GeiTrian 
music,  but  better  still  ItaUan, 
and  prefer  Itahan  opera  to  all 
other  kinds. 

My  mother  is  not  quite 
well;  in  the  country  she  was 
better;  but  at  no  time  was  she 
so  well  as  dming  her  Eiu'opeaa 
tour. 


MATERIAL   FOR   CONVERSATION. 


71 


187. 


tlnf  crc3icT)'6ruttncn  finb  meif^ 
ten^  mit  gineiCvimcnt  t)erfel)cn; 
iDci^renb  ber  ehie  ^inunter^eljt, 
fommt  bcr  anbcre  |crauf. 

'^k  beibcti  ^erbrcdjcr  tnur* 
ben  ftct^  t)on  emanber  Qctrcnnt 
cje^altcn ;  fo  eft  bcr  eine  in  t>m 
@crt(^t§faa(  l^crcinfam,  ipurbe 
bcr  anbcre  l^inan^n^f^^^)^*^* 

%IU  ic\)  an  ble  4:{)itre  Kopfcn 
I)ortc,  vicf  id)  „I|ctctn!''  iDoranf 
cine  wtr  nnbcfannte  (Stimme 
antn)ortcte:  „S<^  !ann  ntd)t 
l^iucin!ommcn,  bie  3:i}ure  ift 
t)crfd)(of[cn." 

(i^  ift  uu^  fitr  tntntcr  Dcrfagt 
jn  tpiffcn,  tuo^et  n)ir  fommen 
nnb  iDo^tn  w'w  Qc()cn. 

„2Bo  tommen  (gie  \^tt,  unb 
Ujo  gcl)en  <Sie  l^in?"  fragte 
mid)  ber  Q'nfpcftor. 

i)cv  ^anqnier  SJletgner  ift 
nad)  granffnrt  g^sogen,  unb 
fein  ^ruber  toirb  anc^  bajin 
gel)  en. 

„Senn  (Sic  Iner^cr  fommen," 
fagte  bcr  ^rebiger  gn  mir,  „\o 
\mh  e§  3^^c^'  "ttidjt  an  gntcn 
^^rennben  fcljlcn*'' 


Our  draw-well^  are  {general- 
ly fitted  witli  two  buckets; 
wliile  the  one  is  going  down, 
the  other  is  coming  up. 

The  two  criminals  were 
constantly  kept  separated  from 
each  other;  whenever  the  one 
entered  the  court-room,  the 
other  was  led  out  of  it 

When  I  heard  a  knocking 
at  the  door,  I  cried — Come  in; 
whereupon  an  unfamiliar  voice 
answered:  *'I  cannot  come  iu: 
the  door  is  locked." 

It  is  forever  denied  to  us  to 
know  whence  we  come  and 
whither  we  go. 

"Whence  do  you  come,  and 
whither  do  you  go  ?"  the  In- 
spector asked  of  me. 

Meissner,  the  banker,  has 
moved  to  Frankfort,  and  his 
brother  wiU  f  oUow  him  thither. 

"If  you  come  here,"  said 
the  preacher  to  me,  "you  will 
not  lack  for  good  friends." 


188. 


^Dle  deputation  ber  ^Irbcitcr 
immfd)t  bem  gabriri)errn  bos 
flit  gn  banfen,  ha^  er  il)nen  ein 
fefejimmer  eingerid^tet  l^at. 

5lpolfo  iuar  barilBct  erjiirnt, 


The  deputation  of  the  work- 
men wish  to  thank  the  pro- 
prietor of  the  estabhshment 
for  having  fitted  up  a  reading 
room  for  them. 

Apollo  was  angry  because 


72 


MATERIAL    FOR   CONVERSATION. 


ha^  \\)m  bie  ©cfd^rten  bc5 
Dbt)[feu^5  fcine  ^linbcr  geraubt 
Ijattcn.  —  5^a^  9imb. 

Unfcr  ©eneral  fel)lte.  t\ntin, 
ba^  cr  ben  gcinb  3U  fpdt  angriff. 

Sir  fd^Iiegen  bie  ©elbtjer* 
Iegenl)eit  bee  SJiajor^  barouS, 
ha^  er  fein  Siebling^pferb  Dcr* 
tauft  l)at. 

!Cie  !iDid)tcr  getDtnnen  bie 
©unft  ber  ^egenteti  oft  bos 
tut(^,  ba^  fie  i()nett  fc^meidjeltu 
—  S^cr  Regent. 

^l)i(ipp  Don  ^^aniett  ivar 
ber  ein3ige,  bcr  emftlic^  borait 
bac^te  hen  STob  bcr  aiZaria 
©tuart  gu  rddjcn. 


tlie  comrades  of  Ul^'sses  had 
stolen  liis  cattle. 

Oiir  (reneral  made  a  mistaJie 
in  attacking  the  enemy  too 
late. 

We  infer  the  pecuniary  em- 
barrassment of  the  major  from 
the  fact  that  he  has  sold  hia 
f  ayorite  horse. 

Poets  often  -win  the  favor 
of  rulers  by  flattering  them. 


Philip  of  Spain  "was  the 
only  one  who  seriously  thought 
of  avenging  the  death  of  ]\Iai'ia 
Stuai't. 


189— 192< 


SS>ir  bcgteitctcn  unfere  grcun* 
be  Big  on0  (gtabttI)or. 
Sir  rubertcu  Vi^  jur  ^riicfc. 

Unfcr  9^a(^bar  Ijat  htn  $ro* 
gc6  t)cr(orcn;  auger  ben  ©e* 
riiit^fofteu  mup  er  2000  ^laxt 
3al)IeTt. 

^cr  patient  Ijai  ha^  Mte 
S3ab  bcr  dr^tliciien  SSerorbnung 
gemd§  gcnommeiu 

^er  ^\\^o[  tooljut  \)tm 
!Dome  3uudd)tt. 

Unfer  SBirt  ertpartct  l^cutc 
obetib  bie  ^bnigiu  neb  ft  eincm 
grogcn  @ef  olge. — SDa^^  ©ef  o(gc. 

'^CT  A^ampfer  (gd)it(er  fing 
anf  l)oI)er  ^ee  geuer  nnb  ging 
ni i  t f  a ;u  t  bcr  Siannf djaf t  nn* 
ter. 


We  accompanied  our  friends 
as  fjir  as  the  city  gate. 

AVe  rowed  as  far  as  the 
bridge. 

Our  neighbor  has  lost  the 
law-suit;  besides  the  costs,  he 
has  to  pay  2000  marks. 

The  patient  has  taken  tlie 
cold  bath  according  to  the 
prescription  of  the  physician. 

The  bishop  lives  next  door 
to  the  cathedral 

Our  landlord,  to-night,  ex- 
pects the  queen  with  a  large 
suite. 

The  steamer  "  Schiller  ** 
caught  fire  on  the  high  seas, 
and  went  down  with  all  her 
crew. 


MATERIAL   FOR    CONVERSATIOIT. 


73 


T)cm  (^k\ti^e  ;;ufoIge  mu^ 
ber  lUiorber  bie  S^obe^ftrafe  er* 
leiben. 

$ciT  3J?enbct  ift  au§  hem 
S3ereme  QU^geftoJen  tnorben, 
n^eit  er  ben  (BtatnUn  guintber 
gel)anbc(t  \)at  —  ^a^  (Btatvit 

®  a  n  f  bcr  Umfidjt  unb  Stier^ 
gte  (Sicero^  iDurbe  tie  ^erfdjtro^ 
rung  ^atittna^  rec^tjeittg  ent= 
bedl 

SOJeincr  5lnfi(J)t  n  a  cf)  (or  na^ 
metner  5lnfid)t)  \d)idt  e^  fi^  fiir 
nn^f  unfcre  @dfte  am  ^aljn^of 
3a  bcgriigciu 

^l lift  at  t  bc§  grul)lmg6  ^a* 
ben  tinr  im  (giiben  nur  eincn 
Derfrit()ten  (^ontmer. 

Unfer  ©arten  liegt  auger* 
I) alb  bet  @tabt,  aber  inner* 
I) alb  bctSJ^auer. 

£)berr)alb  bc§  Safferfall^ 
tft  bic  (gcenene  fet)r  fd)on,  un* 
tcrtjalb  ticgfclBcn  aber  iDirb 
]ie  emformig. 

^ergtuB  ift  binnen  etnct 
8tunbe  um  gn>ci  gug  geftiegen. 

granfreld)  Ucgt  ton  t){cr  au0 
bteSfett^bc0  9?f)em^,!J:)eutfd}* 
lanb  jenf  ett^  bcSfclkn. 

S)cr  ^aifer  ift  feincr  @efunb* 
!)ett  ^alber  nai^  (Sm^  gegan* 
gen. 

S)er  9^ebner  ttjurbc  inm it* 
ten  feincr  9^ebe  feftgenontmen* 

Unfer  fdjonftcr  (gpajiergang 
ift  Icings  bcSgtuffe^. 

gaut  bc8  Urteilgfpru(^§  I)a* 
Un  bcibe  ©eUnquenten  leben^* 
Iangltd)c^  ^iid)tf)au^. 

4)er  gcuerwet)miann  $ein* 


According  to  the  law,  the 
murderer  must  suffer  the 
■penaliy  of  death. 

Mr.  Mendel  has  been  ex- 
pelled from  the  club  because 
he  acted  contrary  to  the  re- 
gulations. 

Thanks  to  the  circumspec- 
tion and  energy  of  Cicero, 
CatiHne's  conspiracy  was  de- 
tected in  time. 

In  my  opinion,  it  is  proper 
for  us  to  welcome  our  guests 
at  the  station. 

We  have,  in  the  south,  only 
a  premature  summer  instead 
of  sjDring. 

Our  garden  lies  without  the 
town,  but  within  the  walL 

Above  the  waterfall,  the 
scenery  is  very  fine;  below  it, 
however,  it  gTOws  monoton- 
ous. 

The  river  has  risen  two  feet 
within  one  hour. 

From  where  we  stand,France 
lies  this  side  of  the  Bhine; 
Germany,  on  the  other. 

The  emperor  has  gone  to 
Ems  on  account  of  his  health. 

The  orator  was  arrested  in 
the  midst  of  his  speech. 

Our  most  beautiful  walk  ia 
along  the  river. 

According  to  the  sentence, 
both  criminals  are  to  be  im- 
prisoned for  life. 

Hem-y  Stapel,   a    fireman. 


u 


JIATERIAL   rOa   CONVEIffiATIOX. 


x\6)  (^iapcl  !)at  eine  golbene 
lll?et>ai((e  bcfommen,  tocii  er 
tro^  bcr  ciuBerftcn  @cfal)r  sirct 
£inber  gcrettet  Ijcit 

5lltefti§  gtng  urn  i^rc§  &at^ 
ten  ID  {((en  in  ben  ^abc^^. 

Wlcim  il^cmmnbtcu  luol^nen 
unnoctt  bcS  i^afcn^?. 

S'cr  l^icb  offiicte  bie  !l:i)ure 
m'lttcU  einc§  3Jad)f(^(Uffc(^. 


received  a  gold  medal  because 
in  the  face  of  the  greatest 
danger  he  saved  the  lives  of 
two  childi'en. 

Alcestis  def3cended  for  her 
husband's  sake  into  Hades. 

My  relatives  Hve'^not  far 
from  the  port. 

The  thief  opened  the  door 
by  means  of  a  false  key. 


193. 


S6)  Ijobc  §crm  itnb  i^ran 
T)imt?cr  uhtt  ben  (See  ^in  ru- 
bem  fcl)cn. 

S^cr  f^allott  ift  uBcr  ba^  @c* 
btrgc  meg  gcflocjcn. 

ailo^^art  UHir  tion  £mbl)cit 
auf  bcr  llihifif  ergcbcn. 

!^te  5^icbc  fprangcn  gum 
genftcr  l^inauS  nnb  entfamcn. 

aiMr  t)crltef>ett  ha^  .^^au^^  erft 
atS  ba^  SiHiffer  jur  2:|iirc  ^ers 
einftromte. 

!iDie  ^uppel  fief  mliUn  im 
©ottc^bicnfte  ein. 


I  saw  Mr.  and  !Mrs.  Diintzer 
rowing  across  the  laka 

The  balloon  flew  away  over 
the  mountains. 

Mozai-t  was  devoted  to 
music  from  childhood. 

The  thieves  jmnped  out  of 
the  window  and  escaped. 

We  did  not  leave  the  house 
until  the  water  was  looming 
in  through  the  door. 

In  the  midst  of  the  service 
the  cupola  fell  in. 


194—195, 


Tk  ©cfcHfcbaft  blicb  tm 
^arf,  Bi§  bci^  gcucnt)er!  feincn 
Slnfang  nal)m. 

!4^ie  (2d)iucbcn  t)crridhtetcTt 
ftet^S  il^r  ©cbct,  BctJor  jie  in  bie 
fed}Iacl)t  ^ogcn. 

i)crSO^drbcr  tt>itrbc  ^^um  Xobe 
Dentrtci(t;  ha  cr  abcr  ^cuc 
geigte,  iintrbe  ifjni  bie  S^obc^ 
ftrafe  erlaffctu 


The  company  remained  in 
the  park  until  the  fireworks 
began. 

The  Swedes  always  offered 
a  prayer  before  going  into 
battle. 

The  murderer  was  con- 
demned to  death;  but  since  he 
evinced  repentance,  the  death 
penalty  was  remitted. 


MATERIAL   FOR   CONVERSATION. 


7j 


^aM  e^moriicnregnenfolttc, 
h)trb  ba^  gcft  ii'bermorgen  ftatt* 
finben. 

l^ubtnig  ber  ^Jrotntne  tear  fo 
red)tltcf),  baft  iljm  feine  getnbc 
nid)t  tneniijcr  trauteu  a(^  fcine 
grcunbc. 

9lttcjbcm  ^(tfar  bie  ©alHcr 
befiegt  ^atte,  iiberfdjritt  cr  ben 

^er  *iportter  lt)i((  ipiffen,  nB 
er  ba^  §au^  3itfd)lte^ett  !ann. 

53eet^ot)cn  com^onterte  bi§ 
an  fctn  (Snbe,  obgtcic^  er  taub 
gctt)orben  iKar. 

@cit  (or  fcttbcm)  meine 
Tlnttcv  im  ©cbirge  ift,  bcfinbet 

ISfeii^tcnb  bie  Zvojancv  for(5== 
Io§  fdjtiefcn,  brangen  bie  ®ric* 
ci;en  in  i()re  (Stabt  ein. 

S^ie  n)ilben  ©anfe  finb  fdjmer 
^u  fdjiejen,  ttJcil  fie  fe^r  l)oc^ 
unb  fdjncU  fliegen.  —  !Die 
®an§. 

^ine  SD^ionbtinfterniS  pnbet 
ftalt,  tnenn  bie  febe  ^inifc^en 
©onne  un'i)  SJ^onb  tritt 

a^  voav  !etn  Staffer  tm  Drte, 
at^  ce  brannte,  fo  baft  bie 
(gpri^cn  nu^lo^  inaren.  —  !Der 
Ort;  bie^pi%, 

SJZan  l^at  bcm  iungcn  ^aron 
dneniBonnunb  gecjeben,  botnit 
er  fein  il^ermogcn  'nid)t  t)ergeu* 
t>tn  tann. 

©cr  ^Ir^t  ^at  bem  ^attcnten 
geraten^  tdglic^  jtnet  ober  bret 


In  case  it  should  rain  to- 
morrow, tlie  festival  will  take 
place  on  the  day  after  to- 
morrow. 

Lewis  the  Pious  was  so 
honest  that  his  enemies  trusted 
him  not  less  than  his  friends. 

After  Caesar  had  conquered 
the  Gauls,  he  crossed  the 
Bhine. 

The  doorkeeper  wants  to 
know  whether  he  can  close 
the  house. 

Beethoven  continued  to 
compose  until  his  death,  al- 
though he  had  become  deaf. 

Since  my  mother  has  been 
in  the  mountains,  she  has  been 
feehng  much  better. 

While  the  Trojans  were 
sleeping  in  securitj^,  the  Greeks 
entered  their  city. 

Wild  geese  are  hard  to  shoot 
because  they  fly  very  high  and 
very  fast. 

An  eclipse  of  the  moon 
takes  place  when  the  earth 
comes  between  the  sun  and 
the  moon. 

There  was  no  water  in  the 
place  at  the  time  of  the  con- 
flagration, so  that  the  fire- 
engines  were  useless. 

They  have  given  the  young 
baron  a  guardian,  so  that  he 
cannot  squander  his  fortune. 

The  physician  has  advised 
the  patient  to  v/alk  for  tw^  or 


76 


MATEMAL   FOR    C0N\"ERSATIOX. 


(Stimbcn  fpa^iercn  .p  getjen,  jc 
naditicm  cr  bci  ^rdften  ift.  — 
:^ie  ,<tlraft. 

^ie  feinblicfic  9?eitcrei  t)er* 
fud)te,  unfere  recite  glatife  gu 
umgci)cn,  inbcftcn  tie  .^nfan* 
terie  auf  alien  ^^unften  geqen 
tie  unfrtge  iJoiTucfte,  —  t)cv 
^unft. 

Sotote  bie  erften  (Sc^iiffc  ^c^ 
len,  fan!  ber  ^Jla[ov  goljer  tot* 
lid)  ucmunbet  uom  $ferbe.  — 
!iDcr  (g^ug. 

Obl)fjeu^  lotinte  feine  ^tU 
mat  lange  ntd}t  crreid)cn,  tnic 
(or  fo)  fe^r  er  jid;  au(^  bamac^ 
fe^ntc. 

Sobalb  Co  3{)ncn  gcfcidig  ift, 
lircd)cu  unr  nad)  ben'^ccn  auf. 

SBir  uicrben  am  (^eftabe  blei* 
ben,  fo  longc  (ol§)  bie  ^ittt^ 
runi]  e^  erlaubt. 

^emoftt)ene§  nat)m  ©ift,  um 
nidjt  lebenbig  in  bie  §dnbe  fci^ 
ncr  geinbe  ju  fallen. 

Sir  tonnen  feine  9)linute 
Icinger  iparten,  bcnn  wiv  miiffen 
nod^  t)or  fed)^  Ut)r  bie  Stabt  er^ 
reid)en,  toenn  e^  au(!^  noc^  fo 
fel)r  regnet. 

„3d)  nnd  alle§  geftel)cn/' 
fagte  ber  epion,  „tticntt  eie 
mid)  nur  am  Seben  laffen.'^ 

^eine^  t)on  biefen  (Sdjiffen 
n)trb  unter  @ege(  neften,  mnn 
fid)  ber  @turm  nid)t  legt. 


three  hours  evers'  day,  accord- 
ing to  his  strength. 

The  enemy's  cavahy  tried 
to  turn  our  right  flank,  while 
the  infantry  advanced  against 
us  alonof  the  whole  hne. 


As  soon  as  the  first  shots 
were  heai'd,  Major  Folzer  fell 
moi-tally  wounded  from  his 
horse. 

Ulysses  could,  for  a  long 
time,  not  reach  his  home,  how- 
ever much  he  longed  for  it 

As  soon  as  it  pleases  you, 
we  shall  set  out  for  the  lakes. 

"V\^e  shall  stay  at  the  sea- 
shore as  long  as  the  weather 
permits. 

Demosthenes  took  poison  in 
order  not  to  faU  ahve  into  the 
hands  of  his  enemies. 

We  cannot  wait  one  minute 
longer,  for  we  must  reach  the 
town  before  six  o'clock,  though 
it  may  rain  ever  so  hard. 

"I  wiU  confess  even-thing," 
said  the  spy,  "i^rovided  you 
only  let  me  hve." 

None  of  these  ships  will  set 
sail  unless  the  stonn  subsides. 


196. 


1.   Unfere  grcunbe  tnerben 
(Sicitien  nid)t  befudjen,  bcnn  e^ 


Our  friends  are  not  going 
to  visit  Sicily,  for  it  is  already 


MATERIAL   FOR   CONVERSATION. 


77 


Ift  f(^on  fet)r  f)eij^  in  Stalieti; 
nui)  (or  auBerbem  or  iiberbie^) 
tjahcn  fie  nid^t  genucj  3^^t  baju 
iibric^. 

*!|3rofefior  Seller  ift  ntr^t 
niir  ein  au§ge;^eirf)neter  (5I)emi^ 
!er,  fonbern  er  i)at  ait^  me^^ 
rere  tDertuoUe  ©ntbecfungen  in 
ber  ^I)l)fi!  gemac^t,  —  !43ie  (^nU 
bedung. 

(Somo^l  bie  i^lotte  ol8  bae 
^anbt)eer  ber  ^erfer  trurbe  Don 
ben  @ried)en  gefc^Iagen. 

9^a(^  ber  ^nfic^t  be§  3n* 
genieur^  ^'et)(  finb  bie  ^ogen 
ber  neuen  -Q3rii(fe  Itiebcr  fjod) 
noc^  meitgenug. — !©er:^ogen. 

i)ie  9tduber  tuurben  iciii  im 
^ampfe  getotet,  itiU  fielen  fie 
nnfern  ©enbarnten  lebenbig  in 
bie  §anbe.  —  ®er  (S^enbarm^ 

^ie  Seftung  mugte  Japitulie* 

ren,  benn  cincrfcitS  gingen  bie 

SSorrate  auf  bie  92eige,  nnbcts 

cit0  ^errfci)te  3^r»ietrad)t  ^v^'u 

c^en  ben  :Q3iirgern  nnb  ber  ^e* 

a^ung.  —  3)er  ^iirger. 

©a§  Setter  ift  fei)r  unbe* 
ftanbig  l)ier  in  bonbon;  Ibolb 
regnet  e§,  bolb  fdineit  e^. 

2.  §err  ^ird)ner  ift  nid)t 
banfrott;  biclme^t  ^at  er  fein 
(^efd)dft  bebeutenb  enueitert. 

Unfere  greunbe  finb  je^t  tnU 
tncbcr  in  ber  (S(i)iDei5  obcr  im 
(Sdiwar^malb. 

n^mkn  (Sie  fid)/'  rief  un§ 
ber  @d)affner  p,  „fonft  !om^ 
men  (gie  lu  fpdt." 


very  hot  in  Italy;  besides, 
they  have  not  time  enough  to 
spare  for  it. 

Professor  Weller  is  not  only 
a  distinguished  chemist,  but 
he  has  also  made  several  valu- 
able discoveries  in  physics. 


The  fleet  as  well  as  the  army 
of  the  Persians  were  defeated 
by  the  Greeks. 

According  to  the  opinion  of 
the  engineer  Kehl,  the  arches 
of  the  new  bridge  are  neither 
high  nor  wide  enough. 

The  robbers  were  in  part 
killed  in  the  fight,  and  in  part 
taken  alive  by  our  policemen. 

The  fortress  had  to  sur- 
render, for  in  the  first  place, 
the  provisions  were  running 
low,  and  in  the  second  place, 
there  was  discord  between  the 
citizens  and  the  garrison. 

The  weather  here  in  Lon- 
don is  very  uncertain;  it  rains 
one  minute  and  snows  the 
next. 

Mr.  Kirchner  is  not  a  bank- 
rupt; he  has,  on  the  contrary, 
enlarged  his  business  con- 
siderably. 

Our  friends  are  now  either 
in  Switzerland  or  in  the  Black 
Forest. 

"Make  haste,"  shouted  the 
conductor  to  us,  "otherwise 
you  will  be  too  late." 


78 


MATERIAL   FOR    CONVERSATIOX. 


Unferc  f^olbaten  bcabfict)ti(;* 
ten  bie  •53rii(fe  p  befci^en,  ofls 
citt  hk  geinbe  ifamen  i^nen  gu* 
Dor. 

l^id)ett  finb  l^ier  jtemftd)  fpar- 
Itd^;  bogcgcn  (or  f)mocgen) 
t)nbcn  mx  Ubcrflup  an  2l()orn* 
baumcn.  —  5^ie  (Sidje. 

'3^cr  5(r5t  \}at  a\k  mogIid)en 
9J?ittc(  uerfnd)t,  ben  (Ertrunfe^ 
nen  in^3  ?eben  priicf^nrufen; 
bo^  (or  jeboc^  or  inbe^  or  in* 
beffen)  c^  Wav  gu  ]pdt,  —  !5)a^ 
mtttl 

•^er  ^anfntann  (^treit  l)at 
im  le^ten  (Stnrnt  giuei  (Sd)tffe 
Derloren;  bcnna^  (or  beffen- 
ungeac^tet  or  gIeid)n)ol)()  ift  fcin 
^rebit  nic^t  gcfunfen.  —  ^er 
tobit. 

3.  ^er  "ipfab  na^  bent  ©ipfcf 
be^  ^erge^  ift  gluot  fteil,  aber 
fd)attig.  —  ^er  ©tpfet. 

4.  (E^3  l^atte  me{)rere  ^age 
geregnet;  iJo^er  maren  bie 
©traBen  fo  fotig,  tci^  unfere 
^anonen  nic^t  tran^portiert 
tperben  fonnten. 


Our  soldiei-s  intended  to 
occupy  the  bridge,  but  the 
enemy  forestalled  them. 

Oaks  are  rather  scarce  here; 
maples,  on  the  contrar}%  are 
abundant 

The  physician  tried  all  pos- 
sible means  to  restore  the 
drowned  man  to  life,  but  it 
was  too  late. 


Streit,  the  merchant,  lost 
two  ships  in  the  last  storm; 
neyei-theless  his  credit  is  not 
diminished. 


The  path  up  to  the  summit 
of  the  mountain  is  steep,  it  is 
true,  but  shad}^ 

It  had  been  raining  several 
days,  and  therefore  tlie  roads 
were  so  muddy  that  our  cannon 
could  not  be  transported. 


197. 


©err  ©ef)r  ift  nid)t  9J?a(er, 
fonbcttt  ^ilb^aner;  nteine  QU 
tern  finb  nidjt  intint  mit  i{)m, 
ahtt  fie  fennen  il)n  jiemlid) 
gut. 


IVIr.  Gehr  is  not  a  painter, 
but  a  sculptor;  my  parents 
are  not  intimate  with  him, 
but  they^know  him  pretty 
weU.  ^ 


198. 


SBir  gebenfen  in  etner  \}aibcn 
©tnnbe  anf  5nbred)en,  totnn  ^ie 
nic^t:^  bagcgen  ^abeu. 


We  intend  to  staii  in  half 
an  hour,  if  you  have  no  objec- 
tion. 


MATERI.M.    FOR    CONVERSATION. 


79 


!Der  ©drtner  \mii  iDiffen,  oB 
er  iDci^e  ober  rote  ^ofen  ju 
ben  befteUten  ^ouquet^  ne^men 
foU. 


The  gardener  wants  to  know 
whether  he  is  to  take  white 
or  red  roses  for  the  bouquets 
ordered. 


199, 


1.  !Da^  (Spric^tDort  fagt: 
„9)?acf)  @eu,  tuenn  bie  (Sonne 
fc^eint." 

^tr  waren  in  5l(e^*anbria, 
M  e^  bombarbiert  nrnrbe. 

©ie  ^^riege  tnnrben  fritter 
mit  t)te(  me()r  (S3raufam!eit  ge^ 
\n\)vt  al§  jel^t;  totnn  cine  ^Stabt 
m  bte  ^cinbe  be^  Sieger^  fiet, 
iDurbe  fie  Qcwb()nlic^  geplitnbert 
unb  jerftort. 

2.  T)k  foiiid  \dili  trtffen, 
toann  njir  liier  angefommen 
finb. 


The  proverb  says — Make 
hay  while  the  sun  shines. 

We  were  in  Alexandria  when 
it  was  bombarded. 

Wars  were  formerly  con- 
ducted with  much  more  cruelty 
than  now;  when  a  town  fell 
into  the  hands  of  the  con- 
queror, it  was  usually  pillaged 
and  destroyed. 

The  police  want  to  know 
when  we  ai-rived  here. 


200. 


T)k  (Sinbrei^er  fatten  3Kad)en 
an^geftellt,  bomit  fie  hd  i^rer 
5lrb'eit  ntt^t  iiberraf d)t  raiirben; 
unb  ba  fie  fiircl)teten,  ba^  bie 
©prengung  be^  4^elbfd)ran!^  fie 
tjerraten  mddjte,  fatten  fie  bie 
genfter  mit  naffen  2:itd^rn  oer^ 
l)angen.  —  ©ie  ^acl)e;  bcr 
©d)ranf;  ba^  Zud], 


The  burglars  had  established 
outposts,  that  they  might  not 
be  surprised  at  their  work; 
and  fearing  lest  tlie  bursting 
of  the  safe  should  betray  them, 
they  had  covered  the  windows 
with  wet  cloths. 


201, 


5lnfang§  bereuten  metne  25er= 
inanbten,  fid)  in  ^affel  nieber^ 
getaffen  in  Ijaben;  allein  |c  Ian* 
ger  fie  bort  n)ot)nen,  bcfto  beffer 
gefciKt  e$  iljnen. 


My  relatives  were  at  first 
sorry  that  they  had  settled  in 
Cassel;  yet  the  longer  they 
live  there,  the  better  they 
like  it. 


READING  EXERCISES. 


Note. — The  student's  attention  is  called  to  the  correspondences  ol 
consonants  in  German  and  English  (p.  124). 

To§14-§17(p.9). 

^ic  Grbc'  ift  runb.  T)a§  9J?eer'  ift  hvt'it'  unb  tief.  SiMe  Mau 
ber  §tmmc(*  ift,  \vk  rein*  unb  !(ar'  bie  8uft' !  X)a^i  ^Ici '  ift 
fc^rocr'.  3Da§eifen*'  ift  ^art.  3:)a$  Sad)^  ift  lucid) ".  X)k 
MM),  ber  §onig  unb  ber  Qudtv  "  finb  fii^ ''.  5)cr  §irfd) ''  ift 
fd)nell'^;  bie  <Sd)ne(fe^*'  ift  langfam''.  X)k  3eit^'  ift  loftbar^". 
S^a^  Setter'"'  ift  Derdnbernd)'^\  ^er9?aum"  ift  unenblid)". 
@ott"iftuberdI". 

X)a^  geuer  ift  fein  Element.  T)a^  gid)t  be§  2)2onbe§"  ift 
matt "'.  !5Die  SBufte  '^^  ift  bie  ©eimat "  be^  ^^tiiDen'".  ^cr  Xot> " 
beS  gitrften  irar  einUngliicf"  fiir  ba§  ^anb.  !iDie  ^eife"  ber 
^onigin"  tear  9mcfad)'\  !Die  ^enntni^"'  ber  ©efd)id)te''  ift 
notn3enbig'\  Unfer  ^afein''  ift  cm  9Mtfer".  ^er  Zoh  ift 
lein  libel*'.  T)cx  @d)metterling "  ift  ein  (St)mbot  ber  Unfterb* 
Iid)!eit ".  ^Da^  tleib  **  ber  Unfd)ulb  *'  ift  n^eig  ".   '^k  (Stimme  *' 

1  earth.  2  sea.  3  broad.  4  sky.  5  pure.  6  clear,  7  air.  8  lead. 
9  heavy.  10  iron.  11  soft.  12  sugar.  13  sweet.  14  stag.  15  swift. 
16  snail.  17  slow.  18  time.  19  precious.  20  weather.  21  change- 
able. 22  space.  23  infinite.  24  Grod.  25  everywhere.  26  moon. 
27  dim.  28  desert.  29  home.  30  lion.  31  death.  32  misfortune. 
33  journey.  34  queen.  35  fortunate.  36  knowledge.  37  history. 
38  necessary.  39  existence.  40  riddle.  41  evil.  42  butterfly.  43  im- 
mortality.    44  dress.     45  innocence.     46  white.     47  voice. 


READING   EXERCISES.  81 

bc§  .?>er5en^  {ft  nidjt  immer''  bie  (Stimme  be^  35crftanbe§  (m.)". 
Unban!  ^^  ift  ber  Selt  ^^  ?o^n^\  ^er  ©eij  "  ift  bie  SBur^eP* 
alle^  ilbet^  (n.).  sjijcfjt^"  {ft  jo  o^mi^"'  a($  bcr  Sob,  ni^t§  \o 
ungeimg  a(^  bie<2tunbe''  bee  3:obee.  0()ne''  ^ampf'  fein 
©teg"".    T)ie  gurd)t'''  be^  §errn  ift  ber  Sei^ljeit^'  5lnfang'\ 

48  always.  49  reason.  50  ingratitude.  51  world.  52  reward.  53  avar- 
ice. 54  root.  55  nothing.  56  certain.  57  hour.  58  without.  59  struggle. 
60  victory.     61  fear.     62  wisdom.     63  beginning. 

To§  18  — §21. 

(See  Note  on  page  4  of  the  Practical  Part.) 

(Seine  Saffen'  tDarcn  gtatf*  iric'  ein  (Spiegel*  (m.).  ^ie 
Sterne'  (m.)  finb  3at)l(o§\  (S^  ift  be!annt\  \ok'  bie  ®ett)itter" 
(n.)  entfte^cn'".  (Sd)iUer  nennt'*  bie  SBoU'en'"  Segkr''  ber 
^itfte'*.  3i)ie  ©emcilbe''  unb  Statuen  iinfere^  Wln\mm^  finb 
beriU)mt''.  !Die  ^tjitren ''^  unfere^  !l)omee  finb  t)on  (^rj'',  bie 
(Saulen^'  t)on  aj^armor '\  2:)ie3:)ad)er''  ber§dufer''  in^tdien 
finb  meift^'  ptatt.  Unfere  Stragen"*  finb  gerabe'''  unb  breit. 
So  finb  bcine  iBiidjer  '^^  ?  So  finb  bie  ^^riic^te '"  meiner  5lrbeit ''  ? 
!Deine  §dnbe  finb  !alt,  unb  beine  is^i^jpen"'  finb  blag'",  ^ie 
gifdje  (m.)  \)abcn  !eine  Stimme".  gliegen"  unb  ajliiden''  finb 
bie  ^^a^rung"*  ber  (Sc^UJatben ", 

1  S)ie  SBaffe,  weapon.  2  polished.  3  as,  4  mirror.  5  star.  6  num- 
berless. 7  known.  8  how.  9  thunderstorm.  10  arise.  11  calls. 
12  3)ie  2Bol!e,  cloud.  13  sailor.  14  3)ie  ^n\t,  air.  15  S)a8  ©emcilbe, 
painting.  16  famous.  17  S)le  S^^iire,  door.  18  bronze.  19  2)ie  @du(e,  col- 
umn. 20  marble.  21  2)aS  S)ad),  roof.  22  2)a§  §au6,  house.  23  mostly. 
24  S)ie  (Strafe,  street.  25  straight.  26  S)a3  Sdixd},  book.  27  ®ie  grud)t, 
fruit.  28  labor.  29  S)ie  !Bippe,  lip,  30  pale.  31  voice.  32  2)ie  gUegc, 
ay.    33  3)ie  TlMt,  gnat.     34  food.    35  3)ie  @d)n)a(be,  swallow. 

To  §  24. 

:iDie^pfeIbdume^  U\xl}cn\    %ik  Dbftbdume^  f)aben  bie  @e^ 

1  2)er  5lpfelbaum,  apple-tree.     2  bloom.     3  fruit-tree. 


82  READING  EXERCISES. 

ftalt*  if)rer  grucf)te.  ^ie  !^orbcerb{atter  *  finb  gciDitrj^aft".  T^tx 
grueling''  ift  na\}c'';  bie  3aatfclber"  finb  grim.  T)ic  Singoogcl" 
gentegen"  in  ^^Deutfdjfanb  hen  (gdju^''  bc^  ©cfc^e^"  (n.), 
SS^affcrfcide "  finb  tnalcrtfd)''.  ^er  9^c(far  unb  ber  9JMn  finb 
9kbenf(ufie"  bc^$Hf}ein^.  §afenp(%''  finb  mcift  )e()r  belebt'". 
^er  ^iirgenneifter''  ^at  fein  ^urean  int  9?at^anfe^\  !^{e  33or* 
l)angc^'  mcine^  Soljn^immcr^  "  (n.)  finb  mctj?''.  Unfere  @ro§* 
ticiter'*  luarcn  (vngldnbcr.    2Bie  t)ic(  toftcn  bicfe  §al^tiid)cr''? 

4  shape.  5  3)Q§  ?orbecrbIatt,  laurel-leaf.  6  spicy.  7  spring.  8  near. 
9  2)a3  @oatfeIb,  grain-field.  10  2)cr  ©ingOogel,  singing-bird.  11  enjoy. 
12  protection.  13  law.  14  2)er  SBofferfall,  "water-faU.  15  picturesque. 
16  2:cr  9ZebcnfIu|3,  tributary.  17  2)er  §afenplQ^,  sea-port.  18  lively. 
19  mayor.  20  town-ball,  21  2)er  3Sorl)ang,  curtain.  22  sitting-room. 
23  white.    24  grand-father.    25  2)a§  ^al^tud^,  neck-handkerchief. 

To  §  30. 

^ie  SJionard^en  (5uro^a§  l)atten'  cine  3^f ^^^^^'hi^ft '  i^ 
Berlin.  X)k  @eograp()en '  miffen  *  nnr  trenig '  t»on  a}^ittclafrifa. 
5}iefe  ^rofefforcn  finb  tcil^'  ^^itofopf)en ',  tcxU  ©cotogen'  nnb 
tei(^  aJJineralogen.  X^it  5lftronomen '  be^  5lltcrtum5 ''  (n.)  r)atten 
!eine  gernro{)re".  33iele  2^i)rannen*^  ©riedjenlanb^ ''  maren 
§crrfd}er'*  Don  Xalent  unb  35erbienft'*.  ^en  ©dedjcn'"  marcn 
aire  5Iu6lanber''  ^arbaren''.  3:)ie  ^a^nen''  ber  ^ometen '" 
finb  meift"  nnbefannt".  X)k  ^laneten  finb  inaljrfdjcinlid) '-''  aKe 
beiDoI)nt".  aJieine  S5ettern'^  finb  ^^^oftoren  ber  DJ^ebicin.  ^We 
SlbDoiatcn""  nnb  'JJotare  unfcrcr  (Stabt"  f}aben  t)ie(  gu  tl)un'\ 
!I)ie  (5f)t)re "  be^  (SopI)ofIe^  finb  er^abcn '°. 

^ie  OJZnfi!  unferer  d^oriile "  ift  einfad)",  aber"  ernft  nnb 

1  had.  2  convention.  3  geographer.  4  know.  5  but  little.  6  partly. 
7  philosopher.  8  geologist.  9  astronomer.  10  antiquity.  11  ®a3 
gcrnro^r/  telescope.  12  tyrant.  13  Greece.  14  ruler.  15  merit. 
IG  Greek.  17  foreigner.  18  barbarian.  19  ®ie  ^al)n,  orbit.  20  S)er 
hornet,  comet.  21  mostly.  22  unknown.  23  probably.  24  inhabited. 
25  S)er  ^Better,  cousin.  26  lawyer.  27  city.  28  do.  29  S)er  (^t)or, 
chorus.     30  sublime.    31  hymn.     32  plain.     33  but. 


REAMNG   EXERCISES.  83 

feterltc^'*,  !Die  ^trd)m  ^*  uttb  ^alaftc,  bie  Dbelt^lcn  unb  ^ri^ 
umpt)bogen "'  ^om^  finb  ein  ©egenftanb"  (m.)  ber  ^etDun^ 
beruuG ''  aller  9lationen.  Sir  refen ''  bte  @c[d)t(^te  bcr  ^apfte 
t)on  Scopotb  t)on  dlank,  Me  ©enerafe  9^apo(con^  tt^arenSJ^anner 
Don  3^a(ent.  "ipcilen*"  unb  !5)iamanten  finb  !oftbar»  T^ie 
eiep^anten  finb  !tuG**  xmb  Gele^^l3'^  S:)ie  ^oligci  t)crfoIi3t" 
atle  -Settler  **  unb  ^agabnnben,  3n  Berlin  finb  iiber ''  t)ier^ 
taufenb  *'  ^tubcntcn. 

34  solemn.  35  church.  36  2)er  iBogcn,  arch.  37  object.  38  ad- 
miration. 39  read.  40  ®ie  "iperle^  pearl.  41  intelligent.  42  docile. 
43  prosecutes.     44  beggar.     45  over,    46  four  thousand. 

To  §34  — §35. 

'Dk  Zcmpd  5lt^en§  toavm  3}^eiftertt)er!e  ber  5lrd)tte!tun  ©er 
ganbel '  ^orintl)^  wax  auBcrorbentlid) '  batljenb ',  !iDer  S3efut)  tft 
^ente  *  ber  (Stol^ '  unb  morgen  ber  (Sdjred'en "  5)leape(§,  ®ie  ^e= 
lagerung "  Don  (^t)ra!u§  burd)  ^  bie  Dtomer  n»ar  fel)r  languiiericj  ^ 
®te  5ltmofpI)dre  3talien§  ift  meift  !Iar  unb  fonntg.  (SnglanbS 
^efi^ungen '"  finb  fcl)r  gal)lretd)  '\  5lnftotc(e^  n>ar  ber  ii^eljrcr  " 
5l(e^'anber§.  Qd)  Ijabe  (Sdjtller^  unb  ®oetI)e§  SKerfe,  X)cv  Zob 
be§  :DemoftI)ene^  tear  tragtfd).  Sutfen^  ®timme  ift  t)olI  unb 
rein»    SJ^arien^  ^ran!f)eit ''  ift  ni(^t  gefd^r(id)  '\ 

1  commerce.  2  exceedingly.  3  flourishing.  4  to-day.  5  pride. 
6  terror.  7  siege.  8  by.  9  of  long  duration.  10  ®ie  iBefi^ung,  pos- 
session.    11  numerous.     12  teacher.     13  disease.     14  dangerous. 

To  §46— §47. 

X)k  ^dd'er  arbciten '  h)dl)renb  ber  9^ad)t.  Unfere  2J?afc^inen 
ftcl}en'  ftill  iDcgen  be^  M^ftanbe^ '  ber  5lrbeiter\  Q\t  biefe^ 
^anb '  nad)  3^I)rem  @efd)mad "  ?  „%vi^  hen  5lugen  \  am  bem 
8inn%"  fagt '  ba^  (^pridjUiort  '\    T)ie  ^oft  ift  hci  ber  ^rucfe ", 

1  work.  2  stand.  3  strike.  4  workman.  5  ribbon.  6  taste.  7  2)a3 
Stuge,  eye.     8  mind.     9  says.     10  proverb.     11  bridge. 


84  RE.\DING   EXERCISES. 

bent  9^at!)au^  gcgcniibcn  X^ie  5(rbeiter  fommcn*'  t)om  JJc^be. 
33L>ir  t)abcit  nid)t  @etb  genug''  gur  ^cife.  giir  tncn  fiub  bicfe 
^^flaumcn  '*  unb  5(prifo|cn''?  (E()mm  v^t  cin  IDIittel''  gcgcn  ba^ 
gneber.  25>ir  glauben  an  bic  gortbaucr  ^'  bcr'3ee(c'^  nad)  bcm 
■S^obe.  3}^cinc  (vltern  inoljticn ''  i.n  (Sommcr  auf  bcm  \^anbe  unb 
Im  Sinter  in  bcr  i^tabt  ^er  (See  ift  I)intcr  bem  ^arf.  ^ie 
2(rmut="  it»oI)nt"  oft"  ncbcn  bcm  Uberftuffe  '\ 

X^ie  (Strage  fiUjrt''*  iibcr  i>m  ^crg"*  nad)  ber  (Stabt.  !Die 
^iid)c "  ift  untcr  bcm  (Speifejimmer  ".  'Der  Dbeli^f  ftef)t''  »or 
bcr  £ird;e.  5)a3  §ofpita(  licgt'"  gunfcfien  bcm  gluffc  unb  ber 
^taht  Tlcin  Onfel  bcmoI)nt'"  cin  ?anbl)au^  am  ^ee.  Qd) 
fd)reibc "  einen  -53ricf "  an  meinen  grcunb  in  .geibelberg.  2}^ein 
^Setter  arbcitct ''  in  cinem  ^anf^aufc.  X;ie  (gdjnittcr'*  frii^* 
ftiicfen''  im  Cdjatten  bcr  i^inbc.  X)cii*e  §anbfd)u()c '"  ticcjen"' 
auf  bem  ^lauicr'^  @e^e"  bie  ?ampe  auf  hen  2:ifc^.  ^ie 
3citung"  lieijt  untcr  bem  (Sofa,  ^er  ^ibcr''  taud)t"  unter 
\>a-^  SS^affer.  !Dcr  Spiegel  Ijcingt "  iibcr  ber  £ommobe  **.  'a^cx 
§afe  **  fprang"  iibcr  ben  3^^^*^-  3^  fanb''  ben  9?ing  l)intcr 
bem  Sd)rante ".  :4^er  §unb  frod) "'  ()intcr  ben  Cfen  ".  93?eine 
^ommobe  ftel)t  gtrifdjcn  bem  ^ett  unb  hem  genfter ''.  9^iicfe " 
ben  ^leiberfd)ranf^*  t)or  bie  3^()iir,  unb  ben  ^^ offer  ncbcn  ben 
Sd)ranf.    A^a^  ^^cnfnrnt "  be5  giirften  ftcljt  t)or  bem  Sdjioffe. 

I)ie  grauen  hcictcn '"  rod()renb  ber  Sd)Iad)t  *'.  Sir  loartcn  " 
^icr  uiegen  be^  (^en)itter^  ".  (Sin  guBPfab'"  fiiljrt  iibcr  bie  Siefe 
nad)  bem  See.  Sir  eriangten"  (gintritt''  in  bie  gcftung"  burc^ 

12  come.  13  enough.  14  2)ie  ^flaume,  plum.  15  apricot.  16  remedy. 
17  duration.  18  soul.  19  live.  20  poverty.  21  lives.  22  often. 
23  abundance.  24  leads.  25  mountain.  26  kitchen.  27  dining-room. 
28  stands.  29  lies.  30  inhabits.  31  write.  32  letter.  33  works. 
34  reaper.  35  breakfast.  36  Xcv  §ani)l'cl)ul),  glove.  37  lie.  38  piano. 
39  put.  40  newspaper.  41  beaver,  42  dives.  43  hangs.  44  chest  of 
drawers.  45  hare.  46  leaped.  47  fence.  48  found.  49  cupboard. 
50  crawled.  51  stove.  52  window.  53  move.  54  clothes-press.  55  mo- 
nument. 56  prayed.  57  battle.  58  wait.  59  thunderstorm.  60  foot- 
path.    61  obtained.     62  entrance.     63  fortress. 


BEADING   EXERCISES.  85 

ben©nflug'*  unferer  greunbc.  2Btet)tc(  forbert"'  bcr  ^ote"" 
fiir  feiuen  Sea""?  ^adjc''  hk  '^cdjmn'"  tiidjt  o[)ne  h^n 
Strt'",  Sarum  fd)n)tmmft'*  bu  gegen  ben  (Strom''?  SSer 
ful}r''  3ucrft'*  urn  ba§  ^a\>  §orn?  S)ie  SJ^ctalle  fommen  au§ 
bc:n  ©cIjOBc''  bcr  (Srbe.  !5)a§  S:)cn!mal  bc§  ^ontg§  ftcl)t  beim 
©c^Ioffe.  Sir  treibcn''  §anbe(  mit  alien  ^latloncn  Suropa^. 
Sir  be^a^kn"  unfcre  5lrbeiter''  nad)  ber  Qualitat  iljrer  5lrbeit 
®ie  §offnung''  ift  unfere  (Stul^e'"  im  Ungtud. 

64  influence.  65  asks,  66  messenger.  67  way.  6S  make.  69  bill. 
70  hoot.  71  swim.  72  current.  73  sailed.  74  fir.-t.  75  bowels. 
76  carry  on.     77  pay.    78  workman,    79  hope.     80  support. 

To  §  78. 

3^  f)abe  greunbe  in  tbtn  unb  grauffurt.  ^u  ^aft  !eine  ^^ad)^ 
\\d)t'  gn  ertuarten'.  5)cr  *ipatient  madjt'  un^^orge*;  er  l)at 
njebcr"  (Sdjlaf  nocf)'  5(ppetit.  Sir  ^aben  ®afte  ttom  !i?anbe. 
^tnbcr,  l^abt  i^r§unger?  S^  tjerftdjere'  (^I)nen,  (Bk  ^ahcn 
cinen  greunb  am  STtinifter.  ©u  l^atteft  !ein  Sf^edjt  gu  f d)iei3cn  °. 
Sir  I)attcn  !ctn®aicf'"  im  (Spiel ^\  ^ie  ©inbre^er ''^  l)attcn 
^red)ei[en''  unb  Sprcngpuloer '*.  So  fatten  bie  9?auber ''  i^re 
S3orrate ''  ?  Sa§  l)attcft  bu  gcftem  auf  bcm  9tatl)aufe  3U  tl)un? 
§attet  il)r  bie  (grlaubnis'"  gu  fifdjcn?  Qah^  id)  redjt''  obcr  un* 
red)t ".  §-fi  ^^  ®^^^ '°  9<^^^^9  3^^  ^^^fe  ?  §err  ^aftncr  ift  gc^ 
fat)rlid)'^  !ran!";  ber  5lrst'='  f)at  feine  ©offuung'*  fitr  feine 
©enefung''.  @r  l^at  \)tn  3:t)pl)U^,  nid)t  iral}r'°?  9^cin,  etne 
©erj!ran!^eit".  —  ©atten  Sie  eincn  giiljrer"'  ilber  ba§  @e* 
birge ''  ?  9leiu,  bcr  Seg  t^ar  un^  belannt  '\ 

1  indulgence.  '2  expect.  3  causes.  4  care.  5  neither.  6  sleep. 
7  nor.  8  assure.  9  shoot.  10  luck.  11  play.  12  burglar.  13  crow- 
bar. 14  blasting-powder.  15  robber.  16  ^cr  S5orrat,  provision. 
17  permission.  18  right.  19  wrong.  20  money.  21  dangerously. 
22  sick.  23  physician.  24  hope.  25  recovery.  26  not  true?— has  he 
not?    27  heart-disease.     28  guide.     29  mountains.     30  familiar. 


READING   EXERCISES. 


To   §   49. 


iBift  bu  utttDo^I  ?  9^em,  id)  bin  nur  *  miibc ',  —  Sie  wctt '  ift 
e§  nod)  *  nad)  bcr  <Stabt  ?  —  SSir  finb  2J^cnfd)cn  uv.h  f d)ti3an{"cn ' 
balder'  ftct^^  gtDii'djcn  23a]^rl)cit  nnb  -Si'i-'^^'.  —  S)^  fcib  fcijr 
crl)i^t%  ^inber;  too  jcib  irjr  gctncfcn?  —  ^ie  Ufcr'"  M  9il)ein« 
finb  fc^r  malerifd^,  bc)onbcr§  "  gtoifdjen  Tlaini  unb  ^oblenj.  — 
3ft  ba§ 3}Ma3C]ien''  fertig^''?  Sa,  e§  ift  langft^*  fcrtig,  aber 
bie  ©dfte  finb  nod)  nid^f'  ba".  —  (Sinb  luir  frci'^  obcr  unfrei 
in  unfcrcn  ©anblnngen '' ?  —  (Seib  il)r  nod)  meine  grcunbe?  — 
„Q6)  tear  loilb  nnb  nnbanbig^'  o(§  ^nabc/'  fd^rcibt'"  ©err 
2)ZoI)ring  in  fctncr  ^iograpl)ie,  „bie  (gpicle  meincr  £amerabcn 
iparcn  mcift  gn  rnt)ig"  fiir  mid).  ^cin-53anm  iDar  ntir  gn" 
I)od)'%  !cin  gelfcn'*  gn  ftciP%  !ein  ©rabcn"'  gn  brcit;  id)  wax 
bie  SScrjiociflung  "  meincr  2Jtnttcr,"  —  3Bo  ioarcn  (Sie  fo  lange? 
5lnf  bcr  ^orfe^\  —  SSar  id^  nid)t  immcr  an  bcincr  (Scite  ?  Sar 
bcine  grcubc'"  nid)t  mcine  grcnbe  nnb  bcin  l^cib'"  nid)t  mein 
geib? 

1  only.  2  tired.  3  far.  4  stilL  5  -waver.  6  therefore.  7  always. 
8  error.  9  overlieated.  10  bank.  11  especially.  12  dinner.  13  ready. 
14  long.  15  not  yet  16  here.  17  free.  18  2)ie  §aublung,  action. 
19  unmanageable.  20  writes.  21  qniet.  22  too.  23  high.  24  rock. 
25  steep.     26  ditch.     27  despair.     28  exchange.     29  joy.     30  sorrow. 

To  §  50. 

3d)  tDcrbe  gteid)gitltig  *  gegen  ba^  Sanbleben.  Unfcr  ®drtner 
nnrbaltnnb  fdjiDad)".  S}a§  Setter  toirb  fdjon.  ^er§erbft' 
iftnafjc*;  bae  Saffer  n)irb  fdjon'  rcd)t  !alt.  Sir  tuerben  nic 
gang '  glcid)gii(tig  gegen  ^inl)m '  nnb  gl)re '.  Serbet  nic^t  nn^ 
gebnibig',  mcine  grennbc!  Q^v  Uicrbct  fd)(dfrig'''  ^inber,  e6 
irirb  and)  fd)on  fpdt".    S§  ift  l^eip"  nnb  trocfen"  l^ier,  bie 

1  indifferent.  2  weak.  3  fall.  4  near.  5  already.  6  qnite.  7  glory. 
8  honor.    9  impatient.     10  sleepy.     11  late.     12  hot.     13  dry. 


READING   EXERCISES.  87 

^Stragcn  tt)crbcu  ftaubtg  '*  unb  ble  ^runnen'"  Iccr  ".  !^er  griif)^ 
ling  ift  ha,  bie  ^dume  tncrben  grim.  34  tDurbe  fteberfran!  in 
$Rom;  ami}'''  meine  (gltern  luurbcn  Iran!.  !Die  5In!nnft''  bc§ 
giirftcn  \nurbe  fd;nell '"  iiberall  befannt*  T)a§  ^iperferreicl;'"  tnurbc 
eine  ^eute''  ^llc^anbcr^,  >Die  Stomer  inurbcn  admditg"  bie 
gerren  bcr  Sclt.  ll)ie  ^arbaren  im  9^orbcn,  anfangS"  ein 
©egenftanb"*  bcr  S3erad)tnng  "  ber  9?omcr,  luurbcn  fpater"  tl)re 
§crrcn. 

14  dusty.  15  well.  16  emr>ty.  17  also.  18  arrival.  19  quick. 
20  Persian  empire.  21  prey.  22  by  degrees.  23  in.  the  beginning. 
24  object.    25  contempt.     26  later. 

To  §  55. 

Q<i)  Icfe  etnen  9loman*  tjon  5^et)tag,  S'^^bcr  ®ricd)c  lerntc 
eincn  Xcir  ber  ®ebicf)te  §omer§  auStDcnbig".  Scr  Icrnt  nidjt, 
n)dl)rcnb*  er  leljrt^?  ^er  SJicnfc^  irrt%  fo  lang'  er  ftrebt\ 
JiDie  2:ugcnb '  mad)t  hm  aJlenfdjcn  gliiciad)  '\  !Da§  (gnbe  frfinf' 
ba^Scr!.  ©er(Scgen''  !ommt  t)on  oben''.  !Die  ^lume  im 
©arten  tc^rt,  tr»ie  lange  bie  ©djonfjeit  '*  n)dl)rt".  ^ugenb  mad)t 
md)t\iol]'%  fonbcrn^'  bcmutig^\  5:)cr  Gljrift  gtaubt^"  an  bie 
Unfterbtidjlcit'"  bcr  ©cclc.  ^ie  §iinmc(  er3d^(cn"  bie  &jxc 
©ottc§.  !Dic9^atur  mad)t  Icincn  (Sprung '\  ^a§  SBer!  lobt 
ben  OJieifter.  3^ur  ber  ^cfi^  bcr  33crnunft''  untcrfc^eibet'*  hen 
3Jicnfdjen  tJom  S^icre.  9^td)t§  Dcrtitr^f  bie  3cit  fo  fcl)r  tDie  bie 
5lrbeit.  ^3  rcgnct"  unb  taut''  l)icr  feit  einem  SJ^onat.  !5)ie 
®icpd(^e''  ftitrjen'''  mit^etofe'"  t)on  ben  Bergen,  bie  glitffe 
fc^iuellen,  bieX)dmme"  berften;  5lngft  unb  (Sd)rec!en "  ^errf^t" 
uberall.  ' 

1  novel.  2  part.  3  by  heart.  4  while.  5  to  teach.  6  err.  7  ag 
long  as.  8  strive.  9  virtue.  10  happy.  11  to  ci'own.  12  blessing. 
13  above.  14  beauty.  15  to  last.  16  proud.  17  but.  18  humble. 
19  to  believe.  20  immortality.  21  proclaim.  22  leap.  23  reason. 
24  distinguish.  25  shorten.  26  to  rain.  27  to  thaw.  28  2)er  ®ie§= 
'ba6),  torrent.  29  to  rush  down.  30  roaring.  31  dike.  32  terror. 
33  prevail. 


88  KEADINa  EXERCISES. 

„^enttft  bu  ba§  ?anb,  ttio  bie  ^itronen'*  b(ur)n?"  ift  bcr  ^In* 
fanj  cinc5  ©ebidjtcd  Don  ©octljc.  Sir  Ic[cn  alle  S^age  cin  @cbid)t 
Don  (Sdjiller.  §orft  bu  bie  ^iad^tigaU"'  fingcn?  !5^er  §irfd)  ^^ 
rul)tc''  im  Sc^attcn  einer  Gid)c''.  !Dcr  DJialcr'^  ®rafe  rnatt 
^icrc,  !2anbfd)aftcn"  unb  'iportrait^.  S3icle  ^flan^cn  iDadjfcn  im 
Safi'cr.  §eibclbcrg  licgt  am  ^Icdaw  l^k  5IIpcn  trcnncn  "  bie 
edjtDci^  "  Don  ^talien.  S3iet  Stcgcn  erjcugt "  Un!raut  *\  Sir 
Ic'jcn  nid)t,  um  su*''  cffcn,  fonbern  \Dir  cfjcn,  um  gu  Icl)cn.  5Irbcit 
unb  (Spar[^mteit "  fiil)ren  gum  9?cid)tum*\  33crmcibcn*'  Gie 
bicfe  garben",  fie  ftcljcn'"  3f}ncn  nidjt.  ^ctradjte'*  ben 
'3d)meid;Icr "  aU  bcinen  geinb.  §anb(e"  mtt  33or)'id)t '*  unb 
crgrcife "  hen  2lugenOIi(f '\  (Srtrage  *'  bein  (Sd)i(ffa(  '^  mit  @e* 
bulb  '\  §a(te  3J^aJ5 ""  in  alien  !Dingen.  9^ebe "  ftet^  bie  Sal)r* 
I)eit.    33crU-aue'''auf  ©ott. 

§9rcn  <Sie  e3  bonnem"?  (55  regnet  m  (StriJmen'*,  ba6 
Safi'cr  ftcigt'^  Don  ^tunbe"'  gu  8tunbe.  (^ie  tDiffen  ben  Seg, 
fu^rcn  (^le  un5.  "^x^  i^anb  forberte''  ben  ^ob  bc5  2J^orbcr5  bc3 
f>rdfibentcn.  !^a5  Ocifpicr*  5llejanber§  ermutigte""  ba^  gecr'°. 
^ie9?i)mer  erobertcn''  unb  gerftorten"  ^orintl),  (Eafar  fiird)^ 
tcic''^  feine  gcinbe  nid)t  gcnug,  unb  feinSelbftDertrauen'*  iDar 
cine  ber  §aupturfadjcn^'  feinc^  SSerberben^"'.  X)k  (Solbaten 
jeigten"  mvLf'  unb  ^iTapfcrfeif^',  allcin""  bie  Xdm  i()rer  gitl}rcr 
tDar  fcl)ler[)aft".  33icle  '^r)i(ofopI)cn  bc3  5lltcrtuni5  glaubtcn  nid)t 
an  bie  ©otter  §omer3.    ©er^eig"'  Derprtct"  ba^  gerj  bc^ 

31  2)ie  ^itrone,  lemon.  35  nightingale.  36  stag.  37  to  rest,  38  oak. 
39  painter.  43  2)ic  ?anbfd)oft,  landscape.  41  separate.  42  Switzer- 
land. 43  to  produce.  44  weeds.  45  in  order  to.  46  economy. 
47  riches.  48  to  avoid.  49  S)ie  ^arbe,  colour.  50  to  be  becoming. 
51  consider.  52  flatterer.  53  to  act.  54  precaution.  55  seize.  56  mo- 
ment. 57  to  bear.  58  fate.  59  patience.  60  to  keep  within  bounds. 
61  to  speak.  62  to  trust.  63  thunder.  64  S)cr  (Strom,  tori'ent.  65  to 
rise.  66  hour.  67  demand.  68  example.  69  encourage.  70  army, 
71  to  conquer.  72  to  destroy.  73  to  fear.  74  self-confidence.  75  prin- 
cipal craise.  76  ruin.  77  to  show.  78  courage.  79  bravery.  80  but. 
81  faulty.     82  avarice.     83  to  harden. 


HEADING  EXERCISES.  89 

EO^cnfd)en.    Scr  bet^o^nt  btcfc«  (S^Io^    (Spred^en  (Sie  itatie* 
ni[c!)  ?   9^em,  aber  id)  lerne  e^. 

Q6)  l^abe  ein  ©mpfano^immer**,  em  ©psimmer,  ein  <Stubier^ 
simmer  unb  pci  <Sc^Iaf jimmer.  —  !Da§  SBaff er  !o(^t^%  maljlen"' 
©ie  hen  ^affce,  —  Sann  friiljftUcfen^^  <2ie  getDoIjnlid)*^?  — 
Soljiit  9cl)cn  <Ste  ?  tof  bie  ^oft,  i(^  emarte  ettten^ricf  Don 
meinen  (SItent,  —  Siet)iel  ®elb  brau^ft**  bu  3U  beiner  ^ieife  ? 
—  (S^  ift  fo  !alt  bet  un5,  bag  ba^  ©af[cr  in  ben  3'i^wic^it  G<^* 
friert".  —  3ft3r)r9lad)barti3ir!ridj'^  fo  orm,  iPtc  er  f agt  ? — 
Siffen  ^kr  it)o  bcr  ^o!tor  ^cijjncr  iroljnt?  3a,  er  n)oI)nt  in 
bcr  ^eirftragc.  —  Sa^  madjt  bcr  (53artncr  ?  dv  ^flan^t "  tirfd)- 
bciume".  —  ^'Ijr  (cbt  Don  enrcm  @elbc,  \Dir  leben  Don  un[erer 
§anbc  Arbeit,  —  $Bir  Icfcn  5KieIanb§  Dberon.  —  T)k  mn\\l 
bcr  £)per  ift  au^gejcic^net'S  abcr  bcr  ^c^t  taugt'^  nid;t^.  — 
(Eafar^  ©cmal}[ln  olptc''  hen  Xoh  iljrc^  Wanned.  —  ©cr  2:ob 
iibcrrafdjtc  °*  ^Icjcanbcr  auf  bcm  @ipfcl"*  fcinc^  ^nt)mc5  in 
:Sabl)ton.  —  ^ic  <Dcbattc  tDar  [eljr  lcb^aft'%  fii^rte""  abcr  gn 
{einem  9?efultate, 

84  paxlour.  85  to  boiL  86  to  grind.  87  to  breakfast,  88  usually. 
89  to  want.  90  to  freeze.  91  really.  92  to  plant.  93  cherry-tree. 
9i  excellent.  95  to  be  worth.  96  to  have  a  presentiment  of.  97  to 
surprise.     98  acme.     99  lively.     100  to  lead. 

To  §  58. 

SKo  [inb  <Bk  tt)al)renb  bc§  (Soncerte^  cjctDcfen?  3d)  l^abe  ctnen 
(Spasiergang '  urn  hen  (See  gemadjt\  —  So  ^aben^Sie  in -Berlin 
gewoljnt  ?  Qn  bcr  ^^Gcrftrage.  —  Sann  gebenfcn '  Sie  ouf^S 
Sanb  3n  gel)cn?  iXbcrmorgen.  —  Sann  iDcrbc  ic^  ba^  S3cr^ 
gniifjen*  ^bcn,  (Sie  ^n  fel)cn?  —  SSie  (ange  l)aben  (Bk  in  ^ari^ 
getDoIjnt  ?  (gin  Qaljx.  —  Qfi)  fonntc  ^  mcine  $)ici[e  au§  SO^angeP 
an®elb  nid)t  fortfc^cn'.  —  gaben  (Bk  Suft%  eincn  5ln§flug " 
in^  ©ebirge  mit  un§  gn  mac^en  ?    ^6)  f iircl)te,  e^  tcirb  morgen 

1  walk.  2  to  take.  3  to  intend.  4  pleasure.  5  could.  /  6  want. 
7  continue.     8  a  min  J.     0  trip. 


90  KEADOa   EXERCISES. 

rcgnctt.  —  Sad  l^abctt  <Bk  in  bcr  (Stabt  gefauft  ?  (Smcn  goffer '% 
cine  9tci]"ctafd)c "  unb  einen  9^cgctifd)inn^\  —  Sir  iperben  mor* 
(jcn  mit  !itagc§anbrud)'^  aufl)rcd)en '\  —  Sir  Ijaben  (ange  auf 
(Sie  cjetDartet;  iijarum  fitib  ^ie  fo  fpdt  gefommcn?  X)ic  §aupt* 
ftragc'^  JDar  gcfpcrrt'%  unb  id;  mugtc''  fomit'^  einen  Umroeg" 
madjcn,  —  Dcr  !i:f)ce  ipirb  glcidj'"  fcrtig  fcin;  tpir  beabfid)ti(jcn^', 
nad)  bcm  5lbcnbef[cn  in  ben  ^ar!  gu  fal)ren".  —  Sdj  I)cibe  (Sic 
in  biefem  ^Regen  nid)t  crtuartct.  <Sinb  (Sic  nag  "  gciDorben  ?  — ■ 
Serben  (Sic  umS  begteiten"?  —  3}Wn  9^ad)bar  I)at  aUe  feine 
$ferbe  t)er!auft;  er  gebenit  and)  fcin  §an§  gu  t)er!aufen. 

:4:)ic©rabfd)rift"§erfd)eldlautct":  „(vr  f)at  bic  StememDcIt 
unS  nal)c  geriicft"  Kepler  \}at  bic  ^BciDcgung^gcfe^c "  bcr  ^(ane- 
ten  entbedt".  ^icfcDfficierc  ^aben  in  9J?e^*i!o  gcbient",  !Der 
^aifer  ift  unferm  ^iirgermcifter  fel}r  getro(jen^\  Unferc  (5i)cn* 
bal)nen"  ipcrben  balb  in  ben  ®cfit5 "  bed  Staated  iibcrgel)en  ", 
3d)  I)abc  (angc  nidjtd  Don  meincm  53rnber  oel)ort;  id)  fiird)tc,  er 
ift  in  fciner  (Stcttuncj"  nid)t  glitctlid).  3ic  finb  fcljr  freunb(id), 
nad)  meincm  35ettcr  gu  fragen;  er  tuirb  5(}ncn  hatii  feine  5luf* 
iDartung"  mad)cn.  Tlc'm  Dnld  ift  in  5luftra(icn  fd)neK  rcid) 
geworben  unb  unrb  balb  nad)  §aufe  3urii(f!el)rcn''.  Dr.  3al)n 
ift  nod)  nidjt  t)on5lfri!a  gurud.  gerr  M)(er  \)at  bieSlbfidjt" 
feine  ^inbcr  nac^  ^eutfd)(anb  in  bic  Sd)ule  gu  fd)i(fcn.  Sir 
iDcrbcn  einen  S^eil  unfered  ©aufed  bcr  gamilie  bed  iDoftord  iiber^ 
Iaffen'\  gd  ift  bcr  ©cfunbr)eit"  gutraglid)*"  bic  gcnfter  bed 
Sol)n5immcrdtaga(^"  mel)nna(d"  gu  offncn".  ^iefed2J?dr* 
c^en*Mft  alien  ^inbem  bcfannt.    §aben  Sic  gcine'd  @ebid)te 

10  trunk.  11  satchel.  12  nmbrella.  13  day-break.  14  set  out. 
15  main-street.  16  to  close.  17  was  obliged.  18  thus.  19  round- 
about way.  20  in  a  moment.  21  to  purpose.  22  to  drive.  23  wet, 
21  to  accompany.  25  epitaph.  26  to  read,  run.  27  law  of  motion. 
28  to  discover.  29  to  serve.  30  favorable.  31  S)ie  (Sifcnba^n,  railroad. 
32  possession.  33  to  pass  over.  31  position.  35  respects.  36  return. 
37  intention.  38  to  yield.  39  health.  40  conducive.  41  every  day. 
42  several  times.     43  to  open.     44  tale. 


READING  EXERCISES.  91 

gctefctt  ?  SKir  lerncn  tagltt^  erne  gabel  Don  ^effing  au6tncnbtg  *\ 
Tiapokon  l)atte  !cine  goffnung,  au§  bcr  ©cfangcttfdjaft "  ber 
(ingtanbcr  ju  cntlommen  '\ 

45  by  heart.     46  cajDtivity.     47  to  escape. 

To  §59  — §60. 
Dftlad)t*  ber3]^unb%  tocm  bct^^cq  it^eint'.    ^lu^cr  ®ott 

voav  nicmanb  *  ^^^^O^ '  ^i^f^^  ^^t'-  ^^^S  ^f^  ^^^  ^^G  ^^^*'^^)  ^^^'^ 
fi^riftcn  \  !ur3  *  aber  unb  inidj'am "  burd)  ^ctfpiclc '".  ^a^  bcr 
(Sinnaljme"  Don  ^roja  teilten''  bie  ©riedjcti  bte  ^cute''  unb 
fcQcItcn'*  nad)  bcr  ©ctmat  Tldn£)nld  \vav  fritter''  Inciter" 
unb  Icben^frol) '';  jctit  '*  ift  er  finftcr '"  unb  t)cr[^(offcn'°.  ©nc 
Dtciljc"'  t)onUngIud§falIen'%  bcfonbcrS"  abcr  bcrS^ob  fctner 
gran,  Ijabcn  fcincn  Tint  unb  fcin  S3crtraucn'*  erfdjiittcrt ". 
3}lorgcn  u^crbcn  \vh  unfcr  l^anb^au^  bcjicljcn '".  9lad)  bcm  Wllt^ 
tagcj'fcn  fpiclcn  tuir  geiro^nlic^ ''^  (Sc^ad)'\  Wlit  (^onncnauf* 
gang'''  i^crlaffcn'"  bie  S3ogc(  il)rc  9^cfter.  <Scit  eincm^onat 
I)abe  id)  nidjt^  t)on  meincm  iSrnbcr  gcljort.  SJ^ojart  licbte  bie 
^unft^^fo(c{benfd)aftac^'%  bag  er  il)r  fcine  ©cfunb^cit "  auf^ 
opfcrte  '*.  Scnn  n)ir  JJ^'cube ''  obcr  2cib  "  im  ^erjen  tragen '% 
U)iinfd)en^^  tt)ir  bie  (S^'cgcntoart'"  einc§  grcunbc^. 

S^a,  ti3o  bie  W^t*'  ruft",  mug  "  unfcr  S5ortetI"  fc^tDcicjen". 
Qm  filter  *'  erntcn'"  Ujir,  xoa^  Wiv  in  bcr  3^ugenb  gcfdt'''  I)aben. 
(gotuic''  bcr  Scil)raud;''  ha^  gcben  ber  ^ol)Ie'"  erfrif^t  "^^  fo 

1  smile.  2  moutli.  3  weep.  4  nobody.  5  ■witness.  6  deed.  '  7  S)ic 
S5orfc^rlft,  precept.  8  short.  9  efficient.  10  ®a^  SBeifpiel,  example. 
11  capture.  12  divide.  13  booty.  14  to  sail.  15  formerly.  16  merry. 
17  cheerful.  18  at  present.  19  gloomy.  20  reserved.  21  series. 
22  accident,  23  especially.  24  confidence.  25  to  shake.  *^6  to  move 
into.  27  habitually.  28  chess.  29  sunrise,  30  leave.  31  art.  32  pas- 
sionately. 33  health.  34  to  sacrifice.  35  joy.  36  sorrow.  37  bear. 
38  to  wish.  39  presence.  40  duty.  41  to  call.  42  must.  43  in- 
terest, 44  be  silent.  45  old  age.  46  to  reap.  47  to  sow.  48  as. 
49  frankincense.     50  coal.     51  to  refresh. 


92  EEADIXa  EXERCISES. 

crfrtfdjt  ba6  (3tM  "  bie  goffnung  "  bc6  gcrgcn^^.  T)cr  SJienfd^ 
ift  Tiic  "*  fo  fd)on,  al^  xotnn  er  urn  33cr5eit)ung  "  bittet ''.  3^ 
leucjtte  ^'^  mdjt,  ha^  id)  ntirecf)t  ge^abt  l^abe;  bod)  meiue  ^*  id^,  ift 
c^Ttutt"  ^cii,  ha^  U)r  e5  t)erGe§t''"  xtub  mit  mcmer  9^eue"  ^u* 
fricbcn  feib.  ^onnen  (Sie  mir  fagen,  ob  ^rofeffor  Corner  l)ier 
JDoIjut?  ^r  ^at  bb3  bon3cftertt ''  l)icr  geroo^nt;  jel^t  lror)nt  er  in 
bcr  SSorftabt".  Qd)  bebauere  aufrid)tig'*,  bag  <kk  no(^  immer 
untDo^l  fiub;  \)ahcn  ^ic  hm  5lr3t  bcfragt?  (Sie  fragcn,  ob  icf) 
ben  Dberften  fenne;  id)  fenne  i^n  nur  tjon  5^nfcI)n*^  -3"C^  gel)e 
langfam"'  ijorau^"'';  iDenn  il)r  leine  3<^it  Dcr(icrt'%  tDerbet  i^r 
mid)  leid)t*'  emt)olen'°.  (S3  ift  gwcifel^aft ",  ob  eine  li^cnfung'' 
ber  ^uftfc^iffe "  moglid)  '*  ift.  §crobot  befd)reibt "  in  feiner  ©e- 
{d)ic^te  bie(Sitten"  unb  (^cbraud^c"  aUer  ^Zationen,  xodd)t  er 
auf  feinen  $Reifen  fennen  gelernt  l)at. 

52  prayer.  53  hope.  54  never.  55  pardon.  56  to  ask  for.  57  to 
deny.  58  to  think.  59  now.  63  to  forget.  61  repentance.  62  the 
day  before  yesterday.  63  suburb.  64  sincerely.  65  sight.  66  slowly. 
67  ahead.  68  lose.  69  easily.  70  overtake.  71  dubious.  72  steering. 
73  balloon.  74  possible.  75  describe.  76  S)ie  <©itte,  manner.  77  2)er 
©ebrauc^,  custom. 


THEORETICAL   PART 


A 

51 

a                  B           b 

a          S      b 

0      c 

S    c 

D 

d       E        e 

b    g    e 

L/C/  y<^  .^^y^  ^ 

X.. 

^ 

F 

5 

f          G       g           H 

f     @    9     €> 

h             I    i 

K      k 

yj 

%^ 

^c^^^^^^^C/ 

W 

L 

1               M           m 

I      m    m 

N       n 

^    n 

O    o 

So 

p    p 

^^ 

^C/.^^^<t^ 

aC^^i^ 

U  u 

a   q 

R         r              S 

9t    r       @ 

S                B 

f       « 

/ 

T      t 

S  t 

^J/^7JM^ 


Vv  Ww  Xx  Yy  Zz 


Compound  Consonants. 
ch  ck  88  8z  Bch        sp  8t  th        tz 


<y 


/^^^>/^^^^ 


C/j^^y   '/^^^^/f<f^-iy^  0^/>t^/^-^  \ 


>^>e^i 


'^€yc^v^. 


i^i^-u< 


'^^<ri^-^-t^ 


?>^^>^^>^^^-" 


ETYMOLOGY. 


ALPHABET. 

In  tlie  Middle  Ap;es,  the  form  of  the  E.omcan  letters  underwent,  in 
the  hands  of  monkish  scribes,  many  changes.  Most  of  the  European 
nations  used,  at  the  time  of  the  invention  of  printing,  the  form  then 
in  vogue;  but  sooner  or  later  they  returned  to  the  plainer  Roman  char- 
acters, while  the  Germans  alone  have  retained  it  up  to  the  present  day. 

1.  The  German  alphabet  consists  of  the  following  letters: 


German 
letters. 

Roman 
equivalents. 

German 
name. 

German 
letters. 

Roman 
equivalents. 

German 
name. 

51     a 

a 

ah 

^ 

n 

n 

en 

^     b 

b 

ba 

D 

0 

o 

o 

e     c 

c 

tsa 

? 

P 

P 

pa 

T)    b 

d 

da 

Q 

q 

q 

koo 

g     e 

e 

a 

^ 

r 

r 

er 

g     f 

f 

ef 

<B 

f« 

s 

es 

®     g 

g 

ga 

Z 

t 

t 

ta 

©     I) 

h 

hall 

U 

u 

u 

u(oo) 

S     i 

i 

e(ee) 

^ 

'O 

V 

fou 

3    i 

J 

yot 

SB 

lu 

w 

va 

t     ! 

k 

Vah 

^ 

^ 

s 

ix 

8      ( 

1 

el 

9 

i) 

y 

ipsilon 

m  m 

m 

em 

3 

S 

z 

tset 

2  AI.PHASET.  [§  1^ 

a.  The  letter  f  is  never  used  at  llie  end  of  a  word,  but  §  is 
substituted  for  it  Thus,  the  nominatiye  of  ©lafe  is  @Ia8. 
This  §  is  retained  before  another  -word  in  composition:  as, 
(^(aSglocfc,  glass-belL  Also  before  a  suffix  (§  10)  commencing 
\vitli  a  comonant,  $  is  used-  Compai'e:  9iofe,  9to§d)CTi;  Icfen, 
lc05ar.  Finally,  it  occurs  before  some  consonants— especiaUv 
!  —  in  words  of  foreign  origin  mostly:  as,  2}ZuiJfc(,  23la^!e. 

2.  Besides  the  six  vowel-sounds  of  the  alphabet  there  are: 
a.  The  modified  vowels:  %{  a,  O  o,  U  it. 

They  -were  developed  through  the  phonetic  assimilation  of  n,  o,  ii  f  o 
an  i  or  j-sonnd  in  a  following  syllable:  as,  ^ii)C,  from  chasi;  jd^Oll,  from 
sconi;  ^iillc,  from  hulja. 

The  dots  ai'e  an  abridgment  of  the  letter  c.  "When  the  mod- 
ified vowel  is  a  capital,  many  authors  ^Tite  %t,  De,  Ue  in- 
stead of  %  r,  il 

The  scientific  name  for  the  modified  vowel-sound  is  „Um* 
laut/  change  of  sound. 
h.  The  diphthongs:  oi,  ct,  cu,  au,  ait. 

Di  and  ui,  too,  are  diphthongs,  but  of  exceedingly  rare  occurrence. 
The  diphthongs  a\),  Cl),  and  ot)  occur,  at  present,  only  in  proper  names 
and  foreign  nouns,  and  correspond  to  ai,  ci,  oi. 

3.  Tliree  vowels:  a,  t,  o  occur  double:  ^a,  ce,  00 :  —  ^aar, 
§ecr,  ^oot ;  when  modified,  aa  and  00  lose  one  of  the  two 
vowels:  thus,  ^drd)eu,  ^Ote. 

4  Combinations  of  cojisonants  are:  d),  ng,  ^I),  tl),  fd),  5  {="  f 
and  3),  all  of  which  represent  simple  sounds;  and  d))',  pf,  ^ 
(=  t  and  3),  qu,  fp,  ft,  which  represent  compound  sounds. 

5.  All  consonants,  except  I),  d),  fd),  j,  0,  H),  and  ^,  j)ccur 
doubled:  as,  ff,  ff,  etc.;  but  instead  of  !!,  33  wo  wiite  rf,  ^. 

Obs.  The  letters  jj  and  ff,  although  alike  in  sound,  cannot  be  inter- 
changed in  writing.  In  the  middle  of  a  word,  use  ^  after  long  vowels: 
as,  (Strafe;  and  ff  after  sJiort  ones,  except  before  a  consonant:  as,  Ijaffcn; 
but:  er  l^^t.    At  the  end  of  the  word,  jj  is  used  exclusively  like  in  ^a^, 

6.  Consonants  when  pronounced  are  either  accompanied  by 
the  voice,  L  e.,  by  the  vibration  of  the  vocal  chords,  or  not 
In  the  former  case  they  are  called  sonant,  in  the  latter,  surd. 
Sonant  are:  b,  b,  g,  j,  I,  m,  U,  ng,  r,  f,  il).  All  the  rest  ai-e 
sui'cL 


§  8]  ALPHABET.  3 

7.  Capitals  are  employed  not  only  at  the  beginning  of 
sentences,  of  lines  in  poetry,  and  of  direct  quotations,  as  in 
English,  but  also: 

a.  Tor  all  subntantwes,  or  words  used  substantively:  as,  bCK 
§crr,  the  master;  ta^  2Bie,  the  how. 

Note  especially  the  adjectives  connected  with  t)ier,  etn)a§, 
ntc^t^,  etc.  (§  85, 3):  as,  Diet  ©ute^,  ti\m^  @roge§,  ntd)B  9^eue^; 
also  the  adjectives  and  ordinal  numerals  placed  with  the 
article  after  a  proper  name:  as,  ^ar(  bcr  ©roje,  §emri(^  ber 
iBlcrte. 

h.  For  pronouns  of  the  third  person,  when  used  in  address 
(§98):  thus,  l^aben  @te  3^^  §ciu^  t)er!auft?  have  you  sold 
your  house? 

c.  For  pronouns  of  the  second  person,  when  intended  to 
come  under  the  notice  of  the  person  addressed  (as  in  letters) : 
thus,  id)  fd)i(fe  3)ir  tjicrmit  Sieine  ^ltd)cr,  I  send  you  herewith 
your  books. 

The  pronoun  of  the  Jirst  person  id),  on  the  contrary,  has 
always  a  small  initial 

d.  For  adjectives  derived  from  names  of  persons  or  places: 
as,  bie  ^(atonifd)e  ^I)Uo[opt)ic,  bcr  S^rojanifd^e  llrteg. 

But  for  adjectives  of  nationality  small  initials  are  used:  as, 
\i(X^  bcutfc^C  9tcid),  the  German  empii-e. 

e.  For  adjectives  and  pronouns  used  in  connection  with 
titles  and  in  comphmentary  address:  as,  (^e.  ^aiferlidje  ©ol^eit, 
his  imperial  majesty. 

PRONUNCIATION.* 

8.  Quantity. 

I.  Besides  aU  diphthongs,  the  following  vowels  are  long: 
a.  Every  vowel  doubled  or  followed  by  1^:   as,  (^aal,  §eer, 

S3oot,  et)re. 
h.  Every  Jinal  vowel  with  the  exception  of  c :  —  bu,  'tiCi,  \o, 

(Sofa. 


*  This  chapter  is  an  extract  from  the  author's  ,,'J)  a  §  S)  e  il  t  j  cf)  e  i  Tit 
50lunbe  beS  ^aniioDcranerS"  (Hahn,  Hannover),  to  which  tho 
Btudeut  is  referred  for  fuller  information. 


4  ALPHABET.  [§  8- 

c.  ETery  vowel,  when  the  syllable  to  which  it  belongs  ends 
in  a  single  consonant:  —  Zoh,  dlot,  ©rab,  tragbar. 

H  A  Yowel  is  short  when  the  syllable  to  which  it  belongs 
ends  in  more  than  one  consonant:  as,  5lbt,  ^ttt 

Before  6),  fc^,  &nd final  %  however,  long  vowels  occur  as  well  as  short 
ones:  —  ®(f)macf),  iBacf);  '>!fl\)d)C,  ^irf);  gug,  ^{u§;  while  before  ^  in  the 
middle  of  a  word  the  vowel  is  always  long  :  as,  ®ti"^^c. 

9.  The  following  list  contains  a  description  of  all  vocal  and 
consonantal  sounds  in  alphabetical  order: 

a  has  the  sound  of  a  iafatJier :  —  @abe,  SBaffc. 

ao  is  like  long  a:  —  ^aar. 

a  like  ai  in  air:  —  ^dl%  SSotlbe. 

01,  the  dij)hthong,  is  very^  much  like  i  in  kind:  —  ^aifer, 
2)2ai. 

au,  the  diphthong,  is  almost  precisely  like  ou  in  house:  — 

an  almost  like  oi  in  boil:  —  §dufer. 

b  hke  b:  —  halh,  iRebc;  but  at  the  end  of  a  word,  or  before 
sui'd  consonants  (§  5),  it  is  very  much  like  p;  —  ab,  QCljabt, 
^rcb^,  3i>eibd)en. 

t  before  one  of  the  vowels  a,  o,  u,  an  is  like  k:  —  (Earrierc, 
^onto,  Gultu^,  caufat;  before  the  other  vowels,  like  ts:  —  den* 
fur,  ciuiL  In  many  words  of  French  origin  it  is  Hke  a  shai-p 
s:  —  (Seruicc,  balancieren. 

CC  before  e  or  i,  is  like  kfs:  —  5lccent,  5Icci[c;  before  the  other 
vowels,  like  cc  in  accord:  —  Slccufatiu. 

1^  is  a  guttural  sj)irant  after  the  vowels  a,  0,  it,  au :  —  ^ad), 
!0od),  ^ud),  O^aud).  After  all  other  letters,  it  is  a  palatal  spu-- 
ant:  —  ^ed)er,  id),  ^dd)c,  I'ddjcr,  ^iid)er,  ^Bdudje,  didd),  cud), 
toc[d)c,  ?crd)c. 

In  the  diminutive  syllable  d)cn,  it  is  always  palatal,  no  matter 
what  letter  precedes:^ —  @ofad}cn,  9J^dbd)en. 

a.  d)  initial  occm'S  ir  foreign  words  chiefly,  and  has  then  the 
jyalatal  soimd,  when  followed  by  c  or  i:  —  (EI)emie,  (il)iruvcj; 
before  the  vowels  a,  0,  or  any  consonant,  it  is  like  k:  —  (il)a* 
rafter,  (E^or,  (il)rift. 

b.  Finally,  d)  is  hke  sh  in  words  of  French  origin:  —  (5I)auffcc, 

Gl)Cf. 

I^f,  (1)0,  when  belonging  to  the  same  stem,  ai'e  like  ks:  — 


§  9]  PRONUNCIATION.  ,     6 

ItJac^fen,  ^^ndj^.  Otherwise  they  are  pronounced  separately: 
—  irac^fatn,  be$  9?ei(l)6. 

rf  and  ct|tt  are  hke  ck  and  cqu. 

b  is  hke  d:  as,  dlthc;  but  almost  like  t,  when  final,  or  before 
a  surd  consonant  (§  6):  —  ^tnb,  eilenb^,  ^aubdjcn. 

bt,  when  belonging  to  the  same  stem,  does  not  differ  from 
^:  — (Stabt. 

tf  when  followed  by  one  consonant,  is  either  close  like  a  in 
base:  as,  eiuig;  or  open  like  ai  in  air;  as,  5BciV  "When  followed 
by  more  than  one  consonant,  it  is  almost  always  open  like  e 
mend:  —  @enbung. 

The  e  of  many  prefixes  and  suffixes  (§  10)  is  slighted  and 
obscured:  —  ^cfud),  genug,  2;t[c^d}en,  'Dlame,  33ogel,  cifcrn. 

CC,  when  both  belonging  to  the  same  stem,  are  pronounced 
lilve  long  c,  i.  e.,  hke  a  in  base:  —  WlctX,  ©cele. 

tif  the  diphthong,  is  very  much  like  i  in  kind:  —  eiuc  !(ciuc 

tXl,  the  diphthong,  is  much  like  oi  in  boil:  —  (Sule,  eudj. 

f  like/. 

g  initial  is  like  gr  in  «7iV/;  —  @an^r  (\xaVL. 

At  the  end  of  the  word,  it  coincides  with  d),  to  wit:  it  is 
guttural  si3irant  after  a,  0,  U,  au:  as,  ^ag,  bog,  trUQ,  5(ug'; 
otherwise,  palatal:  —  3Beg,  <Stieg,  ^^^Gr  ^erg. 

In  the  middle  of  a  word,  it  has  the  sound  of  initial  g,  when 
a  vowel  follows:  as,  Sage,  ^erge;  and  that  of  final  g,  when  a 
consonant  foUows:  —  9J^agb,  fragft,  Utgt. 

gn,  in  German  words,  is  hke  gn  in  ignorant:  as,  ©UQbe;  in 
foreign  words,  like  ngji  in  long-necked:  —  ^fl^oraut,  T)iagnofe, 
3}?agnet,  (Stgna(;  or  like  ni  in  companion:  —  ^aftagtiettc, 
ii^brgnette. 

!^,  at  the  beginning  of  a  word,  and  in  the  suffixes  ^ett  and 
^aft  is  like  h:  —  §au^,  greiljeit,  tra^rl)aft ;  also  in  ^2l{)ortt  and 
Ul)U,  in  the  interjections  ([\)(\,  o{)0,  and  in  some  foreign  words: 
,as,  aOftral)icrcn,  tontraljieren.  Elsewhere  I)  is  not  sounded: — 
geljcn,  <Stro^. 

i  is  lilie  i  in  machine  or  sin,  according  as  it  is  long  or  short 
(§8):  — 9)ane,  9iiune. 

ic,  in  German  words,  is  Hke  ee  in  bee,  the  e  only  serving  to 
lengthen  i:  —  9^iefc,  ^nic.  In  many  words  oi  foreign  origin 
both  vowels  are  pronounced:  —  gamilte,  (iSUeut,  ^icravd). 

i  like  y  in  you:  —  jener  3ubc. 


6    .  PRONUNCIATION.  [§  9- 

!  Uke  k,  even  before  n:  —  ^nabc,  ^od)cn. 
I  is  somewhat  different  from  the  English  /,  being  produced 
by  touching  the  upper  fi'ont-teeth  with  the  tongue:  —  Sanb, 

m  is  like  m. 

It  like  n.  In  words  taken  from  French,  however,  it  is  like 
ng  in  long:  —  ^a(fon. 

ng,  in  the  middle  of  a  word,  is  like  ng  in  f^inger:  as,  j^inger. 
Vilien  Jinal,  it  is  like  nk  in  sink:  —  @ang,  ^Offitung.  In  many 
pai*ts  of  Germany,  however,  final  ng,  too,  is  sounded  like  ng  in 
song. 

0  is  either  like  o  in  nofe,  or  like  French  o  in  pomme,  accord- 
ing as  it  is  long  or  short  (§8):  —  obcr,  Sonne. 

ij  long  is  hke  French  eu  in  peu:  —  fd)bn,  l)orcn;  b  short,  is 
somewhat  like  French  eu  in  neuf:  —  ^bffel,  fbnntc. 

oi,  the  diphthong,  is  much  like  oi  in  boil:  —  ^roi^an. 

00  Hke  long  o:  —  ^oot,  l^oo^. 

|1  Hke  p. 

In  |if,  pf,  and  |jt  both  letters  are  sounded  respectively: — 
•iPfau,  rupfen,  ^^falm,  ^tolemdu^. 

^^  is  Hke//  —  ^l)afe,  (g(ept)ant. 

qu  is  ahuost  like  kv  ;  the  v,  however,  being  purely  labial: — 
Cuclle,  quer. 

t  diffei-s  from  r,  being  articulated  by  the  vibration  of  the 
uvula:  —  9iei^,  ©err,  barren. 

f  is  like  z:  —  ^onne,  9io)e,  getfcn,  ?in]e,  gerfe;  except  when 
either  preceded  or  followed  by  any  other  consonant  than  I,  tn, 
n,  r,  in  which  case  it  is  Hke  s  in  son.  Examples:  (Stein,  21ft, 
*ip)a(m,  Sefpe,  grbfe. 

g  is  always  like  s  in  son:  —  T^a^  §an^. 

\6)  is  like  sh:  —  ^ufd). 

fp  and  p,  at  the  beginning  of  a  word,  may  either  be  pro- 
nounced like  sp,  st,  or  equally  weU  Hke  shj),  sht:  —  fpred)en, 
fte()en.     In  the  middle  of  a  word,  the  former  way  only  is  ad- 
missible: —  Sefpe,  ^efte. 
SHkes^-;  —  ^^offe. 
,  see  imder  fp. 

^  like  s  in  son:  —  gllfe*  ^^  the  difference  between  ^  and 
fl  in  ^-riting,  see  §  5. 

i  is  somewhat  different  from  /,  the  tongue  touching  the  upper 
front-teeth  for  its  aiiiculation:  —  Xob,  bctct. 


§  10]  PRONUNCIATION.  7 

t^  does  not  differ  from  t:  —  tI)Un,    Only  when  I)  belongs  to 

another  stem  than  t,  it  is  pronounced  separately:  as,  ^etl)au^« 

it  in  some  foreign  words  is  pronounced  like  ^j:  —  Station, 

^  like  ts:  —  @(f)U^. 

tt  like  00  in  moon  or  book,  according  as  it  is  long  or  short 

(§8):  — «ubc,  «unb. 

ii  hke  French  u:  —  9^ul)e,  ^iirbe, 

Ui,  the  diphthong,  is  somewhat  like  ui  in  ruin:  —  p^UU 

t)  hke/,  when  final:  as,  "ifaffit);  and  in  the  following  words: 
SBater,  ©eoatter,  ^eild)en,  33etter,  3Siet),  l)te(,  t)ier,  33ae6,  33oger, 
SSogt,  33o(!,  DoK,  Don,  bor,  SSefper,  SSice*,  gret)c(,  l^et)!oje,  garoe, 
©flaue,  and  the  prefix  t)er==. 

In  all  other  words,  i3  is  Hke  i;.-  —  3Sit)at,  ^latjicr,  ncrt)OfS. 

m  like  v:  — ■  ^ctk;  but  after  fcf)  and  ^^  its  pronunciation  is 
purely  labial,  the  action  of  the  front-teeth  being  entirely  ex- 
cluded: as,  (k^wanif  ^voan^x^. 

y  hke^«;  — 3:e^t,  5)^t^e. 

i)  stands  between  it  and  t:  —  ml)tf)ifd},  St)preffe» 

J  is  like  ts:  —  ^cit,  ^^CtJ. 

ACCENT.* 

10.  The  accent,  in  simple  words,  regularly  rests  on  the  root- 
sylloble.  Examples:  ®e=re'd)t,  33er^bi'nb=ung,  freu'nb4ic^*er,  33er* 
ei'n^am^^UTtg,  (^e=fe'U4rf)aft^er4n. 

No  prefixes  nor  suffixes  can  take  the  accent,  except  the 
following ; 

1.  The  prefixes  ant,  er;^,  mt^,  ur:  —  a'nUrorten,  (S'q^ 
Ijerpg,  mi'B^bilUgen,  U'r^prung. 

2.  The  prefix  Utt  in  all  substantives  and  adverbs:  as,  U'n* 
menfd),  U'tl-gern  ;  also  in  all  adjectives,  if  the  component  of  un 
exists  independently  in  the  language:  as,  u'n*angene()m,  u'n- 
banfbar;  but,  un^ci'gUd),  unspeakable,  because  faglid)  does  not 
exist.  A  number  of  adjectives  ending  in  the  heavy  syllables 
bar  and  lid)  make  exception  to  the  rule. 

3.  The  suffixes  ei  and  ier :  as,  5lbt=ei',  9f?eg4e'r*uncj;  and  enb 
in  (eb=e'nb4g. 

*  For  fuller  information  on  tliis  subject,  which  cannot  be  treated  here 
exhaustively,  the  student  is  referred  to  the  author's  "Lehre  vom  Acccni 
der  deutschen  Sprache, "  New  York,  F.  W.  Christern. 


8 


ACCENT. 


[§10- 


Note.— Althongh  the  prefixes  and  suffixes  will  be  treated  in  a  later 
chapter,  we  subjoin  here,  for  the  sake  of  reference,  an  alphabetical  list 
of  the  more  common  ones: 


ant:  antmortcn 
be:  bercbcn 
cmp:  cmpfangcn 
cut:  cntfcrnen 

bar:  frud)tbar 
djen:  2;t|  djdjen 
c:  @roJ5C 
ci:  ©rudcrci 
d:  'Ji^cdd 
en,  cm:  cjolbcn, 

l)o(3ern 
I)cit:  ^d)onl)cit 
icr:  S^urnicr 


Prefixes. 

cr:  cnniibcn 
ers:  (ir5l)cr5oa 
Oe:  @efal)r 
mi§:  migltngcn 

Suffixes. 

ig:  frcubig 
in:  §clbm 
i[rf):  Ijcrrifd) 
Icit:  feanfbarfeit 
Ici:  allertci 
lein:  2^i|'d)(cin 
lic^:  finblid) 
ling:  ^iingting 


un:  ungcm 
ur:  Urfprnng 
ber:  Dcrbinbcn 
Ser:  3erbei^cn 


ni^:  ^cnntniS 
^al:  !^abfa( 
ch  mtid 
ant:  (angfam 
d)aft:  grcnnbfdjaft 
turn:  9?cid)tmn 
ling:  ^emcgung 
3ig(6tg):bicnig,brei- 


11.  In  compounds  the  accent  rests  on  tlie  determining  com- 
ponent (§  212, 2),  which  occupies  the  first  place  in  substantives, 
adjectives,  and  verbs,  as  in  ^^I'pfclbaum,  aj^ple-ti-ee;  ro'fenrot, 
rose-red;  au'ffd)(te^en,  unlock;  and  usually  the  last  in  particles: 
as,  bcrgau'f,  uphill;  gcgenii'bcr,  opposite;  obgfci'd),  althougk 

DIVISION  OF  SYIiABLES. 

12.  "When  a  division  of  syllables  is  necessarj'-,  compound 
words  and  those  A^ith  prefixes  (§  10)  are  di'sided  accordin<j  to 
their  foiTaation:  as,  §an^M)nnb,  gc-rcdjt.  Also  words  with 
suffixes  (§  10),  if  the  suffix  begins  with  a  consonant:  as,  S^^^O* 
ling,  n)irt4idj. 

Otherwise,  every  single  consonant  in  the  middle  of  a  word  is 
put  on  the  second  hne:  as,  ba^bcn,  rei^bcn,  ge=I)cn. 

Also  d),  \d},  pi),  t\)f  and  §,  as  representing  simple  sounds  (§  4), 
as  well  as  bt,  are  put  on  the  second  line:  thus,  brc*d)Cn,  Una* 
fd)cn,  (v(c4il)ant,  'ipan4[}cr,  rci^gen,  ^Std^^bte. 

Of  several  consonants  in  the  middle  of  a  word  the  last  one 
is  placed  upon  tlie  second  line:  as  Ijal^tcn,  f)nf^ten,  bc['[C0 
Se|4ic,  rnp=fcn,  Sldj^d,  en=gcr,  fdj(an4er,  fiird;4cn. 

d  becomes  ft:  as,  ^d)ncMe. 


§14]  THE  APOSTEOPHE. ^ARTICLES   AND   DEC!LENSION.  9 

The  double  consonants  ^  and  5  are  always  put  on  the  second 
line:  as,  §C4*C,  bei-^Ctl,  Ijct-^en;  also  pf  after  m  and  r:  as,  !dm^ 

Note. — Tlie  sign  nsed  in  the  division,  of  syllables  is  also  employed: 

1.  In  abbreviations  such  as  Slfloxh^  unb  @ubft)inb  (for  9Zorbft)iub  imb 
©iibtinnb);  SSofallange  unb  ^^urge  (for  iBofaltdnge  unb  ^ofolfuqc). 

2.  In  compound  proper  names,  and  in  adjectives  derived  from  tbem: 
as,  Sung-@tiIIinr|,  Stcujs^Orci],  tie  bcut[d)=ameri!anijc^e  ^reffe. 

3.  In  long  and  cumbrous  compounds:  as,  £)I)crap^cIIation8geric^t§=» 
^raftbent,  ha§  gur=fid^4ctBft4etn;  especially  for  tbe  sake  of  clearness,  to 
distinguish,  e.  g.,  @eueral[tab§=5lrst,  and  @cncraI^(Stab6ar3t. 

THE  APOSTROPHE. 

13.  1.  The  omission  of  any  letter  in  writing  is  marked  by 
.the  apostrophe:  thus,  ha^  glaub'  id)  md)t    !Der  IiciCge  (tieidge) 

In  contractions  of  the  preposition  with  the  article  (§  47), 
the  apostrophe  is  no  longer  in  use:  —  an^,  bcim. 

2.  Proper  names  do  not  require  the  apostrophe  before  the 
genitive  ending  §:  as,  ®oetf)e^  S^lUft.  But  with  those  which 
cannot  take  any  ending  in  the  genitive  (§  36,  1),  the  case  is 
signified  by  the  apostrophe,  as  in  English :  thus,  GbcrS' 
9^omanc. 

ARTICLES  AND  THEIR  DECLENSION. 

14.  The  definite  article  assumes  a  special  form  for  each  of 
the  three  genders:  thus,  b  er  SSatcr,  the  father;  bte  SJZutter,  the 
mother;  ha^  ^inb,  the  child. 

In  many  cases,  wbicli  will  be  treated  in  a  later  chapter,  the  German 
noun  requires  the  article  where  the  English  does  not:  as,  haQ  l^ebeil  ijl 
fur^,  life  is  short. 

There  being  four  cases  of  declension,  the  definite  article 
presents  the  following  changes: 


Si 

ngular. 

Plural. 

masc. 

fem.  neui 

m.  f.  n. 

Nominative: 

ber 

bte    ba^ 

bie,     the 

Genitive: 

bc§ 

ber    be§ 

ber,     of  the 

Dative: 

bem 

ber    bem 

ben,    to  the 

Accusative: 

ben 

bie    ba§ 

bie,     the 

10  ABTICLE3  AXD  DECLENSION. ^NOUNS.  [§  14- 

2)13  in  eolloquifil  language  is  often  abridged  to  '^  :  as,  fomm  ^cr,  ttJcnil 
bit  '5  ipcrj  i}a\tl     Goe.*     Here  !  if  you  dare. 

fl.  The  following  pronominal  adjectives  are  decHned  in  the 
same  way: 
bicfcr,  biefc,  biefe^,  this;         aller,  alle,  aik^,  all; 
jcncr,  jcne,  jetie^,  that;  iDcldjcr,  incldjc,  ir)clci)e«,  which? 

icbcr,  jebe,  jebe^,  each; 

Full  declension  of  bicfcr : 
Singular.  Plural, 

m.         f .  n.  m.  f .  n. 


N.  biefcr    bicfe    biefe^  {i)it^),  this        bie 


t,    these 


G.  bicfc^    biefcr  biefe^,  of  this    biefcr,  of  these 

T>.  bicfcm  biejcr  biefem,  to  this    biefen,  to  these 

A-  bicjcn  bicfe    biefcr  (bie^),  this        biefe,    these 

15.  The  indefinite  article  is  declined  like  the  definite,  ex- 
cept in  the  nominatiTs  masculine,  and  the  nom.  and  ace 
neuter,  where  it  takes  no  ending  at  all     Hence : — 

m.  f.  n. 

N.     tin        cine      cin,        a 

G.    einc§     einer    eine^,      of  a 

D.    einem    einer    einent,    to  a 

A-  einen  einc  cin,  a 
Si,  The  jKDssessives  mcin,  bctn,  fcin,  i^r  (my,  thy,  his,  her), 
unfcr,  euer,  il)r  (our,  yom-,  their),  and  the  indefinite  tein,  no, 
foUow  the  same  mode  of  inflection  as  the  indefinite  article. 
In  the  nomraative  plural  they  are  like  bicf cr :  —  meinc,  bcine, 
fcinc,  unfcrc,  cucre,  i^rc. 

NOUNS. 

DECLENSION. 

SINGULAE. 

The  singular  of  nouns  is  formed  according  to  the  following 
niles: 

16.  Masculine  and  neuter  nouns  take  §  (c^)  in  the  gen- 
ilivey  and  no  obhgator}^  ending  in  the  other  cases.  In  the  dative 


*  Goe.  stands  for  Goethe. 


§  16]  DECLENSION.  H  ~ 

they  can  take  an  c,  except  those  ending  in  cf,  em,  en,  er.    Ex« 

amples: 

N.  bcr  ^efel)l,  the  order  'iia^  ^t%,  the  net 

G.  bc^  ^cfel)l§,  of  the  order     be^  9^e^e§,  of  the  net 
D.  bcm^efel)l(e),  to  the  order     bcm  9le^(c),  to  the  net 
A.  hzxi  ^efel)(,  the  order  ba^  9^e^,  the  net 

Note.— The  ending  e§,  instead  of  g,  is  required  after  a  hissing  sound 
{\,  %  f d),  %) :  as,  gu^  :  gen.  ^u^  e  g,  and  preferred  with  all  monosyllahiG 
nouns,  especially  those  which  end  in  b  or  b  :  as.  ber  23inb  :  bc§  SSinbcg; 
bag  ©rab :  beg  ©rabeg. 

Exceptions: 

1,  Masculine  nouns  in  e  take  n  throughout:  as, 

N.  ber  ^nabe,  the  boy 
G.  be^  l^nabcn,  of  the  boy 
D.  bcm  ^naben,  to  the  boy 
A.  ben  ^nabcn,  the  boy. 

The  only  exception  is  ber  ^cife,  cheese,  which  is  declined  as  fol- 
lows: gen.  beg  ^ajeg,  dat.  bent  ^dfe,  ace.  ben  M\t. 

a,  A  group  of  nouns  in  e  have  a  secondary  nominative  in 
en,  and  form  their  genitive  from  this;  thus,  bcr  3^ame  (;Jkmen), 
name:  gen.  bc^  i)tamen^. 
The  others  are: 

ber  gunfe,  spark  ber  ©anfe,  heap 

ber  ©ebante,  thought  ber  Same,  seed 

ber  ©efalle,  favor  ber  ©c^abe,  damage 

ber  ©lanbe,  faith  ber  SBille,  wiU. 

S)er  53u(^ftabe,  letter  of  the  alphabet,  although  a  nominative  33u(^= 
ftaben  does  not  exist,  follows  this  analogy:  gen.  beg  S3n(^ftabe  n  g. 

2.  A  number  of  monosyllabic  nouns  which  dropped  their 
original  ending  c,  take  en  throughout;  thus,  ber  SD^enfd),  mar.: 
gen.  bc^  SO^enfc^cn,  dat.  bem  30^enfcl)ett  ace.  ben  9}ienfd)cn.  The 
others  are: 

W^\[,  ancestor  @C(f,  fop  §trt,  shepherd 

^dr,  bear  @efe(I,  companion  \^ump,  scamp 

J^urfd),  lad  @raf,  count  OJioIjr,  moor 

^t}rift,  Christian  @reif,  griffin  "^IdXX,  fool 

J^inf,  finch  §elb,  hero  ^hx\),  nei-ve 

gUrft,  j)rince  ^crr,  master  Oct)iS,  ox 


12  NOUNS.  [§  !&* 

^rin,^,  prince  <Spat>  sparrow  'i^\)OX,  fool 

(^d)cnt,  cup-bearer    (StrauJ,  ostrich 
and  tlie  compounds: 

bcr  ^Q^eftol^,  bachelor  bcr  Untcrtl)an,  subject 

ber  -Snfap,  inmate  bet  ^^orfaI)r,  predecessor. 

9ri)n,  ©cd,  ^in!,  ©reif,  ®pab,  <Strau§  may  also  foi-m  their  singular 
like  ^cfcljl  (§  16). 

3.  !^a5  §cr5,  heart,  is  declined  as  foUows:  bc§  ^erjen^, 

bem^ergen,  ba^gerj. 

17.  Feminine  nouns  are  invariable:  thus,  bie  5^au,  woman; 
gen,  bcr  Srau;  dai  bcr  grau;  ace.  bie  grau. 

1.  Formerly,  feminine  nouns  were  inflected,  and  a  few  retain  in 
certain  phrases  their  old  endings;  thus,  Quf  Srbctl,  on  earth;  mit  @^reil, 
with  honor;  mit  ^reubcil,  with  pleasure;  in  2}Zittctl,  in  the  midst  (of); 
t)on  ©eitelt,  on  the  part  (of).  These  examples  are  all  in  the  dative  sin- 
gular from  the  respective  nominatives  (Svbc,  (Sljrc,  ^reubc,  3Jiitte,  @eitc. 
KoTE  to  §  lG-§  17. 

The  ^-declension  embraces  all  nouns  whose  stem  originally  ended  in 
a  vowel,  while  the  ll-declension  comprises  all  those  whose  st^m  origin- 
ally ended  in  tl.  The  former  was  styled  by  Grimm  the  strong  declens- 
ion, the  latter  the  weak.  To  call  the  one  the  rule,  and  the  other  the  ex- 
ception, as  has  been  done  above,  is  less  scientific  than  convenient. 

PLURAL. 
The  nominative  plural  is  formed  as  foUows: 

18.  Masculine  nouns  ending  in  e(,  en,  er  do  not  take 
any  special  termination,  but  modify  in  part  the  radical 
vowel: — 

ber  35ater,  father:  plur.  33ttter 

ber  Dfen,  stove:  plur.  Ocfcti 

ber  ^ruber,  brother:  plur.  iBruber. 

Those  ending  in  e  take  n  without  altering  the  vowel: — 
ber  £nabe,  boy:  jDlur.  ^naben, 

as  do  also  those  mentioned  in  §  16,  2;  thus,  SJ^enf^,  plur. 

ajienfdjcn. 

All  the  others  add  c  to  the  singular,  and  generally  modify 

the  radical  vowel;  as, 

bcr  51  ft,  branch:  plur.  f[eftC 

bcr  @ol)n,  son:  plur.  (So^tlC 


§  20]  DECLENSION.  13 

ber  gug,  foot:  plur.  giigc 

ber  ^aum,  tree:  plm\  ^ttumc. 

Note. — Two  groups  of  nouns  ending  in  er  never  modify  the  radical 
Yowel,  viz. ,  those  derived  from  verbs  and  names  of  countries  or  places, 
as,  ber  9Jia(er,  painter:  pi.  bie  Wtcikx;  ber  5lmerifaner,  the  American:  pi. 
bie  Slmerifaner;  ber  hamburger,  inhabitant  of  Hamburg :  pi.  bie  ham- 
burger. 

19.  Feminine  nouns,  when  monosyllabic,  add  e  to  the  sing- 
ular, and  modify  the  radical  vowel;  as, 

bie  ganb,  hand:  pL  §onbc 

bie  tunft,  art:  pL  ^Unftc 

bie  ^raut,  bride:  pi.  ^VttUtC. 

When  of  more  than  one  syllable,  they  add  n  (en)  without 
modifying  the  stem-vowel;  as, 

bie  ^(ume,  flower:  pL  ^lumctt 

bie  ^ugenb,  virtue:  pi.  S^ugenbcit. 

Exceptions: — 

1.  The  names  of  numerical  figures  receive  en:  as,  bie  <Sec^^, 
the  six:  plur.  bie  (Sec^fcn. 

2.  Those  ending  in  niS  and  fol  take  e:  as,  bie  ginftemi^: 
pL  bie  gin[terniffc;  bie  T)rangfa(:  pi.  bie  ^rang[alc. 

Note.— Nouns  ending  in  ttiS  double  the  last  consonant  before  in- 
flectional endings.  The  same  is  true  of  those  in  in :  as,  bie  ^^onigin :  pi. 
I^iinigitttten. 

20.  Neuter  nouns  in  c,  et,  en,  er,  6)cn,  lein  are  invariable: 

ba§  ©emcilbe,  paintiag:  pi.  ©emalbe 

ba§  mttd,  means:  pL  mttd 

ba§  Saftcr,  vice:  pL  Rafter 

t)a?  aj^abdien,  girl:  pi.  93^abc^en. 

The  others  when  monosyllabic  take  er,  and  modify  the  radical 

vowel;  as, 

ba§^Iatt,leaf:  pLiBIattct; 

when  of  mo7^e  than  one  syllable,  they  add  e  without  changing 

the  vowel;  as 

ha^  ®elag,  banquet:  pL  bie  ©elagc 


U  NOUNS.  [§  20- 

Those  in  tum,"  however,  make  tiimer ;  as,  ha^  gurftcntum: 
pL  gurftentumcr. 

21.  The  dative  plural  of  all  noims  adds  n  to  the  nominative 
plural,  except  when  this  itself  ends  in  n;  thus,  bie  ^J^dnbe;  dat 
ben  ganbcn. 

The  genitive  and  accusative  plural  are  like  the  nominative 
plural 

22.  PAKADIGMS  TO  §  16— §  21. 

ML\SCULINE  NOUNS. 

1.  bcr  95atcr,  father,  2.  ber  ll^nobc,  boy,    3.  bcr  ©ojn,  son, 

(representing  all       (representing  all  nouns  (representing  all  the 
nouns  in  el,  en,  er)  in  e)  rest) 

be^  3?ater§  be§  tnabctt  bc5  ^ot)nc8 

bent  ^ater  bem  ^naben  bent  (Sol)n(e) 

ben  Skater  ben  ^mben  ben  (So{)n, 

bie  3?oter  bie  ^naben  bie  8o^ne 

ber  ^^dtcr  ber  ^nabcn  ber  eo^ne 

hm  33dtertt  hen  ^nabcn  ben  ©d^nen 

bie  ^dter  bie  £naben  bie  (Sd^ne. 

FEMDONE  NOUNS. 

4.  bie  #ttnb,  hand,  5.  bie  Slumc,  flower, 

ber  $anb  •  ber  ^Inme 

ber  §anb  ber  ^lunie 

bie  §anb  bie  ^lume 

bie  §anbc  bie  :53(umen 

ber  §dnbe  ber  ^lumen 

ben  §dnbett  ben  ^lumen 

bie  gdnbe  bie  :33lnmen 

NEUTER  NOUNS. 

6.  ha^  gci^cn,  sign,  1,  ba§  Slott,  leaf,     8.  ha^  ©clog,    . 

(repres.  those  in  e,  el,  (repres.   all  monosylla-  banquet, 

en,  d)cn,  lein)  bie  nouns)  (repres.  the  rest) 

bc^  3cirf)enS  be6  ^(attc§  be^  ®elag§ 

bem  5cicl)en  bem  ^latt(e)  bem  @e(ag(e) 

ba§  3eic^en  ba§  matt  ba§  ©elag, 

bie  ^eicften  bie  flatter  bie  ©elage 

ber  3ci(|en  ber  flatter  ber  (pelage 

ben  3eid)en  ben  -Q3(dttern  ben  (^^elageit 

bie  3eici)en  bie  flatter  bie  ®e(age. 


§  26]  DECLENSION.  15 

Note  that  all  monosyllabic  nouns,  no  matter  of  what  gender,  modify 
their  vowel, 

23.  Exercise.     Decline  the  following  noiins: 

!Da^  S:)ad).  "^zx  §immeL  !Die  8uft.  "^k^^  ©efamini^. 
T^er  ^art  T){e  9J^aM.  ^cr  ©ut.  S)ie  9^u6.  ®er  gifd). 
!5)ie  geber.  'Da^  ©ra^.  !Die  ^raut.  ©ie  Sur^eL  3}er  ^atl. 
!Der  ^2(ffe.  !r)a^  gad),  "^k  gructit  33ie  ^nfeL  3:)er  Solf. 
3:)er  i^ngeL  3:)ie  @tabt.  >Da§  ^ab.  ^Der  Sun[d),  3}ie  traft, 
3:)er  i^dffet.  ^Die  ^tene.  T)a^  gag.  3}ie  ©an^.  3)ie  SBunbe. 
3:)a6  talb.  !^er  9^aum.  T)ie  ^ruft.  3:)a^  «uc^.  3:)er  ^ube. 
IDer  (Spa^.  ^iDa^  getb.  ^Die  SKaub.  3:)er  ©eibe.  ^Da^  ^i'inb. 
T)ie  ^uf).  3:)ie  5lrbeit.  !I)a^  3:)orf,  !:Der  (gdjuler,  3:)cr  :33o(f. 
T)a^  ®et)eimnt§.     S^a^  vgau^,     "^k  (Sd)ule.     !Da§  (^d)lo6. 

24.  Of  compound  substantives  only  the  last  component  is 
declined;  as,  ba§  ^anbl)au§:  gen.  sing,  be^  ?anb^au[e§;  plur. 
bie  !Banbf)dufer. 

1.  A  few  nouns  in  composition  are  declined  irregularly:  bic  SSotf= 
mad^t,  full  power:  pi.  3>oEma(^ten  (not  SSoEmad)te) ;  bie  Dl)umacl)t, 
swoon:  pi.  OI)nm a  d)  t  e  ii. 

25.  Several  nouns  which  have  two  meanings  in  the  singular 
have  two  corresponding  forms  in  the  plural: 

"ba^  ^anb,  ribbon:    ^anber  ber  ^abctt,  shutter:  !gabett 

\>a^  ^anb,  tie:         ^anbe  ber  ©trau^,  nosegay:  @trau|e 

bie  ^ant  bench:      ^dn!e  ber  ©trau^,  ostrich:  (gtraugc 

bie  ^ant  bank:       ^antctt  ba^  Zyx^,  cloth:  2^uc^e 

ba^  ©ing,  thing:      ^inge  'i^a^  Zu&f,  shawl:  Stitt^er 

ba^  ©tug,  small  in-  ba§  2Bort,  isolated  word :  Si)rter 

significant  object:  dinger  ba^  SBort,  connected 

ba^  @efid)t,  face:      ©efid^ter       word:  SBorte 

ba^  ©efidjt,  vision:    ©efic^te  ber  ^o%  inch:  3oWe 


ber  Saben,  shop:       Wizn        ber  ^o^O  toll:  ^^ik. 

1.  3)er  9JJann,  besides  aJiciuner,  makes  2)'lannen,  but  only  in  the  mean- 
ing of  'vassals,  warriors.' 

2.  Of  \)0.^  l^anb,  country,  the  plural  $?anbe  is  in  poetry  preferred  to 
!?auber. 

DEFECTIVE  DECLENSION. 

26.  The  following  substantives  cannot  form  a  plural,  and 
Use  instead  the  plural  of  a  cognate  noun: 


16 


5 

NOUNS. 

L§26- 

Singular. 

Plural. 

bcr  ^au, 

structure; 

tauten 

bcr  :53ctrug, 

deceit; 

^ctriigcreicn 

bcr  ©unb. 

league; 

^unbniffe 

ber  'A^ant, 

thanks; 

SDanffaciungen 

ha^  dvhCr 

inheritance; 

(Srbfd)aften 

ba^  ®lucf. 

luck; 

®(u(f§fdlle 

bie  ©utift, 

favor; 

©unftbe^etguttgen 

ba^  !^ob. 

■praise; 

^obc^cr^cbungcn 

bae  Dbft, 

fruit; 

Dbftarten 

ber  9?at, 

advice; 

9?atfc^Idge 

ber  9?aub, 

robbery; 

9iauberctcn 

ber  9?cgen, 

rain; 

9?cgcn(}uffe 

ber  (gcgett. 

blessing; 

(^cgnungen 

ber  (gtreit. 

contention; 

(gtreitiqfcttcn 

bcr  5^ob, 

death; 

Srobc^fdlle,  Xobe^arten 

ba^3  Ungliicf, 

misfortune; 

llnGlitcft^fdlle 

ber  ikrbrug, 

vexation; 

33crbrieg(ic^teitett 

hit  5>orftd)t, 

precaution; 

5>orfid)t§ma§rege(n 

ber  3anf, 

quan-el; 

3cintereien. 

27.  Compounds  with  *mann  for  the  last  component  sub- 
stitute the  word  ?Ieute  (people)  for  it  iu  the  plural;  as,  ber 
^aufmann;  bie  ^aufleute. 

Exceptions  are:  53iebermanti,  (S^renmann,  man  of  honour; 
<Scf)uImann,  pedagogue;  (Staat'iJtnann,  statesman;  3Baibmann, 
huntsman,  all  of  which  form  their  plirral  regularly:  thus,  ^te* 
bermdnner,  (il)renmdnner,  etc. 

1.  (SI)cmann,  married  man,  too,  makes  G^emanner;  6^cl eute 
means  'husband  and  wife,'  or  'married  people.' 

28.  The  following  plural  forms  lack  the  singular: 
4Brieffd)aften,  letters  ©Itebmagen,  limbs    ^fingften,  Pentecost 
(Sintiinfte,  income      .Soften,    )      ^ 
eUern,  parents  Unfoftcn, )  ^""^^ 
gaften,  Lent  ii^eute,  people 
gerten,  vacation        9}2afcrn,  measles 
©cbriibcr,  brothers    93^olfen,  whey 
©efd)iDiftcr,  broth-    Dftern,  Easter 

er(s)  and  sister(s) 

29.  Suppressed  forms  of  declension: 


9?dnfe,  intrigues 

STrummcr,  ruins 
Seit)nad)tcn,  Christ* 
mas. 


§  30]  DECLENSION.  17 

1.  Masculine  nnci  neuter  nouns  indicating  measure,  weight, 
or  number  do  not  form  any  plural  when  preceded  by  a  num- 
eral. The  preposition  of  between  the  measure  and  the  object 
measured  is  not  translated,  the  latter  being  treated  as  an  ap- 
position to  the  former: — ■ 

3tt)et  JJafi  5IBetn,  two  barrels  of  wine. 
J^C^n  §U§  I)OC^,  ten  feet  high. 
^Vod  ^aav  (S^U^e,  two  pairs  of  shoes, 
gitnf  ^funb  S^^^^r  ^^^  pounds  of  sugar. 

300  Mann  .^nfanteric,  300  infantry. 

But:  fed)^  aikn  lancj,  six  yards  long,  Slle  being  feminine. — 
The  only  feminine  noun  which  has  no  plural  termination  is 
bie  9J?arf,  when  used  in  the  meaning  of  a  coin;  as,  3el)n  SRatf, 
ten  marks. 

a.  A  measure  of  iime,  no  matter  of  what  gender,  according  to  the  latest 
Tisago  forms  a  plural:  as,  fie  ift  ;^et)n  3al)re,  brei  9)?onatC  iinb  ;;rt)an3ig  Xagc 
alt,  she  is  ten  years,  three  months,  and  twenty  days  old. 

2.  Substantives  taken  in  a  partitive  sense,  when  depending 
on  a  noun,  drop  their  genitive  ending  in  ordinary  prose:  as, 
tin  ^ec^er  23Scin,  a  cup  of  wine;  ein  ^tM  ©rub,  a  piece  of 
bread. 

FOEEIGN  NOUNS. 
30.  Masculine  nouns. 

1.  Those  ending  in  unaccented  d,  ett^  er,  are  declined  like 
bcr  S3ater  (§  22,  1),  but  without  modifying  the  vowel;  as,  ber 
©u!atcn:  gen.  sing,  be^  ^u!aten§;  nom.  plur.  bie  !Du!aten. 

2.  The  foUowing  are  dechned  Hke  ^nabe  (§  22,  2),  taking 
Ctl  throughout: 

a.  Those  denoting  persons,  and  ending  in  one  of  the  con- 
sonants !,  t,  or  in  one  of  the  syllables  e,  atib,  ard),  grapf),  !rat, 
gog,  log,  nOTTv  Ot,  fop'^;  also  the  names  of  nations  and  tribes 
in  ar. 

Examples:  ^ofacf,  ^tubcnt,  5I(umnc,  (^onftrmanb,  3D?onard), 
©eocjrap^,  Slrtftofrat,  ^^etnagog,  2^()eotog,  5lftronom,  'patriot, 
^^ilofop^,  UngaiV  Hungarian. 

'£t)rann,  ^agabunb,  ^arbar  follow  the  same  rule. 

Exceptions  are:  S(bt,  abbot;  ^apft,  pope;  ^ropft,  provost;  55ogt,  bailiff 
which  are  declined  like  bee  (S50gU  (§  22,  3). 


18  NOUNS.  [§  30^ 

b.  The  following  names  of  animaU  and  things:  :33ril(attr, 
T^iamant,  eteptiant,  g-oltant,  .hornet,  ^onfonant,  planet,  ^^ono^ 
grapf),  3:e(egrapf),  Cluabrant,  Quotient. 

3.  Those  endinpf  in  unaecented  or,  otl,  and  denotinpf  persons, 
are  declined  like  S>ater  (§  22, 1)  in  the  singulai',  and  like  ,^nabe 
(§  22,  2)  in  the  j)luraL  The  syllables  or  and  on  are  accented 
in  the  plural;  thus,  ber  X)6ftor:  gen.  sing,  be^  ^oftor^i;  nom. 
plur.  bte  !5}ott6ren. 

The  follo^ving  take  the  same  endings:  "^Pfalm,  !i:ribun,  ^on-- 
fu(,  Stnpoft,  mvi^kl 

4.  All  others  take  §  (c^)  in  the  genitive  singular,  and  e  in 
the  nominative  plm-al:  as,  ber  9iotar,  notary:  gen.  sing,  be^ 
9iotar§;  nom.  plui\  bie  92otare. 

There  are  also  some  which  modify  the  vowel,  viz.  9lltar ;  ^I)or,  choir; 
^I;oraI,  choral  song;  ^aital;  ^^alaft,  palace;  ^oplan,  chaplain;  ^ropft, 
provost ;  ?Ibt,  abbot ;  33ljd)of,  bishop  ;  ^arbinat ;  ^apfl,  pope  ;  ©cneral; 
SSogt,  bailiff;  the  vowel  modified  being  always  the  last  one:  as,  Slltfirc, 
e^)oraIe,  ^anale,  ^alafte,  ^orbinale. 

Note.— Nouns  ending  in  §  preceded  "by  a  short  vowel  double  8  to  ff 
before  any  inflectional  ending;  thus,  ber  ^ibibu^,  i^aper-match:  beei  5ibi= 
bufje?,  bie  gibibuffe. 

31.  Feminine  and  neuter  nouns  follow  ilie  declension  of 
crdinaiy  German  ones. 

32.  Nouns  with  special  plural  forms. 

1.  Some  nouns  taken  fi'om  ancient  languages  retain  their 
original  plural  endings :  as,  ba^  (J^amen :  W  (Jjfamintt ;  \>a^ 
gattum:  bie  gafto;  ba^  STempu^:  bie  STempoto;  \>a^  ^epfon:  tik 
&jifo;  'iia^  !ilt)ema:  bie  3^f}emato;  ber  ^^erub:  bie  vil)erubim. 

2.  Others  substitute  for  the  classic  plural  endings  German 
ones:  as,  \>a^  ^tubium:  W  <Stubicn;  \)a^  ^xi\^vo\\iViVim:  bie  ^n^ 
bioibucn;  ber  9^1)t)tt)mu§:  bie  9^t)tt)mcn:  ba^  ^lapitat:  bie  ^api* 
tolien;  ba^SJ^inerd:  bie  9)^inera(tcn;  tid^  ^lima:  bie  Mmatc; 
bie  Hrifi^:  bie  ^rifcn;  ber  §ero§:  bie  §croen. 

3.  Many  foreign  nouns  taken  from  modern  languages  receive 
an  g;  thus,  bcr  t^afdja:  bie  ^^afd)a§;  'na^  (Sofa:  bie  ©ofaS;  \>([^ 
(^cnic:  W  ©cnic§;  ber  £lub;  bie  £(ub§;  ba3  ©olo:  bie  @oloS. 

33.  An  alphabetical  list  of  the  more  common  nouns  whose 
plural  deviates  from  the  rules  given  in  §  18  to  §  27. 


^1 

DECLENSION. 

1 

Singular. 

Plural. 

ber  Stat 

eel 

Slate 

ber  %ax 

eagle 

Stare 

bie  %{p 

Alp 

Stipeu 

ber  Slmbo^ 

anvil 

Stmbo^e 

ber  %ima\t 

attorney 

Hnmatte  (Stntt)alte) 

ber  5trm 

arm 

Slrme 

bie  Strt 

species 

Strten 

bas  ^uge 

eye 

Slug  en 

bie  «al)n 

path 

Sa^nen 

ber  53aier 

Bavarian 

^aiern 

ber  S3auev 

lieasant 

S3auern 

ba§  53eit 

hatchet 

53eite 

ba^  «ein 

leg 

S3eine          v 

ber  ^efuc^ 

visit 

S3efurf|e 

bag  S3ett 

bed 

^etten 

ber  33ofeiui(^t 

villain 

iBofen)i(^te(r) 

t>a^  iBoot 

boat 

S8oote 

bas  Brob 

bread 

S3robe 

bie  SButfjt 

inlet 

md}kn 

ba§  S3unb 

bundle 

S3unbe 

bie  ^urg 

castle 

S3urgen 

ba§  ®entmat 

monument 

S)eufmate  (3)entmater) 

ber  2)o(!^t 

wick 

S)oct)te 

ber  ^olcii 

dagger 

S)o(d^e 

ber  S)om 

dome 

S)ome 

ber  ®orn 

thorn 

S)ornen 

ba§  (2nbe 

end 

(Snben 

ber  (Srfolg 

success 

(grfotge 

bie  gai)rt 

ride 

gat)rten 

ba«  ^ett 

skin 

gette 

bie  glur 

field 

gturen 

bie  ^lut 

flood 

gluten 

bie  §orm 

form 

gormen 

ber  gorft 

forest 

gorften  (gorfte,  gorfte) 

bie  grau 

woman 

^rauen 

ber  (Ban 

canton 

@auc 

ber  Oeijl 

spirit 

©eifter 

ha^  ©entac^ 

room 

©emcic^er 

ber  ©ema^l 

husband 

@emaf)te 

ba§  ©emiit 

mind 

©emiiter 

19 


20 


NOUNS. 


I  §33 


ba§  ©efc^led^t 

race 

©cfc^tcc^ter 

bos  ©cfpcnft 

ghost 

©cl>enftcr 

bag  ©cfud) 

petition 

@efu(^ 

ber  ©cttQtter 

godfather 

©cDattcm 

bag  ©cnjanb 

robe 

©cnjanbcr 

i>a^  ©ift 

poison 

©iftc 

bic  ©lut 

glow 

©lutcn 

ber  @ott 

God 

©otter 

ber  ©rob 

degree 

©robe 

has  ^aav 

hair 

^aare 

ber  §alm 

blade 

^atme 

bag  ^orj 

rosin 

^argr- 

bos  ^cer 

army 

^cere 

bas  ^eft 

haft 

^efte 

ha^  .^emb 

shirt 

^emben 

ba§  ^erj 

heart 

^erjcn 

ha^  §om 

horn  (substance) 

§ornc 

bos  ^ojpital 

hospital 

^ofpitalcr 

bcr  c^uf 

hoof 

§ufe 

bcr  Rummer 

lobster 

^ummern 

ber  §unb 

dog 

^uiibe 

ber  §ufar 

hussar 

^ufaren 

bie  Sagb 

hunt 

Sagbcn 

bQ§  3al)r 

year 

3a^rc 

ber  3anitfc^ar 

janissary 

Sanitjd^arcn 

bag  Snjeft 

insect 

Snfeften 

t>a^  Sntereffc 

interest 

Sntcreffen 

bag  3ocl^ 

yoke 

3o(^c 

ha^  Suroet 

jewel 

Suwclcn 

bcr  .Qafc 

cheese 

mit 

bcr  ^arfl 

hoe 

^arftc 

bag  ^lofier 

convent 

tlofter 

U^  tnic 

knee 

tnice 

bcr  ^orf 

cork 

^orfc 

ber  ?a(^g 

salmon 

?adf|fc 

bic  ![?ail 

burden 

i?aftcn 

ber  2a\it 

sound 

5?aute 

bcr  ?cib 

body 

£ciber 

ber  !i:ei(^nam 

corpse 

feid^name 

bag  $!oog 

lot 

?ofe 

bcr  iJorbccr 

laurel 

Sorbecrcn 

§33] 


3] 

DECLENSION. 

bcr  2nd}§ 

lynx 

?ud|fc 

bev  Wlami 

man 

SUidnncr 

bie  maxt 

boundary 

5War!cn 

bcr  SJiaft 

mast 

ma\tm  (SJiafte) 

bag  2JJecr 

sea 

ajJcere 

bcv  Tlold) 

salamander 

mol^e 

bcr  Q^onb 

moon 

SJionbc 

ber  2Jiorb 

murder 

aJZorbe 

bcr  2JJu§!ct 

muscle 

mmdn 

bie  gjiuttcr 

mother 

aJJiitter 

bcr  9kd)bar 

neighbor 

9^ad|barn 

bag  ^d} 

net 

^e^e 

baQ  £)()r 

ear 

O^rcrt 

ber  Ort 

place 

Drtc,  Oetler 

ba§  ^aar 

pair 

^^aore 

bcr  ^ar! 

park 

^^arfe 

bcr  ^i^antoffel 

slipper 

^^antoffelu 

bcr  ^fab 

path 

^fabe 

ber  ^^[au 

peacock 

^^fauc(n) 

bag  ^]^[crb 

horse 

^43ferbc 

bie  ^fiid)t 

duty 

^i3flid)ten 

ba§  ^4>fuub 

pound 

^l^funbe 

bcr  ^ol 

pole 

^^otc 

bcr  ^ommer 

Pomeranian 

^^otnmern 

bie  ^oft 

post 

Soften 

bcr  ^ul3 

pulse 

^ulje 

bcr  ^imft 

point 

^4)unfte 

bie  dual 

torture 

Ouotcit 

ber  Slanb 

margin 

9Muber 

ba§  9led)t 

right 

9ted^te 

ba§  Regiment 

regiment 

9tegimenter 

ba§  m 

deer 

m^ 

ta^  9lcic^ 

reign 

9teid)c 

bag  9lol)r 

reed 

5Ro^re 

ta^  9to§ 

horse 

9Jof[e 

bcr  Salnx 

salmon 

@atme 

bag  (5alj 

salt 

@atse 

bie  (Sc^ar 

host 

@(^arcu 

bag  <3(^af 

sheep 

®d)afe     • 

bag  @cl)cit 

log 

®d^eitc(r; 

bag  0d)i|f 

ship 

@cf)i[te 

2J 


22 


KOUNS. 


[§  sa- 


ble <Bii\ad,t 
bcr  (Sd^merj 
ticec^rift 
bcr  <?(^ii"'t 
bcr  <S(^::!) 
tit  €c^u'.b 
baS  'Sdjiuciii 
tcr  vgce 
ba§  @cit 
bcr  <Spalt 
ba§  ®i)icl 
baS  (Bpital 
bcr  Cporit 
bcr  Sp^o^ 
bic  (Spur 
bcr  (Star 
bcr  (Star.t 
bcr  (DtQt^rl 
baS  Ctotiit 
bic  ©tirit 
bcr  (Sto[f 
tcr  Ctral)t 
bcr  (Strolc^ 
bag  @tr:cf 
t:r  (Sunb 
tcr  2::g 
bcr  Xalt 
hcQ  Xaii 
bic  2:i)at 
i>a$  Xier 
bc8  Sljor 
bcr  Z:}cx 
bcr  Sijroii 
tic  Sijiir 
tic  Sod^ter 
bic  Xrac^t 
tic  UI)r 
bcr  Unf)oIb 
bcr  iScrtuif 
t:r  i3cr;!id) 
bcr  5Sctcrau 


battle 

pain 

■writing 

scoundrel 

shoe 

debt 

pig 

lake 

rope 

cleft 

game 

spitil 

spur 

sboot 

trace 

starling 

state 

Eting 

statute 

forehead 

matter 

ray 

stroller 

piece 

strait 

d.y 

neasnre 

Tcpe 

deed 

animal 

gate 

fool 

tlirone 

door 

daughter 

costtune 

clock 

monster 

IJSS 

trial 
veteran 


<Sc^(ad}tcn 
^d^mer^cn 
^d^riftcn 
©d^ufte 

^c^ulbcrt 

^d^mcine 

Cccn 

@eitc 

©poltcii 

©piele 

epitalcr 

©pornc(n),  @Voveit 

epro|y::i 

©purcn 

©tore  or  @tavcu 

©taatcii 

etad^clit 

etotutcit 

©tirncii 

etoffe 

©tra^Icii 

©trold^e 

etudE2 

©unbc 

Sage 

Saftc 

2:auc 

2;ici-e 

S:i)ore 

iX^^orcii 

Z\)vo\iz 

d)urcn 

S:o(^t:r 

Srat^tcn 

ll!)rcn 

ll:tl)0lbe 

Cerluf:c 

S^crfudjc 

2?cterQncu 


S] 

DEOLEiiSION. 

bcr  SSettcr 

cousin 

SBcttmt 

bcu  ^ofot 

vowel 

33o!aIe 

bic  2Br.l)t 

election 

53aI)Icn 

ber  SSalb 

wood 

Scitber 

ba3  2Bci)r 

weir 

5>SeI)rc 

bie  2BcU 

world 

Sclten 

ba3  2Scr! 

work 

ilScrfe 

bcr  SSurm 

worm 

SSiirmer 

bic  i^at)I 

number 

BaI)Icn 

bie  Beit 

time 

Bcitcn 

ba3  3citg 

stuff 

•Bcuge 

ba3  Bid 

end 

Bide 

bcr  Bierrat 

ornament 

Bicrraten  (Bierratc) 

bcr  B^ttS 

rent,  interest 

Binfcu. 

23 


PROPER  NAMES. 

Names  of  rivers,  seas,  lalces,  mountains,  and  forests,  as  well  as  those 
of  countries  of  the  masculine  or  feminine  gender,  follow  the  rules  given 
for  common  nouns.  But  the  names  of  persons,  places,  and  the  neuter 
names  of  countries  require  special  attention. 

8i.  All  names  of  phpe^,  and  the  neuter  names  of  countries 
receive  ^  in  the  genitive,  and  are  undeclined  in  the  other 
cases: — 

N.    :53erritt         ^eutf^Ianb 

G.    ^Berlins        T)eutfd)Ianb8 

D.    ^Q-rin         3:)eut|d)tanb 

A.     ^txWxi         T)eutfcl)(anb 
Names  of  places,  however,  endin^^  in  one  of  the  sibilants  ^^ 
f^,  fc^,  y,  I,  do  not  form  any  genitive,  but  substitute  the  pre- 
position Don :  thus,  W  9JJaueru  uou  ^art^,  the  walls  of  Paiis. 

35.  Names  of  persons  have  §  in  the  genitive,  and  can  have 
Tt  (en)  in  the  dative  and  accusative,  but  are  better  le^t  un- 
declined in  these  tv/o  cases: — ■ 
yVricbrlcl),  Frederick,   (gtifabett),  Elizabeth,     ®oet()e 
?^riebnd)8  G(ifabct()0  @oett)cg 

?vricbrid)(en)  (S(ifabetl)(en)  @oetl)e(n) 

gri:bnd)(en)  (5(i}abett)(en)  @oetf)e(n)« 

33.  Special  remarks. 

1.  MxxuUne  names  of  persons  (includinj  familj  names) 


24  NOUNS.  [§  36^ 

terminating  in  a  liissing  sound  either  take  cn^3  in  the  genitive, 
or  else  mark  it  by  the  apostrophe,  or  hj  the  article.  Also  the 
preposition  t)on  may  be  used.  Examples :  ^an]  e  U  ^,  Wa^  e  n  ^, 
gritjen^,  ^raugen^^;  3=acolv3'  SSerfe;  Hbm'  9^omane;  ber  ^ob 
hc^  (Botxatc^;  bie  ^(rbcitcn  Don  !D?a^. 

a.  3pfu3  (II)riftu§  is  declined  as  follows  :  gen.  3efu  S^rifti ;  dat.  3efu 
S^rifto  ;  ace.  Sejum  (Sl^riftum. 

b.  Of  So^aunciJ  and  ^43aulu§,  the  Latin  genitive  forms  3o^aimi6, 
^Quli  occur. 

2.  Feminine  names  of  persons  ending  in  e  can  take  n§  in- 
stead of  §:  as,  %{)txt\t:  gen.  %)^txt\zn^, 

a.  Of  SJJaria  the  Latin  genitive  form  2Jiaria  occnrs. 

3.  If  the  name  of  a  person  is  used  with  the  article  or  a  pro- 
noun it  is  not  dechned.  —  bie  ^Uii)er  be^  geinric^,  the  books 
of  Hem;y;  bie  iBriefe  unfercr  9J?arie,  the  letters  of  our  Mary. 

Only  if  the  proper  name  iirecede  the  governing  word  it  takes 
a  genitive  ending:  as,  bc^  oro^cu  griebrid)0  @iege ;  unfere^ 
§eim'id}8  ^ricfe. 

37.  In  the  plural,  ina:<cidine  names  of  persons  ai*e  either, 
and  preferably,  left  undechned,  or  they  take  c  or  '{<:  as,  bie 
§einricf)  (§einrid)c,  or  .^einrid)'^);  W  Solf  (Solfc,  or  3S?olfe); 
bie  beiben  ^umbolbt  (or  ^umbolbfci). 

Those  in  o  add  e  to  their  Latin  theme  in  on;  as,  diccro:  pL 
bie  (>iccroticj  Otto:  pL  bie  Ottonc.  A  few  take  ncn:  as,  (gcipto: 
pL  tie  ^cipioncn. 

1.  Feminine  names  of  persons  take  n  (en) :  as,  bie  OJ^ariett, 
bie  ©ertmbcn.  Those  ending  in  a,  i,  or  I)  take  'n:  as,  bie 
(Jmma'n,  hk  Wx%  bie  (gmm^'n. 

3S.  Family  names,  either  -with,  or  more  frequently  without,  the 
article,  take  in  colloquial  usage  an  '§  to  denote  the  collective  members 
of  the  family:  thus,  2JiiUer'§  fmb  bci  un8,  the  JMiller's  are  with  us. 

Also  titles  are  treated  in  the  same  way,  but  always  without  the  article: 
as,  2)o!tor'^  fiiib  gcfommcu,  the  family  of  the  Doctor  has  come. 

39.  Of  two  or  more  names  belonging  to  the  same  person  only  the  laso 
one  is  inflected:  thus,  ^cinrid^  §cincg  ^ieber,  Henry  Heine's  songs. 

1.  Of  two  proper  names  connected  by  Don,  the  sign  of  nobility,  the 
first  one  is  declined,  if  the  governing  word  precedes :  as,  bic  9ieifen 
2llcyanbcrfil  UOli  ^iimbolbt:  and  the  last  one,  if  the  governing  word  follows: 
as,  3llc^-Qubcr  uou  Jpumbclbt^  SfJcifeu. 

4D.  A  proper  name  preceded  by  a  title  with  the  article  is  left  un- 


§  42]  GENDER.  25 

changed :  ~  bic  ^romiTtg  be?  ^oifcr«  SBil^elm,  the  coronation  of  the 
emperor  William. 

If,  on  the  contrajy,  the  title  is  nsed  voithout  the  article,  the  proper 
name  is  declined,  and  the  title  is  not:  as,  ^aifer  SBU^elmg  ^ronung,  or 
tie  ^ronung  ^aif:r  SSiII)cIm8. 

1.  The  title  ^crr,  however,  is  always  declined,  whether  accompanied 
by  the  article  or  not:  as,  ^etrtt  @i-iiu3  iBtlbev,  or  bic  33Ubcr  beS  ^eiTll 
©riin,  Mr.  Green's  pictures. 

2.  A  title  in.  apposition^  whether  the  preceding  proper  name  be  in- 
flected or  not,  is  always  declined:  thus,  bic  @iege  ^friebrid)8  bt^  @rof3Ctt; 
bic  (Siege  be3  ^iittigS  gviebric^  beg  @io(jeit,  the  victories  of  Erederick  the 
Great. 

GENDER 

The  only  succinct  rules  for  determining  the  gender  of  a  noun  are  the 
following: 

41.  Masculine  are: 

1.  The  names  of  seasons,  months,  days,  and  points  of  com^ 
pass:  as,  bcr  (gommer,  summer;  bcr  5lpri(,  April,-  bcr  SJiontacj, 
Monday;  ber  ©itbcn,  south. 

2.  Most  names  of  rivers. 

The  rivers  of  Asia,  America,  Africa,  and  Australia  are  masculine.  As 
to  European  rivers,  those  of  Germany,  Austria,  France,  and  England 
are  mostly  feminine,  those  of  the  other  countries,  masculine. 

The  few  masculine  German  rivers  are:  bei*  3ll)eiu,  bcr  'jDlain,  ber  ^cilar, 
bee  Sec^,  ber  3>n«. 

3.  The  names  of  stones;  as,  bcr  ^Rubin,  ruby. 

4.  Most  substantives  ending  in  e(  (net  fcl,  tct),  en,  cr,  Id), 
Itng;  as,  bcr  §imme(,  sky;  ber  Garten,  garden;  bcr  3::cHcr,  plate; 
ber  l^ranic^,  crane;  bcr  gittbling,  foundling. 

42.  Feminine  are: 

1.  Most  names  of  trees,  flowers,  fruits  :  bie  Ratine,  fir;  bie 
gud)fia,  fuchsia;  bie  92u6,  nut 

2.  The  names  of  the  numbers :  as,  btc  (Scd)§,  the  six. 

3.  Most  derivatives  in  t  and  e  not  denoting  living  beings: 
as,  bie  9}iad)t,  might;  bie  Srbe,  eaiih. 

4.  AU  derivatives  in  ci,  ic,  in,  l^cit,  lett,  fcl)aft,  nng,  ion,  if, 
cn3,  ur,  tat:  as,  bic  (S4i)meid)efci,  flattery;  bic  9}fe(obic,  melody; 
bie  §elbin,  heroine;  bie  grcil)cit,  liberty;  bie  ADantbart'cit,  grat* 


26  )  Noum  [§42- 

itude;  btc  55rcunbfcf)aft,  friendship;  bic  §offnuttg,  hope;  btc 
3^ation,  bie  9J?u]if,  bie  grequenj,  bie  9^atur,  bie  SJiajeftat 

The  only  exceptions  are:  bcr  9?ibctung,  the  Kibelnng;  ber  ^ornnng 
(obsolete  for  ^ebruor,  Pebruarj^),  and  ba^  ^ktfc^aft,  seaL 

Note. — Many  female  appellatives  are  formed  from  the  male  ones  by 
the  syllable  in;  this  generally  causes  the  modification  of  the  root-vowel: 
as,  bev  ©uaf,  count:  bie  ©ratin/  countess  (§  209). 

43.  Neuter  are: 

1.  Nearly  all  names  of  countries  and  places:  as,  ha^  \dy6nc 
QtalkUf  beautiful  Italy;  ha^  alte  9?om,  ancient  Boma 

The  most  common  exceptions  are:  bic  ®cf)tuci5,  Switzerland;  bic  Xui» 
!ei,  Turkey;  bcr  J^aag,  the  Hague. 

2.  Karnes  of  metals:  as,  ha^  ©olb,  gold;  ha^  ^kx,  lead;  but; 
bcr  ^ta{)i,  steeL 

3.  Names  of  letters  of  the  alphabet:  as,  ba§  51  Itnb  ba§  D. 

4.  Eveiy  word  used  suhdanliixhj :  as,  ba^  35}arum,  the  why; 
ba$  (2d)due,  the  beautiful;  bad  Sfjcn  unb  2:rinfcn,  eating  and 
diinking. 

5.  Collective  nouns  haYing  ®e  for  a  prefix;  as,  ha^  ©ebirgc, 
mountains. 

6.  All  nouns  ending  in  cf)ett  and  Icitt,  and  most  of  those  in 
fat,  fe(,  ntd,  turn:  as,  t)a^  3!J?effercl}cn,  Httle  knife;  ha^  £inb(ein, 
baby;  ha^  i^ab)a(,  refreshment;  bad  9iatfe{,  liddle;  ha^  4Buttb=» 
nid/league;  bad  (E^riftentum,  Christianity. 

a.  The  s;s-llables  d)cn  and  Icin,  by  which  diminutives  are 
formed  from  nouns,  regularly  require  the  modification  of  the 
radical  vowel:  as,  bad  gdnbdjcn,  bad  ^oljuc^en,  bad  ^Srubcrdjen, 
bad  ^dttuidjcu  (§  209). 

44.  Some  nouns  have  a  double  gender  TN-ith  a  correspond- 
ing difference  in  meaning: 

bcr  5l(p  nightmare  bie  3l(p  Alp    (mountain 

pastui'e) 
bcr  iBanb  rolume  ha^  53anb        ribbon,  tie 

bcr  ^auer         peasant  \ia^  ^auer      cage 

bcr  ^udcl         hiuup  bie  -53ucfc(        buckle 

ber  4BlllIe  buU  bie  ^uUc  bull  (papal  do. 

cument) 
bcr  ^unb  league  bad  i8unb         bundle 

ber  (iljor  choir  (persons)    bad  (^^or  choir  (place) 


§46] 

GENDEE. 

21 

bcr  GrLe 

heir 

ha^  dxhc 

inheritance 

bie  G-rlcnntniS 

knowledge 

ba^  (5r!cntttni§  sentence 

bcr  ©cl)alt 

contents 

ba^  ^5cl)alt 

salary 

bie  ©ift 

gift 

ba^  ©ift 

poison 

bcr  §arj 

Harz  mountains  baS  ^ar,^ 

resin 

bcr  ©cibe 

heathen 

bie  ©cibe 

heath 

bcr  Sut 
bcr  ticfer 

hat 

bie  Sut 

•^  guard 

jaw-bone 

bie  Sicfcr 

pine 

bcr  It'unbc 

customer 

bie  knnhc 

tidings 

bcr  ^citcr 

leader 

bie  ii^citcr 

ladder 

bcr  !['oI)tt 

reward 

ba^  ^oI)n 

wages 

bie  manM 

almond 

ba^  ^anhd 

a  number  of  fif< 
teen 

bie  mavl 

march(district),  ha^  SJiarf 

ma,rrow 

mark  (coin) 

bcr  iO^arfd^ 

march 

hk  mav\d) 

marsh-land 

bcr  ma\t 

ship's  mast 

bie  Wla\t 

mast  for  hogs 

bcr  a}?cnfd) 

man 

bae  ayjcnfd) 

wench 

bcr  $me|[er 

measurer 

bae  9}?cffer 

knife 

bcr  mm 

rice 

ba^  mci^ 

twig 

bcr  ©d)i(b 

shield 

ba^  (gdjilb 

sig-n-boai'd 

bcr  ©djiDuIft 

bombast 

bie  SdjiDuIft 

swelling 

bcr  ©cc 

lake 

bie  (See 

sea 

bcr  ©pro[fe 

shoot 

bie  (Sproffe 

step 

bie  ©teuer 

tax 

ba^  (Steuer 

helm 

bcr  ©tift 

peg 

ba^  Stift 

ecclesiastical 
foundation 

bcr  STett 

part  of  a  whole  \>a^  ^ci( 

share,  portion 

bcr  S^or 

fool 

ba^  S:i)or 

gate 

bcr  $l>erblenft 

earnings 

ba«  S3erbienft 

merit 

hk  Sjcljr 

defence 

bag  Seljr 

weir 

45.  Compound,  substantives,  with  very  few  exceptions, 
have  the  gender  of  the  last  component:  as,  bet  ^(umengartett, 
flowergarden;  hit  ^lumenjud^t,  floriculture;  bttS  ^(umeubeet, 
bed  of  flowers. 


PREPOSITIONS  (cf.  §  189). 
46.  Prepositions  govern  the  genitive,  dative,  or  accusative. 
1.  The  genitive:  ipd^renb,  dui-iug,  and  tocgcU/  on  account 
of:— 


23 


PREPOSITIONS. 


[§46- 


3Ba^renb  bc8  (^tunncS. 

During  the  storm. 

Segcu  bcS  ^RcgenS, 

On  account  of  the  rain. 

2.  The  dative : 

au^,  out  of,  from 

fcit,  since  (time) 

bei,  near 

Don,  from,  of 

mit  '«'ith 

3U,to 

nad),  to,  after 

gcgenUbcr,  opposite. 

Exami)les: 

'Die  Seute  fommcn  au§  bcr 

People     ai-e     coming    from 

^ird)c. 

church. 

<Scit  fcincm  5tobc. 

Since  his  death. 

a.  To  after  verba  of  motion  toward  a  place  is  nad),  towards 

B.2yerson,  yii  as, 

3c^  Qclje  noi^  SSien. 

I  go  to  Yienna. 

-Jc^  gcljc  ju  neiucm  On!ct. 

I  go  to  my  uncle. 

3.  The  accusative : 

burd>  through 

gcgen,  against 

fur,  for 

urn,  about,  rotmd. 

Through  the  wood. 
Against  the  enemy. 


O^nc,  without 
Examples: 
S)urd)  bctt  Se^alb. 
©cgcn  bcti  geinb. 
4.  The  dative  or  ajccusative  : 

an,  at,  on  l^ttitcr,  behind  unter,  imder 

QUf,  upon  nebcn,  beside  t)or,  before 

in,  in  iiber,  above,  across    3n){fd;cn,  between; 

the  dative  being  required  in  answer  to  the  question  where? 
and  the  accusative  in  answer  to  the  question  whither? 

Examples : 
Qd)  fpa^icre  in  bem  (^rtcn.        I  walk  in  (within)  the  garden. 
Qd)  gcl)C  i;i  ben  ©artcn.  I  go  into  the  garden. 

47,  Preposition  and  article  are  often  contracted:  thus, 
oitS  Seufteiv  for  an  ba^  &enfter,  to  the  ^vindow; 


§  48]  AUXILIARIES  OF   TENSE.  29 

am  genftcr,  for  an  bem  genfter,  at  the  wmdow; 

im  (Garten,  for  in  bem  ©arten,  in  the  garden; 
fitim  Tiini^kv,  for  bel  bem  SDIinifter,  -with  tlie  minister; 
Horn  Wlavttc,  for  Don  bem  TlaxttCf  from  the  market; 
inv  ^irdjc,  for  3U  ber  ^trc^e,  to  churcL 
Similarlj:  auf^,  burd)^,  fUr5,  l^inter^,  in^,  Itbcr^,  um§,  i3or§. 

1.  la  the  phraso  um'3  §immct3  UJlGen,  for  heaven's  sake,  um'§  stands 
for  urn  be§. 

VERBS. 

The  study  of  the  verb  must  begin  with  the  three  Auxiliaries  IjaBcn, 
fein,  and  tuerbcn,  because  many  tenses  of  the  verb  are  formed  with  their 
assistance. 

4:8,  Conjugation  of  ^abtn,  to  have. 

INDICATIVE.  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present: 

iiS)  Ijahc  I  have  ic^  ^abc  I  (may)  have 

bu  I)aft  thou  hast  bnl)abeft  thou  have 

er  (fie,  e§)  I) at    he  (she,  it)  has  er  Ijabe  he  have 

ipir  l)aben  we  have  n)ir  ^abcit  we  have 

ibr  Iiabt     )  ,  ibr  Iiabct  ) 

(Bk  !)aben  \      ^^^  ^^^  ©icr)aben  |  ^^^  ^^^^ 

fie  l^aben  thej  have  fie  I)aben  they  have 

Note.— On  the  use  of  <Sie  in  address,  see  §  98. 

Imperfect: 

ic^  ^attc  I  had  tc^  !)attc  I  might  have 

bu  l)atteft  thou  hadst  hVi  l^dtteft  thou    mightest 

have 

er  f)atte  he  had  er  Vdtk  he  might  have 

n)ir  \jaitcn  we  had  njir  Ijdtten  we  might  have 

i^r  t)attet  you  had  i()r  Ijattct  3'ou  might  have 

fie  l)attett  they  had  fie  Ijatten  they  might  have 

The  other  moods  and  tenses  are  formed  Hko  those  of  lobctl  (^  51  and 
§55): 


30 


VERBS, 


f§48. 


INDICATIVK 


SUBJUNCTTVli 


Perfect: 

id)  t)alie  QCi)aht  I  liave  had         id)  Ijahc  gc()abt   I(may)liaveliad 

Pluperfect : 

id)  l)atte  gcl)abt  I  had  had         id)  fjcitte  gel^abt  I   might    have 

had 
Future: 
xi)  iDcrbc  Ijdbcn  I  shall  have       ic^  iDerbc  Ijahcn  I  shall  have 

Future  Perfect: 

x6)  l^crbe  gel)abt  I  shall  liave       ic^  iDcrbe  Qtt)aht  I  shall  have  had 
l)abcn  had  I)abcn 

Conditional:  id)  ^riiirbe  r)abcn  I  should  have 

Conditional  Perfect:  i^tuiirbegefjabf^aben  I  should  have  had 

Imperative:  l^abe  have  (thou) 

l)abt,  l)abett  (Sic  have  (you) 

Infinitive  Present:     (^u)  l)aben  to  have 

Infinitive  Perfect:      gel}abt  (jU)  Ijahcn  to  have  had 

Present  Participle:    I)abenb  having 

Past  Participle:        gc^abt  had. 


49. 


Conjugation  of  fein,  to  be. 


INDICAT1\K 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present: 

id)  bin 

I  am 

ic^fci 

I  (may)  be 

bu  btft 

thou  ai-t 

t>Vi  f  eieft 

thou  be 

crift 

he  is 

cr  fci 

he  be 

h)ir  jinb 

we  are 

\v\v  fcicn 

we  be 

il)r  fcib 

you  are 

il)r  fcict 

you  be 

fie  finb 

they  are 

fie  fcien 

Imperfect : 

they  be 

i^toar 

I  was 

ic^  tDdrc 

I  were,  I  might 

bu  tearft 

thou  wast 

bu  Uiarcft 

thou  wert     [be 

cr  luar 

he  was 

er  luare 

he  vrere 

ttjir  tDarett 

we  were 

wiv  tuarcn 

we  were 

i^r  Xoavct 

you  were 

i^r  marct 

you  were 

fie  luareu 

they  were 

fie  jpciren 

they  were 

§50] 


AUXILIAIITES  OF  TENSE. 


31 


Perfect: 

id)  Bin  geiDe[en  I  liave  been      id)  f ci  gclDcfcn    I  (may)  Imve 

been 
bu  bift  gett)e[cn  thou  bast  been,  bu  [cieft  getDCfeu  thou  have  been, 
etc  etc  etc 

Pluperfect: 

id)  toot  genjefen  I  had  been        ic^  tt»arc  gctt)C]€tt  I  had  been 

bunjarftgeiDCfctlthou  hadst        bu  iDdrcft  gc-      thou  hadst 

etc  been,  etc  iDcfctt,  etc  been,  etc 

Future: 

id)  iDcrbe  \dn     I  shall  be         ic^  tt)erbe  fein     I  shall  be 

Future  Perfect: 

ic^\r)crbcgctt)c[cnl  shaU  have       id)  Wcvht  gett)e^  I  shall  have 
fcin  been  fen  feitt  been 

Conditional:  id)  tDiirbc  feitt  I  should  be 

Conditional  Perfect :  ic^  tuiirbe  geftJefeu  feitt  I  should  have  been 


fci 

feib,  feictt  Sic 

(3U)  fein 

gewefcn  (ju)  fcin 
fctenb 
gctocfen 


Imperative : 

Infinitive  Present: 
Infinitive  Perfect: 
Present  Participle : 
Past  Participle: 

Note.— In  the  conjugation  of  fein  three  roots  are  to  be  distingnisliecl: 
hi,  as,  vas.  From  vas  tuar  {originally  tna^)  and  gett)cfen  are  derived. 
2)a8  3Be(eu,  the  being;  Deutucfcn,  to  decay;  aniucfcitb,  present;  abtuefeub, 
absent,  have  the  same  root. 


be  (thou) 

be  (you) 

to  be 

to  have  been 

being 

been 


50. 


id)  tt)erbe 
bu  n)u'ft 
er  n)irb 
iDir  n)erben 
i^r  njerbet 
fie  iDerbcn 


Conjugation  of  toerbeit^  to  become 


IKDICATrV^ 

Present: 
I  become  i^  tpcrbe 

thou  becomest  bu  Voerbeft 
he  becomes       er  li^erbe 
we  become        tt)ir  iDerben 
you  become       it)r  iDerbet 
they  become     fie  toerbcn 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

I  (may)  become 
thou  may  est  become 
he  may  become 
we  may  become 
you  may  become 
they  may  become 


32 


[§50, 


Imperfect : 

id)  rjurbc,  or     I  became  id)  iDUrbc 

loarb 
hvi  njurbcft,  or    thou  becamest  bit  tDiirbcft 

luarbft 
cr  njurbc,  or       lie  became        cr  tt>Urbc 

luarb 
toir  tourbcu        we  became        iuir  Witrben 


I  might  become 

thou  mightest 

become 
he  might  be- 
come 
we  might  be- 
come 
i^r  ttJUrbct  you  became       i^r  luitrbet  you  might  be- 

come 
fie  IDUrbCtt  they  became      fie  roiirben  they  might  be- 

come 
Perfect: 

id)  Bin  (jelDorbcnl  have  become  id)  fci  gcmorbenl  (may)  have 

become 
Pluperfect: 

id)  toor  gciporben  I  had  become  id)  toare  gcmorbcn  I  had  become 

Future : 

id)  iDcrbc  ipcrben  I  shall  become  id)  iucrbe  toerbeti  I  shall  become 

Fnture  Perfect: 

id)  mcrbe  genjor- 1  shall  have  be-  id)  tDerbe  gctt)or*  I  shall  have  be- 
beti  fcin  come  ben  fcin  come 

Conditional:  \6)  iDlirbe  tDCrbetl  I  should  become 

Conditional  Perfect:  id)  Uuirbe  gcnjorbetl  I  should  have  become 

fein 

Imperative:  iDerbe  become  (thou) 

hjerbet,  iDerbcn  ^^ie  become  (you) 

Infinitive  Present:     (^u)  tDCrben  to  become 

Infinitive  Perfect:     gciPorbcn  (311)  fcilt  to  have  become 

Present  Participle:    IPCrbenb  becoming 

Past  Participle:        gcioorticn  become 


§  52]  GENEKAL   REMAEKS.  33 

General  remarks  on  the  Verb, 

51.  Tliree  foiTQs:  tlie  infinitwe,  imperfect,  and  pad  participle 
are  called  Principal  Parts,  because  all  the  others  can  be 
inferred  from  them. 

52.  Formation  of  moods  and  tenses. 

1.  The  Infinitive  of  every  verb  (except  fcitt  and  t\)Vin)  ends 
in  en:  as,  toben,  to  praise.  By  cutting  off  this  syllable,  the 
stem  is  obtaiaed. 

2.  The  Present  Participle  adds  etlb  to  the  stem:  as,  (obetlb, 
praising. 

3.  The  Past  Participle  requires  the  augment  i]e,  and  has 
either  (c)t  or  en  for  an  ending:  as,  geIol)t,  praised;  gcfcIjCIl, 
seen. — The  augment  (jc  is  suppressed: 

a.  In  aU  verbs  with  the  prefixes  be,  ge,  cnt,  emp,  er,  t)er,  3er, 
and  some  others  (§  78  to  79) :  thus,  bebauen,  partic.  bebaut. 

b.  In  aU  verbs  not  accented  on  the  stem  (§  10),  especially 
those  in  ieren  and  eten,  as,  marfd)ieren:  partic.  marfd)iert;  pro- 
:p()egeten:  part  propljejeit 

4.  The  Present  Indicative  adds  the  endings  c,  (e)ft,  (c)t,  cn, 
(c)t,  en  to  the  stem.  On  certain  changes  of  the  stem-vowel, 
see  §  C4,  1. 

The  Present  Subjunctive  adds  the  terminations  e,  eft,  e,  etl/ 
et,  en  to  the  stem. 

5.  The  Imperfect  Ind.  either  ends  in  te,  and  then  the  Im- 
perfect Subjunctive  agrees  with  it;  or  else  it  takes  no  ending, 
but  changes  the  radical  vowel;  as,  cjeben:  imperf.  id)  Qah;  and 
in  this  case  the  Imperfect  Subjunctive  adds  e  to  it,  and  mod- 
ifies the  vowel:  thus,  id)  gab,  e.  g.y  becomes  id)  <^Ciht, 

6.  The  Perfect  and  Pluperfect  are  compound  tenses,  and 
are  formed  by  adding  the  past  participle  to  the  proper  tenses 
of  the  auxiliaries  l)aben  and  jein:  thus,  id)  l^abe  gelobt,  I  have 
praised;  ic^  l)atte  getobt,  I  had  praised;  i^  bin  gcfommen,  I  have 
come;  id)  XOdX  gefommen,  I  had  come. 

7.  The  Future  and  Conditional  are  also  compound  tenses, 
and  are  formed  by  adding  the  infinitive  to  the  proper  tenses 


34  VERBS.  [§  52^ 

of  tr>crbcn:  —  ic^  tuerbc  toben,  I  shall  i)raise;  i^  ipiirbe  loben,  1 
should  praisa 

8.  Tlie  Imperative  adds  e  to  the  stem  ia  the  singular,  and 
(c)t  in  the  plural:  —  lobe,  praise  thou;  Iob(c)t,  j^i'^ise  ye. 

Tliis  e  is,  in  colloquial  language,  often  suppressed;  as,  rcicfj' 
mir  bie  ^^axi^.    Some  verbs  reject  it  altogether  (§  GJ^  1,  a). 

53.  In  the  same  way  as  in  EngHsh  some  verbs  undergo 
stronger  inflectional  changes  than  othera  (compai'e  icinie^  ityrofe, 
written  with  praise,  praised,  praised),  so  the  German  language 
presents  a  strong  and  a  lueak  conjugation,  the  foiiner  being 
commonly  called  the  irregular,  the  latter  the  regular. 


WEAK  OR  REGUIiAR  CONJUGATION. 

54.  The  characteristics  of  the  regular  conjugation  are  that 
tlie  stem-i-xnoel  is  never  ctmnged,  that  the  imperfect  ends  in  tc, 
and  the  fyast  pnirticiple  in  t. 

The  following  table  presents  the  conjugation  of  a  regular  verb. 

55.  CoBcn,  to  praise. 
ACTIVE  VOICE. 

IXDICATTSTE  MOOD.  SUBJUNCTH^  MOOD. 

Present: 
i^  lobe,  I  praise,  I  am  praising  id)  lobc,  I  (may)  j^raise 
tVi  lobfl  bu  lobcjl 

cr  lobt  er  lobe 

mir  (obcn  tuir  lobcn 

i()r  lobt,  or  lobct  i^r  lobct 

fie  lobctt  fie  lobcn 

Imperfect: 

t(^  lobte,  I  praised,  I  was  \&j   lobte   (old  Conditional),   I 

bulobtcfl  [praising  bit  lobtcft  [might  praise 

er  lobtc  cr  lobte 

xoxx  lobten  xoxt  lobtcn 

i()rIobtct  iI}rIobtct 

fie  lobicn  fie  lobteu 


§  55]  WEAK    CONJUGATION.  35 

INDICATIVE  MOOD.  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Perfect: 

id)  \)ahc  QCloU,  I  have  praised  ic^  ^abc    gcfobt,  I   (may)   liave 

praised 

'hu  f)a\t  cjefobt  bu  l)abeft  c\ctoU 

cr  ^at  gelobt  er  I)abe  gciobt 

ttJtr  I)abctt  Qclobt  iuir  I)abeu  gclobt 

i^r  l)abt  cjelobt  i^r  l)abct  gelobt 

fie  l^aben  gelobt  fie  f)abcn  gelobt 

Pluperfect: 

id)  ^attt  gelobt,  I  had  praised  id)  \)atk  gclobt  (old  Cond.  Perf.), 

I  might  have  praised 

bu  I)attcft  gelobt  bu  I)attcft  gelobt 

er  l)atte  gelobt  er  l)dtte  gelobt 

tDir  l)atteu  gelobt  wiv  fatten  gelobt 

il)r  i^attet  gelobt  il)r  I)dttet  gelobt 

fie  l^attcn  gelobt  fie  ^dtteu  gelobt 

Future: 

id)  tnerbe  loben,  I  shall  praise  id)  trcrbe  loben,  I  shall  praise 

bu  tDtrft  lobeu  bu  u>erbeft  lobeu 

er  tt)irb  lobeu  er  wcvht  lobeu 

ipir  inerbeu  lobeu  tuir  n^erbeu  lobeu 

i^r  JDerbet  lobeu  il)r  inerbet  lobeu 

fie  iDerbeu  lobeu  fie  li^erbeu  lobeu 

Future  Perfect: 

id)  tttcrbe  gelobt  l^abeu,  I  shall  ic^  tt»crbe  gelobt  l^abeu,  I  shall 

have  praised  have  praised 

hVi  iDirft  gelobt  l)abeu,  etc.  bu  luerbeft  gelobt  ^abeu,  etc. 

CONDITIONAL  MOOD. 

Present:  Perfect: 

ic^  ttjiirbe  lobeu,  I  should  praise  id)  ttjiirbe  gelobt  l)abeu,  I  should 

have  praised 

bu  tnitrbeft  lobeu  ^u  mitrbeft  gelobt  l^abeu 

er  iDitrbe  lobeu  er  ii^iirbe  gelobt  l)abeu 

toxv  itjiirbeu  lobeu  u>ir  triirbeu  gelobt  t)abeu 

il)r  iDiirbet  lobeu  it)r  iniirbet  gelobt  l)abeu 

fie  iDiirbcu  lobeu  fie  icUrbcu  gelobt  l)abeu. 


36  VERBS.  'l^§  55 

IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 

lobe,  praise  (thou)  IoI)(c)t,  lobctt  ^\c,  j^raise  you 

cr  foil  lobcn,  or  er  lobe,  let  Idm  fie  foUcn  lohcn,  let  tliem  praise 

praise 
lobcn  ipir,  or  lag  (lagt)  un^  lo^ 

bcu,  let  us  i^raise 

Note.— If  tlie  exhortation  is  directerl  to  only  one  person  besides  the 
speaker,  lajj  is  used;  if  to  more  than  one,  la^L 

INFINITIVES. 

Pres.  3U  lobcn,  to  praise 

Past  gctobt  (3U)  Ijahzn,  to  kive  praised 

PAETICIPLES. 

Pres.  lob  en  b,  j^raising 
Pasi  gclobt,  praised. 

PASSIVE  YOICR* 

INDICATrVTB  MOOD.  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Present: 

id)  ti)crbc  gclobt,  I  am  praised  ic^  toerbc   gclobt,  I  (may)  be 

praised 

btt  ttjirft  gelobt  bu  tDcrbeft  gctobt 

cr  tpirb  gclobt  cr  iDcrbe  gclobt 

toxv  iDcrbcn  gclobt  iinr  uterben  gclobt 

i^r  tocrbet  gclobt  i^r  iDcrbct  gclobt 

fie  iDcrben  gclobt  -  fie  toerbcn  gclobt 

Imperfect: 

id)  tpurbe  gclobt,  I  was  praised  i^  ftiiirbe  gclobt  (old  Cond.),  I 

were  praised 
bu  it^nrbcft  gclobt  bu  initrbeft  gclobt 

er  iDurbe  gclobt  cr  iriirbe  gclobt 

unr  luurbcn  gclobt  toir  tuiirbcu  gclobt 

il)r  tpurbct  gclobt  il)r  luiirbct  gclobt 

fie  luurbcn  gclobt  fie  toUrben  gclobt 


*  The  study  of  this  table  is  meant  to  be  reserved  for  §  166, 


§55] 


WEAK   CONJUGATION. 


37 


INDICATIVE  MOOD. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


Perfect: 

id)  bin  gclobt  njorben,  I  have     ic^  fei  gelobt  tt>Drben,  I  (may) 

been  praised  liave  been  praised 

bu  bift  gelobt  tnorbctt  bu  feieft  cjelobt  morbcn 

er  ift  (gelobt  hjorben  er  fei  gelobt  tnorben  ^ 

mv  finb  gelobt  iDorbcn  \v\v  feien  gelobt  luorben 

i^r  feib  gelobt  worben  il}r  feiet  gelobt  tuorben 

fie  finb  gelobt  njorben  fie  feicn  gelobt  ttjorben 

Pluperfect: 

ic^  mar  gefobt  njorben,  I  had     ic^  mare  gelobt  morben,  I  should 


been  praised 
bu  marft  gelobt  morbcn 
er  toar  gelobt  morben 
\mt  maren  gelobt  toorben 
i()r  waret  gelobt  morben 
fie  toaren  gelobt  morben 


tc^  merbe  gelobt  mcrben,  I 

be  praised 
bu  mirft  gelobt  merben 
er  ttJirb  gelobt  merben 
mir  merben  gelobt  merben 
i^r  tDerbet  gelobt  merben 
fie  merben  gelobt  merben 

Future  Perfect: 


have  been  praised 
bu  mftreft  gelobt  trorben 
er  iDcire  gelobt  morben 
njir  mciren  gelobt  morbcn 
i^r  tociret  gelobt  morben 
fie  maren  gelobt  morben 

Future : 

shall  \6)  merbe  gelobt  merben,  I  shall 
be  praised 
bu  merbeft  gelobt  merben 
er  merbe  gelobt  merben 
wiv  merben  gelobt  merben 
t^r  merbet  gelobt  merben 
fie  merben  gelobt  merben 


id)  mcrbe  gelobt  tDorben  fein,  I  id)  merbe  gelobt  morben  fein,  I 
shall  have  been  praised  shall  have  been  praised 

bu  mirft  gelobt  morben  fein,  i^Vi  merbeft  gelobt  morben  fein, 
etc  etc. 


CONDITIONAL   MOOD. 


Present : 

id)  milrbe  gelobt  merben,  I 

sho  old  be  praised 
bu  tpitrbeft  gelobt  mevbcn 
er  tnurbe  gelobt  toerbcn 
mir  miirben  gelobt  merben 
i^r  luitrbct  gelobt  iDerbcn 
fie  ttJiirben  gelobt  merben 


Perfect : 

i^  miirbe  gelobt  morbcn  fein, 

should  have  been  praised 
bu  tnilrbeft  gelobt  morben  fein 
er  nntrbe  gelobt  morben  fein 
mir  jDitrben  gelobt  morben  fein 
il)r  loiubct  gelobt  morben  fein 
fie  joiirben  gelobt  morben  fein 


38  VERBa  [§  55- 

IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 

fct  gclobt,  be  thou  praised 
fcib  gctobt,         ] 
fcicn^iegeIobt,r"y^^P^^^ 

INElNlnVES. 

Present:  gclobt  (p)  ircrbcn,  to  be  praised 

Past:  gclobt  iuorbeu  (3U)  feitt,  to  liave  been  praised. 

FUTURE  PARTICIPLE. 

in  lobctt,  to  be  i)raised. 

1.  Inferrogative  form:  lobe  id}?  do  I  praise?  Ijaht  id}  gclobt?  have  I 
praised  ? 

2.  Xerjatwe  form:  icf|  lobe  itic^t,  I  do  not  praise;  {6)  ^abc  nid^t  gelobt, 
I  Lave  not  praised. 

Examples  of  regular  verbs  for  practice:  Icbetl,  live;  ftrafCTl, 
punish;  fagcn,  say;  na()cn,  approach;  fdjicfctt,  send;  bantetl, 
thank;  ()o(en,  fetch. 

56.  Special  remarks, 

1.  When  the  stem  of  a  verb  ends  in  b  or  t,  a  euphonic  e  is 
inserted  before  an  inflectional  t  to  prevent  difficulty  in  pro- 
nunciation: as,  cr  rcbct,  rcbctc,  l^at  gercbct;  if)r  rcbct.  Also 
after  vx  and  n  the  same  e  is  sometimes  indispensable. 

For  practice:  babcn,  bathe;  arbeitett,  work;  atmen,  breathe; 
geidjucn,  draw. 

2.  When  the  stem  of  a  verb  ends  in  a  hissing  sound,  an  e 
is  often  required  before  the  termination  ft:  as>  bu  reifcft,  tatV* 
Scft,  I)afie|t. 

3.  Verbs  whose  stem  ends  in  el  or  er  drop  the  c  from  the 
termination  en:  as,  iDir  l^anbeltt/  tDattbcrtt;  and  in  the  first  per- 
son singular  of  the  present  tense,  as  well  as  in  the  second  sin- 
gular of  the  imperative,  they  drop  the  e  j)receding  I  or  r :  as, 
id)  l)anbre,  imper.  l)anble ;  id)  twanbre,  imper.  tuanbrc ;  although 
before  r  it  may  also  be  retained:  as,  ic^  njanbere. 


§  58]  OEDER  OF  WOEDS.  39 

Preliminary  rules  on  the  Order  of  Words  in  the 
Sentence. 

57.  The  order  of  words  in  the  sentence  differs  materially 
from  the  English,  and  contributes  more  than  anything  else  to 
that  strongly  marked  individuality  by  which  the  German 
idiom  is  characterized.  What  grammatically  belongs  together, 
as  subject  and  predicate,  is  often  torn  asunder,  the  subject 
being  placed  at  the  head  of  the  clause,  the  predicate  at  the 
(sometimes  very  distant)  end  of  it,  the  two  thus  embracing, 
as  it  were,  and  holding  together  what  logically  belongs  to- 
gether. 

There  are  three  modes  of  arranging  a  German  sentence: 
the  normal  order,  the  inverted  order,  and  the  transposed  order. 

58.  In  the  normal  order  the  subject  precedes  the  pre- 
dicate, and  this,  its  adjuncts  (objects  and  adverbs);  thus,  bie 
^flanscn  liebcn  ba^  Sidjt,  plants  like  light 

1.  It  is  to  be  noted,  however,  that  if  the  predicate  consists 
of  a  verb  in  any  compound  tense,  the  participle  or  infinitive 
stands  last  in  the  clause:  as, 

liDcr  JJcitlb  I)at  bo^tob  ge=s     The  enemy  has  evacuated 
r  a  U  m  t.  the  country. 

^d)  tt)  e  r  b  e  nac^  SDeutf cf)Ianb    I  shall  go  to  Germany. 
cjef)en. 

2.  Similarly,  when  the  predicate  is  made  up  of  the  verb 
fcin,  or  tDCrbcn,  and  a  complement,  the  complement  stands  last 
in  the  clause. 

9^apoIeon  to  a  r  f  einetl  ^cttl*  Napoleon  was  a  terror  to  his 

bctt  etn  (Sc^recfen.  enemies. 

!iDtefcr  ©artetl  tftnic^tme^r  This    garden    is  mine    no 

mctn.  more. 

(5m  3Kcd)}e(  n?  a  r  un«  a  n  g  e  *  A  change  was  agreeable  to 

nct)m,  us. 

3.  An  infinitive  depending  on  a  verb,  substantive,  or  ad- 
jective, likewise  stands  last: 


40  ORDER   OF   WORDS.  [§  58-« 

3c^^offc,baIbeittc2lnth)ort  I  hope  to  get  an  answer 

jubcfommcn.  soon. 

a^  Uiar  fcin  SSunfc^,  mit  It  was  his  wish  to  live  in 

jcbcrmann  in  grieben  gU        peace  with  everybody. 

Icbctt. 

(S5  ijt  fd}n)cr,icbcrmann  JU  It  is  hard  to  please  every- 


gcfalletu  bod 


59,  The  inverted  order  only  differs  from  the  normal  in 
that  the  personal  verb  precedes  the  subject  It  occurs  in  in- 
dependent  clauses  only,  and  is  (besides  in  questions)  required: 

1.  If  the  sentence — ^usually  for  the  sake  of  emphasis — ^be- 
gins with  any  other  word  than  the  subject  (for  exceptions,  see 
§196,  note):  as, 

©cute  b I C il)  C  I c^  ^U  §auf C.     To-day  I  stay  at  homa 
!Dcn  S3o(}eI  fclje  id),  aber    I  see  the  bird,  but  not  the 

nic^t  bo§  9^cft,  nest 

5lnn  ID  ar  er,  bod)  freigcbig.      He  was  poor,  yet  HberaL 
Or,  with  compound  tenses:    §eute  twcrbe  tc§  gu  §aufc 

bicibcn.  liDcn  23of;ct  I)  ab  e  icij  gefeljeu,  aber  nidit  ba§  9^cft.  5lrm 

tft  er  (jcK3c[en,  boc^  freigcbig. 

2,  If  the  principal  clause/oZfoit-s  the  subordinate:  as, 
SBcnn  bcr  (Sommcr  fommt,    "When  summer  comes  I  go 

g  C  I)  C  i  ^  auf ^  l^anb.  into  the  country. 

The  principal  clatif?e  is,  in  this  case,  freqnently  introduced  by  jo:  as, 
SScnn  eiicr  ©ctriffcn  rein  i%  \  o    If  your  conscience  is  clean,  you 
fcib  iljr  frei.    Goe.  are  free. 

60,  The  transposed  order  differs  from  the  normal  in  that 
the  personal  verb  is  removed  to  the  end  of  the  clause.  It  only 
occurs  in  dependent  clauses,  and  is  required  after  relative  pro- 
nouns and  adverbs,  and  many  conjunctions  (§  194) ;  thus, 

^^lanctcn,    njcldjc    -I^onbe    Planets  which  have  moons, 
^aben. 


§  62]  USE   OF   THE   SUBJUNCTIVE.  41 

T)k  (S telle,    h)0    VOiV    hen    The  place  at  whicli  we  came 

ge inb  e  r  r  e  i  d)  t  e  n.  up  to  the  enemy. 

Qd)  tneijj,  b  a  5  e  r  frci  l  ft.        I  know  that  he  is  free. 

1.  When  the  conjunction  ba§  is  suppressed,  the  clause  assumes  the 
normal  order;  as,  ic^  Ixieijj,  er  til  freu 

2.  Instead  of  ttJcntl  with  the  transposed  order,  the  inverted  order 
without  tricitn  is  more  extensively  used  than  in  English:  as,  '^  ab  C  ici) 
3eit,  jo  fomme  ic^,  if  I  have  time,  I  shall  come. 

61.  The  negative  ntc^t,  unless  drawn  elsewhere  by  em- 
phasis, follows  the  personal  verb  as  well  as  the  object: 

^r  !ommt  nic^t  —  ift  nid)t  ge*  He  does  not  come — ^has  not 

!ommen.  come. 

Q6)  f tub e  tneitt  ^\id)  nt(f)t  —  I  do  not  find  my  book — can- 

fautt  meitt^U(^  nidjt  f inben.  not  find  my  book. 

62.  Preliminary  remarks  on  the  use  of  the 

Sul:yunctive. 

The  Subjunctive  has  a  variety  of  uses  which  will  be  treated  in  the 
syntax.     We  confine  ouiselves  here  to  the  conditioned  and  quotatUnud 

uses. 

1.  Conditional  use.    Example: — 

Senn  ber  3}^enfc^  unfterbli^  If  man  were  immortal; 
to  are. 
that  is,  the  Subjimctive  (imperfect  or  pluperfect)  is  used  when 
the  speakar  assumes  as  real  that  which  is  contrary  to  reaUty. 
a.  In  the  clause  which  contains  the  conclusion  drawn  from, 
the  hypothesis,  either  the  Subjunctive  or  the  Conditional  is 
used:  as, 

SKenn  bcr  3Jlen[c^  nt(^t  fret    If  man  were  not  free,  he 
tDcirc,  jo  to  a  r  C  er  nicljt  t)er=        would  not  be  responsible. 
anttoortltd)(oryo  to  it  r  b  e  e  r 
ttid)t  ueranttoortli^  f  ein). 

2.  Quotational  use.     Example: — 


42  VERBS.  [§  62- 

9J?etTl    grcunb    ft^rcibt,    er    My  friend  writes  lie  cannot 
tonne  nid}t  f ommcn.  come ; 

that  is,  the  Subirmctive  is  used  whenever  the  speaker  reporta 
or  quotes  a  statement  nob  in  its  exact  form,  but  only  accord- 
ing to  its  contents  {indirect  statement),  and  without  in  any 
way  identifying  or  concerning  himself  with  ii 

a.  As  to  the  teyises  employed  in  indirect  statement,  it  ia 
never  wrong  to  use  the  same  as  in  English:  thus, 

^)er  SJHntfter  f  agte,  erratic    The  minister  said  he  had  no 
tcinc  3c it.  time; 

yet  it  is  more  common  to  deviate  from  the  ordinary  sequence 
of  tonses,  and  to  use  those  of  the  corresponding  direct  state- 
ment; hence,  bcr  2)^nifter  fagtc,  er  ^  ab e  fcine  ^cit,  because  the 
direct  statement  would  be:  „ic^  ^  ab e  fetnc  ^c^^-" 

STRONG  OR  IRREGULAR  CONJUGATION. 

63.  The  characteristics  of  irregular  verbs  are: 

1.  The  change  of  the  radical  vcnveL 

2.  The  lack  of  an,  ending  in  the  im/perfect  indicaiive  (first 
and  third  person  siogular). 

3.  The  ending  of  the  pa^  participle,  which  is  en  instead 
of  et. 

64.  The  change  of  the  radical  vowel  always  takes  place  in 
the  imperfect  and  usually  in  the  past  participle;  thus,  binben, 
bind:  impert  baub,  part  gcbttnbcn. 

The  scientific  name  for  this  change  of  the  vowel  is  „5lblaut/ 
divergence  of  sound. — ^Moreover: 

1.  Most  verbs  with  t  for  a  radical  vowel  change  this  to  i  or 
ic  in  the  second  and  third  singular  indicative  present,  and  in 
the  second  singular  imperative;  as,  \d)  l^clfe,  I  help,  bu  ^tlfft,  er 
^ilft;  imperative,  I}i(f;  ic^  lefc,  I  read,  bu  Iteft,  cr  licft;  imper- 
active,  UcS;  viz.  long  e  becomes  ic;  short  e— I 


§  66]  STRONG   CONJUGATION.  43 

Note.— Of  tliG  two  vowels  c  and  i  occurring  in  the  conjugation  of 
many  verbs  with  c  in  the  infinitive,  the  latter  (i)  is  the  original  one  ;  it 
was  changed  to  e  when  the  ending  contained  an  a,  as  can,  e.  g.,  be  seen 
in  the  old  High-German  conjugation  of  l^etfen :  hilfis,  thou  helpest; 
hilfit,  he  helps;  helfam,  we  help;  helfat,  you  help;  helfant,  they  help. 

This  phonetic  assimilation  of  i  (or  u)  to  an  a  in  a  following  syllable 
is  called  ^ved)ung. 

a.  The  ending  e  of  tlie  imperative  is  dropped  in  this  class 
of  verbs,  except  in  tt)erbe,  become,  and  in  fiel)e,  look,  although 
fte'^,  too,  is  quite  common. 

The  other  verbs  may  drop  the  c. 

2.  Verbs  with  a  for  a  radical  vowel  imodify  it  in  the  second 
and  third  singular  indicative  present;  as,  \6)  falle,  bu  fall  ft,  CV 
fiitlt. 

Exceptions  are:  fd^affen,  to  create;  jc^aHen,  to  resound;  fatten,  to  fold; 
ntal)len,  to  grind;  jatjen,  to  salt;  jpalten,  to  cleave. 

a,  ?aufcn,  to  run;  faufen,  to  drink,  and  fto^en,  to  push,  follow  the 
same  rule:— thus,  id^  laufe,  bu  lan\%  er  I&ltft;  16)  jaufe,  bu  faitffl,  er  ffiltft; 
id^  fto^e,  hvi  ftoijt,  er  fto^t. 

3,  The  imperfect  subjunctive,  besides  adding  an  e  to  the 
imperfect  indicative,  modifies  its  voweL  Thus,  i(^  banb  be- 
comes ic^  banbc;  id)  bot:  ic^  bote;  tcf)  trug:  \d)  triigc* 

In  a  few  verbs,  the  vowel  of  the  imperfect  subjunctive  is  an  alto- 
gether different  one  from  that  of  the  imperfect  indicative:  as,  id)  florb, 
ic^  fturl)e,  the  u  being  found  in  the  Old  High-German  plural  of  the 
Imperfect  Indicative. 

65.  Some  verbs  whose  stems  end  in  t,  reject  the  inflectional 
t  of  the  third  person  singular;  as,  braten:  er  brdt ;  fledjten:  er 
flicfjt ;  gelten :  er  gi(t ;  l}ixittn :  er  l)a(t ;  raten:  er  rat ;  fd)clten:  er 

mt 

66.  Conjugation  of  some  irregular  verbs  for  comparison 
with  the  refmlar  verb. 


INDICT 

LTiVK 

Present: 

16)  lobe 
bu  lobft 
er  lobt 

ingc 
ingft 
ingt 

>red)e              j 

■prtt^ft 

|)rid)t 

[aire 
ttllft 
ttllt 

44 


§06- 


tuir  loben 
il)r  lobt 
fie  loben 

fmgen 

fingt 

imgen 

prcc^en 

pred)t 

prcd)cn 

alien 

allt 

alien 

if^  lobte 
bu  lobtcft 
er  lobte 
Unr  lobten 
i()r  lobtct 
fie  lobten 

fang 

angit 

ang 

angen 

angt 

angen 

Imp& 

\ 

rfed: 

prad)ft 

prad^ 

prad)cn 

prac^t 

prat^en 

fid 

ictft 

id 

iclcn 

iclt 

ielen 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present: 

id)  lobe 
bu  lobcft 
er  lobe 
tinr  loben 
il)r  lobct 
fie  loben 

mgeft 

[inge 

ingcn 

inget 

ingen 

pred)e 

prec^cft 

pred)e 

prec^cn 

prec^ct 

pred)en 

faltc 

aUcft 

aUe 

alien 

aUct 

alien 

Imperfect : 

id)  lobte 
bu  lobtcft 
cr  lobte 
W)\v  lobtcn 
i^r  lobtct 
fie  lobten 

angc 

angcft 

cinge 

dngcn 

dnget 

dngen 

prod)e 

prdd)cft 

prdd^e 

prdc^cn 

prdd)ct 

prdc^en 

tele 
[ielcft 

iclcn 
ielct 
ielen 

Imperative: 

lobe              j 
lob(e)t           j 

inge 
ing(e)t 

Infinitive: 

aHe 
all(e)t 

loben 

'ingen 

fprec^cn            j 

Participles: 

alien 

lobenb 
gelobt 

ingenb 
^efungen 

1 

prec^cnb           j 
jefpr0d)cn         \ 

allenb 
jefallctt 

67.  Mixed  Conjugation.     Some  verbs  are  regular  in  their 
endings,  but  irregular  in  so  far  as  they  change  the  radical 


68] 


AUXILIARIES  OF  MOOD. 


45 


YoweL     Thus,  brenncn,  to  bum,  forms  its  imperfect  brautttc, 
and  its  participle  gcbraunt. 

To  this  class  belong  also  the  six  Auxiliaries  of  Mood,  so  called  becau5e 
they  are  often  used  with  other  verbs  to  supply  certain  modalities  the 
expression  of  which  is  not  provided  for  by  special  forms  of  conjugation. 

68.  Conjugation  of  tbe  Auxiliaries  of  Mood. 

1.  2)urfCtt,  to  be  allowed. — ^Past  Participle:  geburft. 

INDICATIVE.  SUBJUNCTTVE. 

Imperfect: 

ic^  biirfte 
bu  bitrfteft 
er  biirfte 
n)ir  biirftcn 
i()r  bltrftet 
fie  biirften 

Qcfonnt. 
ii^  tonnte 
'tvi  fonnteft 
er  !onnte 
\o\x  fonnteti 
il)r  fonntet 
fie  !dnntett 

gemoc^t 
\6)  mbc^te 
'tVi  moc^t-eft 
er  mo(l)te 
tt)tr  mo(i)ten 
i^r  mod)tet 
fie  moc^ten 

Part.:  gemugt 
ic^  miigte 
bu  mit^tcft 
er  viv&''^it 


Present: 

Imperfect : 

Present: 

\6)  barf 

\^  burfte 

id)  burfe 

tvi  barfft 

bu  burfteft 

\>Vi  biirfeft 

erbarf 

er  burfte 

er  biirfe 

n)ir  bitrfen 

xovc  burfteu 

n^ir  bUrfett 

if)r  bi'trft 

t^r  burftet 

il)r  biirfet 

fie  bitrfeti 

fie  burfteu 

fie  biirfen 

2.  Iliinnctt,  to  be  able.- 

-PastPartic: 

t(^  faun 

ic^  fonnte 

tc^  fbnne 

bu  !annft 

\>]X  fonnteft 

\iVi  fbnneft 

er  fann 

er  founte 

er  fonne 

ttjir  fonncn 

\o\x  fonnten 

tuir  fonnen 

il)r  fount 

tf)r  fonntet 

i^r  fbnnet 

fie  fduueu 

fie  fonnten 

fie  fonnen 

3.  SWogCtt,  to  like,  may.- 

—Past  Partic. : 

i^mag 

id)  mod)te 

ic^  nioge 

\>Vi  magft 

bu  mod)teft 

'tM  ntogeft 

crmag 

er  mo^te 

er  moge 

ttjtr  Tubgen 

n)tr  moisten 

n)ir  mbgen 

tt)r  mbgt 

it)r  mod)tet 

it)r  moget 

fie  mogeu 

fie  mod)ten 

fte  mbgen 

4.  SRuffc 

in,  to  be  obliged,  must. — ^Past 

id)  mug 

id)  mujte 

id)  miiffe 

bu  mujt 

\>yi  mugteft 

bu  mUffeft 

ermufe 

er  mufete 

er  miiffe 

46 


VERBS. 


[§6a- 


tDtrtnilffcn  n)irmu§ten  tDtrtnuffcn  tPtrmu^tcn 

\\)V  mitgt  i()r  mn^kt  tt)r  mitffct  i{)v  mii^tct 

fiemiiffen  fie  mupten  fiewiifien  fie  miigtett 

5.  SoUcn,  shall,  to  be  to.- -Past  Partic.:  gefoUt. 

i(i)foII  id)fo(Ite  id)  foUe  id)  fotlte 

bufoUjt  bufoUteft  bufolleft  bufolltcft 

crfoU  erfoUte  er  foUe  erfoUte 

ttjirjollen  toir  follten  njirfotlen  ipir  foUten 


ifjv  foCt 
fie  foUeti 


i^r  foUtet 
fie  foUten 


i^r  fotlet 
fie  foUeu 


i^r  foUtct 
fie  foUteu 


6.  U&nUtn,  to  wish,  to  be  wiHing. — ^Past  Partic. :  cjctuoUt. 


id)XDiU 
btt  Unllft 
ertoiU 
\v\v  xooUtn 
i^r  tooUt 
fie  tooUen 


xii)  tPoUte 
bu  iDoUteft 
er  iuoUte 
irir  tpollteti 
if)r  iDo Utet 
fie  iDoUtett 


id)  njotle 
bu  tPoUeft 
er  njoUe 
n)ir  ftJoUen 
il)r  iDotlct 
fie  tooUen 


ic^  troUte 
bu  tPoUteft 
er  iDoflte 
irir  tDoUtctt 
i^r  tvolltet 
fie  iDoUten. 


Note.— As  tlie  conjugation  table  of  tlie  six  Auxiliaries  of  Mood  shows, 
their  chief  deviation  from  the  regular  verb  loben  is  in  the  singular  of 
the  present  indicative,  vrhich  takes  its  forms  from  an  imperfect  of  the 
irregular  conjugalion  (§  63  to  §  64). 

69.  The  compound  tenses  of  the  Auxiliaries  of  Mood  are 
formed  regularly  (§  52,  6  to  7):  as,  id)  Ijahc  gefonnt,  I  have 
been  abla  If,  however,  the  past  participle  is  accompanied  by 
an  infinitiw,  it  taJies  the  form  of  the  infinitive:  as,  id)  Ijobt 
nid)t  fommen  f  onnen,  I  have  not  been  able  to  come. 

70.  Instead  of  the  Conditional  id)  tt)iirbe  Ifinnen,  iDotlett, 
muffen,  etc.,  the  imperfect  subjunctive,  ic^  fi)nnte,  tooUtz,  mii^te, 
etc,  is  almost  invariably  used,  and  instead  of  the  Conditional 
Perfect  i6)  tritrbc  Qetonnt  l^aben,  I  should  have  been  able,  the 
Pluperfect  Subjunctive  ic^  l^dtte  QCfonut.  Hence,  a  phrase  like 
he  could  have  come  (he  would  have  been  able  to  come)  is 
translated  er  1^  (itte  fommeu  !i)nncn  (§  69),  and  he  should  have 
come,  or  he  ought  to  have  come,  by  er  l)dtte  fommen  foUctt. 


§  71]  IRREGULAR   VERBS.  47 

71.  Alphabetical  list  of  all  irregular  verbs. 

Note. — The  following  rules  will  greatly  facilitate  the  study  of  the 

list. 

1.  All  verbs  vdth  a  in  the  infinitive  retain  it  in  the  past 
participle.     In  the  imperfect  they  take  either  te  or  u: 

raten:         net,        geraten 
tragen:       trug,       getrageu 

2.  Those  with  et  in  the  infinitive  take  t  or  ie  in  both  the 
imperfect  and  past  participle: 

reiten:        ritt,        gerittett 
meiben:      micb,      gemicbeti 

Exception:  l^eigen,  l)ic|j,  gel)ei§en. 

3.  Those  with  te  or  any  modified  vowel  (S,  o,  it)  have  an  o 
in  both  the  imperfect  and  past  participle: 

bieten:        M,        gebotcn 
liigen:         log,         gclogen 

Exceptions:   (iegen,  Ittg,  getegen;  geBciren,  gebttr,  geBoreu;  and  the 
modal  auxiliaries  biirfeu  and  miiffeiu 

4.  Those  with  e  take  either  a  or  o  in  the  imperfect;  if  o,  the 
same  vowel  is  found  in  the  past  participle: 

geben:        gab,        gegeben 
l^eben:        Ijiih,        ge^obett 

5.  Verbs  whose  root  ends  in  inb,  ttig,  or  in!,  take  a  in  the 
imperfect,  and  U  in  the  past  participle: 

btnben:  bonb,  gebunben 
fingen:  fang,  ge[ungctt 
jinfen:        fan!,       gefunfen 

Exception:  bringen,  bro(f)tf,  gebraii^t. 

6.  Consonants  remain  unchanged,  except  in  a  few  cases 
pointed  out  in  ihe  hst 


48 


IBBEGUIAB    VERBS. 


[§71 


o  5 


-*:J  &> 


S  b 


-£i.b 


1 


y  rf 


_    CJQ    C3    ®     ^ 

2  S  i=5  ^  ^ 
.S  .§  ^  S  ;S 

«1^-§  I. 


3     s 
1?      « 


u—        JjrL  C35        vO  5fc2 


o  t>  — .o  «CS^Oo500« 


o  50 


2 

O 


s&    -§ 


■s 

I  rt  ®  fl  tjD5 
a 


«_>    e_»    fi  -»-r    o 

^  3  3  '>H  A 


§71] 


mREGTTLAR  VERBS. 


49 


sO        '.sn  ■j^t  ^.ct  yzi  j=i  j=t 


:C3 


•.Ox— s 

i-t  '^  ^ 


:^>e^ 


i    s 


"6^  G> 


a 

O   :« 


5-*  "S^ 


fi  ts  'fl 
WW  ^ 


CS)CS> 


sO  sO  ^O  >0  .O  >0  .O  -s—^vO  vO  ,o 


O     Cl>     &>     «L>    o     o 
<35  «)  CS5  <35  CSJ  <33 


cn 


<=5  <-5c> 


SS  .1 


>A  ^O  ^O  ..^  x:>  .^3        X>        .^z  jO   o 


'73 

I? 

JH      ®     © 


^a  ^a  ^a  js  j=>  ja 


«>        .iZ 


»- 

s 


»- 

s 


»^;«  ^ 


3  23- 


f5    O    C^      w 


<33 


6) 

OS 

d 
o 


o  •—* 
to  ** 


u —  ^   a> 


3 


80 


IRBEGTJLAR   VERBS. 


[§71 


Pi 


•e- 

o 


«» 

^ 


:g3 


:0  re-  rO    P 


i-t 

:CS 

:C  :0    ^ 

vO 

^  y=>  fi  ^  i:: 

i-,    iZ  -^ 

<L> 

-C    c^  .«-    «_,  :o 

M^l^CS 

C5 

CS5  csi  crs  c:  cs; 

Pi 


S  €32-ti^^ 


»ta 


c» 


C33  Ca 


-  it 

C5         <3i 


«  o 


c_>    o    c^ 
<Si  a  C33  CA 


«->    t>    «-> 
CS5G5C3 


t>    ej    «_»    c_>    e_>    c->    o 
€52  CS;  C5  C5  C3  C3  C» 


>=-        ?       OS'S 

C3    c_>  .i-    t>    G    e->    «^ 
€55  C25  CSi  C33  CS  C»  C5i 


>%  ©   Q"^ 


cpj  ^        crt  q:?^    c3 


9    ©   § 

i  s  a 

'^  e+H   *t-l 


tfl 


o   1^ 
o 


•fl     .^  a  o  5  ©  s  5 


gg 


ti  ci  d  pt       pt 

«^    o    c^    o  ej 


C5 


<->    «^    e-> 


^-'     ^-^      Z^  .«-    -*-»     ni   TZJ 


e_>    o    «_>    ej 


€55  C53  C:  C35  C:  CJi  <33 


§71] 


IRREGULAR  VERBS.  51 


03         CD  C33  CA         03 


i  III  I  ilii^iiiiiii  1 1 1 

CS3  CJC»<33  C»  C3:0C3<35C»^<35C3«:C33C33  C35' — ^  CSS  C55  03 

I iitiia- rii  iiiiiHijiii 


I  ill  I   I  llg    slsslsg    ij   I 

CS3         02  CS3  O)         <Si         <Si         <Si  CSifC^         ^fT-jfT-^Sr^ST^aST^CTiM  tt-t  M-*         f*-* 


52 


IBBEGTJLAK   VERBS. 


[§71 


t*  .-« 


I  f  t  I  Jl:g  I  f  M  mm 


$i        S        §  ri^ 

n  o   ^ 

o   ^   o  • 


«-*      *c 


^ 

^ 

o 

-«-> 

e3 

o 

■— 1 

>3 

^    ^      ^ 

_«-» 

g; 

jj-^ 

«-» 

-»-^   3?  ^T~" 

2 

.  > 

-^^ 

,o 

>=> 

.in -2    ;:j 

i^— 

^ 

:« 

-«    «r  ■« 

Ji 

_«j 

P3 

:2 

•^-t 

•>— » 

'TS 

Y"? 

d 

.i_> 

>=> 

C3 

c: 

c:  .«j    «. 

(3 

^tT 

«-. 

o 

<—  j^  >— *  > 

§ 

e_> 

t>  ^  <i> 

<L> 

«_> 

"cI* 

^ 

CSJ 

C5^     CSiCS 

— 

<= 

)<r3c:5ca 

O  *^ 
'5     C33 


I 


S? 


» 


fi  o  :-» 

^>    >>«    ^^  O    !-»    O 


^       .Si        .^  .ti        .Si  5  5  o^ 


o 

f>> 

i 

pinch 
0  regular. 

pinch 
re  commonl 

come 

be  able 

creep 

choose 

i 

:l 

si 

CO           o 

^ 

^          ^     ti 

S 

ti     ^     s 

lis 

1 

S 

S          «->          J3 

•TJ  "^  "^    ©  "d 

r-H     fn  r— 1  r— ' 


J-5    ^    J^   «^ 


;a 


«5 


§71] 


lEKEGULAB  VEEBS.  53 


,^5  o 


e8  >r 


tl«|.S?S;£iBll     litis  rSegsg^g 

C35  cri<53  C35  «    C»  C»  <»  <35  <3:  cn  e„     CS  o»     C55  rf      c;3  C35  CSS  C35  <35  C»  C3I 


o       ::3   p 


So^^^§       ti-^ 


«> 


o 


2  •  8      d      § 

g  g   j:i  Ji   §^ji   g  g   g  ti   g   «  ^Sg  c  t-   ^   -   ^  « 

ggg  ggggSS'sS   n.     g-  ^2  2se^:£i-e 


54 


IimEGDLAR   ^^ERBS. 


[§71 


^  ^  g 


00 


CO  "^ 


g  g^  ^ 

o 


B       ti 


C3 


«->  


-Si         H 


5=:  rr  ^  H 


pi    3 


« 
^ 


1:3     ^ 


d  <o 


jO  _5  ^    ^ 


©   -+3 

o  o  w 

03 


-^^ 


j:i  ?i  J=J 

.^  .^  .s 


§71] 


IRREGULAR   VERBS.  55 


r^  ^■^_  ^*^.  ^*^_  >**_ 

CS3  C3  CS3  <33  CS 


«       .'^ 


56 


mREGUIAK   VERBS. 


[§71 


1 

« 

1 

-•-» 

i 

II 

2 

2 

1 

OB 

'C.2 

o 

^ 

•S 

§1 

i^ 

^ 

M 

,^1-H 

:« 

rt 

d 

s 

2 

'^ 

<M 

g 

S 

,4 

, 

ti 

S 

Ck 

o 

ti 

r; 

o 

•1 

.3i  o 

i 

JO 

is 

O 

o 

^ 

^ 

> 

o 

PM 

2 

22 

2 

2 

g 

2 

a 

-s 

^Q" 

*c:  ^ 

^ 

*5^^ 

P.^     " 

s 

fS 

«-> 

«-.  «_» 

o 

«-> 

o 

«-> 

<=5 

cr.  c=> 

C35 

C5C5 

+3 

C3 

c 

o 

^ 

« 

^ 

d 

2 
?> 

> 

s 

jO 

c: 

*-»  ^ 

d^2 

OQ 

s 

Pt 

fi 

>5" 

^  » 

V* 

o  ^ 

\ii  o 

C3 

« 

C3 

C3 

o  ^ 

»4 

2 

2  w 

-<B  2 

s 

» 

2 

2 

^ 

2  ^ 

Pi 
B 

•S" 

^S"^ 

fl 

§: 

g;^ 

g"^ 

M 

1 

■4^ 

1 

1 

a 

c3 

1 

8 

1 

1 

to 

1 

£ 

r^     Sd 

g. 

cc 

k 

02 

OQ 

^- 

ti 

g^ 

o 

g 

ti 

•^ 

J 

C5 

<d 

?a 

?i  » 

'5 

'S 

2 

» 

M 

.»-•    .«-• 

rS^ 

ra^.^ 

«^ 

rs^^ 

«^        ^ 

o  €->  o  F 


^    ^>=>  ^ii  J=i  ti  f^  ^"^ 

Ji  ^_^  ci  -i-J"^   «-»    eit   «->   ^  ci 


I    I    ^1    I 


TO 


■i 

•a -a  a 


©• 


§71] 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


57 


o  «^ 

«>    5    S>    <u    C33 
•J-    :0  »^—  J-    >-»    ;-,  -5  rg 


^^ 


g_:«         g_ 


^       ^>       «V       *^  «->       *K1.       «^       «^ 


a- 


:0 


d  ri  J-»  oj 


O    »-  €3?  »-    »-  »-  »-  »->-  .-^ 


s 


CD 

rr  ^  o  pj'^ 


-Os^    G 


<35  CJi 


cn   C» 


Cl>     «>     C-k     «>     «> 

C»  C5  C33  C»  C53 


ei  tf  c; 
«  o  .^  o  o  -^  ^  o  n  n  ^ 

e^    tt>    «_>    «>    o 
C3i  C35  CSi  C55  €35 


58  IRREGULAR   ^^ERKJ.  [§  71 


a 


<N 


O 


H 


•*■*        -*->  -t-t  ->-,  -*-,     ,t_(-«^ii 


Sao  sS^O  -^^  ».  .^» 

5<  S  }\  -«  }_,         o 


s 


f=-r  ^- 


•2    .«-►  ri  ^  «-»  S  n  r-,-^n  f-"    o 


^    O    Q    ^^    w..  -  ...— , 


£>  »  »  » 

c:c3 

CS3  CS5 

t 

^«^ 

'«> 

&> 

•^ 

§ 

:C3 

*e^ 

1 

^    O 

£2 

ll 

o 
o 

^ 


<D  ® 


-  -  ?? 


fi 


§71] 


IBREGULAR  VERBS.  59 


60  VERBS.  [§  72- 


SEPAHABLE  AXD  INSEPAEABI^E  YEKBS. 

72.  Compound  verbs — i.  e.,  those  made  up  of  two  in- 
dependent words,  as,  au^ge^eu,  to  go  out — have  the  pecuHarity 
that  their  components  may  be  separated  from  each  other.  The 
first  of  the  two  components,  which  is  usually  an  adverb  or  a 
preposition,  is  called  ihe  prefix. 

73.  Separation  takes  place  in  the  present  and  imperfect,  but 
only  in  principal  clauses;  moreover,  in  the  imperative.  The 
prefix  comes  last  in  the  clause.  Thus,  the  verb  abfc^reibetl/  to 
write  off,  to  copy,  is  used  in  the  following  ways: 

3^)  f^tClBe  ben  iBricf  oB.      I  copy  the  letter. 
^6)  fc^ricfi  ben  ^rtef  oB.       I  copied  the  letter. 
S^rciBc  ben  ^rief  aB.         Copy  the  letter. 

But:    2)er  S3ricf,   hjelc^en  i^  aB*    The  letter  which  I  am  copying. 
f^rciBc. 
3lt«  i(^  ben  53rief  aBf^rtcB.  When  I  copied  the  letter; 

these  being  dependeni  clauses. 

1,  The  augment  g  C  of  the  past  participle,  and  the  J  n  of  the 
infinitive  are  inserted  between  the  prefix  and  the  verb :  as, 
Qd)  \jabc  hm  ^rief  ab gcs    I  have  copied  the  letter. 

fc^rteben. 
Qd)  tDitnfd^e  ben  ^rief  ah^    I  wish  to  copy  the  letter. 
5ufd)reiben. 

Other  examples: 

Infinitive.  Participle.  Infinitive  with  j^u. 

anfongeu,  begin:  angcfangen                  angttfangen 

Dorangetjen,  precede:  Dorangcgangen             ijoranjttge^en 

fliUfd^meigen,  be  silent:  ftiagcfc^roiegen              ftilljttfc^ttjetgetu 

74.  There  are  a  number  of  idiomatic  phrases  made  up  of  a 
verb  and  a  substantive,  or  an  adverbial  expression,  which  are 
construed  like  separable  verbs:  as,  ad)t  geben,  to  pay 
attention;  thus, 


§76] 


SEPARABLE  AND  INSEPARAELS  VEEBS. 


61 


(^olumbue  gab  onf  ben gtug 

bcr  SSogei  adjt 
®a  ^olumbu^  auf  \)m  g(ug 

ber  ^ogel  ac^t  gab. 


Columbus  paid  attention  to 
the  flight  of  birds. 

Since  Columbus  paid  at- 
tention to  the  flight  of 
birds. 


Other  phrases  of  this  kind  are  the  following: 


ttt  ad)t  Tiet)men,  to  take  care 
in  onf)3rud)  nefjmen,  lay  claim 

to 
banf  fagcn,  give  thanks 
fiirlieb  ne^men,  put  up  with 
3ur  9^ebe  ftellen,  call  to  ac- 
count 
ftanb     fatten,     keep     one's 

ground 
^u  ftanbe  bringen,  accomplish 
an  ftanbe  fommen,  be  brought 

about 
^n  grunbe  ge^en,  be  ruined 
gn  grnnbc  ric^ten,  ruin 


l^an^  !)alten,  keep  house 

l^o^n  fpred)en,  bid  defiance 

inne  werben,  perceive 

gn  Uiht  t!)Un,  harm 

rebe  ftel)en,  answer 

im  (^itd^e  (affen,  leave  in  the 

lurch 
teil  ne^nten,  take  part    . 
3n  tett  inerben,  fall  to  one's 

share 
tro^  bleten,  defy 
jnnt  93orf(i)etn  fomntcn,  appear 
in^  Serf    fe^en,    carry    into 

effect 


Exceptions  to  the  rule  given  in  §  72. 

75.  The  following  compound  verbs  are  inseparable. 


Qrgtt)bl)ncn,  suspect 
froI)locfen,  exult 
frit^ftuden,  breakfast 
l^nb^aben,  handle 
l^ofmetj'tern,  tutor 
!urgtDei(en,  amuse 
langroeilen,  bore 


ratf(i)(agen,  deHberate 
recl)tfertigen,  justify 
f(^ulmetftem,  keep  school 
IDe^flagen,  lament 
ipeiffagen,  prophesy 
tDetteifern,  emulate 
tt)etter(en(i)ten,  lighten 
h)ieber^o(en,  repeat 
h)it(fa^ren,  comply  with 


Uebfo[en,  caress 

(uftmanbeln,  walk  for  pleasure 

mutma^en,  suppose 

Example :  '^a ^rf olg  red)tferttgt  f cine (Sdjrttte  —  I}at  f elite 
©d)rttte  gerec!)tfertigt,  success  justifies  his  steps — ^has  just- 
ified his  steps. 

76,  Verbs  formed  with  the  prefixes  Be,  fiC,  ent,  tmp^  tX, 
tni§,  tier,  lit  are  inseparable.    They  reject  the  augment  gc 


^  VERBS.  [§  7G- 

in  the   past  particij)le.      Thus,  ticrlicrctt,  to  lose;    pres.   idj 
ucrlicrc;  partic  uciiorcn;  m^m-  ^utjciiicrcn. 

1.  5tnttt)0rtcn,  to  answer,  althonsli  ant  is  but  an  older  form  for  ent, 
forms  its  past  participle  Qcanttt)ortct 

2.  Several  verbs  formed  vrith.  the  prefix  m  i  J3  take  gc  in  tbe  past  part- 
iciple, some  before  the  preUx  :  as,  miObrauc^cn,  to  abuse  :  part.  gCinife* 
brauc^t;  others  after  it:  as,  nii{jMIbcn,  to  deform:  part.  jni|30Cl)iIbct. 

Note, — Verbs  formed  with  these  inseparable  prefixes,  none  of  which 
has  any  longer  an  independent  existence  in  the  language,  are  no  com- 
pounds, according  to  the  definition  given  in  <^  72,  but  derivatives,  and 
as  such,  proj)erly  sx^eaking,  no  exceptions  to  a  rule  given  for  com- 
pounds. 

On  the  meaning  of  the  inseparable  prefixes,  see  §  205. 

77.  Any  separable  prefix,  as,  auf  in  auftragen,  becomes  in- 
separable when  preceded  by  an  inseparable  one.  Thus,  be* 
Quftragen,  to  commission:  pres.  ic^beauftracjc;  part  be  auf* 
tragt 

The  only  exceptions  are  e  n  t  g  e  g  c  n  ;  as,  entgegcngel^en :  pres.  tc^  gcl^c 
Cittgcgcn,  and  b  e  Do  r  in  bcDorflcI)cn,  be  imminent:  pres.  e§  ftcl}t  beDor.  — 
In  other  compounds,  b  e  U  o  r  is  inseparable. 

1.  A  compound  verb  such  as  ancrfcnttcit,  to  recognize,  where  an  in- 
separable prefix  (cr)  is  preceded  by  a  separable  one  (an),  is,  in  accord- 
ance with  the  rules  given,  used  in  the  following  way:  ic^  er!enne  an; 
ic^  ^abc  anerfannt;  ic^  bin  bcrcit  anguerJennen.  Some  writers, 
however,  treat  aucrtennen  as  inseparable. 

78.  Six  prefixes:  bur^,  utn,  ilbcr,  unter,  ^tnter,  iDtber 
are  separable,  when  the  compound  of  which  they  form  a  "poirt 
iaintransUive:  as,  untcrgeljcn,  go  down:  pres.  t(^  gctje  UUtcr. 

With  transitive  compounds,  the  prefix  is  regularly  insepar- 
able, if  it  stands  to  the  object  merely  in  the  logical  relation  of 
a  preposition  of  its  noun.  The  phrase  'ta^  8anb  burd)3tel)cn, 
e.  g.,  can,  without  injury  to  the  sense,  be  changed  to  burd)  ha^ 
2ciX\h  gicljcn,  where  burc^  is  a  preposition  to  the  object  2ant)f 
and  is,  therefore,  inseparable.  Thus,  ic^  b ur  d) ^  i e I)  e  ba§  J^anb, 
l)abe  ha^  Sanb  b  ur  d)  5  o  g  e  n,  the  augment  ge  being  always  op- 
pressed, when  any  one  of  the  six  jDrefixes  is  used  insepar- 
ably. 


§  81]  ADJECTIVES.  63 

On  the  contrary,  in  tlie  phrase  ein  (Sett  burd^^te^Ctt,  to  pull 
a  rope  through  (sc  a  ring),  the  prefix  t>VLX6)  is  not  a  mere  pre- 
position to  the  object  (Scil,  as  the  translation  shows,  but  has 
the  weight  of  an  adverb,  and  is  as  such  (accented  and)  separ- 
able: id)  3tel}e  ein  (Sell  burd;,  Ijabe  em  ^ei(  burdjgcjogen.* 

79.  S3  oil  is  inseparable  with  the  following  verbs:  t)otIbritt* 
cjeu,  accompHsh ;  Doltcnbcn,  finish ;  uoUftrcden,  t)on3ieI)cn,  exe- 
cute.    "With  aU  others  it  is  separable. 


ADJECTIVES. 

80.  The  adjective  is  not  decHned  when  used  predicatively : 

©le  ^unft  ift  lang.    Goe.        Art  is  long. 

35  0  n,  full,  only  is  often  used  predicatively  in  its  inflected 
form  t)olIcr  for  all  three  genders:  as,  ber  ^aum  ift  t)oI(er  ^epfcl, 
the  tree  is  fuU  of  apples;  bte  Siefe  ift  t)oUcr  ^(utnen,  the 
meadow  is  fuU  of  flowers ;  ba§  'BtM  ift  Doltct  §anb(ung,  the 
play  is  f  uU  of  action. 

When  used  attributiveXy  (as  epithet  preceding  a  noun)  the 
adjective  is  dechned,  but  its  endings  vary  according  as  it  is 
preceded  by  a  limiting  word  or  noi 

81.  When  not  preceded  by  any  limiting  vxyrd  the  adjective 
takes  the  endings  of  the  definite  article  (§  14) : 

MASCULINE.  FEMININE.  NEUTER. 

Singular.  Singular.  Singular. 

btaucr  ©tmmel,       griinc  SBiefe,  green  h)ettc§  X1)q1,  wide 

blue  sky  meadow  valley 

blauctt  §immel§      griincr  Siefe  tDeitcn  ^^a(eg  {xotu 

(blaue§  ^immel^)  tee  Z\)ak^) 

blaucm  ^tmmel       grimct  SBlefc  xoditm  i^^ale 

btauctt  §immet       griinc  SSiefe  i^eitcg  Z\)a{ 


*  For  fuller  information  on  this  subject,  see  the  author's  ''Lehre  vom 
Accent  der  deutschen  Sprache." 


64 


ADJECTIVES. 


[§81. 


Plural. 


Plural. 


blauc  gintmct 
liautt  $immc( 
bfauctt  |)imme(n 
blauc  §iuimc( 


griinc  SS^icfcti 
gritncr  SSiefcn 
Qrimcn  SStcfctt 
griinc  Siefcu 


PluraL 

iDcitcr  S^l)alcr 
tvcitcit  5tl)a(em 
tocite  Zl)'dicv 


The  ending  en  is,  in  the  genitive  singular,  preferred  to  c3 
when  the  noun  itself  takes  e^  (or  §). 

1.  The  adjective  retains  these  distinctive  endings  if  the 
noun  qualified  by  it  is  not  added  but  understood:  as,  to  a  3  fur 
9^o|ert  Dcrfaufen  (Bit?  —  9^ote  uub  Wc'i^t,  what  kind  of  roses 
do  you  sell? — Ked  ones  and  white  ones. 

The  English  one,  ones  after  an  adjective  is  never  translated. 

82.  "WTien  preceded  by  the  indefinite  article  the  adjective 
requires  the  distinctive  endings  of  the  definite  article  in  the 
nominative  and  accusative  only;  in  the  other  cases  etl  is  sub- 
stituted for  them: — 


lIASCULDfE.  FRAfTXIXE. 

tin  Uautx  §imtttet  etne  griinc  SSicfe 
eine^  blauen  §tm*  eincr  gri'mcn  3S5ie[c 

ntel^ 
cincm  blaucn  §ini*  eincr  gruncit  Siefe 

mc( 
cinen  blaucn  gim*  cine  griinc  SSiefe 

met 


KEUTEB. 

ein  lueitcS  !i:tiar 
eine§  \\>cittn  Zi)ak^ 

eincm  njeitcn  Z\)ak 

tin  toeitcS  2:]^a( 


1.  The  same  endings  are  used  after  all  2X)ssessive  adjectives, 
and  after  tein,  no;  tiius,  tnein  liebcr  S^eunb,  my  dear  friend; 
!ein  gutcS  S^i^^^^^  ^^  S^^^  sign. 

The  plural,  after  Siese  pronominal  adjectives,  takes  en 
throughout:  as,  meinc  altcn  greunbc,  my  old  friends;  fcine 
gutcn  ^^2ac^rtcf)tcn,  no  good  news. 

83,  "When  preceded  by  the  definite  article  the  adjective 
takes  an  C  in  the  nominative  singular  of  all  three  gendei's,  and 
ia  the  accusative  singular  feminine  and  neuter;  everywhere 
else  en:  — 


§  85]  DECLENSION.  65 

MASCULINE. 

Singular.  Plural. 

ber  blaue  §immc(  bie  Mantn  ©Immef 

bc^  blauctt  ©tntmcl^  bcr  btauen  ©immct 

bcm  blaucttjjimmel  ben  btauen  J)tmme(n 

ben  bkuctt  ^immel  bic  blaucn  @tmme( 

FEMININE. 

Singular.  Plural. 

bie  griinc  SSicfe  bie  gritttcn  SSiefett 

ber  griincn  Siefe  bcr  griincn  Siefen 

ber  gritncn  SBiefc  \)cn  grimcn  SBiefen 

bie  griinc  Siefe  bie  gritncn  SCSiefen 

NEUTER. 

Singular.  Plural. 

ha^  njcitc  X^ai  bie  xocittn  Z^kv 

be^  weitctt  Xljait^  ber  iDeitcn  ^^citer 

htm  weitcrt  Sl^ale  t^tn  \odttn  Z^akxn 

ba^  iDcitc  Zl)ai  bic  loeitctt  ^i)dler 

1,  !^tcfer,  jcner,  jcber,  and  a  few  others  having  the  same 
distinctive  endings  as  the  definite  article,  have  the  same  effect 
on  the  adjective  they  precede:  as,  biefe^  altC  @C^loJ3,  this  old 
castle;  jeber  e^r(id)C  llJiann,  every  honest  man. 

Note. — The  principle  underlying  the  declension  of  the  adjective 
(§  81  to  83)  is,  tliat  tliore  should  be  sufficient  infection  to  sho-w  the  case, 
and  no  more.  Hence,  whenever  the  limiting  word  has  a 
distinctive  ending,  the  adjective  drops  its  own,  sub- 
stituting an  indifferent  cor  cttfor  it;  but  it  retains 
its  distinctive  ending,  whenever  the  limiting  word 
lacks  it. 

84.  Participles  are  declined  like  adjectives;  as,  ein  lac^en- 
bcr  'ip^ilofop^,  a  laughing  philosopher;  geliebtcr  SSater,  beloved 
father. 

85.  Adjectives  and  participles  are  often  used  as  substantives. 
They,  then,  retain  their  ordinary  declension,  but  are  written 
with  a  capital  initial: 


66  ADJECTIVES.  [§  85- 

Cm  ^rcmbcr  ift  l^icr.  A  stranger  is  here. 

5^cr  ^rembc  ift  blonb.  Tlie  stranger  is  fair. 

1.  Tlie  most  common  particij^les  thus  used  are: 

IDcr  ^comtc  (53c*  cm  ^camtct,  official 

amtctc),  * 

!Dcr  ^ebtcntc,  em  ^cbientct,  servant 

!Der  ©efangenc,  cin  ©efangettcr,  prisoner. 

!Der  ®cle{)rtc,  cin  (3cic[]Vttv,  learned  man. 

2)er  9?eifenbc,  cin  ^cifenber,     -  traveller. 

!Dcr  ©ei'anbtc,  eitt  ©cfanbtcr,  ambassador. 

>Der  S3cmanbte,  ein  3>enuanbtcr,  relative. 

2.  Also  bcr  iDeutfc^e,  the  German,  is  nothing  but  an  ad- 
jective used  substantively;  hence  a  German  is  ein  ^eut[djcr; 
the  Germans:  bie  !^eutfc^Ctt;  Germans,  2)eutfc^c. 

3.  The  neuter  form  of  an  adjective  is  very  commonly  used 
substantively,  usually  with  an  abstract  sense;  as,  ba3  (Sd^ouc, 
SSaljrC  UUb  ©Utc,  the  boautiful,  the  true,  and  the  good;  (Bu)0^ 
nc8  unb  Olttcl;  especially  so  in  connection  -with  e  tlu  a§,  some- 
thirtg;  ntd)t§,  nothing;  allc^,  eveiything;  and  the  lilie:  as, 
cixva^  ^cnt^f  something  new;  nid)t^  ©utcg,  nothing  good. 

86.  Suppressed  forms  of  declension. 

1.  @an^^,  whole,  and  Ijaih,  half,  are  left  undecUned  when 
used  vdthout  an  article  before  names  of  countries  and  places: 
a^  9an5  ^^eiUfdjlaub,  in  ganj  ^eiiiu;  ^Ib  gcaulrcic^,  I)alb  ^oi'iiS. 

2.  In  a  few  instances  two  adjectives  connected  by  unb  are  not  de- 
clined. Such  are  alt  unb  jung,  gro^  unb  ticin.  Thus,  a  1 1  unb  j  u  u  g  Be* 
ftur:nt  mic^  mit  ^roblemcn  (Goe  ),  old  and  youg  assail  me  with  pro- 
blems. 

3.  In  poetry  the  epithet  sometimes  follows  the  nonn,  and  is  then  nn- 
declincd:  as,  ein  SJicibc^cn  fcf)on  unb  iounbcr&ar.    Sch. 

In  prose,  the  only  epithets  which  can  be  placed  after  the  noun  are 
fetig,  sairited;  as,  ntcin  95atcr  jelig  (for  the  more  common  mcin  fcligcr 
SSoter),  my  sainted  father;  and  adjectives  designating  coins:  as,  gttjci 
©ulben  ofterrcic^ifci^,  two  Austrian  florins. 


§  89J  COMPARISON.  67 

4.  Before  a  neuter  noun  the  adjective  is,  in  poetry,  occasionally  found 
T/ithout  the  ending  e§,  as,  I  i  e  b  ^inb,  eln  U  e  b  ^inb. 

5.  "When  two  adjectives  of  like  inflection  follow  each  other,  the  first 
sometimes  drops  its  ending:  as,  in  tlax  ititb  triibcii  S^agen  (Goe.),  in 
bright  and  gloomy  days. 

Much  more  frequently  is  this  the  case  in  such  expressions  as  ^  a  X  = 
f  erli  C^  beutfc^cS  ^onjulat,  imperial  German  consulate. 

87.  Indeclinable  adjectives, 

1.  Karnes  of  inhabitants  of  countries  and  places  formed  by 
the  syllable  er,  as,  (BdjWd^a,  Swiss;  SBietier,  inhabitant  of 
Vienna,  may  be  ussd  like  attributive  adjectives,  but  without 
inflection.     Thus,  ha^  2K  t  en  C r  4BiciV  Vienna  beer. 

2.  Some  foreign  adjectives  denoting  colour,  as,  toja,  lita,  are  not 
declined. 

88.  Special  remarks, 

1,  The  adjective  1^  o  (^ ,  high,  when  declined  drops  c  ;  thus, 
^oje  ^crgC/  high  mountains. 

2.  "When  an  inflectional  syllable  is  added  to  adjectives  ending  in  e( 
or  er,  the  e  which  precedes,  or  that  which  follows  the  I  or  r,  is  usually 
dropped;  thus,  auf  bunHem  (for  bun!elem)  ©runbe,  on  dark  ground;  in 
finftcrtt  (or  finflren)  ^ddfttn,  in  dark  nights.  Adjectives  ending  in  en 
can  only  drop  the  c  preceding  the  n;  as,  niit  eigner  (for  eigener)  §anb, 
with  his  own  hand. 

3.  The  derivative  syllables  ig  and  i[(^  may,  especially  in  poetry,  drop 
their  i  before  inflectional  endings :  as,  ettj'gei* ;  l)eif  ger  ;  ber  '^eim'fdje 
^oben. 

The  chapter  on  the  declension  of  the  adjectives  will  be  completed  in 
the  syntax. 

COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES. 

89.  The  comparative  is  formed  by  adding  cr  (r)  to  the 
positive,  and  the  superlative  by  adding  ft  (eft).  They  are  both 
declined  like  the  positive : 


68  ADJECTIVES.  [§  89- 

xdd}r  rich  relict,  richer  berrei(^flc,  the  richest 

miibe,  tired        miiber,  more  tired     ber  miibefic,  the  most 

tired. 

1.  efl  is  used  for  ji  in  the  superlative: 

a.  After  sManis  ([,  jj,  fc^,  g)  ;  as,  fufj :  bcr  fu^Cjlc ; 

b.  After  b  and  t  (except  when  they  belong  to  the  endings  cnb  or  ct  of 
the  participles;  as,  ful)tenb,  cooling:  ber  fii^leubfte;  gebilbet,  accom- 
plished :  bcr  gebilbetfte) :  thus,  l^olb,  lovely  :  ber  Ijolbefte  ;  matt,  feeble: 
bcr  mattefle. 

c.  Usually  after  the  diphthongs  an  and  cu;  as,  gran  :  grauefie  ;  treu  : 
trcucjlc. 

2.  6b  cl,  noble,  forms  its  comparative  eblcr  (not  ebeler),  eliding  the  e 
before  \,  and  so  do  all  other  adjectives  in  el,  and  sometimes  also  those 
in  cu  and  cr :  as,  befd^eiben,  modest ;  bcjd^eib(c)ncr ;  finfter,  dark:  fin= 
ft(c)rcr. 

90.  The  German  has  an  adverbial  form  of  the  superlative 
formed  by  am,  at  the,  with  the  dative  of  the  superlative.  This 
form  is  used  where  the  Knglish  superlative  without  the  article 
stands  as  a  j)redicate:  as, 

3^m  3ll^t  fi^^  ^^^  ^^9^  ^^     ^  *^^J  ^^  ^J^  ^^'®  hottest, 
^ei^cftcn. 

91.  Monosj^llabic  adjectives  with  a,  o,  or  U  for  a  radical 
vowel,  modify  it: 

ftar!,  strong:      ftfirfer,  ber  [tarfftc 

fromtn,  pious:   frommer,       ber  frommfte 
fur^r  short:        furjer,  ber  tursefte. 

The  following  are  exceptions  to  the  rule: 

hav\d},  rough  flad),  flat  morfd^,  rotten 

b(an!,  bright  frol),  merry  nacft,  naked 

blog,  bare  ho%  hollow  platt,  flat 

brat>,  brave  ^olb,  gentle  plump,  clumsy 

bunt,  motley  !a^(,  bald  rafcl),  quick 

bumpf,  dull  !arg,  chaiy  ro^,  raw 

fa^I,  pale  tnapp,  scant  ruub,  round 

falb,  fallow  Ial)m,  lame  fad)t,  slow 

falfd^,  false  matt,  weary  jauft,  soft 


93] 


COMPAEiaON. 


69 


fatt,  satiated  ftot^,  proud  boH,  full 

f(i)(aff,  slack  ftraff,  tense  tua^r,  true 

fc^tanf,  slender  ftumm,  dumb  inunb,  sore 

fd)roff,  steep  ftumpp  blunt  ga^m,  tame, 

ftarr,  rigid  toll,  mad 

Also  with  bang,  anxious;  glatt,  smooth;  llav,  clear;   gart, 
tender,  the  vowel  is  usually  not  modified. 

92.  The  comparison  of  the  following  adjectives  is  more  or 
less  irregular. 


Positive, 
grog,  great 
gut,  good 
l)0d),  high 
nat)C,  near 
re(I)t,  correct 
t)iel,  much 
Dtete,  many 
iDentg,  httle 


Comparative. 

grower, 

beffer, 

l)oI)er, 

nci^er, 

ncf)tigcr 

me^r 

me^rere 

mittber  or  iDentger 


1.  The  article  before  meift  cannot  be 
meiften  l^eute,  most  people. 


Superlative. 

ber  grogte 
ber  befte 
ber  f)ocl)ftc 
ber  nac^fte 
ber  ric^ittgfte 
ber  meifte 
bie  meiften 
ber  minbefte  or  ber 
iuenigfte. 

dropped:   thus,  hk 


93.  Defective  comparison, 
place  have  only  two  degrees: 

ber  augerc,  the  exterior 
ber  tnnere,  the  interior 
ber  obere,  the  upper 
ber  untere,  the  inferior 
ber  niebere,  the  lower 
ber  t)orbere,  the  anterior 
ber  ^intere,  the  posterior, 

hinder 
ber  mitttere,  the  middle 


The   following  expressions  of 

ber  ciugerfte,  the  extremest 
ber  innerfte,  the  innermost 
ber  oberfte,  the  uppermost 
ber  unterfte,  the  lowest 
ber  nieberfte,  the  lowest 
ber  oorterfle,  the  foremost 
ber  l}tnberfte,  the  hindermost 

ber  mittelfte,  the  middlemost 

T^er  erfte,  the  first,  and  ber  le^te,  the  last,  lack  both  the 
positive  and  comparative:  but  from  erft  is  formed  a  com- 
parative erftercr  (ber  erft  ere),  the  former,  and  from  (el^t: 
te^terer  (ber  (efetere),  the  latter. 


70  ADJECTIYES.  [§  94- 

Special  Remarhs  on  Comparison, 

94  1.  The  positive  is  stren^liened  by  the  adverbs  f  ef)r,  very; 
xcd)t,  right;  iibcrau^?,  excessively;  au|crft,  l^oc^ft,  extremely; 
augcrorbentlic^,  extraordinaiy;  au^gejeic^nct,  exceedingly;  utt' 
gemeirt,  uncommonly;  also  by  a  word  in  com^^osition :  as, 
fdjnccmci^,  white  as  snow;  eiiidt,  cold  as  ice;  rabcnfdjroarj, 
black  as  a  raven.  Thus,  i^re  @timme  ift  ungemeitt  biegfam,  her 
voice  is  uncommonly  flexible;  tie  ^JiebictU  ift  gaUeitbittcr,  the 
medicine  is  as  bitter  as  gaU 

2.  The  comparative  is  strengthened  by  t)icl,  um  tjiek'S,  much; 
tDctt  or  bci  ineitem,  far;  ungleic^,  incomparably;  bebeutenb,  um 
ein  bebeutenbe^,by  a  great  deal;  as,  er  ift  luctt  (bei  iDeitcm,  t>iel, 
um  Uielc^)  alter,  he  is  much  older. 

3.  The  superlative  is  emphasized  by  alter-,  t)on  alien,  tt)ett* 
au^,  bci  weitem;  as,  ber  atterbefte  SSein,  ber  befte  Sein  i)on 
alien,  bcnuei  tau6  (bei  iDeitem)  befte  SBein. 

a.  Superlatives  thus  strengthened  aro  always  relative,  never  absolute. 
The  only  exception  is  aUerliebfl,  "which  besides  dearest  of  all,  may 
also  mean  very  dear,  very  pretty,  charming:  as,  bcin  ^unbd^en  ifl  allcr* 
licbfi,  your  little  dog  is  charming. 

95.  The  comparative  is  expressed  by  the  adverb  me!)r,  more, 
if  not  two  subjects,  but  two  quahties  of  the  same  subject  are 
compared  with  each  other:  as,  er  ift  me  I)  r  liftig  al^  tapfer,  he 
is  more  cunning  than  brave. 

96.  The  following  examples  show  what  particles  are  used 
in  comparison: 

@r  ift  (eBcn)  fo  grog  aU  id)  (or  He  is  as  tall  as  L 

toic  id)). 

^r  ift  nicl)t  fo  grog  aU  id)  (or  toic  He  is  not  so  tall  as  L 

id)). 

(5r  ift  alter  aU  id).  He  is  older  than  L 

3c  Idnger  bie  Stage,  bcflo  Htrjer  The  longer  the  dajs,  the 

bie  9Jad)te.  shorter  the  nights. 

5ld)ill  U">ar  bcr  ftdrtfte  tioit  (or  uns  Aclulles  was  the  strong- 

tct)  alien §ellenen  (or  ber  ftdrf fte  est  of  all  Hellenes. 

aller  §etlehen). 


§97] 


PRONOUNS. 


71 


1,  2)  e  n  n  Dor  qI§,  tlian,  after  a  comparative  is  obsolete,  except  when 
another  ats  follows:  as,  id)  ]^ai^e  it)n  I}i3l)er  ot§  ^iinftler  b  cnn  al8  9Jicn* 
f(^cn,  I  esteem  him  more  highly  as  an  artist  than  as  a  man. 


PRONOUNS. 

PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 
97.  Declension. 


FIRST   PERSON. 


Singular. 

N.  icf),  I 

Gr.  meincr  (mein),  of  me 
D.  mir,  to  me 

A.  mid)f  me 


Plural. 


unfer, 


SECOND   PERSON. 


N.  bu, 

G.  bciner  (bein), 

T>.  bir, 

A-  bid), 


tliou 
of  thee 
to  thee 
thee 


tf)r  ((Sie), 
cuer  (-3i)i*cr), 
cudi  (^f)nen), 
eud)  (^ie), 


masc. 

N.  er,  he 

G.  Jciner  (fetn),  of  him 
D.  t()m,  '    ■■  ' 

A.  iljn, 


THIRD   PERSON. 

Singular, 
fem. 
fte,      she 
iljrer,  of  her 
i^r,     to  her 
ftc,      her 

Plural  for  all  three  genders. 


we 

of  lis 
to  us 
us 


you 
of  you 
to  you 
you 


neut. 


it 


to  him 
him 


fetncr  (fein),  of  it 
il)m  to  it 

e^,  it 


N.  fie, 

G.  t()rer, 

D.  il)nen, 

A.  fie, 


they 
of  them 
to  them 
them 


1.  9}Jeiu,  belli,  fcin  are  older  forms  than  meincr,  beiuer,  feincr, 
and  occur  in  but  a  few  phrases;  as,  S5ergiJ3metHnid)t,  forget-me-not. 
Unfrer  and  eurcr  are  sometimes  found  for  unfer,  of  us,  and  euer, 
of  you. 


72  PEONOUKS.  [§  97- 

2.  ®8  is  very  often  abbreviated  to  '§;  as,  bii  fannfl  mir'g  glaubeit,  yon 
may  believe  me. 

98.  The  German  mode  of  address  differs  from  the  EngHsL 
Instead  of  "you  are  ■VN'elcome,"  e.  g.,  "we  say  "they  are  "wel- 
come," Sic  finb  tt)ilI!ommen,  using  the  third  person  plural 
instead  of  the  second,  and  distinguishing  it  by  a  capital 

NoTE.— The  nse  of  the  third  person  in  address  is  closely  connected 
witli  that  of  titles,  and  came  in  at  the  beginning  of  the  17th  centnry. 
Persons  of  rank  were  then  indirectly  addressed  by  their  title,  most 
commonly  by  §err  or  ^rau,  with  the  verb  in  the  third  person  singular 
(Compare:  how  is  your  Lordship?).  For  the  title  was  then  naturally 
substituted  the  pronoun  er  (for  §err),  or  fie  (for  ^rau).  During  the 
first  half  of  the  ISth  century,  the  third  person  plural  was  considered 
more  polite  than  the  singular,  and  has  remained  in  nse  up  to  the  pres- 
ent day,  while  er  and  fie  (singular)  are  no  longer  used,  except  in  certaia 
parts  of  Germany,  and  only  by  superiors  towards  their  inferiors. 

1.  This  (Sic,  however,  is  not  employed  exclusively.  Children, 
indeed,  and  pei-sons  we  are  familiar  with,  as  the  members  of 
our  family,  relatives,  and  intimate  friends,  are  addressed  by 
b  U  in  the  siagular,  and  by  i  I)  r  ia  the  plural  Also  in  divine 
worship  and  -poetry  bu  is  used.  Both  bu  and  iljr  require  the 
capital  initial  in  letters. 

a.  Animals  and  things  are  addressed  by  bit  in  the  singular, 
and  by  itji*  in  the  plui-aL 

2.  "While  the  verb  connected  with  (Sic  is  always  in  the 
plural,  even  when  not  more  than  one  person  is  addressed,  an 
adjective,  belonging  to  it  as  an  apposition,  is  either  in  the  sin- 
gular or  plui'al,  according  to  the  number  of  persons  addi'essed, 
thus,  (gie  5(rmftcr,  you  unhappy  one;  but,  @ie  Slnnften,  you 
imhappy  ones. 

3.  In  addressing  persons  by  their  tiile,  poHteness  requires 
the  use  of  ^err  or  grau  in  connection  with  it.  Ladies  assume 
the  title  of  their  husbands;  thus,  gutcn  5lbenb,  §crr  !5)octor! 
gutcn  SO^orgcn,  gran  !4^ircctor ! 

Also  when  mentioning  a  member  of  the  family  of  the  person 
addressed,  the  titles  §err,  grau,  grdulein  are  not  forgotten  in 


§  102]  PEBSONAL    PEONOUNS.  73 

polite  sr>eecli.  Ex.:  ©riigen  (£ie  3t}re  gran  Mnikx  unb  S^jvc 
g  V  ftul  e  in  <Sd}tt)efter  Don  mtr,  give  my  regards  to  your  mother 
and  sister. 

99.  Tlie  pronoun  of  tlie  jfirst  person  is  dropped  in  bittc, 
pray;  ban!c,  thanlis;  gc[cIjn)et(]C,  not  to  mention:  thus,  btttc, 
foutm  bolb,  pray  come  soon. 

1.  In  poetry,  also  the  pronoun  of  tlie  second  and  third  person  is  freely 
dropped:  as,  bie  ST^ur  ift  of[cn,  ^ afl  freien  2au\,    Goe. 

100,  The  pronoun  of  the  third  person  agrees  in  gender 
with  the  noun  to  which  it  refers.     Ex. : 

So  i  "it  tnetn  §ut  ?  Where  is  my  hat? 

§tertftcr.  Hero  it  is. 

S3o  i  ft  tncbe  Uljr ?  "Where  is  my  watch? 

gieriftfi:.  Here  it  is. 

5Bo  i  ft  mctn  ®Ia§ ?  "Where  is  my  glass? 

§ier  ift  e3.  Here  it  is. 

1.  As  to  the  words  whose  grammatical  gender  differs  from 
their  natural  one,  as,  t>Ci^  ^tib,  woman,  the  j)ronoun  prefer- 
ably conforms  to  the  latter.  Ex. :  l^a^  graulcinl  fte  H)i(l  fter- 
ben!  Sch,     The  young  lady!  she  is  dying. 

101.  If  the  pronoun  of  the  third  person  refer  to  an  in- 
animate  object,  and  be  governed  by  a  preposition,  a  contraction 
of  that  preposition  with  the  adverb  ba  (bar  before  a  vowel  or 
n)  is  usually  substituted  for  i^;  thus, 

^6)  tr>ctg  ntcf)t§  batJOtt.  I  hnow  nothing  of  ii 

^c^  Ijabc  nidit^  bagcgett.         I  have  nothing  against  ii 
Other  combinations  of  this  kind  are:  hobn,  baburd^,  hafHv,  baljiutcr, 

bamit,  batior,  baiuibcr,  bct^u,  ba;5h)lj:r)en,  banelen,  bo(r)ttad^,  baran,  barauf, 

baraug,  barin,  barob,  bariiber,  borunt,  barunter. 

102,  The  reflexive  pronoun  of  the j^rs^  and  second  person 
does  not  diller  from  the  personal;  thus,  id)  bcflnne  micl),  I  be- 
think myself;  bu  bC|tnr.i't  hi6),  thou  bethinkest  thyself;  Xoxv  hc^ 
flnneti  un8,  we  bethink  ourselves;  ttjr  bcflnnt  eitcT),  you  be- 
think yoTirselves.    For  the  third  person  f  id)  is  used  for  all 


74  PRONOUNS.  [§  102- 

genders  and  either  number;  thus,  cr  befinttt  fid),  fie  befinnt 
fid),  fie  befinnen  fi^. 

1.  This  fid)  requires  no  capital  in  address;  thus,  lute  bcfinkn 
(^ie  fid)?  how  do  you  do? 

2.  The  reflexive  is  sometimes  used  in  a  reciprocal  sense:  as, 
fic  befd)impf ten  fid)  (for  eiiianber),  they  insulted  each  other. 

103.  The  reflexive  as  well  as  the  personal  pronoims  are 
strengthened  and  emphasized  by  the  indeclinable  f  C  ( b  ft  (or 
fclber),  self:  as, 

<^\t  betritgt  f id)  f  e  ( b  ft  ( f  C I  b  e  r).        She  deceives  herself, 
(gie  f  e  ( b  ft  (f  e  t  b  e  r)  Tjat  e§  c;ctl)atu    She  has  done  it  herself. 

But  if  no  emphasis  lies  on  the  reflexive  pronoun,  fclbft  must 
be  carefully  avoided-  Thus,  I  wash  tnyself  cannot  be  trans- 
lated Ic^  tr>afd}e  Vxx^i^  fclbft,  unless  I  wish  to  intimate  that  I  am 
not  washed  by  others. 

1.  ©clbft  used  as  an  adverb  means  even:  as,  felbft  In  fciner 
le^ten  <Stunbe,  even  in  his  last  hour. 

2.  The  phrase  Don  fcDft  means  of  on^s  oiitti  accord;  as,  cr 
t^at  e§  t) 0 n  f  elb ft,  he  did  it  of  his  own  accord- 
ion. The  reflexive  pronoun  of  the  third  person,  fic^,  is  more 

extensively  used  in  German  than  in  Enghsh,  especially  alter 
prepositions:  as,  er  l^at  ®elb  bet  fid),  he  has  money  with  him. 

POSSESSIVES. 

105.  The  possessive  adjectives — mein,  bcin,  fcin,  unfer,  cucr, 
il)r  —  are,  like  other  adjectives,  not  declined  when  employed 
predicativehj ;  thus,  biefe  ©artcn  finb  mctn,  these  gardens  are 
mine, 

"When  used  attribidively  they  are  declined  like  the  indefinite 
article  (§  15). 

1.  To  the  pei-sonal  pronoun  'tVi  answers  the  possessive  beitt; 
to  i()r:  euer;  to  '3ie:  3I)r;  thus, 

^a\i\^yx  bcincn^ut? 
Sabttl)r  eure§iite? 
^aben  Cie  S'lji^c^  ©i^t? 


§  107]  I>OSSESSIVE&  75 

2.  Unfcr  and  eucr,  when  inflected,  can  drop  their  derivative 
c;  thus,  unfre^,  unfrem,  unfrett;  eure§,  eurcm,  euren,  etc 

3.  In  S3atcr  unfcr,  our  father,  the  beginning  of  the  Lord's 
prayer,  the  possessive  follows  its  noun.  This  is,  in  prose,  the 
only  remnant  of  an  old  usage. 

106,  The  possessive  pronoun  may  assume  three  different 
forms;  mine,  e.  g.,  may  be  translated  either 

meinct,        meine,  meincS;    pL       mcitic;  or 

bcrmeinc,     biemcinc,     baSmcinc;      pL  blc  mctncn;  or 
bcrmeittigc,  bic  meintQC,  ba^  metnigc;  pL  bte  meinigcn; 

the  declension  agreeing  with  that  of  adjectives.  Hence,  your 
cane  and  mine  may  be  translated  in  three  ways:  —  ^^'^r  ^Btod 
unbnelner;  S^jr  Stoc!unb  ber  metne;  3^I)r  (Stocf  unb  ber 
mctntge. 

The  corresponding  renderings  of  ours  are: 

unfcrcr,        unferc,  unfcrc§,    pL       itnfcrc; 

bcr  uttfcrc,     bte  unfcrc,     baS  itnfcrc,      pL  bte  nnfcrcn ; 
bcr  nnfrigc,   bte  unfrtgc,   ba«  unfrigc,    pL  bie  unfrigcn. 

1.  !Da6  SJlelntge  or  baSSJJcine  UBed  absolutely  means 
my  property,  or  my  duty;  and  bie9}Jetniflen  ox'txt^tu 
n  e  Tl  is  used  to  mean  my  family,  my  friends,  my  companions, 
etc. 

Similarly,  \>(x^  ©cintgc,  bte  ^^Dcintgen ;  \>a^  Unfrtgc,  bte  UnfrU 
gen,  etc ;  thus :  (Jarbtnal,  ic^  '^abe  b  a  0  2Ji  e  i  n  t  g  e  gct^n,  tl;un 
©tejc^tbas^'l^re.  Sch. 

107.  S)ero  and  SI)ro,  your,  before  titles,  are  antiquated.  —  (Stt).  ab- 
ridged of  ©ttjcr,  stands  for  (Suer :  as,  ®tt).  §oI)cit,  your  Highness.  —  (gc. 
and  ©r.,  before  titles,  stand  for  ©cine  and  ©eincr :  as,  @e.  9JJojicjlat  bet 
Konig. 


76  PRONOUNS.  [§  108- 

DEMONSTEATIVES. 

108.  The  demonstratives  are:  —  bicfer,  jener,  ber,  berjenige, 
berfcfbe,  fold)cr. 

109.  The  full  declension  of  btcfct  has  been  given  in  §  14,  a. 
That  of  i titer  agrees  with  ii 

The  difference  in  the  meaning  between  bicfcr  and  jcttcr  is 
that  jcner  points  to  a  remoter  object  than  btcfcr.  Accordingly 
"the  latter,"  being  the  nearer,  is  translated  by  btefciv  and  "the 
foi-mer"  by  jcncr ;  thus,  ic^  lefe  $omer  unb  feantc,  jenctt  tm 
Dricjinal,  bief  en  in  bcr  Ucberfc^unn/ 1  am  reading  Homer  and 
Dante,  the  former  in  the  original,  the  latter  in  the  translation. 

110.  ^cr,  this,  that,  when  used  adjectively  does  not  differ 
in  declension  from  the  definite  article,  but  it  is  pronounced 
with  deeper  emphasis:  as,  njcr  !ennt  bcn  !iDicI}ter!  Who  knows 
that  poet! 

When  bcr  is  used  as  a  pronoun,  it  is  declined  as  follows; 

Singular, 
m.  f.  n. 


bcr                   btc 

ba«,                     that 

bcffcn(be«)    bercn(ber) 

bcffen(be«),  of  that 

bem                  bcr 

bcm                     to  that 

\itxi                   bie 

\>Ci^                    that 

Plm-al  of  all  three  genders, 
bie  those 

bcren,bcrer  of  those 
bcncn  to  those 

btc  those 

1.  !r)crct  for  bcr  en  is  used  before  a  relative  pronoun,  or  a 
substantive  with  a  prei^osition:  as,  gcbcnfct  bcrer,  bie  l^cib  tra* 
Cjcn,  think  of  those  who  are  suffeiing.  !Dic  §offnung  bcrcr  tm 
Ungliicf,  the  hope  of  those  in  misfortune. 

2.  2)c8  for  bcffcn  is  found  in  bcS^alb  and  bcSlDcgen,  therefore,  and  in 
a  few  phrases:  as,  hjcg  \ia%  .^cr^,  t)ott  ift,  b  c8  gcl)t  bcr  2JJunb  \ihtx,  out  of 
the  abundance  of  the  heart  the  mouth  speaketh;  besides,  in  poetry. 


§  114]  DEMONSTRATIVES.  77 

111.  As  to  its  meaning,  bcr  stands  between  bicfer  and  jettcr, 
and  comes  nearest  to  the  Latin  ide,  while  bicfer  answers  to 
hie,  and  jcner  to  ilbd.  While  biefcr  is  most  commonly  strength- 
ened by  the  adverb  l^ier,  and  jener  by  bort,  ber  is  emphasized 
by  \ia)  thus;  iDunfd)en  (Sie  biefe^  ^(aoicr  ^icr,  obcr  jcne^ 
b 0 r t?  do  you  wish  this  piano  here,  or  that  one  there?  SBel^ 
d)en  9^mg  meinft  bu?  —  S;)cnbaan  beittem  Stnger,  which  ring 
do  you  mean? — The  one  on  your  finger. 

1.  ^tx  is  sometimes  introduced  to  represent  the  subject  a 
second  time  with  emphasis:  as,  iDCr  ntdjt  arbcitct,  ber  [oU  nidjt 
effen,  he  who  does  not  work  shall  not  eat 

2.  Finally,  ber  may  be  used  without  any  real  demonstrative 
power,  and  is  then  rendered  by  an  emphatic  j^ersonal  pronoun: 
as,  b  er  foil  an  mid)  benfen,  he  shall  think  of  me. 

112.  The  demonstratives  biefer,  jcner,  and  ber  are  used  in 
the  neuter  singular  when  connected  with  their  noun  by  fcin  or 
tDerben. 

!D{efc§  (or  bic§)  ift  mcin  ^rubcr.     This  is  my  brother. 
3cnc§  ift  mcine  ^d)mefter.  That  is  my  sister. 

^tt§  ift  feine  ^ntfd)u(bigung.        That  is  no  excuse. 

113.  When  referring  to  inanimate  objects  and  governed  by 
a  preposition,  the  demonstrative  pronouns  are  little  used,  a 
combination  of  that  preposition  with  the  adverbs  ()ier  or  ba 
(bar  before  a  vowel  or  n)  being  substituted;  as, 

3d)  f d)Iie5e  I)ierau§(barau§).    I  infer  from  that 

When,  however,  the  demonstrative  stands  as  antecedent  to 
a  relative,  no  such  adverbial  combination  can  be  used;  as,  id) 
bin  gufrieben  mit  bent,  tra^  ic^  I}abe,  I  am  satisfied  with  that 
which  I  have. 

114.  ^crjcnigc,  that,  is  a  compound  of  the  definite  article 
and  }enig,  a  derivative  of  j;en(er).  Both  components  aire 
declined: 


78 


PRONOUNS. 


[§114, 


SINGTILAR. 

f. 


PLURAL. 

m.  f.  n. 


berjcnige  biejcnige  badjenigc  bteienicjcn 

beejenigen  berjenigcn  bc^ienigen  berjenfgcn 

bemjenigen  berjenigen  bemjentgen  bcnjcnigcn 

benjcnigeu  bicjenige  ba^jcnige  bicjenigen 

1.  ©erjentge  is  used  both  as  an  adjective  and  a  pronoun, 
and  generally  as  the  antecedent  to  a  relative:  as, 

!l)a$icnigc  ©tucf,  tuelc^e^  un^     That  play  which  pleases 

am  beften  gefdllt.  us  most 

!iD  e  r  i  c  n  i  g  c,  lueldjer  jucrft  !ommt.    He  who  comes  first 

2.  Tliat  followed  by  a  genitive  is  always  rendered  by  bcr* 
jcnigc,  never  by  biefer  or  jeuer;  thus,  mein  §au^  unb  ba^* 
jentge  meinc^  9^ad)bar^,  my  house  and  that  of  my  neighbor. 

3.  ^cr  can  always  be  substituted  for  berjcnige. 

115.  2)crfclBc  (berfelbtge  and  fclbiger  are  obsolete)  and  bcr 
Itatnlt^C,  the  same,  are  dechned  like  bcrjenige,  and  used  both 
as  adjectives  and  q&  pronouns: — 

5Bir  I)abcn  alle  benfelben    We  have  all  the  same  judge. 
9Jid}tcr. 

1.  !DerfeIbe  is  strengthened  by  the  particle  cbctt  preceding 
it.  In  the  same  sense  ctn  unb  bcrfelbe  is  used,  cin  remaining 
usually  imdeclined;  thus,  \mx  finb  an  e  b  e  n  b  c  m  f  e  I  b  c  n  (or  an 
cinunbbemfelben)  S^age  geboren,  we  were  bom  on  the  very 
same  day. 

116.  (5 Oliver,  such,  is  declined  like  biefer  (§  14),  and  used 
both  as  an  adjective  and  a  pronoun. 

Such  a  is  either  ein  foldjcr  wdth  regular  declension,  or  fold) 
ein,  fol^  being  indeclinable;  thus, 

SSlxi  etnem   fo(d)cn  ©aule  or    With  such  a  nag. 
mit  f  0 1  d)  e  i  n  e  m  (^aule. 

1.  (So  ein  is  often  used  instead  of  fold)  ein:  as,  Ijaben  ^k  je 
fo  ein  en  S3ogc(  gcfe^en?  Did  you  ever  see  such  a  bird? 

2.  (Sold)  may  bo  strengthened  by  ebcn:  as,  e ben  folc^  eitt 
9?ing,  just  such  a  ring. 


§  119]  INTERROGATIVES.  79 

INTEEKOGATIVES. 

117.  Tlie  interrogatives  are:  —  WZV?  todd)CV?  Wa^  fi'ir  citt? 

118.  29Scr  is  declined  as  follows: 

m.  and  f.  n. 

ttjer?  who?  tDa«?  what? 

tDcffcn?  (tt)C^?)  whose?  ttjeffen?  (tueg?)  of  what? 


it) em?  to  whom? 


tDCn?  whom?  iDa^?  •     what? 

1.  2Ber?  refers  to  persons,  VDa§?  to  things.  They  have  no 
plural.  Ex.:  3Ber  fiub  <Bk,  unb  xoa^  iDOlIcn  (Sic?  Who  are 
you,  and  what  do  you  want? 

2.  The  genitive  tue^  for  tOt\\tn  occurs  in  tPeSl)aIb?  and 
h)  e  ^  ii)  e gen  ?  wherefore  ? 

3.  The  dative  of  tt)a§?  is  in  colloquial  usage  tT)a§?  Thus, 
k)on  lDa§  fprec^en  (Ste?  Of  what  are  you  speaking? 

But  when  Wa^  is  governed  by  a  preposition,  an  adverbial 
compound  of  tt)0  (tt)Or  before  vowels  or  n)  and  that  preposition 
is  more  correctly  substituted  for  it: — 

2B 0 1)  0  n  fpred)ett  @ie  ?  Of  what  are  you  speaking? 

iK  0  r  i  tl  befte^t  t^re  ©djUlb  ?     Wherein  consists  her  guilt? 

4.  SBaS?  is  sometimes  used  for  iDarutU?  Thus,  mcitt  ©Ol^n, 
tt)a§  btrgft  bu  fo  bang  betn  @cficl)t?  Goe.  My  son,  why  hidest 
thou  so  anxiously  thy  face? 

5.  2Ber  and  iDa^  are  occasionally  used  as  indefinite  pro- 
nouns meaning  some  one,  something.  They  are,  then,  usually 
preceded  by  irgenb:  as,  bu  tannft  irg enb  it) en  fragen,  you 
may  ask  anybody. 

119.  SBcI^cr?   which?   and  which  one?   is  declined  like 

bie[er  (§  14). 

1.  As  a  pronoun,  vodd)  follows  the  rule  given  for  the  de- 
monstratives (§  112);  thus,  iTjeld^eS  finb  3^re  greunbe?  Which 
are  your  friends? 

2.  SKelc^,  especially  in  exclamations,  may  be  followed  by  the 
indefinite  article,  in  which  case  it  drops  its  endings:  as,  toetc^ 
ein  9?iefe !  what  a  giant! 


80  PRONOUNS.  [5  119- 

3.  "Wlieii  followed  by  an  adjective,  lDcI(f|  mar/  drop  its  end- 
ings; thus,  Uu(d}  ticfC'^  '3c()lPeii3ea !  what  a  p}'ofoujid  silence! 

(for  njcldjc3  ticfe  <Sct)n}ei(jen!). 

120.  S!Stt§  fur  Cin  ?  what?  what  kind  of?  is  used  adject- 
ively;  as,  Xo  a  *3  f  ii r  C  i U  ^aum?  what  soi-t  of  a  tree?  The  full 
declension  of  iDtt'^  fitr  eitt  ^aum?  i.5  as  foUows: — gen.  Wa^  fiir 
cmc§  ^aume^?  dat  xoa^  fiir  eincm -53aumc  ?  ace  roa^  fiir  eincn 

1.  Before  a  plui*al  or  the  name  of  a  material  ciu  is  sup- 
pressed:— 

23  a  5  f  ii  r  ^  aumc  fitib  ba^  ?    What  sort  of  trees  are  these  ? 
^a§  fiir  SBctn  Dertaufcn    "What  sort  of  Avine  do  you 
(gie?  sell? 

2.  2Ba§  can  be  separated  from  fiir  eitt;  as,  n)a§  tft  \>a^  fiir 
ciite  ^lutite?  what  flower  is  that? — Compare,  whai  is  he  for 
a  fool?  Shakespeai-e. 

121.  To  the  adjective  tt)aS  fiir  ettl  answers  the  pronoun  Id  a  6 
fiir  cittcr?  toa^  fiir  eittc?  xoa^  fiir  cinS?  Thus,  ic^ 
brattd)e  eitt  i^efebud).  — •  SSa^  fiir  eitt^  ?  —  (Eitt  ettglif^c^,  I  want 
a  reader. — ^What  kind  of  a  one? — An  Engh'sh  one. 

EKLATIVES. 

122.  The  relatives  are:  iDcIc^er,  ber,  lucr.  —  ^o  is  obsolete. 

123.  SBcI^Ct  when  used  adjectivehj  follows  the  declension 
of  biefer  (§  14);  as  a. pronoun,  ij  is  declined  as  follows: 

STNGTILAK.  PLURAL. 

m.  f.  n.  m.  f.  n. 

h)el^cr     n)el(f)e     lt)eld)e^      tt>ctd)c,     which 
beffett     bereti    beffett    berett,  ofwhich 
^Deicl)ettt    U"ield)er    iDelc^etn     iDcMjctt,  to  which 
u^eldjett     uield}e     it)eld)CiJ      uield)c,     which 

the  genitive  adopting  the  forms  of  the  demonstrative  pronoun 

bcr(§110).     Ex.:— 


§  127]  RELATIVES.  81 

^er  grembc,  mit  tt)cld)eni  tcf)  The  stranger  with  whom  I 
rcifte,  unb  beffen  @cfcl)id)te  traveled,  and  whose  liist- 
id^  bir  cr^dljltc.  ory  I  told  you. 

1.  In  poetry  bc§  for  beffen  is  sometimes  met  with. 

124.  ^cr,  who,  which,  is  declined  like  the  demonstrative 
pronoun  bcr  (§  110).     The  genitive  plural  is  berctl  (not  berer). 

1.  The  genitive  of  the  relative  always  precedes  the  word  by 
which  it  is  governed:  as,  ber  ^ercj,  beffen  ©ipfcl  \mx  fc^ett, 
the  mountain  the  summit  of  which  (whose  summit)  we  see. 

Note  the  omission  of  the  article  before  the  governing  noun 
@ipfc(. 

2.  ®er  and  iDcldjCl*  are  in  most  instances  interchangeable. 

3.  Observe  the  use  of  the  relative  after  fo((^  in  phrases  like 
the  following : 

9^ur  f  0  ( d)  e  b  i  e  gcfunb  f inb.     Only  such  as  are  healthy. 

125.  SBcr,  he  who,  and  tUttS,  that  which,  are  declined  like 
the  interrogative  \ozx?  n)av5?  (§  118). 

1.  The  genitive  it)c3  for  n)cffcn  only  occurs  in  h)  cg^alb,  Xo  cSloegen, 
•wherefore,  and  a  few  phrases,  as:  lueS  bag  §eq  Dolt  ift,  beS  ge^t  bee 
2Jiunb  iiber,  out  of  the  abundance  of  the  heart  the  mouth  speaketh. 

126.  The  relative  can  never  be  omitted  in  German:  thus, 

^a^  iBU(^,  n)elci)ee  id)  The  book  (which)  I  am 
lefe.  reading. 

127.  For  a  relative  governed  by  a  preposition,  adverbial 
compounds  of  that  preposition  with  too  (iDOr  before  vowels  or 
n  'are  often  substituted  if  the  pronoun  refers  to  inanimate 
objects.  Thus,  ba^  §au^,  ID  0  r  i  n  er  tDO^nt,  the  house  in  which 
ho  lives. 


82  PRONOUNS.  [§  128^ 

INDEFINITES  (PRONOUNS  AND  NUMEEAI.S). 

128.  SWoit  is  used  like  the  French  on,  and  translated  by 
one,  we,  they,  people,,  or  by  the  passive  voice;  as, 

$^enn  man  rcift.  When  one  is  trayeling. 

9}^  a  n  f agt.  They  say,  people  say,  it  is 

said. 
!DeTn   9^dd)ftcn    mu§    man     AVe  must  help  our  neighbor. 
l)clfen.    Bch. 

1.  The  oblique  cases  are  supphed  by  cincr;  as, 

SBcnn  man  fce!ran!  ift,   ift    "When  one  is  sea^sick,  life  is 
e  i  n  e  m  \>(X^  l^cbcn  glctdj*         indifferent  to  him. 
giltig. 

2.  (5r  is  never  used  as  a  substitute  for  man,  as  he  for  one, 
but  man  is  always  to  be  repeated:  as, 

SKcnn  man  retc^  ift,  I) at  man    If  one  is  rich,  he  has  many 
tiicle  gutc  greuabc.  good  friends. 

3.  The  2^ossessii-e  answering  to  man  is  f:in ;  thus,  man  bcr- 
tcrnt  f  e  i  n  e  SJtutterfpradje  nidjt,  one  does  not  forget  one's  (his) 
mother  tongue. 

The  reflexive  answering  to  man  is  fic^  ;  thus,  man  mug  f  i  d) 
nidjt  felbft  lobcn,  one  must  not  praise  oneself. 

129.  3cmanb,  somebody,  is  declined  as  follows:  gen.  l:^ 
manbcS;  dai  jcmanb  or  jcmanbcjn  or  jcmanbcn;  ace.  jemanb  or 
jcmanbcn. 

!•  5  r  9  C  n  b  jemanb  means  scttne  one  or  other, 

130.  lUicmanb,  nobody,  not  anybody,  is  decHned  like  j:* 

manb  (§  129). 

131.  diner,  some  one,  the  pronominal  form  of  cin,  is  in- 
flected Hke  btc[cr.  Ex. :  Scnn  bu  c  t  n  c  n  Wci^t,  if  you  know 
some  one. 

1.  3  r  g  c  n  b  eincr  means  some  one  or  other. 


§  137]  INDEFINITES.  83 

132.  ^Cttt,  no,  not  any,  is  declined  like  ein,  and  !eincr,  no 
ono,  not  any  one,  like  bie[cr  (§  14).  Ex.:  !etne  S^UIV  no 
trace;  t)on  !  C  t  U  e  Ttt  gea(i)tet,  esteemed  by  no  one. 

133.  Mther  is  rendered  by  CtttCt  tlOtt  Bcibcn,  neither  by 
Icincr  tion  Bcibcn ;  t)On  beibcn,  bowever,  is  often  sujDpressed; 
as,  todd)a  t?on  ben  bcibcti  toabcn?  —  -Reiner  (ooubeiben); 
wbicb  of  tlie  two  boys? — Neither. 

1.  If  each  or  both  can  be  substituted  for  either,  it  is  trans- 
lated by  jcbcr  or  bclbe :  as,  wit  1:)atkn  SBalb  gu  j  e  b  e  r  ^Beite,  or 
3U  b  e  i  b  e  n  @eiteiX,  we  bad  wood  on  either  side. 

134.  3^^^^^  every,  every  one,  is  declined  like  biefer  (§  14). 
Tlie  indeHnite  article  may  accompany  it: — • 

(($in)  i  e  b  C  r  ^ote.  Every  messenger. 

((Sin)  J  C  b  e  V  t)On  eU(^.  Every  one  of  you. 

1.  SegUc!)cr  is  used  but  rarely  for  jeber.     Sci>tt)cbcr  is  rather  obsolete. 

135.  3>bcttnan!t,  every  one,  any  one,  compounded  of  jcber 
and  £D2ann,  takes  §  in  the  genitive,  and  no  ending  in  the  other 
cases;  thus, 

!Da§  ift  nidjt  jcbcrmannS  ®c^     That  is  not  everybody's  taste. 
fd)ma(f. 

136.  (^ttt^a^,  something,  and  ntC^t§^  nothing,  not  anything, 
are  both  indecHnable.  (Sin)a^  before  names  of  materials  and 
abstract  nouns  means  some;  the  substantive  after  etma^  is,  in 
this  case,  not  dechned:  thus,  mit  etrja§  ©elb,  with  some 
money. 

1,  3  V  g  e  n  b  ettraS  means  sometliing  or  other. 

2.  2Sa3  is  often  familiarly  used  for  etlDaS:  as,  tDiffen  @ic  in  a  §  9'teue§? 

137.  5lttbct,  other,  is  dechned  like  an  adjective;  as,  tin 

anbereS  ^{(b;  ba§  anbere  ^ilb;  anbcrc,  others;  ble  anbercn,  the 
others.  Note  the  phrase  ba§  ift  etlDa^  anbereS,  that  is  another 
thing. 

1.  When  another  denotes  addition,  it  is  rendered  nod)  Ctn: 
as,  fjcben  (Sie  mir  nod;  c i n c  !£a[fc,  give  me  another  cup. 


84  ■  PRONOUNS.  [§  138- 

138.  ©inanbct,  each  other,  one  another,  is  indeclinable: 
as,  f :c  fpredjen  nid)t  mit  e  i  n  a  n  b  e  r,  they  do  not  speak  with 
each  other. 

139.  ^11  is  declined  like  bie[cr  (§  14)  and  used  both  ad- 
jectivcly  and  substantively.  Ex. :  allcr  ^^^cifcf,  all  doubt;  id) 
feljc,  wk  allcl  lommcn  toirb,  Sck;  I  see  how  all  will  end. 

Yet  before  a  possessive  or  a  demonstrative,  all  may  be  left 
undeclined;  thus,  TJtit  all  fc::icm  ©elbe,  with  aU  his  money; 
ail  bic'fe  SBuufcIjc;  all  these  wishes. 

1.  In  a  few  phrases  tlie  form  atlc  occurs  for  all;  as,  Bci  olle  bem, 
with  all  that;  tvo'^  a  11  e  bcm,  in  spite  of  all  that. 

2.  ^n  I  e  6,  lilie  the  French  tout,  may  be  Tiscd  in  the  meaning  of  every- 
hod'j  ;  as,  a  n  C  §  fliel)t  mic^,  everybody  shuns  me. 

3.  Kote  also  the  distributive  meaning  of  all.  Ex. :  er  !ommt  a  11  e  3a^rc 
gttjeimal;  ho  comes  twice  every  year. 

140.  (^amttil^  and  gefaittt,  all,  complete,  aro  decHned  like 
ordinary  adjectives,  ©cfamt  cannot,  as  [amttid),  be  used 
without  a  hmiting  word-     Tlius, 

(Sd)il(cr0    [  d  m  t  H  cTj  e  Schiller's  complete  works. 

Scrfc. 

iDie    (^cfamte    9}iadjt  bc5    The  whole   power  of    the 

geiube^.  enemy. 

141,  ©ont,  all,  whole,  is  declined  regularly  (§  8t^/),  and 
used  both  adjecUvely  and  substantively: — • 

Gin  gan^cS  QafjX,  A  whole  year. 

^a^  &a\V^t  unb  jcine  Xc'ik.     The  whole  and  its  pai-ts. 

142,  Cauter,  all,  mere,  is  indeclinable;  as, 

G3  tft  I  a  U  t  c  r  §CUd)cIcL  It  is  all  hypocrisy. 

143,  6ittig,  and  the  less  common  etli^,  some,  are  declined 
like  biefer  (§  14),  and  used  both  adjectively  and  substantively; 

(5tTttge  (etlid)e)  (Sd)iffc.  Some  ships. 

Ginige  (etHd}c)  tdjauptcn.    Some  people  pretend. 


§  147]  INDEFINITES.  85 

(5r  erja^Itc  mtr   ctntc^e§    He  told  me  sometliing  of 
(ct(t(J)e^)  au^  jeinem  Seben.         liis  history. 

144.  (itXDtid)f  some,  is  antiquated,  but  its  abridged  form 
tOcl^  is  used  colloquially  as  a  pronoun  referring  to  a  substan- 
tive mentioned  before.  It  is  declined  like  the  relative  iDelc^er. 
Example : 

§aft  bu  nod)  ®e(b?  —  Qa,     Have  you  any  more  money? 
i^  ^abe  noc^  toddjt^,  — ^Yes,  I  still  have  some. 

145.  Win  ^aaXf  a  few,  is  indeclinable:  as. 

Wit  etn  ^  aar  ^Jrcunbcn.        With  a  few  friends. 

1.  (Sin  paar,  a  few,  is  not  to  be  confounded  with  eiii  ^aax,  a  pair,  a 
couple,  which  latter  is  declined,  except  in  the  case  mentioned  in  §  29. 

146.  Wlan^,  many  a,  is  declined  like  biefcr  (§  14),  and 
employed  both  adjectively  and  substantively:  as, 

SD^  a  tl  d^  C  r  ^rrtum.  Many  an  error. 

WandjtV  mctnt.  Many  a  one  beUeves. 

1.  When  followed  by  an  adjective  it  may  drop  its  endings: 
as,  mand)  tapfcrcr  (Soibat,  many  a  brave  soldier  (for  mandjcr 
tapfere  <SoIbat). 

2.  The  use  of  the  indefinite  article  after  mand)  is  optional; 
thus,  mand)  ctn  ^rrtum;  manc^  cin  tapfcrer  ©olbat. 

147.  85icl  and  tDenig  are,  or  at  least  may  be  dechned, 
whether  used  adjectively  or  substantively: — 

S3iete  M)rer,  unb  iDentCje  Many    teachers,    and    few 

(SdjiUcr.  pupils. 

S5te(e  finb  bcrufcn,  unb  h3e*  Many  are  called,  and  few 

ni(je  finb  au^emal)(t.  are  chosen. 

Only  when  preceding  a  noun  in  the  singular  they  are  2:)re- 
ferably  not  dechDed,  provided,  however,  that  they  are  not 
preceded  by  the  definite  article,  or  a  pronoun.     Ex. : 

mtrotnic^  Si^.  Goe.  With  Httle  wit. 

Tlit  c'mxocnic^  ®ebulb.  With  a  Httle  patience. 


86  tPvONOUNS.  [§  147- 

1.  Note  that  tiie  indefinite  article  before  ttjcnig  remains  undeclined. 
The  sasae  is  tiue  of  the  indefinite  article  in  e  i  n  b  i  §  d^  e  n,  a  little,  which 
is,  colloquially,  often  used  for  cirt  hjenig. 

2.  Mar!c  the  distinction  between  biel,  much  of  one  thing  (multmn), 
and  Diele^,  many  things  (multa).    Ex. :  S?ernc  diet,  nid^t  U  i  c  I  c «. 

148.  1.  9Re^r^  more,  and  ttJcnigcr,  less,  are  not  declined: 
as,  m  e  I)  r  2id)t,  more  light;  to  c  n  i  g  e  r  8drm^  less  noise. 

a.  3D^C^r  foUows  its  noim,  when  the  negative  !cm  precedes: 
as, 

^cinc  ^lagcn  m  c  I)  r !  No  more  complaints  I 

b.  3rore  after  a  numeral  or  mmaerical  expression,  when 
denoting  addition,  is  rendered  by  nod)  i^receding  the  numeral: 

©ebcn  ^ie   mtr  nod)   gmci     Give  me  two  more  meters. 
3J^ctcr. 

2.  SWc^rctC,  several,  is  used  both  adjectively  and  substant- 
iveh': 

5^ad)  mel)rcren  .^a^rcn.  After  several  years. 

W  c  I)  V  c  r  e  ftarbcn.  Several  died. 

^&\  ^abe  mc^rcre^gU  f  an-  I  have  to  buy  several  things, 
fen. 

149.  @cnug,  enough,  is  indeclinable,  and  may  either  pre- 
cede or  follow  its  substantive;  as,  genng  O^cgcn  or  9^C(jen 
g  e  n  n  g,  rain  enough. 

150.  One  before  a  proper  name  is  rendered  by  ein  CjetDtffer: 
as,  ein  getPif fer  (imft  (Stein,  one  Ernest  Stein. 


§  152]  NuiraEiALS.  87 


NUMERALS. 

151.  List  of  the  eardingil  numerals. 

L  em  (em^)  13.  breije^tt  50.  funf^tg  orfimfsig 

2.  ^trei  14.  t)ier3el)tt  60.  fedi^ig 

3.  bret  15.  funf3et)norfunf-  TO.  ficb^ig  (fiebensig) 

4.  t)ier  16.  fec^je^n       [^e^n  80.  ac^t^tcj 

5.  fUnf  17.  fieb5el)tt  (ftcben^^  90.  neun^tg 

6.  \cd)^  18.  ac^t^etju      [ae^n  100.  ^unbert     [(cinS) 
T.  fiebeti  19.  neunae^n  101.  l)unbcrtunbem 

8.  a6)t  20.  sttjan^tg  200.  3tDeit)utibert 

9.  neun         21.  ctnunb^tDanstg  1000.  taufenb 

10.  3cl)n  22.  ^roetunbaiDanjig     10,000.  ge^ntaufetib 

11.  elf  30.  breigig  100,000.  ^unberttaufenb 

12.  ^molf         40.  t)icr3ig  1,000,000.  etne  TliUion. 

1.  In  the  arransfement  of  long'  numbers  the  German  usage 
agrees  with  tlie  EngHsh,  except  that  the  units  precede  the 
tens;  as,  aiDeiuubbrctgtg,  ad)t3c^n^unbert3metunb3n)an3tg. 

2.  Before  l^uubert  and  taufeub  the  indefinite  article  is  us- 
ually omitted. 

152.  din,  one,  before  a  noun  is  declined  like  the  indefinite 
article,  but  pronounced  with  deeper  emphasis;  as,  nur  etne 
<StUttbe,  only  one  hour.    "When  used  as  a  pronoun  it  takes  the 

form  of  cincr,  cinc,  cinS:  as, 

(S  t n  e  r  t)ou  tl)ncn.  One  of  them. 

^iu^  t)on  ben  ^inbern.  One  of  the  children. 

1.  When  preceded  by  the  definite  article  or  a  pronoun,  eitt 
is  dechned  like  an  adjective  (§  83);  thus,  traruiTl  gtrei  *!|3ferbe? 
id)  braud)e  nur  ble[e^  eine,  why  two  horses?  I  need  only  this 
one. 

2.  "When  eitt  stands  first  in  a  compound  number  it  is  not 
declined:  as,  Dor  einuttubreij^ig  3^agen. 

3.  In  numeration,  one  is  eiu^ :  as,  einmat  ein^  ift  eiu^, 
once  one  is  one.  —  ^a^  (Sinmalein^  means  the  multiplication 
table. 


88  KUMERAI^.  [§  153- 

153.  SttlCt  and  btci  require  inflectional  endings  in  the 
genitive,  unless  they  ai'e  preceded  by  a  limiting  word  showing 
the  case:  as, 

'^k  (Sntlaffung  giDeier  obcr  The  dismission  of  two  or 
breict  OJiinifter.  thi-ee  ministers. 

^a^  ^eugni^  jweier  ober  The  testimony  of  two  or 
brcicr.  three. 

But:  :Die  (5ttt(af)ung  bcr  brei  SD^tnifter;  ba^  B^ugni^  biefer 
breu 

1.  3^0,  JttJCen  are  antiquated  forms  for  gttjci. 

1.  ©cibc,  both,  is  often  used  to  render  tivo,  with  the  de- 
clension of  an  adjective  (§  81  to  83):  as,  beibc  ^O^ne;  bie  bet* 
bctt  (Sol)ne. 

a.  Note  the  neuter  singular  in  phrases  like  this:  ^o  tft 
@tocf  uub  ®ct)trm?  —  Qd)  I)abe  beibc^. 

b.  In  colloquial  usage  beibe  is  emphasized  by  all;  as,  blitlb 
OUfallenbcibcn  5lugcn,  blind  in  both  eyes. 

154  The  units  as  a  rule  are  not  declined,  except  in  certain 
phrases:  as,  alle  Dierc,  aU  fours;  ouf  alien  Dieren,  upon  all  fours; 
alle  neunc,  aU  the  nine  (pins);  mit  jcc^fcn  fa^ren,  to  drive  six 
in  hand. 

155.  The  tens  are  regularly  not  declined.  Only  occasionally 
they  take  a  termination  in  the  dative,  especially  in  such  phrases 
as,  in  ben  breigigcil  ftc()Cn,  to  be  between  thirty  and  forty. 

156.  §unbert,  taufenb,  and  9>JiUton  are  often  used  as  col- 
lective nouns:  \ia^  §unbcrt,  ha-^  STaufenb,  bie  SD^tUton.  The 
plural  forms  are:  bie  §unberte,  bie  S^aufenbe,  bie  2)ZilIionen. 
Ex.:  ^r  l^at  ba^  @Iii(f  t)on  ^aufenben  cjcgriinbet,  Sck,  he  has 
laid  the  foundation  to  the  happiness  of  thousands. 

157.  By  means  of  the  syllable  er  many  indeclinable  deriv' 
atives  are  formed  from  the  cardinal  numbers,  and  are  used 
both  as  substantives  and  adjectives;  thus,  ein  (Sedijic^cr,  a  man 
of  sixty;  ein  ^^^^^i^Qf^'  ^  20-kreuzer  x)iece;  brciunbadjt3ii3Ct 
^ia,  wine  grown  in  1883. 


§  161]  NUMERALS.  89 

158.  The  Ordinals  are  formed  from  the  Cardinals  by  add- 
ing i  to  the  numbers  2  to  19,  and  ft  to  the  rest,  with  the  de- 
clension of  ordinary  adjectives.  Thus,  ber  3tt)eitc,  bei'  breigigftc; 
ein  giDcitcr,  em  bretgigftcr. 

The  Jirst,  howeYeYy  is  ber  erfte;  the  third,  ber  brttte  (not 
breite),  and  the  eighth,  bcr  ad)tc  (not  ad)tk), 

1.  For  bcr  3  tt)  e  1 1  e  is  often  substituted  bcr  a n b  c  r  e. 

2.  In  compound  numbers,  only  the  last  member  receives  the 
ordinal  ending;  thus,  ber  breiunbneunjicjfic,  the  ninety  third, 

159.  Ordinals /?rece<i6  their  substantives:  as,  erfte 6  ^apitef, 
chapter  the  first  Only  those  denoting  the  succession  of  prin- 
ces/o/Zow;  the  proper  name:  as,  ©einric^  ber  ^lerte,  Henry  the 
fourth. 

160.  From  the  Cardinals  are  further  formed: 

1.  The  Iteratives  by  adding  mal:  as,  ein  mat,  once;  ^XotU 
in  a  I,  twice,  etc  They  are  adverbs;  but  adjectives  may  be 
formed  from  them  by  adding  the  derivative  syllable  ig:  as, 
ein  bretmatigcr  5lngriff,  a  thrice  repeated  attack. 

2.  The  MultipUcatwes  by  adding  fo^  or  falttg:  as,  iXod- 
fad),  JlDcifdltig,  twofold.  They  are  declined  like  ordinary 
adjectives:  as,  ein  breifa(I)cr  (breifciltiger)  3JJorb,  a  threefold 
murder. 

a.  (5 1  n  f  d  1 1  i  g,  originally  identical  with  etnf ac^,  simple,  plain, 
has  now  in  common  usage  the  meaning  of  f  ooHsh,  silly. 

b.  !iD  0  p  p  C  ( t,  double,  is  declined  like  an  ordinary  adjective: 
as,  ein  boppcltcS  5^crbrccl)cn,  a  double  crime. 

3.  The  Variafives  by  adding  erici  (§  211):  as,  einerlei,  of 
one  sort;  ^ttictertci,  of  two  sorts.  They  are  indedinable  ad- 
jectives: as,  brcierlci  9^ofen,  tlu-ee  kinds  of  roses. 

Note  the  phrase  e5  ift  mir  eincrlei,  it  is  the  same  to  me. 

161.  The  Distrthutives  are  formed  by  [t  and  the  correspond* 
ing  Cardinals  or  Ordinals;  as, 


90  NUMERALS.  [§  161- 

^ie  morfc^tertcn  }e  t)kv  UUb    They    marched    four    and 

Dter.  four. 

3c  ber  jet)nte  3J?ann  ficl.         Everj-  tenth  man  fell 

162.  From  the  Ordinals  are  formed: 

1,  The  Fractionals  "by  adding  tcl  (an  abridgment  of  'Ztxir 
part)  and  suppressing  the  final  t  of  the  Ordinal;  as,  eitt  t)icr* 
it\f  one  fourth,  eiu  glDansigftcI,  one  twentieth. 

But  instead  of  eiti  gtueitel,  we  use  cine  §  d  I  f  t  c  or  c  i  n  I)  a  ( b, 
which  is  declined  like  an  adjectiye;  as,  ctn  {)albeS  -3^^^/  half 
a  year. 

1.  Ordinal  adverbs  by  adding  cn8 :  as,  crftcn^,  firstly;  gtDei* 
ttn^f  secondly,  etc. 

163.  Numerical  expressions  such  as  three  and  a  half  may  be 
translated  either  hterally :  brci  unb  cin  ^alb,  or  by  adding  l)Qlb 
to  the  next  higher  ordijaal:  as,  Diert  1)  a  I  b,  the  idea  being:  of 
the  fourth  one  half,  and  three  whole  ones  understood.  With 
the  former  mode  of  expression  the  noun  stands  iu  the  sing- 
ular; with  the  latter,  which  is  indeclinable,  in  the  plural:  as, 
brci  unb  eine  l)albc  (Stunbe;  Dicrt^alb  igtunben. 

1.  One  and  a  half  is  rendered  anbert^alb  (not  gtt)eitl)Qlb). 

2,  Of  rare  occurrence  are  numerical  expressions  such  as  jelbanbcr, 
fctbbritt,  fclbJJiert,  etc  dv  fpeift  fclbbritt,  e.  g.,  means:  he  dines  with  two, 
he  himself  being  the  third. 

164.  The  time  of  day  by  the  clock  is  expressed  by  placing 
cardinal  numbers  before  the  substantive  Ul)r:  as, 

^3  i[t  brci  Ur)r.  It  is  three  o'clock. 

Often  the  preposition  um  is  used,  in  which  case  Uf)r  may 
be  dropped:  as,  c^  ift  um  brci. 

Note  also  the  following  expressions: 
(55  ii't  cin  Dicrtcl  auf  bier.         It  is  a  quarter  past  three. 
(55  i|t  Ijaib  t>icr.  It  is  half  past  three. 

(55  ift  brci  uicrtct  auf  t>icr.       It  is  a  quai-ter  to  fom-. 
5ct)n  5DJinutcn  n  a  d)  (or  iibcr)    Ten  imimt<?s  past  four. 

Dier. 
giinf  3}Zinutctt  O  o  r  t)icr.  Five  minutes  of  four. 


§  168]  VERBS  (continued).  91 

The  time  of  the  day  is  added  in  the  genitive;  as,  IttU  fitttf 
m)r(be^)9Jiorgen^  — (be^j^Uc^mittag^  — (be^)5lbenbg. 

165.  Dates  are  expressed  by  ordinal  numerals,  either  in 
tho  accusative  or  by  tlie  preposition  an  with  the  dative:  as, 
b  e  n  c  r  ft  e  n  SJ^at  or  a  m  e  r  ft  c  n  9}2ai^  on  the  first  of  May. 

The  question  what  day  of  the  month  is  it?  is  translated  bct 
ipieuiclte  ift  I)cute?  or  beu  toieoieUen  \)ahcn  tt)ir  ^eutcV 

PASSIVE  VOICE. 

For  its  conjugation  table,  see  §  54. 

166.  The  passive  voice  is  formed  by  the  auxiliary  Itter^ 
bcu  ;  the  past  participle  of  Uierben,  in  this  office,  is  tDorben. 
'Seiil  is  used  in  the  second  person  of  the  Imperative  only. 

167.  The  Future  Participle  denotes  possibility  as  well  as 
necessity: 

^ein  (^ternbilb  ift  3U  fe^ en.    No  constellation  is  to  be 
Sch.  seen. 

^eine  ^dt  ift  3 u  t) c r (i c r e n.    No  time  is  to  be  lost. 
1.  When  used  attributively  the  Future  Participle  takes  a  b 
before  the  endings:  as, 
®n  iVL  tabelnber  (Sc^ritt.         A  step  to  be  blamed. 
It  does  not  admit  of  the  forms  of  comparison  in  er  and  ft, 

168.  <Setn  as  well  as  ttjcrbcn  is  construed  with  the  past 
paiticiple  passive.  "WHien  the  German  wishes  to  represent  the 
actual  endurance  of  an  action,  it  uses  Incrbcn,  but  existence  in 
a  state  resulting  from  that  action  is  expressed  by  the  use  of 
fcin.  If,  e.  (/.,  the  enemies  are  beaten  means  the  enemies  are  re- 
ceiving a  defeat  (are  being  beaten),  it  must  be  translated  bic 
gctnbe  It)  erbcn  gefdjlarjcn.  If  on  the  contrary,  it  impUes:  the 
enemies  received  a  defeat,  and  are  now  beaten  foes  (condition 
resulting  from  the  defeat),  it  is  to  be  rendered  by  bte  JJcinbe 
ftnb  gefd)(agcn. 


92  VERBS  (continued).  [§  168^ 

If  an  expression  of  time  relative  to  the  action  in  question  is 
given,  the  distinction  between  tnerbcn  and  fcin  is  greatly  fac- 
ihtated  by  the  practical  rule:  Use  tr>crbcn,  if  the  endurance  of 
the  action  coincides  with  the  time  mentioned;  and  (ein,  if  it 
'precedes  it.  Thus,  the  sentence  in  spring  the  frontier  ivas  fort- 
ified, if  it  imphes  tliat  the  fortifying  of  the  frontier  took  place 
in  spiing,  must  be  rendered  by  im  grii^Iing  IPurb  e  bie  ©rcnje 
bcfeftigt;  and  by  im  grit^Iing  luar  bie  ©retire  bcfefttgt,  if  it 
impHes  that  by  spring  the  fortification  of  the  frontier  was  an 
accompHshed  fact 

169.  A  dative  or  genitive  depending  on  an  active  verb  can, 
in  the  con-esponding  passive  construction,  never  become  a 
nominative,  but  the  genitive  or  dative  is  retained,  and  the 
verb  becomes  impersonal;  thus,  the  phrase  id)  erlaube  3^^cn, 
I  aUow  you,  becomes  in  the  passive  voice:  eS  ift  Sl^nen  erlaubt 
(never  (gte  )inb  erlaubt),  you  ai-e  allowed. 

170.  Intransitive  verbs,  too,  are  used  in  the  passive  voice, 
but  only  imi)ersonally:  as,  e^  tourbc  XAd  gefUTigen,  there  was 
much  singing. 

171.  The  verb  I)ci6cn  means  both  to  call  and  to  he  called.  Ex.: 
X'lriftibc^  l)ie§  bcr  @crcct)te,  Aristides  was  caUed  the  Just 


REFLEXIVE  VERBS. 

172,  Reflexive  verbs  are  conjugated  like  ordinary  active 
verbs,  mth  the  addition  of  the  reflexive  pronoun,  which  is 
either  in  the  accusative  or  in  the  dative,  and  foUows,  in  the 
normal  order,  the  personal  verb,  but  precedes  the  infinitive 
and  participle. 


§  173]  REFLEXIVE   VERBS.  93 

PARADIGMS. 
Present  Indicative. 

id)  fc^e  mid),  I  seat  myself  ic^  fd)meid)te  mir,  I  flatter 

myself 

bu  fe^eft  b  i  dj  bu  f c^meic^etft  b  i  r 

er  f e^t  f  i  d)  er  f d)meic^ett  f  i  d) 

luirfe^cnun^  iDir  fd)meid)cInunS 

i()r  fc^t  e  u  c^  il)r  f djmeic^elt  e  u  d) 

(^ie  f c^eu  f  i  d))  (^ie  fd)metd)e(n  f  i  d)) 

fie  fe^en  fic^  fie  fd)meidjelu  fid) 

Perfect  Indicative. 

ic^  \)aht  mid)  gefel^t,  I  have    id)  l)abc  mir  ocfd)mcid)c(t,  I 
seated  myself  have  flattered  myself 

Future  Indicative. 

ic^  tuerbc  mid)  fe^en,  I  shall    id)  tvcrbe  mir  fd)meid)cln,  I 
seat  myself  shall  flatter  myself 

Imperative. 

fe^e  bic^,  seat  thyself  fc^meid)re  bir,  flatter  thyself 

fet^t  cnd)r         I      seat  fd)meid)e(t  cud),      )  flatter 

fct^en  @ie  fid), )  yourselves      )d)meid)e(n  (Sie  fid),  J  yourselves 

Infinitives. 

Pres.  fic^  (^u)  fc^en,  to  seat  fid)  (^u)  fd)meid)e(n,  to  flatter 

oneself  oneself 

Past,  fid)  gefet^t  (311)  f)aben,  to  fii^  gefd)meic^e(t  (^n)  ^ben, 

have  seated  oneself  to  have  flattered  oneself 

Participles. 

Pres.  fid)  fe^enb,  seating  one-     fic^    fd)meid)e(nb,   flattering 

self  oneself 

Past  gefe^t,  seated  gefd)meid)elt,  flattered 

1.  Interrogative  form:  fe^e  Id^  Tttid^.?  do  I  seat  myself?  — Ijahc  id)  mid) 
gefcljt  ?  have  I  seated  myself? 

2.  Negative  form:  id)  fc^c  tnid^  ntd)t,  I  do  not  seat  myself;  id)  \)aht 
ini(^  ni(!^t  gefe^t,  I  have  not  seated  myself. 

173.  The  following  alphabetical  Hst  contains  the  most 
common  of  those  verbs  which  are  used  in  the  reflexive  form 
exclusively: 


94 


VKU13S    (flON'riNUED). 


[§  173- 


r4bcncl,nicn,,^^^^g 


fjc^  anfdjidfcn,  j^repare 

fic^  bcbanfen,  thaiik 

iid)  bccifcm,  exert  oneself 

bccilcn,  hasten 

bcfinben,  be 

licgcbcn,  betake  oneself 
[tc^  bcgniicjeti,  content  oneself 
fic^  bci)clfcn,  make  shift 
fic^  bctitmmeni  (urn),  concern 

oneself 
firf)  bctaufcn  (auf),  amount  to 
fid)  bcmdci)tigen  (with  the  gen.), 

possess  oneself 

fic^  bctragen,   ) 

fid)  bcfinncn,  reflect 

fid)  bcftreben,  endeavor 

fic^  bcraerbcn  (um),  apply  for 

fid)  biicfen,  stoop 

fid)  einlaffcn  {in  or  auf),  enter 

into,  ujDon 
fid^  ent^altcn,  abstain 
fic^  entfd)Uct!en,  resolve 
fic^  entfinncn,  recollect 
fic^  erbannen,  have  mercy  on 
fid)  erbrciften,  dare 

While  in  the  verbs  enumerated  above  the  reflexive  fic^  is  in 
the  accusativey  in  the  following  it  is  in  the  dative  : 

ftf^  anmaBcn,  presume  fid)  bic  55rcil)eit  ncf)mctt,  take  the 

fic^  au^bittcn,  ask  for  hbei-ty 

fic^  anetgncn,  aj^propriate  to  fid)  getraucti,  venture 
fic^  bcnfen,  fancy  [oneself  fid)  93?iil)e  c^zhtxi,  take  pains 

ftf^  einbilben,  imagioe,  fancy     fid)  fd)mei(^eln,  flatter  oneself 
fid)  l)erau!gne^men,  dare,  i^res-  fic^  Dornc{)iucn,  propose  to  one- 
ume  fid)  Dorftcllcn,  imagine.        [self 

174.  Any  active  verb  may  assume  the  reflexive  form  and 
meaning;  as,  ficiben,  to  dress:   fid)  tlcibcn,  to  dress  oneself. 


fid)  crcifcrn,  get  into  a  passion 

fic^  ereigneu,  happen 

fid)  erfreuett  (gen.),  enjoy 

fic^  crgebcn,  surrender 

fid)  crpolen  (Don),  recover  from 

fid)  crtdften,  catch  cold 

fic^  crfiil)ttcn,  dai-e 

M  crfunbigcn,  inquire 

M  freuen,  rejoice 

fid)  [^rdmcit,  grieve 
fic^  irren,  be  mistaken 
fid)  fiimmcni  (urn),  see  to 
fid)  fd)dmen,  be  ashamed 
fid)  fd)Idngcln,  -vNdnd,  meander 
fid)  fel)nen  (nad)),  long  for 
fid)  fputen,  make  haste 
fic^  umfef)cn,  look  about 
fid)  Dcrirren,   \„^^^^^^ 
fid)  t)erlaufen,  [  "''  ^^^^ 
fid)  Dertieben,  fall  in  love 
fic^  Demetgen,  bow 
fic^  uerfUnbigen,  sin 
fid)  tniberfet^en,  oppose 

fid)  Dcmunbcm,  [  ^    "*=^ 


§  177]  IMPERSONAL   VERBS.  95 

Many,  however,  take  tlie  reflexive  form  without  a  strictly 
reflexive  meaning;  as,  fiird^tcn,  to  fear:  fid)  fitrrfjten  to  be 
afraid;  argcru,  to  vex:  fid^  cirgern,  to  be  vexed 

1.  Often,  too,  the  reflexive  form  has  a  passive  sense;  as,  bcr 
9?ittg  l)at  \i6)  gefunben,  the  ring  has  been  found. 

175.  "With  some  intransitive  verbs  the  use  df  the  reflexive 
pronoun  is  optional:  as,  au^ru'^en  and  fid)  au^rul)en,  to  rest; 
irren  and  fid)  trren,  to  err;  tial)ett  and  fid^  nal)eti,  to  approach. 

176.  Observe  the  reflexive  use  of  some  intransitive  verbs  in 
such  phrases  as:  er  arbeitet  fic^  ^U  2^obe,  he  is  working  himself 
to  death,  —  ($r  tt)irb  fic^  blitlb  (efen,  he  will  read  himself  blind. 

IMPERSONAL  VERBS. 

177.  Impersonal  are: 

1.  All  verbs  denoting  natural  phenomena:  as,  e3  rcgnct,  it" 
rains;  e§  bottttert,  it  thunders. 

2.  A  group  of  verbs  denoting  physical  or  moral  sensations, 
the  person  affected  being  either  in  the  dative  or  accusative. 
The  only  Enghsh  analogue  is  methinks.  The  most  common 
verbs  used  in  the  impersonal  form  exclusively  are  the  follow- 
ing:— 

e§  a^nt  mir,  I  forebode  e§  grant  mir,  I  have  a  horror 

e§  bangt  tntr,  I  am  anxious         of 

e^  bdud^t  mid)  (or  mir),  me-  e§  l)Uttgcrt  mic^,  I  am  hungry 

thinks  e^  f^aubert  mir  (or  mic^),  I 
e§  bitttft  mic^  (or  mir),  me-         shudder 

thinks  e^    fc^lafert    mtc§,    I   feel 
C§  burftet  mid),  I  am  thirsty         sleepy 

e^  efclt  mir  (or  mid)),  I  am  e^   fc^tDinbelt   mir,   I   feel 

disgusted  (at)  giddy 

C§  fricrt  mid),  I  am  cold  e6  fc^tDi^t  mt^,  I  perspire 

e§  fri)ftc(t  mic^,  I  feel  cliiUy  c^  trdumte  mir,  I  dreamt 

e^  gelitftet  (or  litftet)  mid),  I  e^  Dcrlangt  mid),  I  desire 

desire 

3.  A  number  of  phrases  made  up  of  fetnorlDerbett  with 
a  predicative  complement,  and  a  dative  of  the  person,  as: 


96  VERBS  (contintjed).  l§  177- 

C§  ift  mtr  hJOljO  I  am  well         c§  tDirb  mir  ]^ci§,  I  am  get- 
ting liot  [earnest. 
c^  ift  mir  iibe(,  I  feel  sick        e§  ift  mir  emft,  I  am  in 

Note  also  the  phrase  e§  ifl  mir,  oI§  ob,  I  feel  as  if. 

4  The  Yerbs  feljlen,  gebre(f)cn,  mangetn,  to  want;  bc^ 

bUrfcn,  brauc})en,  to  need,  which  are  construed  as  follows: 

a^  fc^tt  (gcbric^t,  mange(t)  un^  nidjt  an  tapfcren  (Solbatcn,  we 

do  not  lack  bravo  Boldiers;  e^  bebarf  feinc^  ^eiPeife^,  no  j)roof 

is  needed. 

I^c!)tcn  and  mangetn  may  also  be  nsed  personally:  as,  tapfcrc  ©olbatcn 
<cl)len  uu3  iiic^t. 

5.  The  verb  eS  (jicbt,  there  is,  there  are  (see  §  179). 

Notes, 

a.  The  following  verbs  can  be  used  only  in  the  third  person, 
but  in  the  plural  as  well  as  the  singular:  cj  e  H  it  g  e  It,  g  I  ii  (f  e  n, 
succeed;  miglingen,  miBgliiden,  succeed  ill;  gcfd)el)cn, 
happen.  Thus,  c^  QcUtigt  mir  Tiid)t,  i^tt  gu  itberjeugen,  I  do  not 
succeed  in  convrQcing  him.  —  5UIe  feiue  (5?:penmente  gclingeti 
i^m,  he  succeeds  in  all  his  experiments. 

b.  Almost  any  verb  admits  of  the  impersonal  use:  as,  ba 
^fcift  e^  unb  gcigt  e^  (Goe.),  there  is  fifing  and  fiddhng. 

Note  especially:  e^3  fcf)(dgt,  it  strikes  (said  of  the  clock),  and 
C§  tlopft,  tliere  is  a  knocking. 

Quit-e  idiomatic  are  e^  gilt  and  c§  i'd^t:  —  ©^  gitt  mcittc 
(5^rc,  my  honor  is  at  staka  —  (S^  Idjt  il^m  iibcl,  it  iU  becomes 

him, 

178.  The  impersonal  use  of  verbs  in  a  passive  or  reflexive 
form  is  common:  as, 

a^  tDltrbe   gctan^t   unb    ge*    There  was  singing  and  danc- 

fungcn.  ing. 

^^  rui)t  fid)  l^ier  angenel^m.      It  is  pleasant  resting  here. 

179.  Conjugation  of  c8  gicBt,  there  is. 
Present:  e5  gtebt,  there  is,  there  are. 
Imperfect:  e§  gab,  there  was,  there  were. 
Perfect:  e^  f}at  gcgcbeit,  there  has  (have)  been. 
Pluperfect:  e^  Ijatte  gegebett,  there  had  been. 


§  181]  IMPERSONAL   VERBS.  97 

Future:  e^  ttJtrb  gcbett,  there  will  be. 
Conciitional:  e^  iDUrbe  geben,  there  would  be. 
Examples : — ■ 

(S^  g  i  e  b  t  feiucn  3l^f ^^'f*  ^^^^     There  is  no  such  thing  as 

chance. 
(5^  ift  \Da()rfrf)CtnItc^,  ba6  e§     It  is   probable  that   there 
etnmat   S'^icfen    QC^chtn         have  been  giants  at  one 
^  a  t,  time. 

1.  When  there  *>,  instead  of  having  the  pregnant  meaning 
of  there  exists,  is  equivalent  to  the  copula  is,  it  is  more  fre- 
quently translated  by  e^  ift,  and  there  are  by  e3  finb:  as, 
(5^  ift  eitt  ^OIDC  int  ^dfic^.         There  is  a  lion  in  the  cage, 
^^  finb  brei  ®er  im  ';)iefte.     There  are  three  egga  in  the 

nest 

paltn  and  6c:n, 

USED  AS  AUXILIAEIES  07  TENSE. 

180.  All  transitive,  reflexive,  and  impersonal  verbs  a^  well 
as  all  modal  auxiliaries  are  conjugated  with  l^aben:  as,  irf) 
f)abc  eineu  ^autu  gepflan^t,  I  have  planted  a  tree.  (Et  I) at 
fii"^  C^c'it^tf  he  has  seated  himself.  (S^  ^at  geregnet,  it  has 
rained.     Qd)  t)  ab C  nid)t  geburft,  I  have  not  been  allowed. 

181.  Intransitive  vorbg  are  conjugated  some  with  Tjabetj, 
and  some  with  fciu.  —  Qdxi  is  required: 

1.  "With  those  denoting  transition  from  one  condition  into 
another:  as, 

^r  t  ft  gcftorbett.  He  has  died. 

(Sie  i  ft  geucfeu.  She  has  recovered. 

2,  With  tho33  denoting  nrntion,  particularly  when  the  poini 
of  departure  or  arrival  is  either  actually  expressed  or  under- 
Btood:  as, 

dv    {ft   Don   Berlin   it)egge=«  He  has  moved  away  from 

30  gen.  Berlin. 

<Sic  linb  nad)  T)re§ben  gc*  They  have  traveled  to  Dres- 

reift.                      [men?  den. 

SBami  finb   (Sle   angetom*  When  did  you  arrive? 


98  ADVERBS.  [§  18U 

a.  When  the  j>oint  of  departure  or  arrival  is  not  held  in 
view,  many  verbs  denoting  motion  may  be  used  with  I)aben: 
as, 

(Sie  I)  a  ben  Diet  gereift.  They  have  traveled  a 

great  deal 

(5Ht)enr  to  walk,  however,  requires  fcia  under  all  circum- 
stances. 

a  With  the  following: 

cjliirfen,  succeed  GelinGcn,    )  g^^j^^d 

iueicl)cn,  yield  cjerateii,      ) 

bcgegnen,  meet  Qef^ef)ett,      happen 

bleiben,  stay  mtplingen, )  ^^^ 

fofgen,  follow  -  miBratcn,  [  ^^     ^ 

9ebcit)en,  prosper  fein,  be 

a.  ^  0 1  g  C  U  "vrben  meaning  io  obey  requires  ^abcit. 

182.  The  same  verb  may,  according  to  its  meaning,  ba  con- 
jugated with  either  I)  a  ben  or  fein:  thus, 

3^)  b in  fortijcfaf)ren.  I  have  driven  off. 

3ci)  I)  a  h  e  fortgefa^ren.  I  have  continued. 

$)a^^  Rafter  ift  gcfrorcn.  The  water  is  frozen. 

Gr  (j  a  t  gcfroren.  He  has  been  cold 

ADVERBS. 

183.  Besides  the  primitive  adverbs,  the  enumeration  of 
which  belongs  to  the  dictionary,  there  are 

1.  Adverbs  which  originally  are  genitive  cases  of  substan- 
tives, adjectives,  or  participles:  as,  niorgen^,  in  the  morning; 
obenb^,  in  the  evening;  flug^,  quickly;  teil^,  paiily;  anfang^, 
in  the  beginning;  rec^t^,  on  the  right;  lint^,  on  the  left;  bereit^, 
already;  ftet*:3,  constantly;  eilenb^,  hastily;  gnfc^enb^,  visibly,  etc. 

a.  The  genitive  ending  8  ia  also  found  with  a  te^^  feminine  nouns:  as, 
nac^t?,  by  night;  eincrfeit^,  on  the  one  hand;  anberfcitS,  on  the  other 
hand. 

b.  The  ending  8  combined  with  en  to  enS  makes  adverbs  from  all 
ordinal  numerals  and  many  superlatives:  as,  crjicnS,  firstly;  I^jd)ftcn8, 
ftt  the  most;  nacljjlcn?,  shortly;  rjcnigftcnS,  at  the  least.  —  SSoUenbS,  com- 
pletely, is  a  corruption  of  tooQenS. 


§  184]  ADVERBS.  99 

2.  Adverbs  derived  from  substantives,  adjectives,  or  pai-ti- 
ciples,  by  means  of  the  suffixes  lid)  and  ling^  :  as,  •mitnbltc^, 
orally;  bitterOc^,  bitterly;  freilid),  indeed;  gcin^Iic^,  entirely; 
l)Od)li(^,  bighly;  ti'tr^lid),  recently;  neulid),  newly;  fdjlDCrlid), 
hardly;  flc^entlid),  euppliantly;  (jefriffentltd),  deliberately;  yM^ 
lincjd,  backward;  btinblitltj^,  blindly. 

The  suffix  ^Ddrt^,  too,  forms  a  fer/  adverbs:  as,  f)immc(^ 
jDdrt^,  heavenward;  aufiudrt^,  upward;  DortnartS,  forward. 

3.  Adverbs  formed  by  composition:  as,  t)orbct,  past;  I)aufen^ 
iwifc,  by  heaps;  rci^enmcife,  in  rows;  especially  all  those  com- 
pounded with  (){n,  l)cr,  ba  (bar),  and  luo  (mor):  as,  ^inauf, 
|erau^,  bamit,  barnad),  iDouon,  iDoriiber. 

4  Adverbs  formed  by  the  fusion  of  adverbial  phrases:  as, 
Ubermorgen,  after  to-morrow;  untermcg^,  on  the  way;  3uerft, 
at  first;  especially  by  the  fusion  of  a  substantive  in  the  geni- 
tive with  a  limiting  word  preceding  it:  as,  cjIitctlic^ertDetfc, 
luckily;  fcine^rae^^,  by  no  means;  jebenfall^,  at  all  events;  aller^ 
bing^,  certainly;  groSenteil^,  for  a  great  part;  niittlevweile,  in 
the  meantime;  eitllgerma^en,  m  some  measure,  etc. 

184.  Almost  any  adjective  can,  in  its  uninflectcd  form,  be 
used  as  an  adverb,  without  changing  its  form:  as,  Xok  f  c^on 
Icuc^tet  ber  SKorgenftertt!  Ho\y  beautifully  the  morning-star 
shines! 

Nor  does  the  comparative  of  adjectives  change  when  used 
adverbially:  as,  fic  fiurjcu  fcf) Otter  ai^  fic  fpiclcu,  they  sing 
more  beautifully  than  they  jolay. 

But  the  superlative  of  the  adverb  is  different,  being  formed 
with  the  preposition  au  (rarely  i:t  or  311)  and  the  definite  article 
contracted  to  atu  (ittl  or  3  utn) :  as, 

^te  malt  am  fd)Ottjlcu  t»Ott     She  paints  the  most  beauti- 
allett.  fully  of  all. 

1.  To  translate  most  beautifully  {absolute  superlative),  in- 
stead of  the  most  heautifully  {relative  superlative),  auf  ^3  i.>  Bub- 
stituted  for  am :  as, 

(Sie  Keibcn  fid)  tiXi\^  fdjonjlc.     They  dress  most  beautifuKy. 


100  AD^'ERBS.  [§  184-, 

a.  The  number  of  superlatives  used  as^adverbs  in  tbeir  simple  form 
in  fl  is  limited.  Tbe  following  are  tlie  most  common:  l^od)ft,  langft, 
jiinsfl,  eiligfl,  batbigfi,  gefalligj^,  ^ofItc^l%  ergebenfl,  freunblid^ft,  gel^or* 
jantft,  mbgli^ll,  Kicijl.    Ex.-. 

3c^  erfu^e  @ic  1^  6  f  It  d^  fl.  I  request  you  most  politely. 

185.  Some  adverbs  form  their  degrees  of  comparison  from 
other  stems. 

Positive.  Comparative.  Superlative. 

ba(b,  soon  el^cr  (balber)  am  c()cften  (am  balbeften) 

gem,  ^viILingly  liebcr  nm  Ilebften 

iibel,  badly  arger  am  cirgften 

hJoI)(,  well  beffer  am  bejten 

186.  Some  adverbs  of  place  have  corresponding  adverbial 
superlatives  in  ft: 

augen,  without:  Sup.  augerft  t)orn,  in  front:  Sup.  Dorbcrft 

innen,  within:  Sup.  innerft  l)mten,  behind:  Sup.  ^interft 

oben,  above:  Sup.  oberft  mitten,  in  the  midst:  Sup. 

untcn,  below:  Hup.  uuterft  mittelft 

Examples: 
^cr  ^cc^cr  h)ar  inn  en  Ucr^    The  cup  was  gilded  inside. 

golbet. 
3u  innerft  bc^  §eilicjtnm$.     In  tho   innermost    of    the 

sanctuary. 

187.  §irt  and  ^cr.  Phrases  like  go  out,  come  out,  cannot 
be  rendered  by  gcl)e  au6,  tomme  au^  simply,  but  only  by  Qcl)e 
I)inan3,  bmme  l^crau^,  ^:n  denoting  motion  away  from,  and 
^er,  motion  towards,  the  speaker. 

Other  adverbial  compounds  of  this  kind  are  l^inan,  l^eran ; 
^inauf,  ^crauf ;  Ijincin,  l^erein;  l)inubcr,  ^eriibcr. 

Examples :  ®e^i'  \)  t  nein ;  !omm  f)  e  rein.  ®c^'  ^  i  nanf,  !omm 
\j  e  ranf .    (^cl)'  ^  i  nilbcr,  !omm  I)  e  riiber. 

1.  As  the  examples  show,  \)\xi  and  I)er  occupy  the^ry^  place 
in  the  compound.  When  compounded  with  rj  o  and  b  a,  how- 
ever, they  stand  second;  thus,  IDoljCr  fommft  bn,  }XxCii  WO^in 
9et)ft  W^  —  @cl)ft  bii  and)  ba^ in? 


§  190]  PREPOSITIONS.  lOl 

^cr  and  Ijin  may  be  separated  from  lt»0  and  ha:  as,  VDO 
ge^ft  bu  t)tn?  SBo  !ommft  bu  l)er?  >Dacjef)ter  ^in.  T)a 
fommt  er  Ij  c  r. 

188.  Demonstrative  adverbs,  made  up  of  bil  or  I)lcr  and  a 
preposition,  are  very  extensively  used  in  correlation  with  the 
conjunctions  baf3  and  it)ci(,  or  an  infinitive  vvdth  31::  as, 

Qd)    red)ne    barauf,     bag  I  reckon  on  your  coming. 

(Sie  fommen. 

Reiner  ftrebte  barna^,  ben  No  one  strove  to  gain  the 

^rei6  3U  cjeiDinnen.  prize. 

PREPOSITIONS. 

(Repetition  and  completion  of  §  40.) 

189.  Prepositions  with  the  accusative: 

^^^'  *^^  9^9^^'  I  ao-ainst 

burd),  through  iDiber,  j  ^^amst 

fiir,  for  Ittn,  about,  around. 

o^ue,  without 

Add  to  these  gen,  toward,  and  fonber,  without,  which,  however,  occur 
in  but  a  few  phrases:  as,  gen  §imnicl,  toward  heaven;  fonber  ©Icid^en, 
without  equal. 

1.  ^t§  more  frequently  stands  adverbially  before  a  pre- 
position: as,  bi^  nad)  ^ari^,  as  far  as  Paris;  bl^  gur  ^irc^e,  as 
far  as  the  church;  bi6  au  bie  ©reuge,  as  far  as  the  frontier. 

2.  In  phrases  like  voxv  c^dcn  bcti  ^crg  l^ittaitf,  ^tnauf  is  not 
to  be  mistaken  for  a  preposition,  but  is  an  adverb  following 
an  absolute  accusative.  Similar  phrases  are:  ben  gtug  l)inab, 
down  the  river;  b^n  ^alb  l)tnbnr(^,  through  the  forest. 

3.  The  expression  ^^cifct^  O^nc,  without  doubt,  is  the  only 
remnant  of  an  old  construction  of  o^nc  with  the  genitive. 

190.  Prepositions  with  the  dative : 

au§,  out  of  cjegcniibeiv  opposite 

au^cr,  except,  besides  H^^^B'  according  to 

bet,  near,  with  mit,  with 

cntgegen,  against  nad),  after,  to 


102  •  MiEPosmoNS.  [§  190- 

r[ad)it,     \        ,  th,  over,  on  account  of  (ob- 
3Utldci)ft,  j  solete  in  prose) 

neb  ft,       1  feit,  since  (time) 

famt,  along  t)Ott,  from,  of 

mitfamt,  "  (together)  with  ^U,  to 

gufamt,    J  Sufolgc,  according  io 

3Uli)it)cr,  contrai-y  to 

Add  to  these  banf,  owing  to,  thanks  to;  as,  ban!  feincn  ^e* 
nxiiI)UnQCn,  owing  to  his  efforts. 

1.  (intQcgcn,  gcgcniibcr,  ^nfolgc,  jnrjibcr,  and  usually 
also  gem  ft  6  and  jnnftdjft^/o/foM;  their  noun:  as,  bcm  J^'cinbe 
entgcgen,  against  the  enemy;  ber  ^irdje  gcgeniibcr,  opposite  the 
chui'ch;  bcm  ^cfet)Ie  gnfolge,  according  to  tlie  order;  bent  @e* 
fc^C  jnunbcr,  contraiy  to  the  law;  bcr  ^orfd^rift  QCrna^,  accord- 
ing to  the  prescription;  bcm  ^bnig  gnnadjft,  next  to  the  king. 

2.  9^  ad),  esjDeciaUy  in  the  meaning  of  *  according  to/  either 
precedes  or  follows  the  noijn;  as,  nad)  meiner  iD^einnng  or  met* 
ncr  3JZcinung  nac^,  according  to  my  oi^inion. 

3.  5(n]ler  occurs  with  the  genitive  in  the  phrase  on§cr  ?an* 
bc^5  fcin,  to  be  out  of  the  countiw,  abroad;  and  with  the  accus- 
ative in  phi-ases  hke  etira^  au^cr  alien  3^^^^f^^  fe^en,  to  put 
something  beyond  all  doubt 

4:.  Wit  is  also  used  as  an  adverb :  as,  ic^  Wax  mit  babei, 
I  was  one  of  the  party. 

191.  Prepositions  with  the  dative  or  accusative: 

an,  at  iiber,  c/ver,  above,  across 

auf,  upon  nnter,  under,  among 

jointer,  behind  Dor,  before 

in,  in  3lpifd)en,  between, 
neben,  beside 

"With  the  dative  they  answer  the  question  where  f  with  the 
accusative,  the  question  whither?    Examples : 

^c^  fpa3tere  in  bem  (Garten.    I  am  walking  in  the  garden. 

3d)  OCl)e  in  ben  (Marten.  I  am  going  into  the  garden. 

1.  When  these  prepositions  denote  other  relations  than  those  of  pZace, 
then  aitf  and  iibcr  govern  the  accusative;  all  the  others,  the  dative.  Ex- 
amples:— 


§  191]  PREPOSITIONS.  103 

%n.  —  %m  erflcn  9Kal  fd^neite  e«.        On  the  first  of  May  it  snowed. 

3c^  I)al)e  einen  greunb  an  i^m.         I  have  a  friend  in  him. 
^d}  jtueifte  am  Svfolgc,  I  doubt  of  the  success. 

a.  Only  a  few  verbs,  like  benfen,  to  think;  gtaubctt,  to  believe;  erinttem, 
to  remind,  require  the  accusative  after  an  because  the  idea  of  turning  the 
thought  towards  predominates. 

b.  Also  with  the  meaning  of  ahowt,  up  to,  before  numerals,  an  has  the 
accusative;  as,  fviv  ja^en  an  bie  l^unbert  §irf(^c,  we  saw  about  a  hundred 
stags. 

3lt.  —  3n  einer  ©tunbe  bin  id^  ^^u-  I  shall  be  back  in  an  hour, 
riidf. 

Sr  jprid^t  t)iel  in  ©leid^niffen.  He  speaks  a  great  deal  in  par- 
ables. 

Uttter.  —  Untcr  jolt^en  ®efprarf)en  In  the  midst  of  such  conver- 
irurbe  C3  9^ad^t.  sation  night  came  on. 

®ic  bat  un8  unter  ^clgen  Xlfvii^  She   besought    us   with  warm 
ncn,  tears. 

SBor.  —  35or  einer  ®tunbc.  An  hour  ago. 

3lu3  ijVixC)t  Uor  bcr  ©trafe.  For  fear  of  the  penalty. 

3lttf.  —  ^Sorrje  c§  mir  anf  einen  Xag.  Lend  it  to  me  for  a  day. 

^ore  nidjt  auf  il)n.  Do  not  listen  to  him. 

Sartc  anf  mid^.  Wait  for  me. 

3tcgimentcr  auf  9(legimenter.  Kegiments  after  regiments. 

Ucftct.  —  (Sr  blicb  iibcr  cin  3a^r.  He  remained  over  a  year. 

Sic  mad) ten  ^liine  iibcr  ^Idne.  We  made  plans  upon  plans. 
Note. — The  dative  is  used  only  when  ubcr  means  during : — 

Sr  jc^Uef  iibcr  bcr  ^rcbigt  ein.  He  fell  asleep  during  the  sermon. 

2.  When  used  together  with  b  i  §  every  one  of  these  nine  prepositions, 
no  matter  what  relation  it  denotes,  requires  the  accusative  : 

©r  ^anbbiS  anS^inninSSaffer.     He  stood  in  water  up  to  the 

chin. 
®ic  ging  bi§  iuS  scl)nte  3al)r  in      She  went  to  school  until  her 
bie  ©c^ule.       "  .  tenth  year. 

The  only  exception  i^  b  i  ^  t>  o  r,  which  when  denoting  time  has  the 
dative:^ 

Sis  t)or  brei  Xagen  Wax  er  iool)i.     He  was  well  until  three  days 

ago. 


104 


PREPOSITIONS. 


[§  192- 


192.  Prepositions  with  the  genitive: 


abfett^,  off  from 
anftatt  or  ftatt,  instead  of 
aufeerl)a(b,  outside 
inner^alb,  within  (time  and 

place) 
ober^a(b,  above 
unterl}alb,  below 
bet)Uf'?,  in  behalf  of 
binncn,  within  (time) 
biefleit(^),  on  this  side 
jenieit(^),  on  the  other  side 

g-;}fortbesaieof 

infolge,  in  consequence  of 
inmittcn,  in  the  midst  of 


fraft,  in  -sirtue  of 

^^^?^'     I  along 

laut,  according  to 
feiten^,  on  the  part  of 
tro^,  in  spite  of 
urn  —  iuillen,  for  the  sake  of 
unfcrn,  unnjcit,  not  far  from 

t)cnnitte('3  or  mtttc(§, )       ^  „ 
uenuittelft  or  mittclft  C  "^^^ 

Uermogc,  by  dint  of 
tDa^retlb,  during 
iDegen,  on  account  of 
3Ufo(ge,  according  to. 


To  these  mar  be  added  the  following  prepositional  expres- 
edons: — 


angeficbts.     )   in  the 

in  ^Ingcftdjt,  |  sight  of 

anldB(id),     j      in  con- 

aud  "iJlnlag,  j  sequence  of 

in  ^ctradit,     ) 

in  5(nbetrad)t,  j 

in  ^etreff, 

in  ^Inbetrcff, 

betreff^, 

onbetreffs, 

besiiglid), 


considering 


concemmfx 


in  ©cgentpart,  in  the  pres- 
ence of 

in  ^inftdjt, 

^inudjt^, 

^in[id)t(i(f),     1-  in  re.crard  to 

in  9?iicf  fi^t, 

riiiffic^tlid) 

Ungeadltet,  notwithstanding 

itnbefd^abct,  without  preju- 
dice. 


1.  5lnftatt  may  take  the  noun  between  its  components:  as, 
an  bc^  33ater^  ftatt,  or  with  suppressed  article,  an  ^ater^  ftatU 

2.  ^  i  n  n  e  n,  t  r  0  ^,  and  g  u  f  o  I  g  e  also  occur  with  the  dative. 
3ufolge  follows  a  dative,  but  precedes  a  genitive:  as,  bem 
4Befel)lc  jufolgc,  gufotge  be^  48cfeI)I^,  according  to  the  order. 

3.  (^ntlang  and  langS  also  occur  with  both  the  dative 
and  accusative.  Gntlang  may  either  precede  or  follow  its 
noun. 


§  193]  pREPOsrrioNS.  105 

4.  §  a  I  b  C  n,  and  its  more  common  form  I)  a  I  b  c  r,  follow  their 
noun;  as,  be^  gricbett^  I)alber,  for  the  sake  of  peace. 

a.  Observe  the  compounds  meinetl^alben,  bcinetf)al'6en,  fcmctf)atBeu, 
i'^rct'^alben,  uufertlialbcn,  curet^tben,  i^rct^atben,  for  my  sake,  for  tliy 
sake,  etc. 

§  a  I  b  e  n  being  by  origin  the  dative  plural  of  Old  High-German  lialba, 
side,  part,  the  pronoun  connected  with  it  may  either  be  considered  as 
the  dative  of  the  possessive,  or  as  the  genitive  of  the  personal  pronoun. 
The  t  in  either  case  is  an  inserted  letter. 

5.  Um —  tDiHen  takes  the  noun  between  its  two  parts: 
as,  um  be§  greunbe^  \mikn,  for  the  friend's  sake.  It  forms 
similar  compounds  as  ()alben;  thus,  utu  meinetipillen,  for  my 
sake;  um  un[ertU)tUen,  for  our  sake. 

6.  3S e fj C n  and  ungeac^tct  either  precede  or  follow  their 
noun:  as,  inegcu  bci*  ^cilte,  ber  ^alte  iretjen, 

a.  335  e  f|  C tt  forms  similar  compounds  as  I)atbcn ;  thus,  mciuct* 
tDegen,  on  my  account;  unferttr>egen,  on  our  account 

b.  SSeg  en,  being  the  dative  plural  of  SScg,  was  formerly  connected 
with  the  preposition  t)on.  Phrases  like  Don  9ted^t3  luegen,  toon  ?lmt8 
luegen  are  remnants  of  it. 

193.  Some  prepositions  are  strengthened  by  adverbs,  usually 
following  the  noun,  to  depict,  as  it  were,  the  action  expressed 
by  the  verb,  and  to  define  more  closely  the  relation  denoted 
by  the  preposition.  Examples:  T)tX  J)afe  f prang  Uber  betl 
3aun  meg,  the  hare  leaped  over  the  fence.  —  !4)er  ^a^ll  (jlitt 
lib er  ben  @ee  I)  in,  the  boat  ghded  along  over  the  lake.  —  (5in 
Ungetritter  fommt  t)  om  ©ebirge  I)  cr,  a  thunderstorm  is  coming 
over  from  the  mountains.  —  ^urd)  bie  geinbe  I)inburc^, 
through  the  enemies. 

1.  While  the  adverbs  meg,  !^in,  I)er,  ^tnburd)  in  the  foregoing 
examples  might  be  left  out  without  injury  to  the  sense,  there 
are  others  which  serve  as  indispensable  complements  to  the 
preposition;  they,  too,  follow  the  noun: — 

^er  §unb  !roc^  unter  bem  The  dog  crawled  out  from 

^ett  I)  e  r  tJ  0  r.  under  the  bed. 

^on  3ugenb   auf  tnar  cr  He  was  addicted  to  drink 

bem  XxviXii  crgeben.  from  his  youth  up. 

3c^  [a^  3Um  genfter  l)in==  I  looked  out  of  the  window, 
au^. 


106 


CONJUNCTIONS. 


[§193^ 


^r  fant  ^ur  Xpre  herein.    He  came  in  by  the  door. 
(Sie  famen  auf  un^  ^U.  They  came  towards  us. 

SD^itten,  too,  is  similarly  used,  but  precedes  the  preposition, 
as,  mitten  im  ^albe,  in  the  midst  of  the  forest 


CONJUNCTIONS. 

194.  Conjunctions  are  either  subordinative  or  coordinative, 
according  as  they  introduce  subordinate  or  coordinate  clauses. 
All  subordinative  conjunctions  require  the  transposed  order; 
most  coordinative  ones,  the  invei-ted  order: — 

al'S  i^   il^tt    He  was  sick  when  I  saw 
him  last. 
The  enemies  were  our  sup- 


(5r  tvav  fran!, 

S)ie  gcinbe  nmren  un§  an 
3at)l  iiberlcgcn;  and)  f^nU 
len  ftc  eine  beffere  ^ttU 
Inng. 

195. 


enors  m  number ;  be- 
sides, they  had  a  better 
position. 


Alphabetical  list  of  the  subordinative  conjunctions: 

ol'?,  when 

ot§  ob,      ] 

aU  rocm, ) 

auf  baB,  in  order  that 


as  if 


je  —  befto,  ) 
je  —  untfo,  >- 
}e  —  ie,      ) 


beoor,  before 

t)a,  as,  since,  when 
bamit,  in  order  that 
bamit  nic^t,  lest 
bafe,  that,  in  order  that 
ba|  nid)t  lest 
C^e,  before 
fall'?,  in  case 
cjleic^wic,  just  as 
tnbem,  while,  as 
inbefjen, ) 


although 


inbe^, 
infofei 
infowcit  (a(cj) 


while 


m(ofem(al§),Ji^^f^^ 


the— the 
(see  §  201) 

le  nad^bem,  according  as 
nacl)bem,  after,  according  as 
nun,  now  that 
thf  if,  whether 
cbgieid),  ob)d)on,  ) 
obiuo^l,  tcicmol)(, ) 
o^ne  bag,  without 

!eitbeni(ba§),}^^^(*^^) 
f 0  —  and),  however 
fobalb  (a(i^),  as  soon  as 

0  ha^f  so  tliat 

ofern,  if 

0  tange  (al^),  as  long  as 

0  oft  (al^),  as  often  as 

oroeit,  so  far  as 

olvie,  as  soon  as 


§  190] 


CONJUNCTIONS. 


107 


ftatt  (or  anftatt)  ha%  instead 
of 

urn  —  ^U,  in  order  to 

ungeac^tct  (bag),  notwith- 
standing 

t)orau«gefe^t  (bag),  suppos- 
ing that 

n)d{)renb  (bag),  while 

IDetl,  because  (rarely,  while) 

menu,  if,  when 

xocnn  aud),  although 

1.  The  dash  in  fo  —  aurf),  tnie 


irienn  fd)on,  [    ^-^^"S" 
tuenn  aud)  nod)  fo,  though 

ever  so 
tnenit  ntd)t,  unless 
trenn  nur,  provided  that 
Wte,  how,  as 
lute  —  auc^,  however 
tDte  ttjenn,  as  if 
iDOfern,  if,  in  case 
m\cxn  nid)t,  unless. 

auc^,  um  —  p  means  that 


the  particles  forming  these  conjunctions  are  separated  by 
other  parts  of  speech.  Thus,  lute  gele^rt  er  aud)  fein  mag, 
however  learned  he  may  be.  Um  eiueu  gutetl  ®runb  JU  ^aben, 
in  order  to  have  a  good  reason. 

Also  the  following  may  be  separated:  tucnn  an6),  obgleic^,  tneim  glei(j^, 
ixienn  jd^on,  toenn  nur,  njenn  nid^t,  tt)ofern  nic^t. 


moreover 


196.  List  of  the  coordinative  conjunctions: 
1.  Copulative: 

unb,  and 

aud),  alfo,  besides 
augcrbem, ) 
pbem,      j 
iiberbie^,  ) 
itberbem,  ) 
be^i]leid)cn,  likewise 
nic^t  nur  —  fonbern 

not  only — but  also 
ni(^t  allein  —  fonbern  aud), 

not  only — but  also 
ntd)t  blo^  —  fonbern  aud), 

not  only — but  also 
foiuol)!  —  al^  (and)),  as  well 

as,  both — and 
tueber  —  nod),  neither — nor 
teilS  —  tei(^,  partly— partly 


QUC^, 


3um  Zdi  —  jum  Xei(,  partly 
— partly 

etne^teilc^  — anbernteil^,  part- 
ly— partly 

eincrf eit^ — anberfeit^,  on  the 

one  hand — on  the  other 

hand 

hato  —  balb, )  „^^^    ..^^ 
m-m    [no— then 

ferner,  )  furthermore, 
iDeiter,  |     moreover 
erften^  (erftlid)),  first 
fobann,  second 
ferner,  then 
enblid),  finally 
namlic^,  namely 
alg,  ) 


^  2 


as 


108 


CONJUNCTIONS. 


[§196. 


2.  Adversative: 

fonft,  otherwise 
benn,  unless 

bennoc^,  nevertheless 
bef|enungead)tet,    1 
bemungead)tct,  ^       notwith- 
QleidilDO^I,         '      I  standing 
entiDcber  —  ober,  either — or    nic^t^^beftoiccnicjer,  J 


abcr,      1 

aUettt,     [but  (§197) 

foubcrn,  J 

nun  (abcr),  now 


3.  Concessive: 

S^ax,  frei(id),  ti3o()I,  it  is  tire, 

4.  Causative: 


bcnn,  for 

bal)er, 

be^l)a(b, 

be^iDcgcn, 

barum, 

urn  bc^millcn, 


for  that 
reason 


bemnac^,  " 
fonad), 
(omit, 
mit^in, 

\0r  ] 

alfo, 
folQlid),  J 


accordingly 


consequently 


Note. — Of  all  these  coordinative  conjunctions,  only  the  following 
have  no  influence  on  the  construction :  ttl&Cr,  HtfCttt,  foilticni,  bctttlp 
Oticr,  UtCii ;  to  which  can  be  added  enttncber,  bod),  inbeffeu,  although  they 
are  quite  as  frequently  used  with  the  inverted  order. 


Special  remarks  on  some  conjunctions. 

197.  But,  when  adversatiTe,  is,  after  negative  clauses, 
rendered  either  by  oBct  or  by  fouticrn,  with  this  difference 
that  the  speaker  introduces  by  f  onbcrn  a  dii'ect  antithesis  or  a 
gradation,  and  by  abcr  a  limitation.     Examples: 

dx  ift  nid)t  rcic^,  fonbern  He  is  not  rich,  but  poor 

arm.  (direct  antithesis). 

(5r  tftnid)t  itjo^l^abenb,  fon*  He  is  not  well-to-do,  but 

b  C  r  U  reid).  rich  (gi-adation). 

Sr  ift  nid)t  reid^,  aber  itso^f*  He  is  not  rich,  but  well-to- 

tjabenb.  do  (limitation). 


§  200]  CONJUNCTIONS.  109 

198.  If  is  translated  by  tttentt^  when  it  is  conditional;  and 
by  oB,  Avlien  it  is  equivalent  to  whether  (in  indirect  questions 
and  dubitative  clauses) : — 

^c^  !omme,  it)  entt  id)  fantt.    I  come  if  I  can. 
^d)  iDcig  nicfjt,  ob  id;  !om*    I  do  not  know  wlietber  I 
men  !ann,  can  come. 

199.  1.  Wlien  is  to  be  rendered  by  M  or  tuetttt.  "With 
reference  to  an  event  of  the  present  or  future  time  Wcnu  is 
used  exclusively:  thus, 

Senn  bte  (Sonne  aufge^t.      "When  the  sun  rises, 
^ir  fommen  U>ieber,  wcnn    We  come  back  when  the 
bcr  ^ncfuif  ruft.  Sch.  cuckoo  calls. 

As  to  past  events,  al^  is  used,  if  when  means  "  at  the  time 
when,"  and  \r>  cnn,  if  it  means  "at  each  time  when,"  whenever: 
as, 

51(0  S^apolcon  nad)9?UJ3(anb  When   Napoleon    went    to 

gog.  Russia. 

S33  e  n  n  5^apo(eon  cinen  @ieg  When  (ever)  Napoleon  gafti- 

gewann.  ed  a  victory. 

a.  If  when  has  an  antecedent,  it  is  usually  translated  by  tx)  o  ;  less  fre- 
quently by  b  a :  as, 

@3giebtim2J2enfc^enteben2tugen*     There  are  moments  in  the  life 
blicfe,    to  0    er    beat  iiBeltgeift  of  man,  when  he  is  nearer  to 

nailer  iji.  Sch.  the  spirit  of  the  universe. 

2.  When?  is  rendered  toattlt  ?  if  denoting  time,  and  lUCtttt  ? 
if  meaning  under  what  circumdances?     Examples: — 

S  a  n  n  bift  bu  getommen  ?       When  did  you  come  ? 
Senn    finb    gmei   g-tguren     When  are  two  figures  sim- 
einanber  dt)niic^?  ilar  to  each  other? 

200.  Lest  is  regularly  translated  bttg  nic^t  (or  bamttnid)t); 
after  expressions  oi  fear,  however,  by  ba§ :  as,  id)  fUrcf)tete, 
'ba);i>  cr  tame,  I  feared  lest  he  should  come. 


110  INTERJECTIONS.  [5  201- 

201.  3^  —  U  (^^  beflo)  requires  the  dependent  order  in 
the  fii'st  (dependent)  clause,  and  the  inverted  order  in  the 
second.  The  second  je  is  usually  replaced  by  be  ft  O,  or  um 
fo:  as, 

3  c  fdngcr  t^  ba^  ^t(b  one  The  longer  I  look  at  the 
fc^c,  befto  (utn  f  o)  beffer  picture,  the  better  I  like 
gcfaflt  eg  mir.  it 


INTERJECTIONS. 

202.  Genuine  interjections  are  the  following: 

ad)!  at)!  ei!  i!  I)a!  a^a!  aJi!  I)e!  I)eba!  ho! 

oh!  holial  holla! 

ad) !  ol) !  0 !  ah!  alas!  (t!  pft!  hush!  hist! 

an !  nu  lueb !  oh  !  i)m !  h  umph  !  hum  ! 

0  je!  0  jemine!  o  jerum!  oh  ^ifui!  fie! 

dear!  piff  paff !  hang! 

l^cifa !  t)eiia|a !  )  ^^^^,  jjo^  tauf enb !     )  what  the 

jud)!  jud)lie!  jucf)I)eifa!)        "  ci  ber  taufenb !  j    deuce! 
^urra!  hurrah! 

1.  To  these  may  be  added  the  following  words  and  plirases  used  as 
exclamations: 

SBe^c!    ac^  iDel)!    o   \od)\  tueg  ba!  out  of  the  way! 

woe!  alas!  5lc^tUTig!  take  care!  attention! 

le ibcr !  unhappily !  §ci( !  hail ! 

lDO^(an !  weh !  @(ii(f  auf !  ©Uicf  ^u !  good  luck! 

brat) !  well  done!  ©ottlob  !  God  be  praised! 

red)t  fo !  'tis  well!  3U  gitfe !  help! 

t)onnart^ !  forwards!  t?euer !  gcuer  io !  fire ! 

iDeiter!  go  on!  ben3at)re!  i  betDa^rc!  J    ^.^^ 

bait!  stop!  @ott  bctnal)rc!  rfnrhiar 

fad)tc !  gently!  bcptc !  ©ott  bcptc ! )  ^^^"'^• 

fort!  be  gone!  be  off!  fief) !  behold! 
auf!  up! 


§  205J  WORD   FORMATION.  Ill 

WORD  FORMATION. 

A.  DEEIVATION. 

203.  Meam  of  Derivation.  All  German  words  like  those  of 
the  other  Aryan  languages,  are  beUeved  to  come  ultimately 
from  monosyllabic  roots.  These  roots  became  stems  and  words 
by  means  of  (1)  internal  vowel  changes,  the  Umlaut  (§2)  and 
5lblaut  (§  64);  (2)  prefixes;  (3)  suffixes.  Thus,  e.  g.,  the  root 
binb  became  by  5lblaut  ^atlb,  tie,  and  ^Utlb,  band.  The  ad- 
dition of  the  prefix  ber  and  of  the  suffix  uttg  produced,  at  a 
later  period,  ^erbtttbuttg,  connexion.  Any  primary  deriv- 
ative, as  ^unb,  can  become  the  stem  of  a  new  (secondary) 
derivative,  as  ^iinbni^,  alliance. 

DERIVATION  OF  VERBS. 

204.  A  large  number  of  verbs,  viz.,  all  those  of  the  strong 
conjugation,  and  many  of  the  weak,  have  no  German  root- 
word,  and  are,  therefore,  considered  here  as  primitive. 

The  derivative  verbs  are  mostly  formed  from  substantives 
and  adjectives  by  merely  adding  the  infinitive  ending  en,  and 
modifying,  in  many  instances,  the  root- vowel:  as,  ipflligen,  to 
plough,  from  ^ftU(5 ;  rotett,  to  redden,  from  rot.  A  few  are 
formed  from  primitive  verbs  by  S(b(aut:  as,  tegett,  to  lay,  from 
(iegen,  to  lie;  fe^en,  to  set,  from  fi^cu,  to  sit;  faugeu,  to  suckle, 
from  faugett,  to  suck.     Tliis  latter  group  is  always  transitive. 

A  very  large  number  of  verbs  are  formed  by  means  of  pre- 
fixes. 

205.  Prefixes  used  for  the  derivation  of  Verbs. 

1.  Sc  was  originally  identical  with  bei,  by. 

a.  It  appHes  the  action  of  the  simple  verb  to  an  object,  and 
thus  makes  intransitive  verbs  transitive: — 

ftagen,  wail:  beflagen,  bewail; 

fommen,  come:  belpmmen,  come  by,  obtain. 


112  WORD   FORMATION.  [§  205 

b.  "With  a  transitive  verb  be  alters  the  direction  of  its  action, 
viz.  the  accusative  governed  by  the  simple  verb  becomes  a 
dative  of  the  instrument: — 

ftreueit  (-^  lumen  auf  ben  3Scg),  to  strew  (flowers 

on  the  way) ; 
beftreuen  {^tw  3Scg  mtt  ^(umen),  to  bestrew  (the 

way  with  flowers). 

c  Sometimes  it  merely  strengthens  the  notion  conveyed  by 
the  simple  verb :  as, 

l^arren,  wait:  be^arren,  persist; 

or  it  adds  to  it  the  idea  of  completion: — 

be(icn/  cover:  bebe (fen,  cover  all  over. 

d.  It  also  forms  a  number  of  verbs  from  substantives  and 
adjectives,  in  which  office  it  can  be  circumscribed  by  to  furnish 
viUhi  to  make  : — 

gtugel,  wing:  beflitgein,  furnish  with  wings; 

feud)t,  moist:  befeuc^teu,  moisten. 

In  befnebigen,  satisfy,  be^er^tgen,  take  to  heart,  and  others, 
the  derivative  syllable  ig  has  been  inserted. 

2.  @nt  (emp),  formerly  attt  (as  preserved  in  5ltlttt)ort, 
answer,  and  2lnt(i^,  countenance)  has  several  meanings,  the 
most  important  of  which  are : 

a.  That  of  removal  and  separaiion  : 

fit^ren,  lead:  entful)ren,  lead  away; 

loitfcn,  run:  enttaufcn,  run  away. 

l>.  That  of  deprivaiion : 

flatter,  leaves:  entbldttcrn,  strip  of  leaves. 

c.  That  of  reversal : 

(aben,  load:  entfabcn,  unload; 

l^eiltg,  holy:  entl)ciUgen,  unhallow. 

d.  It  also  expresses  the  beginning  of  the  state  or  activity 
denoted  by  the  simple  verb : 

brennen,  bum:  entbrennen,  take  fire. 

3.  (Sr  was  originally  not  di£[erent  from  ur  (as  preserved, 
ft  g.y  in  Urfprung,  origin). 


§  205]  DERn^\TICNS   OF  VEEBS,  113 

a.  One  of  its  earliest  meanings  is  out,  forth,  chiefly  with  an 
upward  motion: — 

baucn,  build:  erbauen,  build  up; 

-:^  iDad)fen,  gTow:  emadjfen,  gi-ow  up. 

b.  In  close  relation  to  this  meaning  of  a  gradual  rising,  er 
(hke  ent)  denotes  the  beginning  of  the  state  or  activity  ex- 
pressed by  the  simple  verb,  or  the  adjective: — 

braufen,  roar:  erbraufen,  begin  roaring; 

gritn,  green:  ei'grUTien,  grow  green. 

c.  In  many  other  compounds  it  intensifies  the  notion  ex- 
pressed by  the  simple  verb: — 

tragcn,  bear:  ertragen,  endure; 

finbeu,  find:  erfinben,  invent; 

and  vrith  verbs  of  doing  violence  it  adds  to  the  verbal  action 
the  impHcation  of  destruction  as  resulting  from  it: — 

fd)(av3Cn,  strike:  crfdjlagctt,  strike  dead; 

briicfettr  press:  erbriicfen,  stifle. 

d.  It  adds  to  the  verbal  action  the  idea  of  attainment: — 

tro^en,  defy:  ertro^cn,  obtain  by  defiance; 

eilen,  hasten:  ereilen,  reach  by  hastening, 

overtake. 

e.  It  often  answers  to  the  Latin  re  in  the  sense  of  again, 
lack:—  fid)  er^olen,  recover;  fid)  crinuem,  recollect;  erfeuueti, 
recognize. 

4.  @C  modifies  the  sense  of  many  simple  verbs  in  the  same 
way  as  Latin  cum,  with,  together:  as,  rinuen,  flow:  gcrimtClt, 
coagulate;  fallen,  fall:  gef alien,  faU  in  with,  please; — others  are 
merely  strengthened  by  it:  as,  gebenfen,  think  of;  geli'lftenf 
covet. 

5.  S5et,  originally  the  same  a3  Dor,  has  a  variety  of  mean- 
ings. 

a.  Its  original  sense  seems  to  have  been  off,  away : — 
retfen,  journey:  t)erreifen,  journey  off; 

treiben,  drive:  t)ertvcibcn,  drive  away. 

Hence,  it  impUes  the  idea  of  losing  or  making  disappear 
through  the  verbal  action: — 


114  WORD   FOBMATION.  [§  205- 

fpieten,  gamble:  Derfpietcn  (fciti  ©ctb),  gamble 

away  (one's  money) ; 
hanm,  build:  Derbaucn  (eine  STu^fiiit),  injure 

a  view  by  building. 

b.  It  denotes  the  termination  of  tbe  state  or  action  ex- 
pressed by  the  simple  verb: — 

flingcn,  sound:  t)er!Ittigett,  die  away; 

b(ut)en,  bloom :  DerblitI) en,  cease  blooming,  fade i 

or  the  complete  ivorhing  out  of  the  verbal  action: — 

bluten,  bleed:  Derblutcn,  bleed  to  death; 

l^ungent,  starve:  Der^ungcnt,  starve  to  deatL 

c.  It  reverses  the  notion  of  the  simple  verb: — 

ac^tcn,  esteem:  bcrarf)tcn,  despise; 

or  it  adds  (like  mis)  to  the  action  of  the  verb  the  idea  of  a 
wrong  application : — 

brucfen,  print:  Derbni(fen,  misprint; 

in  particular  the  idea  of  spoiling y  ruining ,  and  the  like: — 

gie^en,  train:  bergic^en,  educate  improperly, 

spoil; 

also  the  meaning  of  over,  excessively: — 

falgen,  salt:  nerfafjen,  oversalt. 

d.  It  forms  many  derivatives  from  substantives  and  ad- 
jectives, and  denotes  an  entering  u^on  the  condition  ex23ressed 
by  them : 

geirot,  marriage:  ftd^  t)cr{)eiratett,  get  married; 

orni,  poor:  ijeranncn,  become  poor. 

"With  active  verbs  it  is,  in  this  case,  to  be  circumsciibed  by 
to  make,  and  the  like : — 

fd[)(e(^tcr,  worse:  t)er)'cf)(cd)tern,  make  worse; 

beutfd},  German:  Derbcut[d)en,  tm-n  into  German. 

Note  also  derivatives  from  nouns  denoting  materials,  where  t)er  ex- 
presses a  iransformaiion  of  the  object  into  the  material  denoted  by  the 
noun,  either  a  real  one:  as,  berjieinent,  to  petrify;  or  an  apparent  on^ 
the  object  being  only  covered  by  the  material :  as,  uergolben,  to  gild. 


§  203]  DERIVATION   OF  VERBS.  115 

e.  Sometimes  Ucr  merely  intensifies  the  notion  contained  in 
tlie  Bimple  verb: — 

bletbett,  stay:  l5erl)(eil)en,  persist; 

or  it  merely  serves  (like  be)  to  make  the  simple  verb  tran- 
sitive:— 

fc^tDeicjcn,  be  silent:         Derfd)tnetGen,  conceal; 
lacf)Ctt,  laugh:  terlad^ett,  deride. 

Sometimes,  too,  it  has  no  effect  whatever  on  the  meaning 
of  the  simple  verb.  Thus  \)enttc{}ren,  au5pnent,  is  the  same 
as  me^ren;  nor  does  ijerdnbem,  change,  differ  from  dnbertt. 

6.  Set  denotes  separation: — 

fciHen,  fall:  ^crfatfen,  fall  apart; 

[cf)neiben,  cut:  3crfd)Tteiben,  cut  in  pieces. 

"When  the  simple  verb  itself  contains  the  notion  of  separ- 
ation, 3cr  merely  strengthens  it: — 

brei^en,  break:  3erbred)en,  break  asunder.^ 

208.  Suffixes  used  for  the  derivation  of  Yerbs: 

1.  tif  which  forms  diminutives:  as,  lad^eltt,  to  smile,  from 
ladjcn,  laugK  It  has  often  a  disparaging  and  depreciatory 
sense:  as,  frommelu,  affect  piety,  cani 

2.  et^  which  forms  a  few  iterative,  desiderative,  and  caus- 
ative verbs:  as,  !(ap.pcrn,  rattle;  frfjlafem  (impers.),  feel  sleepy; 
etnfc^Iafertt,  cause  to  sleep. 

3.  ict,  of  French  origin,  but  grafted  upon  some  German 
stems:  as,  bud)ftabieren,  speU. 

4.  tg.  This  sufiax  forms  a  number  of  causative  verbs:  as, 
reinigen,  make  clean. 

5.  CttJ :  as,  fautetisett,  play  the  sluggard. 

6.  3  and  f^  :  as,  adjjen  (from  ad)),  groan;  !^errfd)en,  rule. 


116  WORD   FORMATIOK.  [§  207^ 

DERIVATIOK  OF  SUBSTANTIVES. 

207.  A  large  number  of  substantives  are  regarded  as  prim- 
itive. The  others  ai'e  clsrived  either  by  chan<;^e  of  vowel  (%b* 
laut):  as,  (Sc^Iu^,  <Sd)(o^,  from  f5)Iic^cn;  a  few  by  prefixes; 
many,  by  suffixes. 

208.  Prefixes  used  for  the  derivation  of  Substantives. 

1.  3CKt  only  occurs  in  $Ittth)ort,  answer,  and  Slntli^,  counte- 
nance, and  means  originally  toward.iy  against. 

2.  ®r  J,  arch,  denotes  what  ii  first  cr  most  distinguished  in 
its  kind:  as,  (irjengcl,  archangel;  (Srjbicb,  arrant  thief. 

3.  @e  forms  many  nouns  with  a  collecfive  cr  frequerUaiive 
character,  and  regularly  goes  together  with  tlie  sufiix  e ;  as, 
ha^  ©cbtrcje,  mountains;  ba$  ©claufc,  i-unning  to  and  fro. 
Many  have  droj^ped  the  e  again,  but  have  retained  the  Um=« 
laut  caused  by  it:  as,  ha^  ©ciDolf,  clouds;  ha^  @efcf)lpd^,  chit- 
chat 

4.  9Ki§  corresponds  to  mis  :  as,  SD^i^Gtiff,  mistake. 

5.  M\\,  This  prefix  either  denotes  negalion:  as,  Uufmtt, 
nonsense;  or  it  expresses  something  unnatural,  monstrous,  or 
injurious:  as,  Unmctlfc^,  an  inhuman  person;  Unttcr,  monster; 
Un!raut,  weeds. 

6.  lit  chiefly  denotes  originalitij  or  primitiveness :  as,  Ul** 
fprung,  origin;  UrlPClt,  primitive  world 

209.  Suffixes  used  for  the  derivation  of  Substantives. 

Note. — The  sufSxes  d^  e it,  Iclii,  c,  el,  en,  in,  ting,  ni^,  fcl  cause 
Umlaut  {)  2). 

a^tn  and  km,  corresponding  to  the  Enghsh  kin  and  ling 

(cf.  manikin,  goding),  form  diminutives;  thus,  bad  §dnbd)eit, 

^  little  hand;  \ia^%  ^dumdjcn,  little  tree;  the  root  vowel  being 

modified  if  capable  of  it,  except  in  a  few  proper  names,  as 

^ar(:  ^ar(d[)en;  ©ertrub:  ^ertnibc^en. 

d)cn  is  more  common  than  lein,  which  latter  is  chiefly  used  after  ^ 
and  g:  as,  ba§  S8dd)letn,  httlo  brook;  \)ai  Sroglein,  Utile  trough,  from 
Srog.  To  use  d)eu  after  such  souuds  ij  not  i^ossible  -without  the  in- 
sertion of  a  euphonic  el*,  as,  SSodjeldieu. 


§  209]  D2RIVATI0N   OF  SUBSTANTIVES.  117 

Nouns  endinrj  in  c  or  cil  drop  these  endings  before  (i)tn  and  Iciu;  tlius, 
ba3  £uglciu,  littlo  eye;  tag  ©urtd)cn,  little  garden. 

In  Borne  -words  the  diminutive  force  of  d^cn  and  tcitt  is  no  lon-^er  fait: 
as,  br.3  SJidbd)cn,  girl;  ha^  grdltlcin,  young  (unmarried)  lady;  2JJdnud)cn 
lui'!)  Ocibcf}cn,  male  and  female  (of  an  animal  species). 

Diminutives  are  often  used  as  terms  of  endearment, 

C  forms  feminine  abstract  nouns  from  adjectives:  as,  bie 

©ro^C,  greatness,  from  (jrojj. 

CI  (from  tile  Latin  ia),  corresponding  to  the  English  y,  forma 
substantives  from  tlie  names  of  persons. 

Such  nouns  denote  the  emplo^^nent,  state,  or  condition  of 
a  i^erson,  cr  a  place  of  business:  as,  bie  glfd^crcv  fishery;  bic 
©rucfcrci,  printmg-office. 

Some  also  have  a  collective  sense:  as,  bie  $yteitcrct,  cavalry. 

Other  nouns  in  ci  are  formed  from  verbs.  They  denote  an 
abstract  action,  usually  "wiLh  a  contemptuous  impHcation;  bie 
§CU(^e(ci,  hypocrisy;  ^(auberct,  chit-chat 

cl  and  c:t  form  a  large  number  of  nouns,  mostly  of  the  mas- 
culine gender:  as,  bcr  (Sdjliifl'ct,  hey;  ber  ©raben,  ditch. 

cr,  lite  Enghsh  er,  or,  denotes  the  agent,  and  is  chiefly  used 
to  make  appellations  of  male  persons,  partly  from  substantive 
stems:  as,  ganger,  singer,  from  (Sang;  partly  from  verbs:  as, 
iO^atcr,  painter,  from  Tlialctt ;  partly  from  the  names  of  countries 
and  places:  as,  b:r  (gno^anbcr,  theEnghshman;  bcr  §amburgcr, 
inhabitant  (or  native)  of  Hamburg. 

In  a  few  nouns,  an.  tt  or  an  I  has  been  inserted  between  tlie 
stem  and  the  suffix  cr;  thus,  ^imftlcr,  artist;  (Sd)Ulbner,  debtor. 

Also  a  few  names  of  instruments  have  the  suffix  cr:  as,  bcr 
^oI)rer,  auger. 

IJcit  (or  f  cit),  Enghsh  head  and  hood,  forms  feminine  ab- 
stract nouns  from  adjectives:  as,  bie  greif)eit,  Uberty;  bie  SDant* 
bartcit,  gratitude.  The  following  few  are  derived  from  names 
of  persons:  bie  ^inb()cit,  cluldhood;  bie  ©ottl}ett,  Godhead;  bie 
3r'^orl)cit  and  5^arr^eit,  foUy;  and  with  a  collective  sense:  hk 
9JZenfcl}l)eit,  mankind;  ^Ijrifteti^cit^  Christendom;  and  (5$eift(ic^=» 
!eit,  clergy. 

The  form  !'  c  i  t  is  used  instead  of  lie  i  t  with  adjectives  having  a  suflSx 
(except  buntet,  and  those  in  en).  Examples: —  ©cUgfeit,  happiness, 
from  jetig;  ^itterfcit,  bitterness;  (gitdfcit,  vanity. 


113  Word  formation.  [§  209- 

Frequently  the  syllable  ig  is,  for  the  sake  of  euphony,  inserted  before 
!cit:  as,  I[?cid)ttgfeit,  facility. 

in,  corresponding  to  English  ess,  ine,  makes  feminine  from 
masculine  appellations,  and  regularly  causes  the  modification 
of  the  root-vowel;  thus^bie  C^rcifin,  countess;  tie  §elbitt,  heroine; 
"iik  giinbin,  bitch. 

SKanntn,  from  SQlann,  only  occurs,  now,  in  bic  2anb§nt  a  ii  ii  i  it,  country- 
woman. 

jTic  ^rin^effin,  princess,  bic  Sibtif  fin,  abbess,  and  bic  ^ononiffiit, 
have  both  the  foreign  suffix  ens  and  the  German  in. 

ling  makes  appellations  of  persons  from  substantives  and 
verbs:  as,  bcr  §dupt(ing,  chieftain,  from  ta^  $^^pt?  '^^^  ^^^^* 
ling,  apprentice. 

"With  more  recent  derivatives,  ling  expresses  contemj^t:  as, 
bcr  X)i(i)terlini3,  j^oetaster. 

ttiS,  Enghsh  ness,  forms  abstract  substantives  from  verbs 
and  substantives,  and  a  few  from  adjectives:  as,  ha^  ^cbiirf* 
ni^,  need;  ba^  ^Bitnbni^,  league,  from  ^unb;  bie  S'iitfterni^^, 
dai'kness.  The  abstract  meaning  often  passes  over  into  the 
concrete. 

fol,  fcl  form  substantives  almost  exclusively  from  verbs: 
as,  ba^  *8d)icf)a(,  fate. 

f^nft,  Enghsh  ship,  and  tunt,  English  dom,  make  abstract 
and  collective  nouns  from  names  of  persons,  substantives,  ad- 
jectives, and  also  a  few  from  verbs;  thus,  grcunbfcf)aft,  fiiend- 
ship;  9iittcrfd)aft,  knighthood;  ^H'icftcrtum,  priesthood;  :53rief* 
fc^aften,  letters;  (^igenfdjaft,  quality;  iKcicl}tum,  aiches;  Sac^^* 
turn,  growth. 

tri,  an  abridgment  of  Xci(,  forms  Eractionals:  as,  eiu  ^ierter, 
a  fourth. 

tin 9^  Enghsh  ing,  forms  abstract  nouns  (convertible  into 
concretes)  from  ti'ansitive  verbs:  as,  ^rcnnnng,  separation; 
(irfinbung,  invention.  In  a  few  cases  it  has  a  collective  mean- 
ing: as,  ^leibung,  clothing. 

The  foUowing  suffixes:  onb  (old  participial  ending  for  Cltb), 
cm,  cnb,  at,  it|,  ic^t,  ig,  ing,  ril^,  and  nt  are  of  very  rare 
occun-ence.  Examj^les:  bcr  ^^eilanb,  Saviom*;  bcr  5ltcm,  breath; 
bie  S^ugcnb,  virtue;  bie  §cimat,  home;  bcr  £ranid>  crane;  baS 


§  211]  DERIVATION    OF   ADJECTIVES.  119' 

T)t(ft(i)t,  thicket;  bci*  @ffig,  vinegar;  bci*  ©(irlno,  lieriin^-;  ber 
ga^nrid),  ensign;  bie  ^rmut,  poverty. 

DERIVATION  OF  ADJECTIVES. 

210.  The  prefixes  iised  for  the  derivation  of  adjectives  are 
the  same  as  those  forming  substantives,  viz.  ht,  tXlf  gc^.TTti]!, 
un,  ur.  Examples:  bcrcit,  ready;  er^faul,  very  lazy;  gcredjt, 
just;  tni^mutio,  discontented;  wntreu,  faithless;  urpld^Ud},  very 
sudden. 

211.  Suffixes  forming  Adjectives, 

"btiX,  This  suffix  is  of  the  same  root  as  hear,  and  originally 
means  hewHng ;  thus,  frud)tbaiv  fruit-bearing,  fiaiitfuL  In 
more  recent  usage,  its  prevailing  signification  is  that  of  a  pos- 
sibility or  inclination  to  the  action  impHed  by  the  stem:  as, 
gangbar,  passable;  bienftbar,  serviceable.  It  is  added  to  ab- 
stract nouns,  and  verbs.  With  transitive  verbs,  it  has  always 
a  passive  meaning:  as,  e^baiv  eatable. 

cn,  English  en,  makes  adjectives  from  names  of  materials: 
as,  golben,  golden.  —  Often  cm  is  substituted  for  it;  thus, 
bleieVn,  leaden;  I)dl3ern,  wooden. 

l^aft,  ^tjftig  i^  connected  with  ^aftett,  to  cling.  When  added 
to  abstract  nouns  and  some  verbs,  it  produces  adjectives  denot- 
ing a, propensity  towards  that  which  is  expressed  by  the  stem: 
as,  lafter^aft,  vicious;  fdjtca^^aft,  garrulous. — ^^Vhen  added  to 
appellations  of  persons  and  some  other  nouns,  it  denotes 
resemblance:  as,  riefett^aft,  gigantic;  !rampff)aft,  spasmodic. — 
It  is  also  added  to  tlu-ee  adjectives:  frautl^aft,  morbid;  b0^t)aft, 
malicious;  Voal)rl)aft,  true. 

ig^  English  y,  forms  adjectives  from  nouns:  as,  mad^ttg, 
mighty,  from  9)^ad)t;  faftig,  juicy,  from  ®aft.  Those  derived 
from  concrete  nouns  do  not  modify  the  stem-vowel,  except 
UJaffctig,  "watery,  and  fdrnig,  granulous.  — •  ig  is  also  added  to 
verbs  and  adjectives:  as,  Txad)giebtg,  yielding;  Ddllig,  complete; 
— finally  to  a  few  adverbs:  as,  ^icfig,  from  tjlCV;  bortig,  l)eutig, 
fonftig,  Dorig. 

i  g  combined  with  f  a  I  (§  209)  to  fcltg  (for  jolifl)  occurs  in  several  ad- 
jectives: as,  niiil)iclig,  toilsome,  from  iuiul)fal ;  triibjelig,  woeful,  from 


120  WORD   FORMATION.  [J  211- 

i^t  is  added  to  a  few  concrete  noims,  mostly  names  of 
material.^:  as,  ^ot^idjt,  woody,  but  it  is  going  out  of  use,  being 
superseded  by  icj.  Only  ti)Orid)t,  foolish,  is  still  properly  in 
use. 

ifd|,  English  vili,  is  added  to  proper  names  of  persons, 
nations,  and  places:  as,  Iut()erifd),  Lutheran;  fpanifd),  Spanish; 
l)ani|d),  of  Halle; — moreover,  to  appellations  of  jDei'sons,  places, 
and  animals:  as,  biebifdj,  thievish;  I)immliid),  heavenly ;  pnbtfd), 
doggish. 

^  Observo  tho  depredator j  sense  of  ij'd^,  compared  with  that  of  lid),  in 
finbifd),  childish,  and  finbfid),  childlike;  tueibifd),  womanish,  and  lueib* 
Ud^,  womanly;  I}errijd),  masterful,  and  l^errlid),  magnificent. 

"With  abstract  nouns,  ifc^  signifies  s,  propensity  to  that  which 
is  impHed  by  the  stem:  as,  gdnfifd),  quaiTelsomc,  from  ^anl. 

Adjectives  derived  from  foreign  noims  usually  have  the 
suffix  ifd}:  as,  ^joetift^,  logifc^. 

Tlie  adjective  ]^iibf(^,  pretty,  is  a  contraction  of  I)ofifcf), 
com-t-like;  b  cutf  d),  of  Old  High-German  diutiac. 

let  is  added  to  numerah,  definite  and  indefinite:  as,  iX'ddtX^ 
let,  of  two  sorts;  t)iclerlci,  of  many  sorts.  It  is  by  origin  a 
feminine  noun  in  the  genitive,  meaning  sort;  the  ending  ci*  of 
the  preceding  numeral  is  the  2)roxDer  case-ending  agreeing 
with  it 

•  li^,  Enghsh  like,  ly.  This  suffix  when  added  to  appellations 
of  persons,  denotes  manner  or  resemblance:  as,  fiirftlic^,  princely; 
ttianntic^,  manlj^ — ^To  adjectives  it  imparts  a  diminidim  signi- 
fication: as,  rotltc^,  reddish;  a(t(ic^,  oldish.  In  this  latter  class, 
the  stem-word  ia  always  modified. 

With  verhsj  Wi)  denotes,  like  bar,  Si,  possibility  ;  as,  crtrdgl{(^, 
enduiable. 

In  a  fevf  instances  a  t  is  inserted  before  Ud^:  as,  iDefentUd),  essential. 

jam,  Enghsh  some,  denotes,  hke  bar,  a  pK)ssiMlity  or  inchn- 
aiion  to  the  action  imphed  by  the  stem:  thus,  Icnffam;  man- 
ageable; fparfam,  saving.  It  is  added  to  abstract  nouns,  verbs, 
and  a  few  adjectives. 

On  the  derivation  of  adverbs,  see  §  183. 


§  2131  COMPOSITION.     .  121 

B.  COMPOSITION. 

212.  By  a  compound  word  we  here  understand  one  that  con- 
sists of  two  or  more  independent  words  expressing  but  one 
lidea:  as,  5lpfetbaum,  apple-tree;  (Sonnenaufgancj,  sunrise. 

Note.— Accordingly, -words like  tugenb!)aft,  ^rantt)cit,  ^nec!^tjd)aft,etc., 
are  no  longer  considered  a3  compounds  because  the  components  \)a\i, 
izit,  jd^aft  have  lost  their  independent  existence  as  words  and  become 
derivative  syllables,  as  which  they  have  been  treated  under  the  head 
of  derivation. 

1.  No  compound  is  to  be  regarded  as  having  more  than 
two  components,  although  each  component  may  be  a  com- 
pound in  itself:  as,  ^^(eibermac^erl)aubn)er!  (^'leiberma{f)er=§anb* 
lucr!). 

2.  Of  the  two  components,  the  one  always  determines  the 
other.  The  determining  component  regularly  occupies  the 
first  place  in  substantives,  adjectives,  and  verbs,  as  in  S)lovh^ 
iDinb,  north- wind;  ()ellb(au,  Hght-blue;  auffc^ticfeeu,  to  unlock; 
and  the  last  in  particles,  as  in  bcrcjauf,  up  hill;  bergab,  down 
hill. 

COMPOUND  SUBSTANTIVES. 

213.  Nearly  all  compound  substantives  have  a  substantive 
for  their  second  component.  The  first  component  may  be  a 
substantive,  adjective,  numeral,  verb,  or  particle.  Examples: 
Safi'erfaK,  water-fall;  S3oUmonb,  full  moon;  >[)reie(f,  triangle; 
(Stubier^immcr,  study;  TOtbiirger,  fellow-citizen. 

A  few  combinations  are  to  be  considered  as  loose  word-groupings 
rather  than  as  compounds.  Such  are  baS  SSergifsmeinnic^t,  forget-me- 
not;  ta-i  @tettbid)ein,  rendezvous;  ba§  ^iirfid^feiii,  the  being  by  oneself. 

1.  "VVlien  the  first  component  is  a  substantive,  it  often  has 
its  regular  genitive  ending  §  orn:  as,  ^rtegSgott,  god  of  war; 
J^bmen^aljn,  lion's  tooth;  Dtofcnblatt,  rose-leaf;  the  it  in  the  last 
example  being  the  old,  feminine  ending  of  the  genitive.  At  a 
later  period,  §  was  added  as  a  connecting  hnk  to  feminine 
nouns  too,  as  in  3Saf)rI)eitglicbc,  love  of  truth;  Uniuerfttdtg* 
freunb,  coUege  friend. 

Sometimes,  too,  the  fu:st  component  takes  a  plural  form;  as, 
2B  b  r  t  e  V  bud),  dictionary ;  2B  C  i  b  e  r  f cinb,  woman-hater. 


122  WOED   POBMATION.  [§  213- 

2.  When  the  first  component  is  an  adjective,  its  stem  is 
closely  joined  to  the  second  component:  as,  (^ro^mut,  mag- 
nanimity. Only  a  few  adjectives  take  an  ending:  as,  ^raufc= 
min3C,  cm-led-mini 

a.  "While  in  ^raufetum^C  the  adjective  retains  the  same  form 
in  the  obHque  cases,  it  is  fuUy  declined  in  the  following:  ber 
$ol)Cpneftciv  high-priest;  ber  (&I)eimerat,  Privy-Councillor;  bie 
i^ani^ctncile,  tedium. 

itt  cgo^cpriefter,  e.  g.,  is  declined  as  follows:  gen.  bc^5  .^olicn^ 
pricftcr^;  dat  bcm  §oi)cnprieftcr;  ace.  ben  .'pot)cnprtcfter;  plur. 
bic  §ot)cnpricftcr.    A  high  pried  is  dn  §ol)erpricftcr. 

3.  When  the  first  component  is  a  verb,  a  euphonic  e  is  often 
inserted,  as  in  3^^9^P^9^'^'  forefinger. 

COMPOUND  ADJECTIVES. 

214  Compound  adjectives  have  mostly  an  adjective  for  their 
second  component  The  first  component  may  be  a  substantive, 
adjective,  verb,  or  particle.  Examples:  iDaiferanu,  waterless; 
l)cUc^ritn,  light-green;  mcrfttjUrbig,  noteworthy;  uberglUcfUc^, 
overhappy. 

"VMien  the  first  component  is  a  substantive,  it  often  takes  the 
same  singular  and  plui'al  endings  as  in  compound  substantives 
(§  213, 1):  as,  IcbenSmiibc,  tired  of  life;  aI)Uum30DoU,  presage- 
ful;  Inlbetreid),  rich  in  images. 

1.  A  very  frequent  combination  is  also  that  of  a  participle 
■with  its  adjunct  preceding  it:  as,  ]^er3>crrci§enb,  heart-rending; 
H)citreid)cnb,  far-reaching;  rul)mbebec!t,  covered  -svith  gloiy; 
mccrum|d)lungen,  sea-siuTounded. 

2.  Finally,  adjectives  are  formed  by  adding  i.j  to  a  com- 
bination which  is  not  in  use  b}^  itself:  as,  langl}aarigr  long- 
haired; engbriiftig,  narrow-breasted. 

COMPOUND  VERBS. 

215.  Verbs  are  compounded  with  substantives,  adjectives, 
and  i^articles:  as,  ratf d)lagen,  dehberate ;  groBtUit,  brag;  fort* 
gcl)cn,  go  away.  Those  compounded  with  particles  ai'e  the 
most  im|X)rtani  Their  i^eculiaiities  have  been  treated  in 
§  72  to  79. 


§  216]  HISTORY  OF  THE  GEKMAN   LANGUAGE.  123 

Brief  Historical  Sketch  of  the  German  Lan^age. 

216.  The  German  language  belongs  to  the  Germanic  or 
Teutonic  family  of  languages,  wliich,  again,  like  Greek,  Italic, 
Indian,  Persian,  Slavic,  Lithuanic,  and  Celtic,  is  a  member  of 
the  Ar}^an  or  Indo-European  family. 

The  Germanic  ^oup  comprises: 

1.  The  Gothic,  now  extinct,  and  only  known  through  a 
Tersion  of  the  Bible  by  the  Gothic  bishop  Ulfilas,  who  lived 
in  the  fourth  century. 

2.  The  Scandinavian,  with  four  sub-divisions:  Swedish, 
Vanish,  Norwegian,  and  Icelandic. 

3.  The  Low-German,  with  the  Frisian,  Old  Saxon^  and  Anglo- 
Saxon  for  dialects.  Out  of  Old  Saxon  were  developed  the 
Dutch,  or  literary  language  of  the  Netherlands,  and  the  „*!p(att:= 
beutfc^,"  occupying  the  "flat"  parts  of  Northern  Germany, 
while  Anglo-Saxon,  in  consequence  of  its  introduction  into 
England,  became  Emjllsh. 

4.  The  High-German,  occupying  middle  and  southern  Ger- 
many, and  a  part  of  Switzerland. 

That  form  of  High-German  which  wag  in  use  between  the 
seventh  and  the  eleventh  century,  is  called  'Old  High-German.* 
It  was  succeeded  by  the  so-called  'Middle  High-Germxin*  with 
the  Saabian  as  leading  dialect  during  the  following  centuries 
down  to  the  Reformation,  when  Luther  brought  into  general 
use  that  form  which  bears  the  name  of  'New  High-German' 
or  'German.* 

Up  to  the  times  of  Luther  there  was  no  uniform  literary  language 
used  in  Germany.  The  Low-German  was,  as  it  were,  in  competition 
with  the  High-German,  each  producing  an  independent  literature. 
Luther,  in  his  writings,  used  neither  the  one  nor  the  other,  but  an  idiom 
which  had  sprung  up  in  the  written  official  communications  between 
the  Imperial  Court  and  the  numerous  German  princes.  It  was  spoken 
in  no  part  of  the  country,  but  had,  to  a  certain  extent,  grown  up  on 
paper.  "While  the  High-German  was  predominant  in  ii,  the  Low-German 
was  sufficiently  represented  to  make  it  intelligible  to  the  northern  as 
well  as  to  the  southern  Germans,  and  thus  eminently  fitted  to  become 
universal. 


124  CORRESPONDENCES   OF   CONSONANTS.  [§  216- 

And,  in  fact,  the  rapid  and  extensive  circulation  of  Luther's  cate- 
chisms and  version  of  the  Bible,  which  became  household  books  of  the 
nation,  brought  about  this  universality.  Moreover,  the  first  German 
grammars  vera  compiled  on  the  basis  of  the  new  idiom,  -vs-hich  thus 
became  a  canon  of  speaking  and  writing  correctly.  Nowadays,  Luther's 
language  is  the  speech  of  the  educated  in  all  Germany,  the  other 
dialects  being  no  longer  heard  in  their  purity  except  among  the  rural 
population. 


Correspondences  of  Consonants  in  German  and 
English. 

217.  The  chief  characteristic  of  the  High-German  in  contradistinction 
to  the  Low-German  is  the  progression  (or  rotation)  of  miUes.  This  sing- 
ular phenomenon,  which  already  appeared  once  before  in  the  primitive 
German  language,  when  High-German,  Low-German,  Gothic,  and 
Scandinavian  were  not  yet  separate  idioms  (§  216),  consists  in  a  regular 
shifting  of  the  mutes  from  one  class  into  another,  so  that,  in  general, 
the  sonants  h,  d,  g  (§  5)  of  a  former  period  became  surds  p,  t,  fc  (§  5) ; 
the  surds,  aspirates,  p^,  Vi,  Teh  {viz.  p,  i,  fc,  -{■  aspiration) ;  and  the  aspir- 
ates, sonants.  The  regularity  of  these  changes,  however,  is  not  absolute; 
the  most  important  deviation  is  that  the  aspirates  pli,  th,  kh,  viz.  surds 
-[-  aspiration,  became  2/,  is  (2),  kch,  viz.  surds  -f  fricative,  and  in  many 
instances  pure  fricatives  /,  sz,  ch.  German  inherited  from  Old  High- 
German  most  of  the  phonetic  changes  of  this  second  rotation  of  mutes, 
while  English,  being  through  Anglo-Saxon  the  inheritor  of  Low-German 
(§  216,  3),  does  not  participate  in  them.  Hence,  the  discrepancies  be- 
tween German  and  English  mutes  in  words  of  common  origin.  'We 
point  out  the  most  important,  taking  also  into  account  some  conson- 
antal correspondences  that  stand  outside  the  law  of  rotation  of  mutes 
(Grimm's  law). 

218.  Dental  mutes  and  fricatives. 

1.  2  =  d:  as,  2^od)ter,  daughter;  treibett,  drive;  trinfett, 
drink;  ^ropfcn,  di-oj); 

bictcn,  bid;  fatten,  fold;  ©artcn,  garden;  I)a(ten,  liold;  \)n\tcr, 
hinder;  rcitcn,  lide;  (^djUltci'/  shoulder;  0citc,  side;  trctcu, 
tread;  UUtClV  under; 


§  219]  CORRESPONDENCES   OF   CONSONANTS,  125 

^ttt,  bed;  iB(ut,  blood;  (^ott,  God;  gut,  good;  I)art,  hard; 
taU,  cold;  SBort,  word. 

2.  ^  =  th:  as,  banten,  thank;  bauu,  then;  bcin,  thine; 
benfcn,  think;  bi(f,  thick;  i)ing,  thing;  boc^,  though;  ^Dorn, 
thom;  brct,  three;  bu,  thou;  biinn,  thin;  ^urft,  thirst; 

beibe,  both;  ^rubcr,  brother;  (grbc,  earth;  gcber,  feather; 
Sebcr,  leather;  nteber,  nether;  ficbett,  seethe; 

^Oa),  bath;  §erb,  hearth;  S^Jorb,  north;  ^nh,  south;  2^ob, 
death. 

a.  ^  =:  th:  as,  fort,  forth;  ^onat,  month;  WVLttCY,  mother; 
taufcnb,  thousand;  ^atcr,  father. 

3,  <B,  ff,  f?  =  t:  as,  au§,  out;  e^,  it;  8o§,  lot;  lDa§,  what;  Ocffer, 
better;  c||en,  eat;  (ajjcn,  let;  Staffer,  water;  iciffett,  wit;  beigen, 
bite;  gu^,  foot;  Grligeu,  greet;  Qa%  hate;  ^flug,  nut;  \m% 
white. 

4='  8'  ^  =  t:  as,  jcl)n,  ten;  3^tt,  tide;  5man3ig,  twenty; 
^inn,  tin;  3U,  to;  ^^ttgc,  tongue;  ^tuci,  two;  gtDdif,  twelve; 
$i^e,  heat;  fc^tuer^eti,  smart;  fi^en,  sit;  §er5,  heart;  ^f^e^,  net; 
(Sal^,  salt 

5.  <&^  =  s:  as,  f(i)(agcn,  slay;  (S^tcim,  shme;  (gc^tittctt, 
sled;  f carnal,  small;  jiimei^Ctl,  smelt;  (Sd)mieb,  smith;  fdjncU^ 
sneU;  (^C^tiepfe,  snipe;  (gdjlDalbc,  swallow;  (Bd)\van,  swan; 
(Schwann,  swarm;  (Sd)n)^in,  swine;  fc^WcUeu,  swell;  iB6)\MXt, 
sword;  fdjtoitigen,  swing. 

219.  Palatal  mutes  and  fricatives. 

1.  ^^  =  k:  as,  brcd)Ctt,  break;  ^^6)^  yoke;  ?er^C,  lark; 
maci)en,  make;  9^ec^cn,  rake;  iDadjen,  wake;  :^uc^^  book;  ^tl&j, 
dike;  SQiild),  milk;  (Stord),  stork. 

a.  <5^  =  sc,  sk:  —  Sfof<^C,  flask;  ^^(xk,  scale;  <Sd)aum, 
8cmn;  fc^elten,  scold;  @(^ulc,  school;  %\\6),  desk. 

2.  G^5  =  gh:  —  ac^t,  eight;  bo^,  though;  gluc^t,  flight;  l)OC^, 
high;  lac^Ctl,  laugh;  letd^t,  light;  SMji,  light;  ^ad)t,  night;  rcd^t, 
right;  2^od)tciV  daughter;  \t)td)tig,  weighty. 

3.  @  =  y :  ^ —  ©ant,  yam;  gelb,  yellow. 

4.  ^  =  dg:  —  §ecfe,  hedge;  ^riicfe,  bridge. 


126 


CORRESPOXDENCES  OF  CONSONANTS.  §  220J 


5.  If  =  ch:  —  ^anf,  bench;  ^^ammcr,  chamber;  .^apelle, 
cliai>el;  ^ttfc,  cheese;  .^tttn,  chin;  £ird)C,  church;  trtinfcn, 
drench. 

220.  Labial  mutes  and  fricatives. 

1.  8  =  v:  —  cbeit,  even;  l^aben,  have;  ^abc,  knave;  9?atie, 
raven;  ficben,  seven;  @i(bcr,  silver;  fterben,  starve;  ftreben, 
strive;  %auht,  dove;  treibcu,  drive;  nbd,  e^dl;  itbcr,over;  Wthm, 
weava 

2.  ^  =  b  or  f :  —  ^olfter,  bolster;  ^tippe,  crib;  £tl>pc, 
diff. 

3.  ^f =p:  —  ?flicl)t,  phght;  ^ftug,  plou^^h;  ppcfcu,  phict; 
gopfcn,  hop;  (Sc!)ticpfc,  snipe;  Xropfen,  drop;  ^tUtUpf,  stump. 

4.  5  =  p:  --  5lffc,  ai)e;  greifcn,  gripe;  §arfc,  harp;  I)cffcn, 
help;  off  en,  open;  ftreifen,  strij^e;  auf,  up;  rcif,  ripe;  fcl)arf, 
sharp;  Sc^iff,  ship. 

5.  3f  =  v:  —  elf,  eleven;  §afen,  haven;  Of  en,  oven;  (gc^au- 
fel,  shovel;  JlPOlf,  twelve. 


GERMAN  TEXT-BOOKS 

PLIBLISUEU    BY 

HENRY    HOLT  &   CO.,    New  York. 

These  books  are  bound  in  cloth  unless  otherwise  indicated. 
^ 

Grammars  and   Exercise  Books. 

Blackwell's   German   Prefixes   and   Suffixes.     By  J,    S.    Blackwell. 

Professor  in  the  Uuiversity  of  Missouri.     16mo.     137  pp 
Hass's   Conversation  in  German.     By  H.   C.  O.  Huss,  Piofessor  of 

Modern  Langiiaijcs  in  Princeton  College.     12uio.     280  pp. 
Joynes-Otto  First  Book  in   German.     For  young  pupils.     By  Emil 

Otto.     Revised  by  Edward  S.  Joynes,  Professor  iu  the  South 

Carolina  College.     12mo.     116  pp.     Boards. 
Joynes  Otto  Introductory  German   Lessons,  The.     Kew  edition,  with 

full  voc.ibularies.     By  Prof.  Edward  S.  Joynes.     12mo.    252  pp. 
Keetels's  Oral  Method  with  German.     By  Jean  Gustave  Keetels. 

12ino.     371  pp. 
Otis's  Elementary  German.     By  Charles  P.  Otis.     16mo.     332  pp. 

([^^"  There  are  two  editions  of  this  hook:  I.  In  German  type;  II.  In 
Roman  type,  ichich  edition  will  only  he  sent  when  specially  ordered. 
Otto's   German   Conversation   Grammar.     By  Dr.  Emil  Otto.     New 

etUllon,  revised,  and  in  part  re-written,   by  Wm.   Cook.     12mo. 

Half  roan.     591  pp 
Otto's  Elementary  German  Grammar.     With  a  vocabulary  by  George 

MoRiTZ  VVahl.     IJmo.     315  pp. 
Otto's    Translating    English    into    German.      By   Dr.    Emil    Otto. 

Ediied  by  Prof.  Rhodes  Massie  and  Prof.  Edward  b.  Joynes. 

12mo.     1G7  pp. 
Spanhoofd's  Deutsche  Grammatik.     By  A.  W.  Spanhoofd,  teacher  in 

St.  Paul's  School,  N.  H.     16mo.     187  pp. 
Wenckebach  und  Schrakamp's   Deutsche   Grammatik  fiir  Amerikaner. 

By   Carla  Wenckebach,    Professor  in  Wellesley  College,  unci 

Joseph  A  Schrakamp.     12mo.     291  pp. 
Whitney's   Compendious  German  Grammar.     By  Wm.  D.  Whitney, 

Professor  in  Yale  University.     12rao.     472  pp.     Half  roan. 
Whitney's  Brief  German  Grammar,  based  on  the  author's  "Compen- 
dious German  Grammar."   \^y  Wm.  D.  Whitney.    IGmo.    14;i  pp. 
Whitney-Klemm  German  by  Practice      By  Dr.  L.  R.  Klemm.     Edited 

by  William  D.  Whitney.     12nio.     305  pp. 

Natural  Method  and  Conversation  Books. 

Game  of  German  Conversation.     By  Mme.  F.  Jeff  Tensler. 
Heness's  Der  neue   Leitfaden.     Beim  Unterriciit   in   der  deutscheij 

Spraclie.     By  Gottlieb  Heness.     12mo.     403  pp. 
Heness's    Der   Sprechlehrer    unter   seinen   Schiilern.     By   Gottlieb 

Heness.     12mo.     187  pp. 
Kaiser's  Erstes  Lehrbuch.     By  H.  C.  Kaiser,  Ph.D.    12rao.    128  pp 
Pylodet's  German  Conversations.    By  L.  Pylodet.    18ino.    278  pp. 


HE.M^Y  HOL  T  d-  CO:S  GERMAN  TEX 7  BOOKS. 


Schrakamp  und  Van  Daell's  Das  Deutsche  Bnch.     By  A.  N.  Van  Daeli 

and  JosEPiiA  Schrakamp      12mo.     144  pp. 
Sprechen  Sie  Deutsch  1     18ino.     147  pp.     Boards. 
Stern's  Studien  und  Plaudereien.     First  Series.     By  Sigmon  M.  SteriTj 

Director  of  Sieru's  School  of  Langu.-iges.     12mo.     2t'2  pp. 
Stem's   Studien  und  Plaudereien.      Second  Series.      By   Sigmon   M. 

Stern  aud  Menco  Stern.     12mo.     380  pp. 
Wenckebach's  Deutscher    Anschauungs-Unterricht.      By   Carla  and 

Helene  AVenckebach.     ]2mo.     451  pp. 
"Williams's  German  Conversation  and  Composition.     B}'  Alonzo  Wil 

liams,  A.m.,  Professor  in  Brown  Univers^ity.     12mo.     147  pp. 

Reading  Books. 

Fouque's  Undine.     With  introduciion.  notes,  and  vocabulary,  by  II. C. 

G.  VON  Jagemann,  Profe.'-sor  in  the  Indiana  University.     190  pp. 
Hey's   Fabeln  fiir   Kinder.     Illustraled   by  Otto   Speckter.     With 

vocabulary.     {In  roman  type.)     l2mo.     5'i  pp.     Boards. 
Joynes-Otto    Introductory    German    Eeeder.      By    Dr.    Emil    Otto. 

With  notes  aud  vocabulary  by  Prof.   Edward  S.  Joynes.     12mo 

282  pp. 
Elemm's  Lese-  und  Sprachbuecher.     In  sieben  Ereisen.     By  Dr.  L.  H. 

Klemm. 
Zlemm's  Abriss  der  Geschichte  dcr  deutschen  Literatur.     Krcis  VIII. 

12mo.     ij85  pp. 
Meissner's  Aus  meiner  Welt.      Geschichten  fUr   Grosse  und  Kleint^. 

With  vocabulary  by  Carla  Wenckebach.     I'imo.     127  pp. 
OtVs  Grimm's  Maerchen.     Selected   and   edited,  with   introduction, 

notes,  and  vocabulary,  by  Charles  P.  Ottis.     151  pp. 
Otto's  German  Eeader.     By  Prof.   E.   P.   Evans.     12mo.     239  pp. 

Half  roan. 
Schrakamp's  Erzaehlungen  aus  der  deutschen  Geschichte.     B}^  Josepha 

Schrakamp.     12mo.     2^6  pp. 
Simonson's  German  Balla/*.  Book.     Prepared  by  Prof.  L.  Simonson,  of 

the  Hartford  (Ct.)  High  School.     I'-mo.     b04  pp. 
Storme's  Easy  German  Beading.     By  G.  Storme.     IGmo.     356  pp. 
Wenckebach's  deutsches  Lesebuch.    By  Carla  aud  Helene  Wencke- 
bach     ]2mo.     316  pp. 
Wenckebach's  Die  schoensien  deutschen   Lieder         By   Carla  and 

Helene  Wenckebach.     12uio.     3H3  pp. 
Whitney's  German  Reader.     By  William  D.  Whitney,  Professor  in 

Yale  University.     12nio.     523  pp.     Half  roan. 
Whitney-Klemm  Elementary  German  Reader.      By  Dr.  L.  R.  Klemm. 

Edited  by  Prof.  W.  D.  Whitney.     12mo.     237  pp. 
Dictionary. 
Whitney's  Compendious   German  Dictionary.      (German-Enirb'sh  and 

English-German.)     By  William  D.  Whitney.     8vo.     900  pp. 

A  complete  caUilogve  and  price-list  of  Henry  Holt  &  Co  s  educa^ 
tional  publications  will  oc  sent  on  applioition. 


HENRY  HOLT  &=  CO:S  GERMAN  TEXT-BOOKS. 


Whitney's  German  Texts. 

Selected  and  annotated  under  tlie  general  editorship  of  Professor  Wiiliam  D. 
Whitney.    ]6mo.    Cloth. 

Goethe's  Iphigenie  auf  Tauris.    Witli  an  introduction  and  notes  by  Frank. 

LIN  Cahtkr,  Presideni  of  Will.anis  College.    113  pp. 
■ Faust.    I.  Theil.    With  an  introduction  and  notes  by  William  Cook, 

late  Professor  in  Harvard  Unive'Sity.     Ji20  pp. 
Lessing's  Minna  von  Barnhelm.    With  an  introduction  and  notes  by  W. 

D.  Wliiuiey.  Professor  in  Yale  University.     138  pp. 
• '  Nathan  der  "Weise.    With  an  introduction  and  notes  by  H.  C.  G. 

Branut,  Professor  in  Hamilton  College.     158  pp. 
Schiller's  Wilhelm  Tell.    With  an  introduction  and  notes  by  A.  Sachtlej- 

BKN,  Professor  ni  the  College  of  Charlesto*),  S.  C.     199  pp. 
Maria  Stuart.    With  an  introduction  and  notes  by  Edward  S.  Joynks, 

Professor  in  South  Carolina  College.    2C'-Jpp. 

Seidensticker's    German    Scientific   Monographs. 

With  notes.    12mo.    Paper. 

No.  I.  Uber  Goethe's  Naturwissenschaftliche  Arbeiten.  Von  H.  Helmholtz. 
5.3  pp. 

No  II.  Uber  Bakterieu,  die  Kleinsten  lebenden  Wesen.  Von  Dr.  Ferdinand 
CoHN.    55  pp. 

Student's   Collection    of    Classic    German    Plays. 

12mo.    Paper. 
Goethe's  Hermann  und  Dorothea.  With  notes  by  Calvin  Thomas.  101  pp. 

Egmont.    Edited  by  Professor  William  Steffen.     113  pp. 

Koerner's  Zriny.    With  an  introduction  and  notes  by  Edward  R.  Rugg:.es, 

I'rofessor  in  Dartmouth  College.     1-^6  pp. 
Lessing's  Emilia  Galotti.    With  notes.    82  pp. 
Schiller's   Der  Neflfe  als  Onkel.     With  notes  and  a  vocabulary  by  Ai 

Clkmknt.    99  pp. 
Jungfrau  Von  Orleans.    Edited  by  Rev.  A.  B.  Nichols,  Instructor  in 

German  in  Harvard  University.     203  pp. 

Wallenstein's  Lager.    With  notes  by  E.  C.  F.  Kracss.    60  pp. 

Die  Piccolomini.    With  notes  by  E.  C.  F.  Krauss.    139  pp. 

"Wallenstein's  Tod.    With  notes  by  E.  C.  F.  Krauss.    210  pp. 

"W alien  stein,  complete  in  one  volume.    Cloth. 

College  Series  of  German  Plays. 

12mo.    Paper. 

Einer  muss  heiraten,  by  W  lhelmi  ;  and  Eigensinn,  by  Benedix.    With 

notes.    (Ji  pp. 
Three  German  Comedies.    I.  Er  ist  nicht  eifersuechtig,  bv  Erz:  IL 

Der  W  eiberfeind,  by  Benedix  ;  III.    Im  "Wartesalon  erster  Classe, 

l)y  MiKLLKR.     With  notes.    24  pp. 

Der  Bibliothekar.    By  Gustav  von  Moser.    With  notes.    162  pp. 
Die  Journalisten.    By  Gustav  Freytao.    With  notes.    178  pp. 
Zopf  und  Sohwert.    By  Gutzkow.    With  notes.    173  pp. 
Englisch.     By  Goerner.     With  notes  by  A.  H.  Edgren.    61  pp. 
Badekuren.    By  Putlitz.    With  notes.    69  pp. 
Das  Herz  vergessen.    By  Putlitz.    With  notes.    79  pp. 

3 


HEXR  Y  HOL  T  ^  CO.'S  GERMAN  TEXT-BOOKS. 

Stern's  Selected  German  Comedies. 

Selected  and  Edited  by  Professor  S.  M.  Stkrx.    l-Jiuo.    Paper. 

Ein  Knopf.    By  Julius  Rosen.    41  pp. 

Der  Schimmel.    By  G.  von  Moser.    55  pp. 

Si3  hat  ihr  herz  entdeckt.    By  W.  Mukller  von  KoENiaswiNTER.    79  pp. 

Simson  und  Delila.    By  Emil  Claar.    65  pp. 

Er  sucht  einen  Vetter.    By  Jungman.    49  pp. 

Er  muss  tanzen.    By  C.  .A.Paul.    51  pp. 

Gaenschen  von  Buchenau.    By  W.  Friedrich.    59  pp. 

German  Plays  for  Children. 

Kinder-Comoedien.  By  various  authors.  Edited  and  annotated  in  German 
by  l^rufe^soi'lH.  Hkness.    Five  plays  iu  one  voliune    li^'mo.    Hi  pp. 

Unterhaltungs  Bibliotiiek.    (12rao.    Paper.) 

Andersen's  Bilderbuch.  ohne  Bilder.    With  notes  and  vocabulary  bv  I'ro- 

ffSsurL.  SiMo.NsoN  «.f  iiie  Hartford  (Ut.)  High  School.     104  pp. 
Die  Eisjxingfrau  u.  andere  Geschichten.  With  notes  by  E.  C.  F.  Krauss. 

LXli'P. 

Auerbach's  Auf  Wache;  Boquette's  Der  gefrorene  Kuss.    The  two  in 

one  vuluine.     With  notes.     IJb  pp. 

Carove's  Das  Maerchen  ohne  Ende.    With  notes.    45  pp. 
Ebers' eine  Prage.    With  introduction  and  notes.    117  pp. 
Eichendorff  s  Aus  dem  Leben  eines  Taugenichts.    132  pp. 
Fouqu6's  Undine.     With  a  glos.saiy  of  the  principal  words  and  phrases. 

137  pp.     -SVe  «i/.su  Jugfiiiaiin's  edition  under  Read  iny  Books. 

Sintram  und  seine  Gefaehrten.    114  pp. 

Grimm's  Die  Venus  von  Milo  ;  Kafael  und  Michel- Angelo.    139  pp. 
Grimm's  Kinder-  und  Hausmaerchen.    With  notes.    '.i2S  pp.    See  also 

Otis'.f  ftlition   undfr  Readiinj  Buoka. 

Hauffs  Das  kalte  Herz.    61  pp. 

Heine's  Die  Harzreise.    With  introduction  and  notes.    97  pp. 

Heyse's  Anfaung  und  Ende.    54  pp. 

Die  Einsamen.    44  pp. 

Hillem's  Hoeher  als  die  Kirche.    With  notes  and  vocabulary.    46  pp. 
Muegge's  Biukan  Voss.    55  pp. 

Signa  die  Seterin.    71  pp. 

Mueller's  Deutsche  Liebe.    With  Eneli.<sh  notes.    121  pp. 
Nathusius'  Tagebuch  eines  arxnen  Praeuleins.    163  pp. 
Ploennies'  Princessin  Use.    Wlih  not.s  by  J.  M.  Merrick.    45  pp, 
Putlitz's  "Was  sich  der  wald  erzaehlt.    62  pp. 

. Ver?issmeinnicht.    With  Enjrlish  notes.    44  pp. 

Eiehl's   Der   Fluch  der   Schoenheit.    W^ith  introduction  and  notes  by 

Francis  T>.  Krnpai.l.     77  pp. 
Schiller's  Das  Died  von  der  Glocke.    With  introduction  and   notes   by 

Charlf.s  V.  Otis.  Ph  D.     ^O  pp. 
Storm's  Tmmensee.    With  notes.    34  pp. 
Tieck's  Die  Flfen  ;    Das  Rothkaeppchen.    With  notes  by  Professor  L. 

SiMON-oN.      '1    !••• 

Vilmar  and  Bichter's  German  Epic  Tales.  Told  in  rrocp.  Die  Nibe- 
lungen.  vmi  a.  F.  V.  Vilmar.  Walther  und  Hildegund,  von  Al- 
bert RicHTER.    100  pp. 

4 


FRENCH  TEXT-BOOKS 

PUBLISHED   BY 

HENRY   HOLT  &   CO..    New  York. 

These  books  are  bound  in  cloth  unless  otherwise  indicated. 

Grammars  and  Exercise  Books. 

Borel's  Grammaire  Frangaise.    A  Tusage  des  Anglais.  Par  Eugene  Borel, 

R^^ vised  by  E.  B.  CoK.     l.mo.    450  pp.     Hulf  ruan. 
Delille's  Condensed  French  Instruction.   By  C.  J.  Delillr.  18mo.  14.3  pp. 
Eugene's  Student's  Comparative  French  Grammar.     To  which  are 

added   Fieiicli  English   Exercises.      Ivcvised   by   L.   H.   i?ucKiNOHAM,   Ph.D. 

Vlmo.    •i.^X  pp. 

Eugene's  Elementary  French  Lessons.  Revised  and  edited  by  L.  H. 
Ulx'Kingham.  Pli.D.     \2\\\o.     ];iJG  pp. 

Gasc's  The  Translator.— Enjflish   into   French.      By  Professors   Gasc,  L. 

Bkun,  aiitl  otheis.     l\inio.     2--20  pp. 
Gibert's  French  Manual.    A  French   Pronouncing  Grammar  for  Young 

Students.     By  .>1.  GiBEiiT.     l",'nio.     ll'^pp. 

Julien's  Petites  Legons  de  Conversation  et  de  Grammaire.    By  F.  Julien. 

Square  r.'mo.     'Zll  pp 
Otto's  French  Conversation  Grammar.    Revised  by  Fkrdinand  Bocher, 

Professor  of  Moderu  Languages  in  Harvard  University.    \'X\\\o.  489  pp.  Half 

roan. 
Pylodet's  Beginning  French.    Exercises  in  Pronouncing,   Spelling,  and 

TraiisLitiiig.     15y  L.  Pylooet.     16rno.     180  pp.     Boards. 

Sadler's  Translating  English  into  French.  By  P.  Sadler.  Revised  and 
aiuiotated  b>  Prof.  C  F.  Gili.ktte.     Iv'tno.     :i8.5  pp. 

The  Joynes-Otto  Introductory  French  Lessons.  By  Edward  S.  Joynes, 
Professor  in  University- of  South  Carolina.     J-^nio.    275  pp. 

The  Joynes-Otto  First  Book  in  French.  By  Edward  S.  Joynes.  12mo. 
116  |)p      Boaids. 

"Whitney's  French  Grammar.  By  William  D.  Whitney,  Professor  in  Yale 
XTriiversity.     l.uio.     44i  pp.     Half  njaii. 

Whitney's  Practical  French.  Taken  from  the  aiithor's  larger  Grammar, 
and  supplemented  by  conversations  and  idiomatic  phrases.  By  Professor 
W.  D.  Whit.\i:y. 

Whitney's  Brief  French  Grammar.  Systematically  arranged,  with  exer- 
cises.   By  William  D.  Whitney.     Itimo.     177  pp. 

Natural  Method  and  Conversation  Books. 

Ailiot's  Contes  et  Nouvelles.  Sui  vis  de  Conversations,d''Exercices  de  Gram- 
maire.    Par  .Madame  L.  Alliot.     l^ino. 

Aubert's  Colloquial  French  Drill.  By  E.  Aubf.rt,  Professor  in  the  Normal 
College,  New  York  City.     Part  I.  lOmo.     L6  pp.     Part  II.  118  pp. 

Le  Jev-  des  Auteurs.    9fi  Cards  in  a  Box. 

Moutonnier's  Les  Premiers  Pas  dans  I'Etud  e  du  Frangais  par  la 
niethode  natnrelle.     Par  C.  -Mo   to.nniek.     K'nio.     lSi7  pp.     lUuslraled. 

Pour  Apprendre  a  Parler  Frangais.    12mo.    191  pp. 

Parlez-vous  Frangais?  A  p.)cket  manual  of  Frencli  and  English  Conversa- 
tion, with  hints  fur  pronunciation  and  a  list  of  the  irregular  verbs.  18mo, 
111  pp.    Boards. 

£ 


HEXR  Y  HOLT  ^  CO:S  FRENCH  TEXT-BOOKS. 

Riodu's  Lucie.  Familiar  Coiivet-sations  in  French  and  English.  By  Mme.  A. 
Kiudu.     l.iuo.     l.'Spp. 

Stern  &  M6ras'  jStude  Progressive  ile  la  Langue  Frangaise.    By  Sigmon 

M   6TERN  and  iJAPiisTE  Meras.     iJiiio.     :iH8  Pit. 
Witcomb  &  Bellenger's  French  Conversation.    Dialojnies  on  Familiar 

iSniijectti,  lo  wiiicu  IS  annexed  tae  Summary  of  i^reuch Grammar,  by  Dklxllk. 

Ibmo.    '^'i  pp. 

Reading  Books. 

.ffisop's  Fables  in  French.    With  vocabulary.    16mo.   237  pp. 
Alliot's  Les  Autexirs  Contemporains.    Extraits  choisis  d'oeuvresdiverses, 
Hvec  Nniic.  s  tJiograpliiqiies  ei  >>iies.     By  Mme.  L.  Aluot.     l"<Jmo.    371pp. 

Aubert's  Ijitt6rature  Frangaise.  Premiere  Ann6e.  By  E.  Acbkrt.  16mo 
$33  pp. 

Bocher  s  Progressive  French  Reader.  Wiih  notes  and  vocabulary  bj 
F.  Bg'HEk,  Prure.s.sur  m  Harvard  Umver>ity.     K'mo.     291    pp.     Half  roan. 

Fishers  Easy  French  Reading.  Historical  tales  and  anecdotes,  arranged 
Willi  fi.ut-nuies.  cuutaining  ii'<iu»ilations  ot  the  principal  words.  Itimo.  '£iA  pp. 

Fleury's  LHistoire  de  France.  Kacontee  a  la  Jeunesse.  Par  M.  LahA 
Flkl'ky.     Itiino.     ;i7x;  pp. 

De  Janon  s  Recueil  de  Po6sies.    A  I'usage  de  la  Jeunesse  Am^ricaine.  Par 

.Mllk.  Camillk  ue  Jano.n.     Itiniu.     180  pp. 

Joynes-Otto  Introductory  French  Reader,  The.  Edited,  with  notes  and 
vucauulary,  by  Edwaku  8.  Joyxe.s.     l:init».     IG^J  pp. 

Juliens  Practical  and  Conversational  Reader  in  French  and  English.  By 
V.  JiLlEN.     Square  Vinxit.     18J  [ip 

Iiacombe's  Petite  Histoire  du  Peuple  Frangais.    By  Paul  Lacombe. 

Willi  Uramiiiatical  ami  Explanatoiy  ^otes  I'y  Jules  Bufe.     I'^ino.     Iil2  pp. 
La  Fontaine's  Fables  Choisies.  Edited,  with  notes,  by  Leon  Delbos.  I'^nio. 

119  pp      Boards. 
Pylodet's  Beginner  French  Reader.    With  a  complete  vocabulary,    Ar- 

r.iiitred  h.\   L   Pyl«  det.     Itiiiio.     :.3.")  pp.     Boards. 
Pylodefs  Second  French  Reader.    With  a  complnte  French  English  vo- 

eaiml.iiv.     C.nii.iled  by  L.  Pylodkt.     Illustrated,     r^'mo.     277  pp. 
Pylodefs  La  Litt6ratux'e  Frangaise  Classique.  Tiroes  des  Matin6es  Litt6- 

laiies  (I"  Edoiahi)  Mennkchkt.     1-Jmo.     3".'8  pp. 
Pylodet  s  La  Litt6rature  Frangaise  Contemporaine.    Recueil  en  prose 

et  i-n  VHis.     i-.'m...     3Ht  pp 
Pylod?ts  Gouttes  de  Ros6e.     Petit  Tresor  poetique  des  Jeunes  Pei-sonnes. 

ismo      iss  pp. 
Pylodefs  La  M6re  lOie.    Poesies,  enigmes,  chansons  et  rondes  enfantines. 

iliiislre.     8vi>.     8U  pp. 
Whitney's  Si>ort  French  Reader.    With  notes  and  vocabt.lary.    By  W.  D. 

Whitney.    16mo. 

Dictionaries. 

Bellow'sFrenchandEnglishDictionary  for  the  Pocket.    32:no.    600  pp. 

The  .same.    Larger  print.     12ino.     6()0  j.p.     Half  ro-in 

Gases  New  Dictionary  of  the  French  and  English  Languages.    By 

FERriNAND  E.  A.  Gasc.     8vo.     French-Eiigiisli  part,  GUU  pp.     EnKhsu-French 

l>art,  V<(i  pp.     One  volume. 
Gasc.i  Improved  Modern  Pocket  Dictionary.    By  F.  A.  E.  Gasc.  18mo. 

Freiieh-Ei.grsii  part,  2ol  pp.    Enghsh-Fieneh  part,  387  pp.  One  v..lume. 

A  descriptive  catalogue,  with  prices,  of  Henry  Holt  dt  Co.'s  educational publir 
cations  icul  be  stmt  on  application. 


HENRY  HOLT  &>  CO.'S  FRENCH  TEXT-BOOKS. 
Students'  Collection  of  Classic  French  Plays. 

The  first  six  with  full  notes  by  Piof.  E.  S.  Joynks.    The  last  three  with  notes 
by  Leon  Delbos,  M.A.     l;imo.    Paper. 

Le  Cid.    Par  CoRNEiLLE.    110  pp. 

Athalie.     Par  Kacinb.     117  pp. 

I.e  Misantlirope.    Par  Molierk.    130  pp. 

li'Avare.     l^ar  Moliere.     \'-^-i  pp. 

Esther.     Par  Racine.    Gti  pp. 

Cinna.     Par  Cokneillk.    H7  pp. 

Le  Bourgeois  Gentilhomme.    Par  MoLtKRE,    140  pp. 

Horace.    Par  CoRNiiiLLK.    Im  pp. 

lies  PlaideuTS.    Par  Racine,    80  pp. 

The  foregoing  in  3  vols.,  three  plays  in  each,  in  the  above  order.    12mo.    Clath. 

Ronnantic  French  Drama.    (12mo.    Flexible  covers.) 

Ruy  Bias.    By  Victor  Huao.    With  notes  by  Rena  A,  Michaels.    117  pp. 

College  Series  of  Modern  French  Plays. 

With  English  notes  by  Prof.  Ferdinand  Bocher.    12iuo.    Paper. 

La  Joie  Fait  Peur.    Par  Mme.  de  Girardin.    46  pp 
La  Bataille  de  Dames.    Par  Scribe  et  Legouve.    81  pp. 
La  Maison  de  Penarvan.    Par  Jules  Sandeau.    7:^  pp. 
La  Poudre  aux  Yeux.     Par  Labiche  et  Martin,    59  pp. 
Jean  Baudry.     I'ar  Augusts  Vacquerie.     7;;  pp. 
Les  Petits  Oiseaux.    Par  Labighe  et  Delacour.    70  pp. 
Mademoiselle  de  la  Seigliere.    Par  J  Sandeau.    9".»  pp. 
Le  Roman  d'un  Jeune  Homme  Pauvre.    Par  O.  Feuillkt.    100  pp. 
Les  Doigts  de  F6e.    Par  E.  Scribe.    Ill  pp. 
Above  in  'I  vols.    Cloth.    Vol  I.  containing  the  first  five,  Vol.  II.  the  last  four. 

Modern  French  Comedies.    (12mo.    Paper.) 

Le  Village.    Par  O,  Feuillet.    34  pp. 

La  Cagnotte.    Par  M.M.  Eugene  Labiche  et  A  Delacour.    83  pp. 

Les  Femmes  qui  Pleurent.  Par  MM.  Siraudin  et  Lambert  Thibou?t.  28pp. 

Les  Petites  Mis6res  de  la  Vie  Humaine.    Par  M.  Claihville.    35  pp 

Le  Niaise  de  Saint  Flour.    Par  Bayard  et  Lemoine.    38  pp. 

Un  Caprice.    Par  Alfred  de  Musset. 

Trois  Proverbes.    Par  Th.  Leclerq.    68  pp.    Wjih  vocabulary. 

Valerie.     Par  Scribe.    39  pp.     With  vocabulary. 

Le  Collier  de  Perles.    Par  Mazkres.    56  pp.    With  vocabulary. 

Selected  French  Comedies. 

Original  text,  with  a  close  English  version  on  opposite  pages. 
En  Wagon.    Comfidie  en  1  acte.    Par  Eugene  Verconsin.    12mo.    44  pp. 
C'e*  ait  Gertrude.   Com^die  en  1  acte.   Par  Eugeme  Verconsin.   12mo.  51pp. 

French  Plays  for  Children.    (l2mo. .  Paper.) 

La  Petite  Maman,  par  Mme.  de  M  ;  Le  Bracelet,  par  Mm:;,  deGaule.  38 pp. 

L  '■  Vieille  Cousine,  par  E.  Souvkstke  ;  Les  RicocRet  >     5:  rP- 

Le  Testament  de  Madame  Patural,  par  E.  Souvestre  ;  La  Demoiselle 

de  St.  Cyr,  par  Drohoyowska.    54  pp. 
La   Loterie   de   Francfort,  par  E.  Sodtestre.      La   Jeuno    Savante^ 

par  Mme.  Curo.    4T  pp. 

French  Plays  for  Girls.    (12mo.    Paper.) 

Trois  Comedies  pour  Jeune  3  Filles  :  I.  Les  Cuisiniere«» ;  II  Le  Tetit 
Tom;  III.  La  Malade  Imaginaire    Par  Lemercier  de  Neuville.  134  pp. 


HENRY  HOLT  b'  CO:s  FRENCH  TEXT-BOOKS. 
Bibliotheque  d'Instruction  et  de  Recreation. 

12mo  \oluines.    Paper  or  Cloth. 
Achard's  Clos-Pommier,  et  Les  Prisonrders  du  Caucase.    Par  Xavieb 

UE  .MaisTRE.     CMutli.     141  pp. 

Achard's  Clos-Pommier.    Paper.    106  pp. 

B6dolli9re's  Mere  Michel.    With  vocabulary.    Cloth.    138  pp. 

Tlie  name.     Piiper. 

Biographies  des  Musiciens  C616bres.    Cloth.    271  pp. 

The  same.     Paper. 

Carraud  et  Segur's  Contes  (Les  Petites  Filles  ]\Iodeles,  par  Mme.  de  Segur, 

et   Les  (jouifis  de  la  Giand'mere,  par  Mme.  Z.  Carraud).    With  a  list  of 

difficult  phrases.     Cloth.     1W3  pp. 
Carraud's   Le"   Qouters   de  la  Grand*ra6re.    With  a  list  of    difiScult 

phrases.    Paper.    95  pp. 
Choix  de  Contes  Contemporains.    With  notes.    By  B.  F.  O'Connor.  Cloth. 

iJUU  pp. 

The  same.    Paper. 

Erckmann-Chatrian's   Conscrit  de    1813.     With   notes.    By  Prof.   F. 

liOcHr.R.     Clutli.    •£^'Q  pp. 

The  same.    Paper. 

Ije  Blocus.    With  notes.    By  Prof.  F,  Bocher.    Cloth.    258  pp. 

The  same.    Paper. 

Madame  Thferdse.    With  notes.    By  Piof.  F.  Bocher.    Cloth.    216 pp 

The  saiiir.     Paper. 

Pallet's  Princes  de  I'Art.    Gloth.    334  pp. 

Tlie  same.     Paper. 

Penillet's  Roman  d*un  Jeune  Homme  Pauvre.    Cloth.    204  pp. 

■ The  same.     Paper. 

F6val*s  '  Chouans  et  Bleus.'    With  notes.    Cloth.    188  pp. 

• The  same.     Paper. 

Foa's  Contes  Biographiques.    With  vocabulary.    Cloth.    189  pp. 

The  same.     Paper. 

Petit  Robinson  de  Paris.    With  vocabulary.    Cloth.    106  pp. 

Tlie  same.    Paper. 

Macs's  Bouch6e  d^  Pain.    (L'Homme.)    With  vocabulary.    Cloth.    260  pp. 

Tlie  same.     Paper. 

De  Maistre's  Voyage  Autour  de  ma  Chambre.    Paper.    117  pp. 

Les  Prisonniers  du  Caucase.    Paper.    38  pp. 

Merimfee's  Columba.    Cloih.    179  pp. 

The  same.     Paper. 

Porchat's  Trois  Mois  sous  la  Neige.    Cloth.    160  pp 

The  same.    Paper. 

Pi  3SsensS's  Rosa.    With  vocabulary.    By  L.  Pylodet.    Cloth.    285. 

The  snme.     Papf  r. 

Saint-Germain's  Pour  une  Epingle.    With  vocabulary     Cloth.    174  pp. 

Tlie  same.    Pujier. 

Sand's  Petite  Fadette.    Cloth.    205  pp. 

The  same.     Pajier. 

Segur  et  Carraud's  Contes.    (Petites  Filles  Modules;   Les  Goutars  de  la 

Giaiidniere  )     C'h'th.     VS^  pp. 
S6gur's  Les  Petites  Filles  Moddles.    Paper.    98  pp. 
Souvestre's  Philosophe  sous  les  Toits.    Cloth.    187  pp. 
The  same.    Paper. 

4 


(^/I'H.-Tf'^Y-Ui.-*.^ 


y^S^  ^^^ ->^y^  ^J^-^ 


A 


THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  ON  THE  LAST  DATE 
STAMPED  BELOW 

AN     INITIAL    FINE    OF     25     CENTS 

WILL  BE  ASSESSED  FOR  FAILURE  TO  RETURN 
^H.S  BOOK  ON  THE  DATE  DUE.  THE  PENALTY 
WILL  INCREASE  TO  50  CENTS  ©N  THE  FOURTH 

DAY     AND     TO     $1.00    ON     THE    SEVENTH     DAY 

OVERDUE. 


JUL  26  1933 
DEC     1    .^ 


l70cr51L 


LD  21-50m-l,'33 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


